# Korean translation for ubuntu-docs
# Copyright (c) (c) 2006 Canonical Ltd, and Rosetta Contributors 2006
# This file is distributed under the same license as the ubuntu-docs package.
# Namhyung Kim <namhyung@gmail.com>, 2006.
#
msgid ""
msgstr ""
"Project-Id-Version: ubuntu-docs\n"
"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n"
"POT-Creation-Date: 2010-03-29 08:26+0100\n"
"PO-Revision-Date: 2010-03-29 17:18+0000\n"
"Last-Translator: Matthew East <matt@mdke.org>\n"
"Language-Team: Korean <ko@li.org>\n"
"MIME-Version: 1.0\n"
"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n"
"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n"
"X-Launchpad-Export-Date: 2010-04-17 14:53+0000\n"
"X-Generator: Launchpad (build Unknown)\n"

#: serverguide/C/serverguide-C.omf:6(creator) serverguide/C/serverguide-C.omf:7(maintainer)
msgid "ubuntu-doc@lists.ubuntu.com (Ubuntu Documentation Project)"
msgstr "ubuntu-doc@lists.ubuntu.com (우분투 문서 프로젝트)"

#: serverguide/C/serverguide-C.omf:8(title) serverguide/C/serverguide-C.omf:11(description) serverguide/C/serverguide.xml:14(title) serverguide/C/bookinfo.xml:13(title)
msgid "Ubuntu Server Guide"
msgstr "우분투 서버 가이드"

#: serverguide/C/serverguide-C.omf:9(date)
msgid "2007-09-30"
msgstr "2007년 9월 30일"

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:13(title)
msgid "Windows Networking"
msgstr "윈도즈 네트워킹"

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:15(para)
msgid ""
"Computer networks are often comprised of diverse systems, and while "
"operating a network made up entirely of Ubuntu desktop and server computers "
"would certainly be fun, some network environments must consist of both "
"Ubuntu and <trademark class=\"registered\">Microsoft</trademark><trademark "
"class=\"registered\">Windows</trademark> systems working together in "
"harmony. This section of the <phrase>Ubuntu</phrase> Server Guide introduces "
"principles and tools used in configuring your Ubuntu Server for sharing "
"network resources with Windows computers."
msgstr ""
"컴퓨터 네트워크는 종종 다양한 시스템들로 구성됩니다. 전부 우분투 데스크탑과 서버 컴퓨터로 구성된 네트워크를 운영하는 것은 분명 즐거운 "
"일이겠지만, 어떤 네트워크 환경들은 우분투와 <trademark "
"class=\"registered\">Microsoft</trademark><trademark "
"class=\"registered\">Windows</trademark> 시스템이 조화롭게 함께 동작하도록 이루어져 있습니다. "
"<phrase>우분투</phrase> 서버 안내서의 이 부분에서는 윈도우즈 컴퓨터와 함께 네트워크 자원을 공유하기 위해 여러분의 우분투 "
"서버를 설정하는 원칙과 도구들을 소개 합니다."

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:25(title) serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:402(title) serverguide/C/security.xml:354(title) serverguide/C/remote-administration.xml:22(title) serverguide/C/package-management.xml:20(title) serverguide/C/introduction.xml:13(title)
msgid "Introduction"
msgstr "소개"

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:27(para)
msgid ""
"Successfully networking your Ubuntu system with Windows clients involves "
"providing and integrating with services common to Windows environments. Such "
"services assist the sharing of data and information about the computers and "
"users involved in the network, and may be classified under three major "
"categories of functionality:"
msgstr ""
"여러분의 우분투 시스템을 윈도우즈 클라이언트와 함께 성공적으로 네트워크를 구성하게 되면 윈도우즈 환경에서 일반적으로 사용되는 서비스를 "
"우분투에서도 제공, 통합할 수 있게 됩니다. 이런 서비스는 네트워크에 관여된 컴퓨터 및 사용자에 대한 정보의 공유를 도와주며, 다음과 "
"같은 세 가지 주요한 기능들로 분류할 수 있습니다:"

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:35(para)
msgid ""
"<emphasis role=\"bold\">File and Printer Sharing Services</emphasis>. Using "
"the Server Message Block (SMB) protocol to facilitate the sharing of files, "
"folders, volumes, and the sharing of printers throughout the network."
msgstr ""
"<emphasis role=\"bold\">파일과 프린터 공유 서비스</emphasis>. 서버 메세지 블럭 (SMB) 프로토콜을 "
"사용하여 네트워크 상의 파일, 폴더, 볼륨 그리고 프린터의 공유를 돕습니다."

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:41(para)
msgid ""
"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Directory Services</emphasis>. Sharing vital "
"information about the computers and users of the network with such "
"technologies as the Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) and "
"Microsoft <trademark class=\"registered\">Active Directory</trademark>."
msgstr ""
"<emphasis role=\"bold\">디렉토리 서비스</emphasis>. Lightweight Directory Access "
"Protocol (LDAP) 와 Microsoft <trademark class=\"registered\">Active "
"Directory</trademark> 기술을 가지고 네트워크의 컴퓨터와 사용자에 대한 가상 정보를 공유 합니다."

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:48(para)
msgid ""
"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Authentication and Access</emphasis>. Establishing "
"the identity of a computer or user of the network and determining the "
"information the computer or user is authorized to access using such "
"principles and technologies as file permissions, group policies, and the "
"Kerberos authentication service."
msgstr ""
"<emphasis role=\"bold\">인증과 접근</emphasis>. 파일 접근 권한, 그룹 정책 그리고 Kerberos 인증 "
"서비스와 같은 원칙과 기술을 사용하여 네트워크의 컴퓨터 또는 사용자의 식별을 입증하고 접근이 인증된 컴퓨터 또는 사용자의 정보를 "
"결정합니다."

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:56(para)
msgid ""
"Fortunately, your Ubuntu system may provide all such facilities to Windows "
"clients and share network resources among them. One of the principal pieces "
"of software your Ubuntu system includes for Windows networking is the Samba "
"suite of SMB server applications and tools."
msgstr ""
"다행히, 우분투 시스템은 윈도즈 클라이언트와 그것들끼리의 네트워크 자원 공유를 위한 모든 것을 제공합니다.  윈도즈 네트워킹을 위해 "
"우분투 시스템에 포함된 기본적인 소프트웨어로는 SMB 서버 응용 프로그램과 도구들인 삼바(Samba) 슈트가 있습니다."

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:62(para)
msgid ""
"This section of the <phrase>Ubuntu</phrase> Server Guide will introduce some "
"of the common Samba use cases, and how to install and configure the "
"necessary packages. Additional detailed documentation and information on "
"Samba can be found on the <ulink url=\"http://www.samba.org\">Samba "
"website</ulink>."
msgstr ""
"<phrase>우분투</phrase> 서버 가이드의 이 절에서는 기본적인 삼바 사용 예와, 필요한 패키지를 설치하고 구성하는 법을 소개할 "
"것입니다.  삼바에 대한 추가적인 상세 문서와 정보는 <ulink url=\"http://www.samba.org\">삼바 "
"웹사이트</ulink>에서 찾으실 수 있습니다."

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:70(title)
msgid "Samba File Server"
msgstr "삼바 파일 서버"

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:72(para)
msgid ""
"One of the most common ways to network Ubuntu and Windows computers is to "
"configure Samba as a File Server. This section covers setting up a "
"<application>Samba</application> server to share files with Windows clients."
msgstr ""
"우분투와 윈도즈 컴퓨터들을 네트워크로 연결하는 가장 기본적인 방법은 파일 서버 역할을 하도록 삼바를 구성하는 것입니다.  이 절은 윈도즈 "
"클라이언트와 파일을 공유하기 위한 <application>삼바</application> 서버 설정을 다루고 있습니다."

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:77(para)
msgid ""
"The server will be configured to share files with any client on the network "
"without prompting for a password. If your environment requires stricter "
"Access Controls see <xref linkend=\"samba-fileprint-security\"/>"
msgstr ""
"네트워크 상의 어떤 클라이언트와도 암호를 묻지 않고 파일을 공유하도록 서버가 구성됩니다.  제한된 접근 제어가 필요한 환경이라면 "
"<xref linkend=\"samba-fileprint-security\"/>를 참조하시기 바랍니다."

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:83(title) serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:287(title) serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:1302(title) serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:41(title) serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:675(title) serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:816(title) serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:940(title) serverguide/C/vpn.xml:33(title) serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:62(title) serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:2014(title) serverguide/C/vcs.xml:28(title) serverguide/C/vcs.xml:86(title) serverguide/C/vcs.xml:405(title) serverguide/C/remote-administration.xml:52(title) serverguide/C/remote-administration.xml:233(title) serverguide/C/network-config.xml:937(title) serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:52(title) serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:1581(title) serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:2092(title) serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:2483(title) serverguide/C/monitoring.xml:42(title) serverguide/C/monitoring.xml:428(title) serverguide/C/mail.xml:40(title) serverguide/C/mail.xml:496(title) serverguide/C/mail.xml:674(title) serverguide/C/mail.xml:823(title) serverguide/C/mail.xml:1315(title) serverguide/C/lamp-applications.xml:108(title) serverguide/C/lamp-applications.xml:287(title) serverguide/C/lamp-applications.xml:423(title) serverguide/C/installation.xml:13(title) serverguide/C/installation.xml:957(title) serverguide/C/file-server.xml:347(title) serverguide/C/file-server.xml:462(title) serverguide/C/dns.xml:23(title) serverguide/C/databases.xml:40(title) serverguide/C/databases.xml:164(title) serverguide/C/chat.xml:37(title) serverguide/C/chat.xml:141(title) serverguide/C/backups.xml:593(title)
msgid "Installation"
msgstr "설치"

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:85(para)
msgid ""
"The first step is to install the <application>samba</application> package. "
"From a terminal prompt enter:"
msgstr ""
"첫번째 단계는 <application>삼바</application> 패키지를 설치하는 것입니다.  설치를 위해 터미널 환경에서 다음을 "
"입력:"

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:90(command) serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:299(command)
msgid "sudo apt-get install samba"
msgstr "sudo apt-get install samba"

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:93(para)
msgid ""
"That's all there is to it; you are now ready to configure Samba to share "
"files."
msgstr "이게 전부입니다; 이제 파일 공유를 위해 삼바를 구성할 차례입니다."

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:99(title) serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:304(title) serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:61(title) serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:726(title) serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:827(title) serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:967(title) serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:1067(title) serverguide/C/vpn.xml:138(title) serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:2088(title) serverguide/C/vcs.xml:39(title) serverguide/C/vcs.xml:423(title) serverguide/C/remote-administration.xml:74(title) serverguide/C/remote-administration.xml:258(title) serverguide/C/package-management.xml:387(title) serverguide/C/network-config.xml:959(title) serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:2131(title) serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:2504(title) serverguide/C/monitoring.xml:187(title) serverguide/C/monitoring.xml:454(title) serverguide/C/mail.xml:505(title) serverguide/C/mail.xml:684(title) serverguide/C/mail.xml:908(title) serverguide/C/mail.xml:1344(title) serverguide/C/lamp-applications.xml:128(title) serverguide/C/lamp-applications.xml:314(title) serverguide/C/lamp-applications.xml:453(title) serverguide/C/file-server.xml:360(title) serverguide/C/file-server.xml:488(title) serverguide/C/dns.xml:39(title) serverguide/C/databases.xml:84(title) serverguide/C/databases.xml:183(title) serverguide/C/clustering.xml:47(title) serverguide/C/chat.xml:57(title) serverguide/C/chat.xml:153(title) serverguide/C/backups.xml:616(title)
msgid "Configuration"
msgstr "설정"

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:101(para)
msgid ""
"The main Samba configuration file is located in "
"<filename>/etc/samba/smb.conf</filename>. The default configuration file has "
"a significant amount of comments in order to document various configuration "
"directives."
msgstr ""
"메인 삼바 구성 파일은 <filename>/etc/samba/smb.conf</filename>에 있습니다.  기본 구성 파일에는 다양한 "
"구성 방법을 알려주기 위해 매우 많은 주석들이 달려있습니다."

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:106(para)
msgid ""
"Not all the available options are included in the default configuration "
"file. See the <filename>smb.conf</filename><application>man</application> "
"page or the <ulink url=\"http://samba.org/samba/docs/man/Samba-HOWTO-"
"Collection/\">Samba HOWTO Collection</ulink> for more details."
msgstr ""
"사용할 수 있는 옵션들은 기본 구성 파일에 있는 것들이 전부가 아닙니다.  "
"<filename>smb.conf</filename><application>man</application> 페이지나 <ulink "
"url=\"http://samba.org/samba/docs/man/Samba-HOWTO-Collection/\">삼바 "
"사용법</ulink>을 참조하세요."

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:116(para)
msgid ""
"First, edit the following key/value pairs in the "
"<emphasis>[global]</emphasis> section of "
"<filename>/etc/samba/smb.conf</filename>:"
msgstr ""
"첫번째로, <filename>/etc/samba/smb.conf</filename>의 "
"<emphasis>[global]</emphasis> 절에 있는 다음 키/값 쌍들을 편집하세요:"

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:121(programlisting) serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:311(programlisting) serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:776(programlisting) serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:990(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"   workgroup = EXAMPLE\n"
"   ...\n"
"   security = user\n"
msgstr ""
"\n"
"   workgroup = EXAMPLE\n"
"   ...\n"
"   security = user\n"

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:127(para)
msgid ""
"The <emphasis>security</emphasis> parameter is farther down in the [global] "
"section, and is commented by default. Also, change "
"<emphasis>EXAMPLE</emphasis> to better match your environment."
msgstr ""
"<emphasis>security</emphasis> 매개 변수는 [global] 절에서 한 참 더 내려가면 있으며, 기본값으로는 주석 "
"처리 되어 있습니다.  또한 <emphasis>EXAMPLE</emphasis>은 당신의 환경에 맞게 더 좋은 것으로 변경하세요."

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:135(para)
msgid ""
"Create a new section at the bottom of the file, or uncomment one of the "
"examples, for the directory to be shared:"
msgstr "디렉터리를 공유하려면, 파일 제일 밑에 새로운 절을 생성하거나, 예제 중 하나의 주석을 제거하세요:"

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:139(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"[share]\n"
"    comment = Ubuntu File Server Share\n"
"    path = /srv/samba/share\n"
"    browsable = yes\n"
"    guest ok = yes\n"
"    read only = no\n"
"    create mask = 0755\n"
msgstr ""
"\n"
"[share]\n"
"    comment = 우분투 파일 서버 공유\n"
"    path = /srv/samba/share\n"
"    browsable = yes\n"
"    guest ok = yes\n"
"    read only = no\n"
"    create mask = 0755\n"

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:151(para)
msgid ""
"<emphasis>comment:</emphasis> a short description of the share. Adjust to "
"fit your needs."
msgstr "<emphasis>comment:</emphasis>는 공유의 짧은 설명이며, 필요에 따라 조정하세요."

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:156(para)
msgid "<emphasis>path:</emphasis> the path to the directory to share."
msgstr "<emphasis>path:</emphasis> 공유할 디렉터리의 경로."

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:159(para)
msgid ""
"This example uses <filename>/srv/samba/sharename</filename> because, "
"according to the <emphasis>Filesystem Hierarchy Standard (FHS)</emphasis>, "
"<ulink url=\"http://www.pathname.com/fhs/pub/fhs-"
"2.3.html#SRVDATAFORSERVICESPROVIDEDBYSYSTEM\">/srv</ulink> is where site-"
"specific data should be served. Technically Samba shares can be placed "
"anywhere on the filesystem as long as the permissions are correct, but "
"adhering to standards is recommended."
msgstr ""
"이 예제는 <filename>/srv/samba/sharename</filename>를 사용하는데, 왜냐하면 <emphasis>파일 "
"시스템 계층 표준(Filesystem Hierarchy Standard, FHS)</emphasis>에 따라, <ulink "
"url=\"http://www.pathname.com/fhs/pub/fhs-"
"2.3.html#SRVDATAFORSERVICESPROVIDEDBYSYSTEM\">/srv</ulink>가 사이트 특정 데이터가 서비스 "
"되어야 하는 곳이기 때문입니다.  기술적으로 삼바 공유는 파일 권한만 올바르다면 파일 시스템의 어느 위치에서도 되지만, 표준에 따르시기를 "
"권장합니다."

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:168(para)
msgid ""
"<emphasis>browsable:</emphasis> enables Windows clients to browse the shared "
"directory using <application>Windows Explorer</application>."
msgstr ""
"<emphasis>browsable:</emphasis>은 윈도즈 클라이언트가 <application>윈도즈 "
"탐색기</application>를 사용해서 공유된 디렉터리를 탐색할 수 있게 합니다."

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:174(para)
msgid ""
"<emphasis>guest ok:</emphasis> allows clients to connect to the share "
"without supplying a password."
msgstr "<emphasis>guest ok:</emphasis>는 클라이언트들이 제공된 암호 없이 공유에 연결하는 것을 허용합니다."

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:179(para)
msgid ""
"<emphasis>read only:</emphasis> determines if the share is read only or if "
"write privileges are granted. Write privileges are allowed only when the "
"value is <emphasis>no</emphasis>, as is seen in this example. If the value "
"is <emphasis>yes</emphasis>, then access to the share is read only."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:184(para)
msgid ""
"<emphasis>create mask:</emphasis> determines the permissions new files will "
"have when created."
msgstr ""
"<emphasis>create mask:</emphasis>는 새로운 파일이 생성되었을 때 가지게 될 파일 권한을 지정합니다."

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:193(para)
msgid ""
"Now that <application>Samba</application> is configured, the directory needs "
"to be created and the permissions changed. From a terminal enter:"
msgstr ""
"이제 <application>삼바</application>가 구성되었으며, 디렉터리가 생성되고 권한이 수정되어야 합니다.  터미널에서 "
"다음을 입력하세요:"

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:199(command)
msgid "sudo mkdir -p /srv/samba/share"
msgstr "sudo mkdir -p /srv/samba/share"

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:200(command)
msgid "sudo chown nobody.nogroup /srv/samba/share/"
msgstr "sudo chown nobody.nogroup /srv/samba/share/"

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:204(para)
msgid ""
"The <emphasis>-p</emphasis> switch tells mkdir to create the entire "
"directory tree if it doesn't exist. Change the share name to fit your "
"environment."
msgstr ""
"mkdir에서 <emphasis>-p</emphasis> 스위치는 디렉터리가 존재하지 않는다면 전체 디렉터리 트리를 생성하라는 것입니다. "
" 당신의 환경에 맞게 공유명을 변경하세요."

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:213(para)
msgid ""
"Finally, restart the <application>samba</application> services to enable the "
"new configuration:"
msgstr "끝으로, 새 구성이 적용되도록 <application>삼바</application>서비스를 다시 시작하세요:"

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:218(command) serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:331(command) serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:468(command) serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:567(command) serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:937(command) serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:1047(command) serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:1162(command) serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:1860(command)
msgid "sudo /etc/init.d/samba restart"
msgstr "sudo /etc/init.d/samba restart"

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:225(para)
msgid ""
"Once again, the above configuration gives all access to any client on the "
"local network. For a more secure configuration see <xref linkend=\"samba-"
"fileprint-security\"/>."
msgstr ""
"다시 한 번, 위 설정은 지역 네트워크에 있는 어떤 클라이언트도 모든 접근이 허용됩니다.  더 강화된 보안 구성은 <xref "
"linkend=\"samba-fileprint-security\"/>을 보세요."

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:231(para)
msgid ""
"From a Windows client you should now be able to browse to the Ubuntu file "
"server and see the shared directory. To check that everything is working try "
"creating a directory from Windows."
msgstr ""
"이제 윈도즈 클라이언트에서 우분투 파일 서버를 탐색할 수 있고 공유된 디렉터리를 볼 수 있습니다.  모든 것이 잘 되는 지 확인하려면 "
"윈도즈에서 디렉터리를 생성해 보세요."

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:236(para)
msgid ""
"To create additional shares simply create new <emphasis>[dir]</emphasis> "
"sections in <filename>/etc/samba/smb.conf</filename>, and restart "
"<emphasis>Samba</emphasis>. Just make sure that the directory you want to "
"share actually exists and the permissions are correct."
msgstr ""
"공유를 추가 생성하려면 단순히 <filename>/etc/samba/smb.conf</filename>에 새로운 "
"<emphasis>[dir]</emphasis> 절을 생성하고, <emphasis>삼바</emphasis>를 다시 시작하면 됩니다.  "
"단, 공유하기 원하는 디렉터리가 실제로 존재하는 지와 파일 권한이 올바른 지를 확인하십시요."

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:243(title) serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:341(title) serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:696(title) serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:1066(title) serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:1273(title) serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:366(title) serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1168(title) serverguide/C/reporting-bugs.xml:304(title) serverguide/C/remote-administration.xml:491(title) serverguide/C/network-config.xml:569(title) serverguide/C/network-config.xml:824(title) serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:1531(title) serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:1975(title) serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:2579(title) serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:3087(title) serverguide/C/installation.xml:892(title) serverguide/C/installation.xml:1173(title) serverguide/C/databases.xml:122(title) serverguide/C/databases.xml:273(title) serverguide/C/backups.xml:855(title)
msgid "Resources"
msgstr "자원들"

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:247(para) serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:345(para) serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:700(para) serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:1070(para)
msgid ""
"For in depth Samba configurations see the <ulink "
"url=\"http://samba.org/samba/docs/man/Samba-HOWTO-Collection/\">Samba HOWTO "
"Collection</ulink>"
msgstr ""
"심도 있는 삼바 구성에 대한 것은 <ulink url=\"http://samba.org/samba/docs/man/Samba-HOWTO-"
"Collection/\">삼바 사용법 모음</ulink>을 보세요."

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:253(para) serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:351(para) serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:706(para) serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:1076(para)
msgid ""
"The guide is also available in <ulink "
"url=\"http://www.amazon.com/exec/obidos/tg/detail/-/0131882228\">printed "
"format</ulink>."
msgstr ""
"이 가이드는 <ulink url=\"http://www.amazon.com/exec/obidos/tg/detail/-"
"/0131882228\">인쇄된 포맷</ulink>으로도 볼 수 있습니다."

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:259(para) serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:357(para)
msgid ""
"O'Reilly's <ulink "
"url=\"http://www.oreilly.com/catalog/9780596007690/\">Using Samba</ulink> is "
"another good reference."
msgstr ""
"O'Reilly의 <ulink url=\"http://www.oreilly.com/catalog/9780596007690/\">삼바 "
"사용하기</ulink>는 또다른 좋은 참고 문헌입니다."

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:265(para) serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:368(para) serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:731(para) serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:1100(para) serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:1286(para)
msgid ""
"The <ulink url=\"https://help.ubuntu.com/community/Samba\">Ubuntu Wiki Samba "
"</ulink> page."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:274(title)
msgid "Samba Print Server"
msgstr "삼바 프린트 서버"

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:276(para)
msgid ""
"Another common use of Samba is to configure it to share printers installed, "
"either locally or over the network, on an Ubuntu server. Similar to <xref "
"linkend=\"samba-fileserver\"/> this section will configure Samba to allow "
"any client on the local network to use the installed printers without "
"prompting for a username and password."
msgstr ""
"또다른 삼바의 일반적인 사용법은 직접 연결되어 있던 네트워크를 통해 연결되어 있던 상관없이, 우분투 서버에 설치된 프린터를 공유하도록 "
"구성하는 것입니다.  이 절에서는 <xref linkend=\"samba-fileserver\"/>와 같게 지역 네트워크 상의 어떤 "
"클라이언트에서도 사용자 이름이나 암호 없이 설치된 프린터들을 사용하도록 삼바를 설정할 것입니다."

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:282(para)
msgid ""
"For a more secure configuration see <xref linkend=\"samba-fileprint-"
"security\"/>."
msgstr "더 강화된 보안 구성은 <xref linkend=\"samba-fileprint-security\"/>을 보세요."

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:289(para)
msgid ""
"Before installing and configuring Samba it is best to already have a working "
"<application>CUPS</application> installation. See <xref linkend=\"cups\"/> "
"for details."
msgstr ""
"삼바를 설치하고 구성하기 전에 <application>CUPS</application>가 이미 설치가 되어 동작되고 있는 것이 가장 "
"좋습니다.  자세한 것은 <xref linkend=\"cups\"/>을 보세요."

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:294(para)
msgid ""
"To install the <application>samba</application> package, from a terminal "
"enter:"
msgstr "<application>삼바</application> 패키지를 설치하려면, 터미널에서 다음을 입력:"

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:305(para)
msgid ""
"After installing samba edit <filename>/etc/samba/smb.conf</filename>. Change "
"the <emphasis>workgroup</emphasis> attribute to what is appropriate for your "
"network, and change <emphasis>security</emphasis> to <emphasis "
"role=\"italic\">share</emphasis>:"
msgstr ""
"삼바를 설치한 후 <filename>/etc/samba/smb.conf</filename>을 편집하세요.  "
"<emphasis>workgroup</emphasis> 속성을 당신의 네트워크에 적당한 것으로 바꾸고, "
"<emphasis>security</emphasis>를 <emphasis role=\"italic\">share</emphasis>로 "
"바꾸세요:"

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:317(para)
msgid ""
"In the <emphasis>[printers]</emphasis> section change the <emphasis>guest "
"ok</emphasis> option to <emphasis role=\"italic\">yes</emphasis>:"
msgstr ""
"<emphasis>[printers]</emphasis> 절에서 <emphasis>guest ok</emphasis> 옵션을 "
"<emphasis role=\"italic\">yes</emphasis>로 바꾸세요:"

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:321(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"   browsable = yes\n"
"   guest ok = yes\n"
msgstr ""
"\n"
"   browsable = yes\n"
"   guest ok = yes\n"

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:326(para)
msgid "After editing <filename>smb.conf</filename> restart Samba:"
msgstr "<filename>smb.conf</filename>를 편집한 후에 삼바 다시 시작:"

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:334(para)
msgid ""
"The default Samba configuration will automatically share any printers "
"installed. Simply install the printer locally on your Windows clients."
msgstr ""
"기본 삼바 구성은 설치된 모든 프린터를 자동으로 공유하는 것입니다.  단순히 윈도즈 클라이언트에 있는 것을 로컬 프린터로 설치하세요."

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:363(para)
msgid ""
"Also, see the <ulink url=\"http://www.cups.org/\">CUPS Website</ulink> for "
"more information on configuring CUPS."
msgstr ""
"또한, CUPS 구성에 대한 더 자세한 정보는 <ulink url=\"http://www.cups.org/\">CUPS 웹 "
"사이트</ulink>를 보세요."

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:377(title)
msgid "Securing a Samba File and Print Server"
msgstr "삼바 파일, 프린터 서버 보안"

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:380(title)
msgid "Samba Security Modes"
msgstr "삼바 보안 모드들"

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:382(para)
msgid ""
"There are two security levels available to the Common Internet Filesystem "
"(CIFS) network protocol <emphasis>user-level</emphasis> and <emphasis>share-"
"level</emphasis>. Samba's <emphasis>security mode</emphasis> implementation "
"allows more flexibility, providing four ways of implementing user-level "
"security and one way to implement share-level:"
msgstr ""
"공통 인터넷 파일 시스템 (Common Internet Filesystem, CIFS) 네트워크 규약으로 쓸 수 있는 보안 수준은 "
"<emphasis>사용자 수준</emphasis>과 <emphasis>공유 수준</emphasis> 두 가지가 있습니다.  삼바의 "
"<emphasis>보안 모드</emphasis> 구현은 더 유연하며, 네 가지 사용자 수준 보안 구현과 한 가자 공유 수준 구현이 "
"제공됩니다."

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:391(para)
msgid ""
"<emphasis>security = user:</emphasis> requires clients to supply a username "
"and password to connect to shares. Samba user accounts are separate from "
"system accounts, but the <application>libpam-smbpass</application> package "
"will sync system users and passwords with the Samba user database."
msgstr ""
"<emphasis>security = user:</emphasis>은 공유에 연결할 때 제공된 사용자 이름과 암호를 클라이언트에 "
"요구합니다.  삼바 사용자 계정은 시스템 계정과 분리되어 있으나, <application>libpam-"
"smbpass</application> 패키지는 시스템 사용자와 암호를 삼바 사용자 데이터베이스와 연동시킵니다."

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:398(para)
msgid ""
"<emphasis>security = domain:</emphasis> this mode allows the Samba server to "
"appear to Windows clients as a Primary Domain Controller (PDC), Backup "
"Domain Controller (BDC), or a Domain Member Server (DMS). See <xref "
"linkend=\"samba-dc\"/> for further information."
msgstr ""
"<emphasis>security = domain:</emphasis> 이 모드는 삼바 서버가 윈도즈 클라이언트에 기본 도메인 "
"제어기(Primary Domain Controller, PDC), 또는 백업 도메인 제어기(Backup Domain Controller, "
"BDC), 도메인 구성원 버서(Domain Member Server, DMS)로 보이도록 합니다.  추가 정보는 <xref "
"linkend=\"samba-dc\"/>를 보세요."

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:405(para)
msgid ""
"<emphasis>security = ADS:</emphasis> allows the Samba server to join an "
"Active Directory domain as a native member. See <xref linkend=\"samba-ad-"
"integration\"/> for details."
msgstr ""
"<emphasis>security = ADS:</emphasis>는 삼바 서버가 액티브 디렉터리 도메인에 네이티브 구성원으로 합류하도록 "
"합니다.  <xref linkend=\"samba-ad-integration\"/>를 보세요."

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:411(para)
msgid ""
"<emphasis>security = server:</emphasis> this mode is left over from before "
"Samba could become a member server, and due to some security issues should "
"not be used. See the <ulink url=\"http://samba.org/samba/docs/man/Samba-"
"HOWTO-Collection/ServerType.html#id349531\">Server Security</ulink> section "
"of the Samba guide for more details."
msgstr ""
"<emphasis>security = server:</emphasis> 이 모드는 삼바가 구성원 서버가 될 수 있도록 하기 위해 남겨놓은 "
"것이지만 몇 가지 보안 문제로 인해 사용하면 안 됩니다.  더 자세한 것들은 삼바 가이드의 <ulink "
"url=\"http://samba.org/samba/docs/man/Samba-HOWTO-"
"Collection/ServerType.html#id349531\">서버 보안</ulink>을 보세요."

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:419(para)
msgid ""
"<emphasis>security = share:</emphasis> allows clients to connect to shares "
"without supplying a username and password."
msgstr ""
"<emphasis>security = share:</emphasis>는 클라이언트가 제공된 사용자 이름과 암호 없이 공유에 연결하게 "
"합니다."

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:426(para)
msgid ""
"The security mode you choose will depend on your environment and what you "
"need the Samba server to accomplish."
msgstr "선택할 보안 모드는 환경과 삼바 서버로 무엇을 할 것인가에 따라 결정합니다."

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:432(title)
msgid "Security = User"
msgstr "Security = User"

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:434(para)
msgid ""
"This section will reconfigure the Samba file and print server, from <xref "
"linkend=\"samba-fileserver\"/> and <xref linkend=\"samba-printserver\"/>, to "
"require authentication."
msgstr ""
"이 절에서는 <xref linkend=\"samba-fileserver\"/>와 <xref linkend=\"samba-"
"printserver\"/>에서 인증을 요구하도록 삼바 파일, 프린터 서버를 재구성할 것입니다."

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:439(para)
msgid ""
"First, install the <application>libpam-smbpass</application> package which "
"will sync the system users to the Samba user database:"
msgstr ""
"첫번째로, 시스템 사용자와 삼바 사용자 데이터베이스를 동기화시킬 <application>libpam-"
"smbpass</application> 패키지를 설치:"

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:445(command)
msgid "sudo apt-get install libpam-smbpass"
msgstr "sudo apt-get install libpam-smbpass"

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:449(para)
msgid ""
"If you chose the <emphasis>Samba Server</emphasis> task during installation "
"<application>libpam-smbpass</application> is already installed."
msgstr ""
"설치하는 동안 <emphasis>Samba Server</emphasis> 태스크를 선택했다면, <application>libpam-"
"smbpass</application>는 이미 설치되어 있습니다."

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:455(para)
msgid ""
"Edit <filename>/etc/samba/smb.conf</filename>, and in the "
"<emphasis>[share]</emphasis> section change:"
msgstr ""
"<filename>/etc/samba/smb.conf</filename>를 편집, 안에 있는 "
"<emphasis>[share]</emphasis> 절을 수정:"

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:459(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"    guest ok = no\n"
msgstr ""
"\n"
"    guest ok = no\n"

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:463(para)
msgid "Finally, restart Samba for the new settings to take effect:"
msgstr "마지막으로, 새로운 설정이 적용되도록 삼바를 다시 시작:"

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:471(para)
msgid ""
"Now when connecting to the shared directories or printers you should be "
"prompted for a username and password."
msgstr "이제 공유된 디렉터리나 프린터에 연결할 때 사용자 이름과 암호를 묻게 됩니다."

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:476(para)
msgid ""
"If you choose to map a network drive to the share you can check the "
"<quote>Reconnect at Logon</quote> check box, which will require you to only "
"enter the username and password once, at least until the password changes."
msgstr ""
"네트워크 드라이브를 설정하려고 하면 <quote>로그온 시 다시 연결</quote> 확인 상자를 체크할 수 있으며, 사용자 이름과 암호를 "
"한 번 만 입력하면 암호를 변경하기 전까지 다시 물어보지 않습니다."

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:484(title)
msgid "Share Security"
msgstr "공유 보안"

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:486(para)
msgid ""
"There are several options available to increase the security for each "
"individual shared directory. Using the <emphasis>[share]</emphasis> example, "
"this section will cover some common options."
msgstr ""
"각각의 공유 디렉터리의 보안성을 높이기 위해 쓸 수 있는 몇 가지 옵션들이 있습니다.  이 절은 "
"<emphasis>[share]</emphasis> 예제를 사용해서, 몇 개의 일반적인 옵션을 다룰 것입니다."

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:492(title)
msgid "Groups"
msgstr "그룹"

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:494(para)
msgid ""
"Groups define a collection of computers or users which have a common level "
"of access to particular network resources and offer a level of granularity "
"in controlling access to such resources. For example, if a group <emphasis "
"role=\"italic\">qa</emphasis> is defined and contains the users <emphasis "
"role=\"italic\">freda</emphasis>, <emphasis "
"role=\"italic\">danika</emphasis>, and <emphasis "
"role=\"italic\">rob</emphasis> and a second group <emphasis "
"role=\"italic\">support</emphasis> is defined and consists of users "
"<emphasis role=\"italic\">danika</emphasis>, <emphasis "
"role=\"italic\">jeremy</emphasis>, and <emphasis "
"role=\"italic\">vincent</emphasis> then certain network resources configured "
"to allow access by the <emphasis role=\"italic\">qa</emphasis> group will "
"subsequently enable access by freda, danika, and rob, but not jeremy or "
"vincent. Since the user <emphasis role=\"italic\">danika</emphasis> belongs "
"to both the <emphasis role=\"italic\">qa</emphasis> and <emphasis "
"role=\"italic\">support</emphasis> groups, she will be able to access "
"resources configured for access by both groups, whereas all other users will "
"have only access to resources explicitly allowing the group they are part of."
msgstr ""
"그룹은 특정 네트워크 자원을 접근하는 공통적인 등급을 가지는 컴퓨터 또는 사용자의 집합을 지정하고 그러한 네트워크 자원으로 접근하는 것을 "
"관리하는 선별 정도의 등급을 제공 합니다. 예를 들어, 그룹 <emphasis role=\"italic\">qa</emphasis> 가 "
"지정되었고 사용자 <emphasis role=\"italic\">freda</emphasis>, <emphasis "
"role=\"italic\">danika</emphasis>, 그리고 <emphasis "
"role=\"italic\">rob</emphasis> 을 포함하고 있고, 두 번째 그룹 <emphasis "
"role=\"italic\">support</emphasis> 가 지정되었고 사용자 <emphasis "
"role=\"italic\">danika</emphasis>, <emphasis "
"role=\"italic\">jeremy</emphasis>, 그리고 <emphasis "
"role=\"italic\">vincent</emphasis> 로 구성된다면, 특정 네트워크 자원은 <emphasis "
"role=\"italic\">qa</emphasis> 그룹에 의해 접근되는 것을 허용하기 위하여 설정될 수 있고 그 결과로 freda, "
"danika, rob은 접근이 허용되지만 jeremy 또는 vincent는 접근을 할 수 없게 됩니다. 사용자 <emphasis "
"role=\"italic\">danika</emphasis> 는 <emphasis role=\"italic\">qa</emphasis> "
"와 <emphasis role=\"italic\">support</emphasis> 그룹 양쪽 모두에 속하므로, 그녀는 양쪽 그룹에 의한 "
"접근을 위하여 설정되는 자원을 사용할 수 있게되고, 모든 다른 사용자들은 그들이 속하는 그룹에게 명시적으로 허용한 자원만을 사용하게 "
"됩니다."

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:508(para)
msgid ""
"By default Samba looks for the local system groups defined in "
"<filename>/etc/group</filename> to determine which users belong to which "
"groups. For more information on adding and removing users from groups see "
"<xref linkend=\"adding-deleting-users\"/>."
msgstr ""
"사용자가 어떤 그룹에 속하는 지를 결정하기 위해 기본적으로 삼바는 <filename>/etc/group</filename>에 정의된 지역 "
"시스템 그룹을 찾습니다.  그룹에 사용자를 추가하고 제거하는 것에 대한 더 많은 정보는 <xref linkend=\"adding-"
"deleting-users\"/>를 보세요."

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:514(para)
msgid ""
"When defining groups in the Samba configuration file, "
"<filename>/etc/samba/smb.conf</filename>, the recognized syntax is to "
"preface the group name with an \"@\" symbol. For example, if you wished to "
"define a group named <emphasis role=\"italic\">sysadmin</emphasis> in a "
"certain section of the <filename>/etc/samba/smb.conf</filename>, you would "
"do so by entering the group name as <emphasis "
"role=\"bold\">@sysadmin</emphasis>."
msgstr ""
"삼바 구성 파일, <filename>/etc/samba/smb.conf</filename>에 그룹을 정의할 때, 그룹 이름 앞에 "
"\"@\" 기호를 붙여야지 그룹으로 인식됩니다.  예를 들어, <filename>/etc/samba/smb.conf</filename>의 "
"어떤 절에 <emphasis role=\"italic\">sysadmin</emphasis> 그룹 이름을 정의하려면, <emphasis "
"role=\"bold\">@sysadmin</emphasis>로 그룹 이름을 입력해야 합니다."

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:523(title)
msgid "File Permissions"
msgstr "파일 권한"

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:525(para)
msgid ""
"File Permissions define the explicit rights a computer or user has to a "
"particular directory, file, or set of files. Such permissions may be defined "
"by editing the <filename>/etc/samba/smb.conf</filename> file and specifying "
"the explicit permissions of a defined file share."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:531(para)
msgid ""
"For example, if you have defined a Samba share called "
"<emphasis>share</emphasis> and wish to give <emphasis role=\"italic\">read-"
"only</emphasis> permissions to the group of users known as <emphasis "
"role=\"italic\">qa</emphasis>, but wanted to allow writing to the share by "
"the group called <emphasis role=\"italic\">sysadmin</emphasis> and the user "
"named <emphasis role=\"italic\">vincent</emphasis>, then you could edit the "
"<filename>/etc/samba/smb.conf</filename> file, and add the following entries "
"under the <emphasis>[share]</emphasis> entry:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:540(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"    read list = @qa\n"
"    write list = @sysadmin, vincent\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:545(para)
msgid ""
"Another possible Samba permission is to declare "
"<emphasis>administrative</emphasis> permissions to a particular shared "
"resource. Users having administrative permissions may read, write, or modify "
"any information contained in the resource the user has been given explicit "
"administrative permissions to."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:551(para)
msgid ""
"For example, if you wanted to give the user <emphasis "
"role=\"italic\">melissa</emphasis> administrative permissions to the "
"<emphasis role=\"italic\">share</emphasis> example, you would edit the "
"<filename>/etc/samba/smb.conf</filename> file, and add the following line "
"under the <emphasis>[share]</emphasis> entry:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:558(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"    admin users = melissa\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:562(para)
msgid ""
"After editing <filename>/etc/samba/smb.conf</filename>, restart Samba for "
"the changes to take effect:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:571(para)
msgid ""
"For the <emphasis>read list</emphasis> and <emphasis>write list</emphasis> "
"to work the Samba security mode must <emphasis>not</emphasis> be set to "
"<emphasis role=\"italic\">security = share</emphasis>"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:577(para)
msgid ""
"Now that Samba has been configured to limit which groups have access to the "
"shared directory, the filesystem permissions need to be updated."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:582(para)
msgid ""
"Traditional Linux file permissions do not map well to Windows NT Access "
"Control Lists (ACLs). Fortunately POSIX ACLs are available on Ubuntu servers "
"providing more fine grained control. For example, to enable ACLs on "
"<filename>/srv</filename> an EXT3 filesystem, edit "
"<filename>/etc/fstab</filename> adding the <emphasis>acl</emphasis> option:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:589(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"UUID=66bcdd2e-8861-4fb0-b7e4-e61c569fe17d /srv  ext3    noatime,relatime,acl "
"0       1\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:593(para)
msgid "Then remount the partition:"
msgstr "그런 다음 파티션을 다시 마운트시킴:"

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:598(command)
msgid "sudo mount -v -o remount /srv"
msgstr "sudo mount -v -o remount /srv"

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:602(para)
msgid ""
"The above example assumes <filename>/srv</filename> on a separate partition. "
"If <filename>/srv</filename>, or wherever you have configured your share "
"path, is part of the <filename>/</filename> partition a reboot may be "
"required."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:609(para)
msgid ""
"To match the Samba configuration above the <emphasis>sysadmin</emphasis> "
"group will be given read, write, and execute permissions to "
"<filename>/srv/samba/share</filename>, the <emphasis>qa</emphasis> group "
"will be given read and execute permissions, and the files will be owned by "
"the username <emphasis>melissa</emphasis>. Enter the following in a terminal:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:617(command)
msgid "sudo chown -R melissa /srv/samba/share/"
msgstr "sudo chown -R melissa /srv/samba/share/"

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:618(command)
msgid "sudo chgrp -R sysadmin /srv/samba/share/"
msgstr "sudo chgrp -R sysadmin /srv/samba/share/"

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:619(command)
msgid "sudo setfacl -R -m g:qa:rx /srv/samba/share/"
msgstr "sudo setfacl -R -m g:qa:rx /srv/samba/share/"

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:623(para)
msgid ""
"The <application>setfacl</application> command above gives "
"<emphasis>execute</emphasis> permissions to all files in the "
"<filename>/srv/samba/share</filename> directory, which you may or may not "
"want."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:629(para)
msgid ""
"Now from a Windows client you should notice the new file permissions are "
"implemented. See the <application>acl</application> and "
"<application>setfacl</application> man pages for more information on POSIX "
"ACLs."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:637(title)
msgid "Samba AppArmor Profile"
msgstr "삼바 AppArmor 프로파일"

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:639(para)
msgid ""
"Ubuntu comes with the <application>AppArmor</application> security module, "
"which provides mandatory access controls. The default AppArmor profile for "
"Samba will need to be adapted to your configuration. For more details on "
"using AppArmor see <xref linkend=\"apparmor\"/>."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:645(para)
msgid ""
"There are default AppArmor profiles for <filename>/usr/sbin/smbd</filename> "
"and <filename>/usr/sbin/nmbd</filename>, the Samba daemon binaries, as part "
"of the <application>apparmor-profiles</application> packages. To install the "
"package, from a terminal prompt enter:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:652(command) serverguide/C/security.xml:925(command)
msgid "sudo apt-get install apparmor-profiles"
msgstr "sudo apt-get install apparmor-profiles"

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:656(para)
msgid "This package contains profiles for several other binaries."
msgstr "이 패키지에는 몇 가지 다른 바이너리들에 대한 프로파일들이 있습니다."

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:661(para)
msgid ""
"By default the profiles for <application>smbd</application> and "
"<application>nmbd</application> are in <emphasis>complain</emphasis> mode "
"allowing Samba to work without modifying the profile, and only logging "
"errors. To place the <application>smbd</application> profile into "
"<emphasis>enforce</emphasis> mode, and have Samba work as expected, the "
"profile will need to be modified to reflect any directories that are shared."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:668(para)
msgid ""
"Edit <filename>/etc/apparmor.d/usr.sbin.smbd</filename> adding information "
"for <emphasis>[share]</emphasis> from the file server example:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:673(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"  /srv/samba/share/ r,\n"
"  /srv/samba/share/** rwkix,\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:678(para)
msgid ""
"Now place the profile into <emphasis>enforce</emphasis> and reload it:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:683(command)
msgid "sudo aa-enforce /usr/sbin/smbd"
msgstr "sudo aa-enforce /usr/sbin/smbd"

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:684(command)
msgid "cat /etc/apparmor.d/usr.sbin.smbd | sudo apparmor_parser -r"
msgstr "cat /etc/apparmor.d/usr.sbin.smbd | sudo apparmor_parser -r"

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:687(para)
msgid ""
"You should now be able to read, write, and execute files in the shared "
"directory as normal, and the <application>smbd</application> binary will "
"have access to only the configured files and directories. Be sure to add "
"entries for each directory you configure Samba to share. Also, any errors "
"will be logged to <filename>/var/log/syslog</filename>."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:712(para) serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:1082(para)
msgid ""
"O'Reilly's <ulink "
"url=\"http://www.oreilly.com/catalog/9780596007690/\">Using Samba</ulink> is "
"also a good reference."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:718(para)
msgid ""
"<ulink url=\"http://samba.org/samba/docs/man/Samba-HOWTO-Collection/securing-"
"samba.html\">Chapter 18</ulink> of the Samba HOWTO Collection is devoted to "
"security."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:724(para)
msgid ""
"For more information on Samba and ACLs see the <ulink "
"url=\"http://samba.org/samba/docs/man/Samba-HOWTO-"
"Collection/AccessControls.html#id397568\">Samba ACLs page </ulink>."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:740(title)
msgid "Samba as a Domain Controller"
msgstr "삼바를 도메인 제어기로"

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:742(para)
msgid ""
"Although it cannot act as an Active Directory Primary Domain Controller "
"(PDC), a Samba server can be configured to appear as a Windows NT4-style "
"domain controller. A major advantage of this configuration is the ability to "
"centralize user and machine credentials. Samba can also use multiple "
"backends to store the user information."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:749(title)
msgid "Primary Domain Controller"
msgstr "기본 도메인 제어기"

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:751(para)
msgid ""
"This section covers configuring Samba as a Primary Domain Controller (PDC) "
"using the default smbpasswd backend."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:758(para)
msgid ""
"First, install Samba, and <application>libpam-smbpass</application> to sync "
"the user accounts, by entering the following in a terminal prompt:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:764(command) serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:980(command)
msgid "sudo apt-get install samba libpam-smbpass"
msgstr "sudo apt-get install samba libpam-smbpass"

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:770(para)
msgid ""
"Next, configure Samba by editing <filename>/etc/samba/smb.conf</filename>. "
"The <emphasis>security</emphasis> mode should be set to <emphasis "
"role=\"italic\">user</emphasis>, and the <emphasis>workgroup</emphasis> "
"should relate to your organization:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:785(para)
msgid ""
"In the commented <quote>Domains</quote> section add or uncomment the "
"following:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:789(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"   domain logons = yes\n"
"   logon path = \\\\%N\\%U\\profile\n"
"   logon drive = H:\n"
"   logon home = \\\\%N\\%U\n"
"   logon script = logon.cmd\n"
"   add machine script = sudo /usr/sbin/useradd -N -g machines -c Machine -d "
"/var/lib/samba -s /bin/false %u\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:800(para)
msgid ""
"<emphasis>domain logons:</emphasis> provides the netlogon service causing "
"Samba to act as a domain controller."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:805(para)
msgid ""
"<emphasis>logon path:</emphasis> places the user's Windows profile into "
"their home directory. It is also possible to configure a "
"<emphasis>[profiles]</emphasis> share placing all profiles under a single "
"directory."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:811(para)
msgid ""
"<emphasis>logon drive:</emphasis> specifies the home directory local path."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:816(para)
msgid ""
"<emphasis>logon home:</emphasis> specifies the home directory location."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:821(para)
msgid ""
"<emphasis>logon script:</emphasis> determines the script to be run locally "
"once a user has logged in. The script needs to be placed in the "
"<emphasis>[netlogon]</emphasis> share."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:827(para)
msgid ""
"<emphasis>add machine script:</emphasis> a script that will automatically "
"create the <emphasis>Machine Trust Account</emphasis> needed for a "
"workstation to join the domain."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:831(para)
msgid ""
"In this example the <emphasis>machines</emphasis> group will need to be "
"created using the <application>addgroup</application> utility see <xref "
"linkend=\"adding-deleting-users\"/> for details."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:839(para)
msgid ""
"If you wish to not use <emphasis>Roaming Profiles</emphasis> leave the "
"<emphasis>logon home</emphasis> and <emphasis>logon path</emphasis> options "
"commented."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:848(para)
msgid ""
"Uncomment the <emphasis>[homes]</emphasis> share to allow the <emphasis "
"role=\"italic\">logon home</emphasis> to be mapped:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:853(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"[homes]\n"
"   comment = Home Directories\n"
"   browseable = no\n"
"   read only = no\n"
"   create mask = 0700\n"
"   directory mask = 0700\n"
"   valid users = %S\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:866(para)
msgid ""
"When configured as a domain controller a <emphasis>[netlogon]</emphasis> "
"share needs to be configured. To enable the share, uncomment:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:871(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"[netlogon]\n"
"   comment = Network Logon Service\n"
"   path = /srv/samba/netlogon\n"
"   guest ok = yes\n"
"   read only = yes\n"
"   share modes = no\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:881(para)
msgid ""
"The original <emphasis>netlogon</emphasis> share path is "
"<filename>/home/samba/netlogon</filename>, but according to the Filesystem "
"Hierarchy Standard (FHS), <ulink url=\"http://www.pathname.com/fhs/pub/fhs-"
"2.3.html#SRVDATAFORSERVICESPROVIDEDBYSYSTEM\">/srv</ulink> is the correct "
"location for site-specific data provided by the system."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:892(para)
msgid ""
"Now create the <filename role=\"directory\">netlogon</filename> directory, "
"and an empty (for now) <filename>logon.cmd</filename> script file:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:898(command)
msgid "sudo mkdir -p /srv/samba/netlogon"
msgstr "sudo mkdir -p /srv/samba/netlogon"

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:899(command)
msgid "sudo touch /srv/samba/netlogon/logon.cmd"
msgstr "sudo touch /srv/samba/netlogon/logon.cmd"

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:902(para)
msgid ""
"You can enter any normal Windows logon script commands in "
"<filename>logon.cmd</filename> to customize the client's environment."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:910(para)
msgid ""
"With <emphasis>root</emphasis> being disabled by default, in order to join a "
"workstation to the domain, a system group needs to be mapped to the Windows "
"<emphasis>Domain Admins</emphasis> group. Using the "
"<application>net</application> utility, from a terminal enter:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:917(command)
msgid ""
"sudo net groupmap add ntgroup=\"Domain Admins\" unixgroup=sysadmin rid=512 "
"type=d"
msgstr ""
"sudo net groupmap add ntgroup=\"Domain Admins\" unixgroup=sysadmin rid=512 "
"type=d"

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:921(para)
msgid ""
"Change <emphasis role=\"italic\">sysadmin</emphasis> to whichever group you "
"prefer. Also, the user used to join the domain needs to be a member of the "
"<emphasis>sysadmin</emphasis> group, as well as a member of the system "
"<emphasis>admin</emphasis> group. The <emphasis>admin</emphasis> group "
"allows <application>sudo</application> use."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:932(para)
msgid "Finally, restart Samba to enable the new domain controller:"
msgstr "마지막으로, 새로운 도메인 제어기가 동작하도록 삼바를 다시 시작:"

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:943(para)
msgid ""
"You should now be able to join Windows clients to the Domain in the same "
"manner as joining them to an NT4 domain running on a Windows server."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:953(title)
msgid "Backup Domain Controller"
msgstr "백업 도메인 제어기"

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:955(para)
msgid ""
"With a Primary Domain Controller (PDC) on the network it is best to have a "
"Backup Domain Controller (BDC) as well. This will allow clients to "
"authenticate in case the PDC becomes unavailable."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:960(para)
msgid ""
"When configuring Samba as a BDC you need a way to sync account information "
"with the PDC. There are multiple ways of accomplishing this "
"<application>scp</application>, <application>rsync</application>, or by "
"using <application>LDAP</application> as the <emphasis>passdb "
"backend</emphasis>."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:966(para)
msgid ""
"Using LDAP is the most robust way to sync account information, because both "
"domain controllers can use the same information in real time. However, "
"setting up a LDAP server may be overly complicated for a small number of "
"user and computer accounts. See <xref linkend=\"samba-ldap\"/> for details."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:975(para)
msgid ""
"First, install <application>samba</application> and <application>libpam-"
"smbpass</application>. From a terminal enter:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:986(para)
msgid ""
"Now, edit <filename>/etc/samba/smb.conf</filename> and uncomment the "
"following in the <emphasis>[global]</emphasis>:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:999(para)
msgid "In the commented <emphasis>Domains</emphasis> uncomment or add:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:1003(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"   domain logons = yes\n"
"   domain master = no\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:1011(para)
msgid ""
"Make sure a user has rights to read the files in "
"<filename>/var/lib/samba</filename>. For example, to allow users in the "
"<emphasis>admin</emphasis> group to <application>scp</application> the "
"files, enter:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:1017(command)
msgid "sudo chgrp -R admin /var/lib/samba"
msgstr "sudo chgrp -R admin /var/lib/samba"

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:1023(para)
msgid ""
"Next, sync the user accounts, using <application>scp</application> to copy "
"the <filename>/var/lib/samba</filename> directory from the PDC:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:1029(command)
msgid "sudo scp -r username@pdc:/var/lib/samba /var/lib"
msgstr "sudo scp -r username@pdc:/var/lib/samba /var/lib"

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:1033(para)
msgid ""
"Replace <emphasis>username</emphasis> with a valid username and "
"<emphasis>pdc</emphasis> with the hostname or IP Address of your actual PDC."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:1042(para)
msgid "Finally, restart <application>samba</application>:"
msgstr "마지막으로, <application>삼바</application>를 다시 시작:"

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:1053(para)
msgid ""
"You can test that your Backup Domain controller is working by stopping the "
"Samba daemon on the PDC, then trying to login to a Windows client joined to "
"the domain."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:1058(para)
msgid ""
"Another thing to keep in mind is if you have configured the <emphasis>logon "
"home</emphasis> option as a directory on the PDC, and the PDC becomes "
"unavailable, access to the user's <emphasis>Home</emphasis> drive will also "
"be unavailable. For this reason it is best to configure the <emphasis>logon "
"home</emphasis> to reside on a separate file server from the PDC and BDC."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:1088(para)
msgid ""
"<ulink url=\"http://samba.org/samba/docs/man/Samba-HOWTO-Collection/samba-"
"pdc.html\">Chapter 4</ulink> of the Samba HOWTO Collection explains setting "
"up a Primary Domain Controller."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:1094(para)
msgid ""
"<ulink url=\"http://us3.samba.org/samba/docs/man/Samba-HOWTO-"
"Collection/samba-bdc.html\">Chapter 5</ulink> of the Samba HOWTO Collection "
"explains setting up a Backup Domain Controller."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:1109(title)
msgid "Samba Active Directory Integration"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:1112(title)
msgid "Accessing a Samba Share"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:1114(para)
msgid ""
"Another, use for Samba is to integrate into an existing Windows network. "
"Once part of an Active Directory domain, Samba can provide file and print "
"services to AD users."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:1119(para)
msgid ""
"The simplest way to join an AD domain is to use <application>Likewise-"
"open</application>. For detailed instructions see <xref linkend=\"likewise-"
"open\"/>."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:1124(para)
msgid ""
"Once part of the domain, enter the following command in the terminal prompt:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:1129(command)
msgid "sudo apt-get install samba smbfs smbclient"
msgstr "sudo apt-get install samba smbfs smbclient"

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:1132(para)
msgid ""
"Since the <application>likewise-open</application> and "
"<application>samba</application> packages use separate "
"<filename>secrets.tdb</filename> files, a symlink will need to be created in "
"<filename role=\"directory\">/var/lib/samba</filename>:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:1138(command)
msgid "sudo mv /var/lib/samba/secrets.tdb /var/lib/samba/secrets.tdb.orig"
msgstr "sudo mv /var/lib/samba/secrets.tdb /var/lib/samba/secrets.tdb.orig"

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:1139(command)
msgid "sudo ln -s /etc/samba/secrets.tdb /var/lib/samba"
msgstr "sudo ln -s /etc/samba/secrets.tdb /var/lib/samba"

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:1142(para)
msgid "Next, edit <filename>/etc/samba/smb.conf</filename> changing:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:1146(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"   workgroup = EXAMPLE\n"
"   ...\n"
"   security = ads\n"
"   realm = EXAMPLE.COM\n"
"   ...\n"
"   idmap backend = lwopen\n"
"   idmap uid = 50-9999999999\n"
"   idmap gid = 50-9999999999\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:1157(para)
msgid ""
"Restart <application>samba</application> for the new settings to take effect:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:1165(para)
msgid ""
"You should now be able to access any <application>Samba</application> shares "
"from a Windows client. However, be sure to give the appropriate AD users or "
"groups access to the share directory. See <xref linkend=\"samba-fileprint-"
"security\"/> for more details."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:1173(title)
msgid "Accessing a Windows Share"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:1175(para)
msgid ""
"Now that the Samba server is part of the Active Directory domain you can "
"access any Windows server shares:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:1182(para)
msgid ""
"To mount a Windows file share enter the following in a terminal prompt:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:1186(command)
msgid "mount.cifs //fs01.example.com/share mount_point"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:1189(para)
msgid ""
"It is also possible to access shares on computers not part of an AD domain, "
"but a username and password will need to be provided."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:1197(para)
msgid ""
"To mount the share during boot place an entry in "
"<filename>/etc/fstab</filename>, for example:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:1201(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"//192.168.0.5/share /mnt/windows cifs auto,username=steve,password=secret,rw "
"0        0\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:1208(para)
msgid ""
"Another way to copy files from a Windows server is to use the "
"<application>smbclient</application> utility. To list the files in a Windows "
"share:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:1214(command)
msgid "smbclient //fs01.example.com/share -k -c \"ls\""
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:1220(para)
msgid "To copy a file from the share, enter:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:1225(command)
msgid "smbclient //fs01.example.com/share -k -c \"get file.txt\""
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:1228(para)
msgid ""
"This will copy the <filename>file.txt</filename> into the current directory."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:1235(para)
msgid "And to copy a file to the share:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:1240(command)
msgid "smbclient //fs01.example.com/share -k -c \"put /etc/hosts hosts\""
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:1243(para)
msgid ""
"This will copy the <filename>/etc/hosts</filename> to "
"<filename>//fs01.example.com/share/hosts</filename>."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:1250(para)
msgid ""
"The <emphasis>-c</emphasis> option used above allows you to execute the "
"<application>smbclient</application> command all at once. This is useful for "
"scripting and minor file operations. To enter the <emphasis>smb: \\"
"&gt;</emphasis> prompt, a FTP like prompt where you can execute normal file "
"and directory commands, simply execute:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:1257(command)
msgid "smbclient //fs01.example.com/share -k"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:1264(para)
msgid ""
"Replace all instances of <emphasis>fs01.example.com/share</emphasis>, "
"<emphasis>//192.168.0.5/share</emphasis>, "
"<emphasis>username=steve,password=secret</emphasis>, and "
"<emphasis>file.txt</emphasis> with your server's IP, hostname, share name, "
"file name, and an actual username and password with rights to the share."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:1275(para)
msgid ""
"For more <application>smbclient</application> options see the man page: "
"<command>man smbclient</command>, also available <ulink "
"url=\"http://manpages.ubuntu.com/manpages/lucid/en/man1/smbclient.1.html\">on"
"line</ulink>."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:1280(para)
msgid ""
"The <application>mount.cifs</application><ulink "
"url=\"http://manpages.ubuntu.com/manpages/lucid/en/man8/mount.cifs.8.html\">m"
"an page</ulink> is also useful for more detailed information."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:1293(title)
msgid "Likewise Open"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:1295(para)
msgid ""
"<application>Likewise Open</application> simplifies the necessary "
"configuration needed to authenticate a Linux machine to an Active Directory "
"domain. Based on <application>winbind</application>, the "
"<application>likewise-open</application> package takes the pain out of "
"integrating Ubuntu authentication into an existing Windows network."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:1304(para)
msgid ""
"There are two ways to use Likewise Open, <application>likewise-"
"open</application> the command line utility and <application>likewise-open-"
"gui</application>. This section focuses on the command line utility."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:1309(para)
msgid ""
"To install the <application>likewise-open</application> package, open a "
"terminal prompt and enter:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:1314(command)
msgid "sudo apt-get install likewise-open"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:1319(title)
msgid "Joining a Domain"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:1321(para)
msgid ""
"The main executable file of the <application>likewise-open</application> "
"package is <filename>/usr/bin/domainjoin-cli</filename>, which is used to "
"join your computer to the domain. Before you join a domain you will need to "
"make sure you have:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:1329(para)
msgid ""
"Access to an Active Directory user with appropriate rights to join the "
"domain."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:1334(para)
msgid ""
"The <emphasis>Fully Qualified Domain Name</emphasis> (FQDN) of the domain "
"you want to join. If your AD domain does not match a valid domain such as "
"<emphasis role=\"italic\">example.com</emphasis>, it is likely that it has "
"the form of <emphasis>domainname.local</emphasis>."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:1341(para)
msgid ""
"DNS for the domain setup properly. In a production AD environment this "
"should be the case. Proper Microsoft DNS is needed so that client "
"workstations can determine the Active Directory domain is available."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:1345(para)
msgid ""
"If you don't have a Windows DNS server on your network, see <xref "
"linkend=\"likewise-open-ms-dns\"/> for details."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:1352(para)
msgid "To join a domain, from a terminal prompt enter:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:1357(command)
msgid "sudo domainjoin-cli join example.com Administrator"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:1361(para)
msgid ""
"Replace <emphasis>example.com</emphasis> with your domain name, and "
"<emphasis>Administrator</emphasis> with the appropriate user name."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:1367(para)
msgid ""
"You will then be prompted for the user's password. If all goes well a "
"<emphasis>SUCCESS</emphasis> message should be printed to the console."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:1373(para)
msgid ""
"After joining the domain, it is necessary to reboot before attempting to "
"authenticate against the domain."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:1379(para)
msgid ""
"After successfully joining an Ubuntu machine to an Active Directory domain "
"you can authenticate using any valid AD user. To login you will need to "
"enter the user name as 'domain\\username'. For example to ssh to a server "
"joined to the domain enter:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:1386(command)
msgid "ssh 'example\\steve'@hostname"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:1390(para)
msgid ""
"If configuring a Desktop the user name will need to be prefixed with "
"<emphasis role=\"italic\">domain\\</emphasis> in the graphical logon as well."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:1396(para)
msgid ""
"To make likewise-open use a default domain, you can add the following "
"statement to <filename>/etc/samba/lwiauthd.conf</filename>:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:1400(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"winbind use default domain = yes\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:1404(para)
msgid "Then restart the <application>likewise-open</application> daemons:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:1409(command)
msgid "sudo /etc/init.d/likewise-open restart"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:1413(para)
msgid ""
"Once configured for a <emphasis>default domain</emphasis> the <emphasis "
"role=\"italic\">'domain\\'</emphasis> is no longer required, users can login "
"using only their username."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:1419(para)
msgid ""
"The <application>domainjoin-cli</application> utility can also be used to "
"leave the domain. From a terminal:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:1424(command)
msgid "sudo domainjoin-cli leave"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:1429(title) serverguide/C/security.xml:1777(title)
msgid "Other Utilities"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:1431(para)
msgid ""
"The <application>likewise-open</application> package comes with a few other "
"utilities that may be useful for gathering information about the Active "
"Directory environment. These utilities are used to join the machine to the "
"domain, and are the same as those available in the <application>samba-"
"common</application> and <application>winbind</application> packages:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:1440(para)
msgid ""
"<application>lwinet</application>: Returns information about the network and "
"the domain."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:1445(para)
msgid ""
"<application>lwimsg</application>: Allows interaction with the "
"<application>likewise-winbindd</application> daemon."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:1450(para)
msgid ""
"<application>lwiinfo</application>: Displays information about various parts "
"of the Domain."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:1456(para)
msgid "Please refer to each utility's man page specific for details."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:1462(title) serverguide/C/mail.xml:351(title) serverguide/C/mail.xml:1598(title) serverguide/C/dns.xml:338(title)
msgid "Troubleshooting"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:1466(para)
msgid ""
"If the client has trouble joining the domain, double check that the "
"Microsoft DNS is listed first in <filename>/etc/resolv.conf</filename>. For "
"example:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:1471(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"nameserver 192.168.0.1\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:1476(para)
msgid ""
"For more information when joining a domain, use the <emphasis>--loglevel "
"verbose</emphasis> or <emphasis>--advanced</emphasis> option of the "
"<application>domainjoin-cli</application> utility:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:1482(command)
msgid "sudo domainjoin-cli --loglevel verbose join example.com Administrator"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:1486(para)
msgid ""
"If an Active Directory user has trouble logging in, check the "
"<filename>/var/log/auth.log</filename> for details."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:1491(para)
msgid ""
"When joining an Ubuntu Desktop workstation to a domain, you may need to edit "
"<filename>/etc/nsswitch.conf</filename> if your AD domain uses the <emphasis "
"role=\"italic\">.local</emphasis> syntax. In order to join the domain the "
"<emphasis>\"mdns4\"</emphasis> entry should be removed from the "
"<emphasis>hosts</emphasis> option. For example:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:1497(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"hosts: files mdns4_minimal [NOTFOUND=return] dns mdns4\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:1501(para)
msgid "Change the above to:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:1505(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"hosts: files dns [NOTFOUND=return]\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:1509(para)
msgid "Then restart networking by entering:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:1514(command) serverguide/C/network-config.xml:559(command)
msgid "sudo /etc/init.d/networking restart"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:1517(para)
msgid "You should now be able to join the Active Directory domain."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:1525(title)
msgid "Microsoft DNS"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:1527(para)
msgid ""
"The following are instructions for installing DNS on an Active Directory "
"domain controller running Windows Server 2003, but the instructions should "
"be similar for other versions:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:1536(para)
msgid ""
"Click "
"<menuchoice><guimenuitem>Start</guimenuitem><guimenuitem>Administrative Tools"
"</guimenuitem><guimenuitem>Manage Your Server</guimenuitem></menuchoice>. "
"This will open the <application>Server Role Mangement</application> utility."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:1544(para)
msgid "Click <guilabel>Add or remove a role</guilabel>"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:1545(para) serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:1547(para) serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:1550(para)
msgid "Click Next"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:1546(para)
msgid "Select \"DNS Server\""
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:1548(para)
msgid "Click Next again to proceed"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:1549(para)
msgid "Select \"Create a forward lookup zone\" if it is not selected."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:1551(para)
msgid ""
"Make sure \"This server maintains the zone\" is selected and click Next."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:1552(para)
msgid "Enter your domain name and click Next"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:1553(para)
msgid "Click Next to \"Allow only secure dynamic updates\""
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:1555(para)
msgid ""
"Enter the IP for DNS servers to forward queries to, or Select \"No, it "
"should not forward queries\" and click Next."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:1559(para) serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:1560(para)
msgid "Click Finish"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:1562(para)
msgid ""
"DNS is now installed and can be further configured using the "
"<application>Microsoft Management Console</application> DNS snap-in."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:1570(para)
msgid "Click Start"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:1571(para)
msgid "Control Panel"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:1572(para)
msgid "Network Connections"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:1573(para)
msgid "Right Click \"Local Area Connection\""
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:1574(para)
msgid "Click Properties"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:1575(para)
msgid "Double click \"Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)\""
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:1576(para)
msgid "Enter the Server's IP Address as the \"Preferred DNS server\""
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:1577(para)
msgid "Click Ok"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:1578(para)
msgid "Click Ok again to save the settings"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:1567(para)
msgid ""
"Next, configure the Server to use itself for DNS queries: <placeholder-1/>"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:1585(title) serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:624(title) serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:772(title) serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:922(title) serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:1017(title) serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:1239(title) serverguide/C/vpn.xml:303(title) serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1840(title) serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:2165(title) serverguide/C/vcs.xml:539(title) serverguide/C/security.xml:877(title) serverguide/C/security.xml:1211(title) serverguide/C/security.xml:1626(title) serverguide/C/security.xml:1817(title) serverguide/C/remote-administration.xml:203(title) serverguide/C/package-management.xml:454(title) serverguide/C/other-apps.xml:330(title) serverguide/C/network-config.xml:1006(title) serverguide/C/network-config.xml:1107(title) serverguide/C/monitoring.xml:391(title) serverguide/C/monitoring.xml:527(title) serverguide/C/mail.xml:459(title) serverguide/C/mail.xml:643(title) serverguide/C/mail.xml:795(title) serverguide/C/mail.xml:1217(title) serverguide/C/mail.xml:1646(title) serverguide/C/lamp-applications.xml:259(title) serverguide/C/lamp-applications.xml:388(title) serverguide/C/lamp-applications.xml:496(title) serverguide/C/file-server.xml:284(title) serverguide/C/file-server.xml:436(title) serverguide/C/file-server.xml:619(title) serverguide/C/dns.xml:572(title) serverguide/C/clustering.xml:234(title) serverguide/C/chat.xml:107(title) serverguide/C/chat.xml:221(title) serverguide/C/backups.xml:297(title)
msgid "References"
msgstr "참조"

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:1587(para)
msgid ""
"Please refer to the <ulink "
"url=\"http://www.likewisesoftware.com/\">Likewise</ulink> home page for "
"further information."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:1591(para)
msgid ""
"For more <application>domainjoin-cli</application> options see the man page: "
"<command>man domainjoin-cli</command>."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/windows-networking.xml:1595(para)
msgid ""
"Also, see the <ulink "
"url=\"https://help.ubuntu.com/community/LikewiseOpen\">Ubuntu Wiki "
"LikewiseOpen</ulink> page."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:13(title)
msgid "Web Servers"
msgstr "웹 서버"

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:14(para)
msgid ""
"A Web server is a software responsible for accepting HTTP requests from "
"clients, which are known as Web browsers, and serving them HTTP responses "
"along with optional data contents, which usually are Web pages such as HTML "
"documents and linked objects (images, etc.)."
msgstr ""
"웹 서버는 웹 브라우저라고 알려진 클라이언트로부터 HTTP 요청을 받아서, 보통 HTML 문서와 링크된 객체(이미지 등)와 같은 웹 "
"페이지의 형태의 데이터와 함께 HTTP 응답을 제공하는 소프트웨어를 말합니다."

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:19(title)
msgid "HTTPD - Apache2 Web Server"
msgstr "HTTPD - 아파치2 웹 서버"

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:20(para)
msgid ""
"Apache is the most commonly used Web Server on Linux systems. Web Servers "
"are used to serve Web Pages requested by client computers. Clients typically "
"request and view Web Pages using Web Browser applications such as "
"<application>Firefox</application>, <application>Opera</application>, or "
"<application>Mozilla</application>."
msgstr ""
"아파치(Apache)는 리눅스 시스템에서 가장 대중적으로 사용되는 웹 서버입니다. 웹 서버는 클라이언트 컴퓨터에서 요청한 웹 페이지들을 "
"제공하는 데 사용됩니다. 클라이언트는 대개 <application>Firefox</application>, "
"<application>Opera</application>, <application>Mozilla</application>와 같은 웹 "
"브라우저 프로그램을 통해 웹 페이지를 요청하여 보게 됩니다."

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:24(para)
msgid ""
"Users enter a Uniform Resource Locator (URL) to point to a Web server by "
"means of its Fully Qualified Domain Name (FQDN) and a path to the required "
"resource. For example, to view the home page of the <ulink "
"url=\"http://www.ubuntu.com\">Ubuntu Web site</ulink> a user will enter only "
"the FQDN. To request specific information about <ulink "
"url=\"http://www.ubuntu.com/support/paid\">paid support</ulink>, a user will "
"enter the FQDN followed by a path."
msgstr ""
"사용자는 웹 서버를 지정하기 위해 Fully Qualified Domain Name (FQDN)과 요청한 자원의 경로를 이용하여 "
"Uniform Resource Locator (URL)을  입력합니다. 예를 들어 <ulink "
"url=\"http://www.ubuntu.com\">우분투 웹사이트</ulink>의 홈페이지를 보고 싶다면 오직 FQDN 만을 입력할 "
"것입니다. <ulink url=\"http://www.ubuntu.com/support/paid\">상업적 기술 지원</ulink>과 "
"관련된 정보를 요청하려면 사용자는 FQDN에 경로를 덧붙여 입력할 것입니다."

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:29(para)
msgid ""
"The most common protocol used to transfer Web pages is the Hyper Text "
"Transfer Protocol (HTTP). Protocols such as Hyper Text Transfer Protocol "
"over Secure Sockets Layer (HTTPS), and File Transfer Protocol (FTP), a "
"protocol for uploading and downloading files, are also supported."
msgstr ""
"웹 페이지를 전송하기 위하여 사용되는 가장 일반적인 프로토콜은 Hyper Text Transfer Protocol (HTTP) 입니다. "
"Secure Sockets Layer 상의 Hyper Text Transfer Protocol (HTTPS) 와 파일을 업로드 또는 "
"다운로드 하기 위한 File Transfer Protocol (FTP) 같은 프로토콜들도 또한 지원 됩니다."

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:33(para)
msgid ""
"Apache Web Servers are often used in combination with the "
"<application>MySQL</application> database engine, the HyperText Preprocessor "
"(<application>PHP</application>) scripting language, and other popular "
"scripting languages such as <application>Python</application> and "
"<application>Perl</application>. This configuration is termed LAMP (Linux, "
"Apache, MySQL and Perl/Python/PHP) and forms a powerful and robust platform "
"for the development and deployment of Web-based applications."
msgstr ""
"아파치 웹 서버는 <application>MySQL</application> 데이타베이스 엔진, HyperText Preprocessor "
"(<application>PHP</application>) 스크립트 언어, 그리고 "
"<application>Python</application>과 <application>Perl</application>과 같은 다른 "
"인기있는 스크립트 언어들과 함께 종종 사용되어 집니다. 이런 설정을 LAMP (Linux, Apache, MySQL 과 "
"Perl/Python/PHP)라 명명하고, 이것은 웹 기반의 프로그램을 개발하고 이행하기 위한 강력하고 튼튼한 플랫폼을 구성 합니다."

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:42(para)
msgid ""
"The <application>Apache2</application> web server is available in Ubuntu "
"Linux. To install Apache2:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:48(para)
msgid "At a terminal prompt enter the following command:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:53(command)
msgid "sudo apt-get install apache2"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:63(para)
msgid ""
"Apache2 is configured by placing <emphasis>directives</emphasis> in plain "
"text configuration files. These <emphasis>directives</emphasis> are "
"separated between the following files and directories:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:71(para)
msgid ""
"<emphasis>apache2.conf:</emphasis> the main Apache2 configuration file. "
"Contains settings that are <emphasis>global</emphasis> to Apache2."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:77(para)
msgid ""
"<emphasis>conf.d:</emphasis> contains configuration files which apply "
"<emphasis>globally</emphasis> to Apache2. Other packages that use Apache2 to "
"serve content may add files, or symlinks, to this directory."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:83(para)
msgid ""
"<emphasis>envvars:</emphasis> file where Apache2 "
"<emphasis>environment</emphasis> variables are set."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:88(para)
msgid ""
"<emphasis>httpd.conf:</emphasis> historically the main Apache2 configuration "
"file, named after the <application>httpd</application> daemon. The file can "
"be used for <emphasis>user specific</emphasis> configuration options that "
"globally effect Apache2."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:95(para)
msgid ""
"<emphasis>mods-available:</emphasis> this directory contains configuration "
"files to both load <emphasis>modules</emphasis> and configure them. Not all "
"modules will have specific configuration files, however."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:101(para)
msgid ""
"<emphasis>mods-enabled:</emphasis> holds <emphasis>symlinks</emphasis> to "
"the files in <filename>/etc/apache2/mods-available</filename>. When a module "
"configuration file is symlinked it will be enabled the next time "
"<application>apache2</application> is restarted."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:108(para)
msgid ""
"<emphasis>ports.conf:</emphasis> houses the directives that determine which "
"TCP ports Apache2 is listening on."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:113(para)
msgid ""
"<emphasis>sites-available:</emphasis> this directory has configuration files "
"for Apache2 <emphasis>Virtual Hosts</emphasis>. Virtual Hosts allow Apache2 "
"to be configured for multiple sites that have separate configurations."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:119(para)
msgid ""
"<emphasis>sites-enabled:</emphasis> like mods-enabled, <filename "
"role=\"directory\">sites-enabled</filename> contains symlinks to the "
"<filename>/etc/apache2/sites-available</filename> directory. Similarly when "
"a configuration file in sites-available is symlinked, the site configured by "
"it will be active once Apache2 is restarted."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:127(para)
msgid ""
"In addition, other configuration files may be added using the "
"<emphasis>Include</emphasis> directive, and wildcards can be used to include "
"many configuration files. Any directive may be placed in any of these "
"configuration files. Changes to the main configuration files are only "
"recognized by Apache2 when it is started or restarted."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:136(para)
msgid ""
"The server also reads a file containing mime document types; the filename is "
"set by the <emphasis>TypesConfig</emphasis> directive, and is "
"<filename>/etc/mime.types</filename> by default."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:141(title)
msgid "Basic Settings"
msgstr "기본적인 설정"

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:142(para)
msgid ""
"This section explains Apache2 server essential configuration parameters. "
"Refer to the <ulink url=\"http://httpd.apache.org/docs/2.2/\">Apache2 "
"Documentation</ulink> for more details."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:150(para)
msgid ""
"Apache2 ships with a virtual-host-friendly default configuration. That is, "
"it is configured with a single default virtual host (using the "
"<emphasis>VirtualHost</emphasis> directive) which can modified or used as-is "
"if you have a single site, or used as a template for additional virtual "
"hosts if you have multiple sites. If left alone, the default virtual host "
"will serve as your default site, or the site users will see if the URL they "
"enter does not match the <emphasis>ServerName</emphasis> directive of any of "
"your custom sites. To modify the default virtual host, edit the file "
"<filename>/etc/apache2/sites-available/default</filename>."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:163(para)
msgid ""
"The directives set for a virtual host only apply to that particular virtual "
"host. If a directive is set server-wide and not defined within the virtual "
"host settings, the default setting is used. For example, you can define a "
"Webmaster email address and not define individual email addresses for each "
"virtual host."
msgstr ""
"하나의 가상 호스트를 위한 지시자의 집합은 그 특정 가상 호스트에만 적용이 됩니다. 만약 서버 전체로 지시자가 지정이 되고 가상 호스트 "
"설정 내에 정의가 안되었다면, 기본 설정 값이 사용 됩니다. 예를 들어, 웹마스터 이메일 주소를 지정할 수 있고 각각의 가상 호스트를 "
"위한 개별적인 이메일 주소를 설정하지 않을 수도 있습니다."

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:171(para)
msgid ""
"If you wish to configure a new virtual host or site, copy that file into the "
"same directory with a name you choose. For example:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:177(command)
msgid ""
"sudo cp /etc/apache2/sites-available/default /etc/apache2/sites-"
"available/mynewsite"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:180(para)
msgid ""
"Edit the new file to configure the new site using some of the directives "
"described below."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:187(para)
msgid ""
"The <emphasis>ServerAdmin</emphasis> directive specifies the email address "
"to be advertised for the server's administrator. The default value is "
"webmaster@localhost. This should be changed to an email address that is "
"delivered to you (if you are the server's administrator). If your website "
"has a problem, Apache2 will display an error message containing this email "
"address to report the problem to. Find this directive in your site's "
"configuration file in /etc/apache2/sites-available."
msgstr ""
"<emphasis>ServerAdmin</emphasis> 지시자는 서버의 시스템 관리자를 위한 이메일 주소를 광고하기 위하여 지정 "
"합니다. 기본 설정값은 webmaster@localhost 입니다. 이것은, 만약 여러분이 그 서버의 시스템 관리자라면, 여러분에게로 "
"배달될 수 있는 이메일 주소로 변경되어야 합니다. 만약 여러분의 웹 사이트가 문제를 가지고 있다면, 아파치2는 그 문제를 보고하기 위하여 "
"이 이메일 주소를 가지는 에러 메세지를 보여줍니다. /etc/apache2/sites-available 내의 사이트 설정 파일에서 이 "
"지시자를 찾으십시오."

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:198(para)
msgid ""
"The <emphasis>Listen</emphasis> directive specifies the port, and optionally "
"the IP address, Apache2 should listen on. If the IP address is not "
"specified, Apache2 will listen on all IP addresses assigned to the machine "
"it runs on. The default value for the Listen directive is 80. Change this to "
"127.0.0.1:80 to cause Apache2 to listen only on your loopback interface so "
"that it will not be available to the Internet, to (for example) 81 to change "
"the port that it listens on, or leave it as is for normal operation. This "
"directive can be found and changed in its own file, "
"<filename>/etc/apache2/ports.conf</filename>"
msgstr ""
"<emphasis>Listen</emphasis> 지시자는 아파치2가 들어야하는, 포트, 그리고 선택 사항으로 IP 주소를 지정 합니다. "
"만약 IP 주소가 지정되지 않았다면, 아파치2는 서버가 실행되는 기계에 지정된 모든 IP 주소를 듣습니다. Listen 지시자를 위한 "
"기본 설정값은 80 입니다. 오직 여러분의 루프백 인터페이스를 듣게하기 위하여 이것을 127.0.0.1:80으로 변경하고 그러면 서버는 "
"인터넷으로는 사용할 수 없고, 듣고자 하는 포트를 변경하기 위하여 (예를 들어) 81로 지정할 수도 있고, 또는 보통의 동작을 위하여 "
"있는 그대로 나두기도 합니다. 이 지시자를 위한 <filename>/etc/apache2/ports.conf</filename> 파일에서 "
"지시자를  찾고 변경할 수 있습니다."

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:211(para)
msgid ""
"The <emphasis>ServerName</emphasis> directive is optional and specifies what "
"FQDN your site should answer to. The default virtual host has no ServerName "
"directive specified, so it will respond to all requests that do not match a "
"ServerName directive in another virtual host. If you have just acquired the "
"domain name ubunturocks.com and wish to host it on your Ubuntu server, the "
"value of the ServerName directive in your virtual host configuration file "
"should be ubunturocks.com. Add this directive to the new virtual host file "
"you created earlier (<filename>/etc/apache2/sites-"
"available/mynewsite</filename>)."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:223(para)
msgid ""
"You may also want your site to respond to www.ubunturocks.com, since many "
"users will assume the www prefix is appropriate. Use the "
"<emphasis>ServerAlias</emphasis> directive for this. You may also use "
"wildcards in the ServerAlias directive."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:230(para)
msgid ""
"For example, the following configuration will cause your site to respond to "
"any domain request ending in <emphasis>.ubunturocks.com</emphasis>."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:236(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"ServerAlias *.ubunturocks.com\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:242(para)
msgid ""
"The <emphasis>DocumentRoot</emphasis> directive specifies where Apache2 "
"should look for the files that make up the site. The default value is "
"/var/www. No site is configured there, but if you uncomment the "
"<emphasis>RedirectMatch</emphasis> directive in "
"<filename>/etc/apache2/apache2.conf</filename> requests will be redirected "
"to /var/www/apache2-default where the default Apache2 site awaits. Change "
"this value in your site's virtual host file, and remember to create that "
"directory if necessary!"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:254(para)
msgid ""
"The /etc/apache2/sites-available directory is <emphasis role=\"bold\"> "
"not</emphasis> parsed by Apache2. Symbolic links in /etc/apache2/sites-"
"enabled point to \"available\" sites."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:260(para)
msgid ""
"Enable the new <emphasis>VirtualHost</emphasis> using the "
"<application>a2ensite</application> utility and restart Apache2:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:266(command)
msgid "sudo a2ensite mynewsite"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:267(command) serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:285(command) serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:538(command) serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:547(command) serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:606(command) serverguide/C/mail.xml:932(command) serverguide/C/lamp-applications.xml:228(command)
msgid "sudo /etc/init.d/apache2 restart"
msgstr "sudo /etc/init.d/apache2 restart"

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:271(para)
msgid ""
"Be sure to replace <emphasis>mynewsite</emphasis> with a more descriptive "
"name for the VirtualHost. One method is to name the file after the "
"<emphasis>ServerName</emphasis> directive of the VirtualHost."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:278(para)
msgid ""
"Similarly, use the <application>a2dissite</application> utility to disable "
"sites. This is can be useful when troubleshooting configuration problems "
"with multiple VirtualHosts:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:284(command)
msgid "sudo a2dissite mynewsite"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:290(title)
msgid "Default Settings"
msgstr "기본 설정"

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:292(para)
msgid ""
"This section explains configuration of the Apache2 server default settings. "
"For example, if you add a virtual host, the settings you configure for the "
"virtual host take precedence for that virtual host. For a directive not "
"defined within the virtual host settings, the default value is used."
msgstr ""
"이 부분은 아파치2의 기본 설정을 설명합니다. 예를 들어, 가상호스트를 추가할 경우 그 가상호스트에서는 그 호스트를 위해 설정한 값이 "
"우선순위를 가집니다. 가상호스트를 위해 설정한 값이 없을 때 기본값을 사용합니다."

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:304(para)
msgid ""
"The <emphasis>DirectoryIndex</emphasis> is the default page served by the "
"server when a user requests an index of a directory by specifying a forward "
"slash (/) at the end of the directory name."
msgstr ""
"<emphasis>DirectoryIndex</emphasis>는 사용자가 디렉토리명 끝에 /(슬래시)를 지정하여 디렉토리의 목록을 "
"보고자 할 때 서버에서 기본으로 제공하는 페이지를 지정합니다."

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:311(para)
msgid ""
"For example, when a user requests the page "
"http://www.example.com/this_directory/, he or she will get either the "
"DirectoryIndex page if it exists, a server-generated directory list if it "
"does not and the Indexes option is specified, or a Permission Denied page if "
"neither is true. The server will try to find one of the files listed in the "
"DirectoryIndex directive and will return the first one it finds. If it does "
"not find any of these files and if <emphasis>Options Indexes</emphasis> is "
"set for that directory, the server will generate and return a list, in HTML "
"format, of the subdirectories and files in the directory. The default value, "
"found in <filename>/etc/apache2/mods-available/dir.conf</filename> is "
"\"index.html index.cgi index.pl index.php index.xhtml index.htm\". Thus, if "
"Apache2 finds a file in a requested directory matching any of these names, "
"the first will be displayed."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:332(para)
msgid ""
"The <emphasis>ErrorDocument</emphasis> directive allows you to specify a "
"file for Apache2 to use for specific error events. For example, if a user "
"requests a resource that does not exist, a 404 error will occur, and per "
"Apache2's default configuration, the file "
"<filename>/usr/share/apache2/error/HTTP_NOT_FOUND.html.var </filename> will "
"be displayed. That file is not in the server's DocumentRoot, but there is an "
"Alias directive in <filename>/etc/apache2/apache2.conf</filename> that "
"redirects requests to the /error directory to "
"<filename>/usr/share/apache2/error/</filename>."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:344(para)
msgid ""
"To see a list of the default ErrorDocument directives, use this command:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:350(command)
msgid "grep ErrorDocument /etc/apache2/apache2.conf"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:355(para)
msgid ""
"By default, the server writes the transfer log to the file "
"<filename>/var/log/apache2/access.log</filename>. You can change this on a "
"per-site basis in your virtual host configuration files with the "
"<emphasis>CustomLog</emphasis> directive, or omit it to accept the default, "
"specified in <filename> /etc/apache2/apache2.conf</filename>. You may also "
"specify the file to which errors are logged, via the "
"<emphasis>ErrorLog</emphasis> directive, whose default is "
"<filename>/var/log/apache2/error.log</filename>. These are kept separate "
"from the transfer logs to aid in troubleshooting problems with your Apache2 "
"server. You may also specify the <emphasis>LogLevel</emphasis> (the default "
"value is \"warn\") and the <emphasis>LogFormat</emphasis> (see <filename> "
"/etc/apache2/apache2.conf</filename> for the default value)."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:370(para)
msgid ""
"Some options are specified on a per-directory basis rather than per-server. "
"<emphasis>Options</emphasis> is one of these directives. A Directory stanza "
"is enclosed in XML-like tags, like so:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:376(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"&lt;Directory /var/www/mynewsite&gt;\n"
"...\n"
"&lt;/Directory&gt;\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:382(para)
msgid ""
"The <emphasis>Options</emphasis> directive within a Directory stanza accepts "
"one or more of the following values (among others), separated by spaces:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:394(para)
msgid ""
"Most files should not be executed as CGI scripts. This would be very "
"dangerous. CGI scripts should kept in a directory separate from and outside "
"your DocumentRoot, and only this directory should have the ExecCGI option "
"set. This is the default, and the default location for CGI scripts is "
"<filename>/usr/lib/cgi-bin</filename>."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:389(para)
msgid ""
"<emphasis role=\"bold\">ExecCGI</emphasis> - Allow execution of CGI scripts. "
"CGI scripts are not executed if this option is not chosen. <placeholder-1/>"
msgstr ""
"<emphasis role=\"bold\">ExecCGI</emphasis> - CGI 스크립트의 실행을 허용 합니다. 만약 이 "
"선택사항이 선택되지 않았다면 CGI 스크립트는 수행될 수 없습니다. <placeholder-1/>"

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:405(para)
msgid ""
"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Includes</emphasis> - Allow server-side includes. "
"Server-side includes allow an HTML file to <emphasis> include</emphasis> "
"other files. This is not a common option. See <ulink "
"url=\"http://httpd.apache.org/docs/2.2/howto/ssi.html\">the Apache2 SSI "
"HOWTO</ulink> for more information."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:414(para)
msgid ""
"<emphasis role=\"bold\">IncludesNOEXEC</emphasis> - Allow server-side "
"includes, but disable the <emphasis>#exec</emphasis> and "
"<emphasis>#include</emphasis> commands in CGI scripts."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:426(para)
msgid ""
"For security reasons, this should usually not be set, and certainly should "
"not be set on your DocumentRoot directory. Enable this option carefully on a "
"per-directory basis only if you are certain you want users to see the entire "
"contents of the directory."
msgstr ""
"보안상의 이유로, 이것은 보통 지정이 되지 않고, DocumentRoot 디렉토리에는 분명히 지정하지 않습니다. 만약 여러분이 사용자가 "
"디렉토리의 전체 내용물을 보는 것을 분명히 원한다면 디렉토리 당 이 선택 사항을 주의깊게 사용 하십시오."

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:421(para)
msgid ""
"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Indexes</emphasis> - Display a formatted list of the "
"directory's contents, if no <emphasis>DirectoryIndex</emphasis> (such as "
"index.html) exists in the requested directory. <placeholder-1/>"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:436(para)
msgid ""
"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Multiview</emphasis> - Support content-negotiated "
"multiviews; this option is disabled by default for security reasons. See the "
"<ulink "
"url=\"http://httpd.apache.org/docs/2.2/mod/mod_negotiation.html#multiviews\">"
"Apache2 documentation on this option</ulink>."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:444(para)
msgid ""
"<emphasis role=\"bold\">SymLinksIfOwnerMatch</emphasis> - Only follow "
"symbolic links if the target file or directory has the same owner as the "
"link."
msgstr ""
"<emphasis role=\"bold\">SymLinksIfOwnerMatch</emphasis> - 만약 타켓 파일 또는 디렉토리가 "
"링크와 같은 소유자를 가졌다면 오직 심볼릭 링크를 따릅니다."

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:456(title)
msgid "httpd Settings"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:458(para)
msgid ""
"This section explains some basic <application>httpd</application> daemon "
"configuration settings."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:462(para)
msgid ""
"<emphasis role=\"bold\">LockFile</emphasis> - The LockFile directive sets "
"the path to the lockfile used when the server is compiled with either "
"USE_FCNTL_SERIALIZED_ACCEPT or USE_FLOCK_SERIALIZED_ACCEPT. It must be "
"stored on the local disk. It should be left to the default value unless the "
"logs directory is located on an NFS share. If this is the case, the default "
"value should be changed to a location on the local disk and to a directory "
"that is readable only by root."
msgstr ""
"<emphasis role=\"bold\">LockFile</emphasis> - LockFile 지시자는 서버가 "
"USE_FCNTL_SERIALIZED_ACCEPT 또는 USE_FLOCK_SERIALIZED_ACCEPT 중의 하나로 컴파일 되었을 때 "
"사용되는 lockfile의 경로를 지정 합니다. 그것은 반드시 로컬 디스크에 저장되어야 합니다. NFS 공유 상에 로그 디렉토리가 "
"위치하지 않는 한 기본 설정된 값으로 나두십시오. 이 경우라면, 오직 root에 의해서만 읽을 수 있는 디렉토리로 로컬 디스크 상의 "
"위치를 기본 설정 값으로 변경 합니다."

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:471(para)
msgid ""
"<emphasis role=\"bold\">PidFile</emphasis> - The PidFile directive sets the "
"file in which the server records its process ID (pid). This file should only "
"be readable by root. In most cases, it should be left to the default value."
msgstr ""
"<emphasis role=\"bold\">PidFile</emphasis> - PidFile 지시자는 서버가 프로세스 ID (pid)를 "
"기록하는 파일을 지정 합니다. 이 파일은 반드시 root에 의해서만 읽혀질 수 있어야 합니다. 많은 경우에, 이 지시자는 기본 설정값으로 "
"남겨져야 합니다."

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:477(para)
msgid ""
"<emphasis role=\"bold\">User</emphasis> - The User directive sets the userid "
"used by the server to answer requests. This setting determines the server's "
"access. Any files inaccessible to this user will also be inaccessible to "
"your website's visitors. The default value for User is www-data."
msgstr ""
"<emphasis role=\"bold\">User</emphasis> - User 지시자는 요청을 대답하기 위하여 서버에 의해 사용되는 "
"사용자 아이디를 지정 합니다. 이 설정은 서버의 접근을 결정 합니다. 이 사용자가 접근할 수 없는 파일은 또한 여러분의 웹 사이트 "
"방문자도 접근할 수 없습니다. User를 위하여 기본 설정된 값은 www-data 입니다."

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:484(para)
msgid ""
"Unless you know exactly what you are doing, do not set the User directive to "
"root. Using root as the User will create large security holes for your Web "
"server."
msgstr ""
"여러분이 하는 것을 정확히 알지 않는 한, User 지시자를 root로 지정하지 마십시오. User로 root를 사용하는 여러분의 웹 "
"서버에 거대한 보안 구멍을 만들게 됩니다."

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:490(para)
msgid ""
"The Group directive is similar to the User directive. Group sets the group "
"under which the server will answer requests. The default group is also www-"
"data."
msgstr ""
"Group 지시자는 User 지시자와 비슷합니다. Group은 서버가 요청을 대답하는 그룹을 지정 합니다. 기본 설정된 그룹은 또한 "
"www-data 입니다."

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:496(title)
msgid "Apache2 Modules"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:498(para)
msgid ""
"Apache2 is a modular server. This implies that only the most basic "
"functionality is included in the core server. Extended features are "
"available through modules which can be loaded into Apache2. By default, a "
"base set of modules is included in the server at compile-time. If the server "
"is compiled to use dynamically loaded modules, then modules can be compiled "
"separately, and added at any time using the LoadModule directive. Otherwise, "
"Apache2 must be recompiled to add or remove modules."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:510(para)
msgid ""
"Ubuntu compiles Apache2 to allow the dynamic loading of modules. "
"Configuration directives may be conditionally included on the presence of a "
"particular module by enclosing them in an "
"<emphasis>&lt;IfModule&gt;</emphasis> block."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:517(para)
msgid ""
"You can install additional Apache2 modules and use them with your Web "
"server. For example, run the following command from a terminal prompt to "
"install the <emphasis>MySQL Authentication</emphasis> module:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:524(command)
msgid "sudo apt-get install libapache2-mod-auth-mysql"
msgstr "sudo apt-get install libapache2-mod-auth-mysql"

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:527(para)
msgid ""
"See the <filename>/etc/apache2/mods-available</filename> directory, for "
"additional modules."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:531(para)
msgid ""
"Use the <application>a2enmod</application> utility to enable a module:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:537(command)
msgid "sudo a2enmod auth_mysql"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:541(para)
msgid "Similarly, <application>a2dismod</application> will disable a module:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:546(command)
msgid "sudo a2dismod auth_mysql"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:553(title)
msgid "HTTPS Configuration"
msgstr "HTTPS 설정"

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:555(para)
msgid ""
"The <application>mod_ssl</application> module adds an important feature to "
"the Apache2 server - the ability to encrypt communications. Thus, when your "
"browser is communicating using SSL, the https:// prefix is used at the "
"beginning of the Uniform Resource Locator (URL) in the browser navigation "
"bar."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:564(para)
msgid ""
"The <application>mod_ssl</application> module is available in "
"<application>apache2-common</application> package. Execute the following "
"command from a terminal prompt to enable the "
"<application>mod_ssl</application> module:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:571(command)
msgid "sudo a2enmod ssl"
msgstr "sudo a2enmod ssl"

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:574(para)
msgid ""
"There is a default HTTPS configuration file in <filename>/etc/apache2/sites-"
"available/default-ssl</filename>. In order for "
"<application>Apache2</application> to provide HTTPS, a "
"<emphasis>certificate</emphasis> and <emphasis>key</emphasis> file are also "
"needed. The default HTTPS configuration will use a certificate and key "
"generated by the <application>ssl-cert</application> package. They are good "
"for testing, but the auto-generated certificate and key should be replaced "
"by a certificate specific to the site or server. For information on "
"generating a key and obtaining a certificate see <xref "
"linkend=\"certificates-and-security\"/>"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:584(para)
msgid ""
"To configure <application>Apache2</application> for HTTPS, enter the "
"following:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:589(command)
msgid "sudo a2ensite default-ssl"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:593(para)
msgid ""
"The directories <filename>/etc/ssl/certs</filename> and "
"<filename>/etc/ssl/private</filename> are the default locations. If you "
"install the certificate and key in another directory make sure to change "
"<emphasis>SSLCertificateFile</emphasis> and "
"<emphasis>SSLCertificateKeyFile</emphasis> appropriately."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:600(para)
msgid ""
"With Apache2 now configured for HTTPS, restart the service to enable the new "
"settings:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:611(para)
msgid ""
"Depending on how you obtained your certificate you may need to enter a "
"passphrase when <application>Apache2</application> starts."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:617(para)
msgid ""
"You can access the secure server pages by typing https://your_hostname/url/ "
"in your browser address bar."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:628(para)
msgid ""
"<ulink url=\"http://httpd.apache.org/docs/2.2/\">Apache2 "
"Documentation</ulink> contains in depth information on Apache2 configuration "
"directives. Also, see the <application>apache2-doc</application> package for "
"the official Apache2 docs."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:635(para)
msgid ""
"See the <ulink url=\"http://www.modssl.org/docs/\">Mod SSL "
"Documentation</ulink> site for more SSL related information."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:641(para)
msgid ""
"O'Reilly's <ulink url=\"http://oreilly.com/catalog/9780596001919/\">Apache "
"Cookbook</ulink> is a good resource for accomplishing specific Apache2 "
"configurations."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:647(para)
msgid ""
"For Ubuntu specific Apache2 questions, ask in the <emphasis>#ubuntu-"
"server</emphasis> IRC channel on <ulink "
"url=\"http://freenode.net/\">freenode.net</ulink>."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:653(para)
msgid ""
"Usually integrated with PHP and MySQL the <ulink "
"url=\"https://help.ubuntu.com/community/ApacheMySQLPHP\">Apache MySQL PHP "
"Ubuntu Wiki </ulink> page is a good resource."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:664(title)
msgid "PHP5 - Scripting Language"
msgstr "PHP5 - 스크립트 언어"

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:665(para)
msgid ""
"PHP is a general-purpose scripting language suited for Web development. The "
"PHP script can be embedded into HTML. This section explains how to install "
"and configure PHP5 in Ubuntu System with Apache2 and MySQL."
msgstr ""
"PHP는 웹 개발에 적합한 범용 스크립트 언어입니다. PHP 스크립트는 HTML 내에 포함될 수 있습니다. 이 절에서는 아파치2와 "
"MySQL이 설치된 우분투 시스템에서 PHP5를 설치하고 설정하는 방법을 설명합니다."

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:669(para)
msgid ""
"This section assumes you have installed and configured Apache2 Web Server "
"and MySQL Database Server. You can refer to Apache2 section and MySQL "
"sections in this document to install and configure Apache2 and MySQL "
"respectively."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:676(para)
msgid "The PHP5 is available in Ubuntu Linux."
msgstr "PHP5는 우분투 리눅스에서 이용가능합니다."

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:678(para)
msgid ""
"To install PHP5 you can enter the following command in the terminal prompt: "
"<screen>\n"
"<command>sudo apt-get install php5 libapache2-mod-php5</command>\n"
"</screen>"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:687(para)
msgid ""
"You can run PHP5 scripts from command line. To run PHP5 scripts from command "
"line you should install <application>php5-cli</application> package. To "
"install <application>php5-cli</application> you can enter the following "
"command in the terminal prompt: <screen>\n"
"<command>sudo apt-get install php5-cli</command>\n"
"</screen>"
msgstr ""
"PHP5 스크립트를 명령행에서 실행할 수 있습니다. PHP5 스크립트를 명령행에서 실행하려면 <application>php5-"
"cli</application> 꾸러미를 설치해야 합니다. <application>php5-cli</application> 꾸러미를 "
"설치하려면 터미널 프롬프트에서 다음 명령을 입력하십시오: <screen>\n"
"<command>sudo apt-get install php5-cli</command>\n"
"</screen>"

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:696(para)
msgid ""
"You can also execute PHP5 scripts without installing PHP5 Apache module. To "
"accomplish this, you should install <application>php5-cgi</application> "
"package. You can run the following command in a terminal prompt to install "
"<application>php5-cgi</application> package: <screen>\n"
"<command>sudo apt-get install php5-cgi</command>\n"
"</screen>"
msgstr ""
"PHP5 Apache 모듈을 설치하지 않고도 PHP5 스크립트를 실행할 수 있습니다. 이를 위해서는 <application>php5-"
"cgi</application> 꾸러미를 설치해야 합니다. <application>php5-cgi</application> 꾸러미를 "
"설치하려면 터미널 프롬프트에서 다음 명령을 입력하십시오: <screen>\n"
"<command>sudo apt-get install php5-cgi</command>\n"
"</screen>"

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:706(para)
msgid ""
"To use <application>MySQL</application> with PHP5 you should install "
"<application>php5-mysql</application> package. To install <application>php5-"
"mysql</application> you can enter the following command in the terminal "
"prompt: <screen>\n"
"<command>sudo apt-get install php5-mysql</command>\n"
"</screen>"
msgstr ""
"<application>MySQL</application>을 PHP5와 함께 사용하려면 <application>php5-"
"mysql</application> 꾸러미를 설치해야 합니다. <application>php5-mysql</application> "
"꾸러미를 설치하려면 터미널에서 다음과 같이 입력하세요: <screen>\n"
"<command>sudo apt-get install php5-mysql</command>\n"
"</screen>"

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:714(para)
msgid ""
"Similarly, to use <application>PostgreSQL</application> with PHP5 you should "
"install <application>php5-pgsql</application> package. To install "
"<application>php5-pgsql</application> you can enter the following command in "
"the terminal prompt: <screen>\n"
"<command>sudo apt-get install php5-pgsql</command>\n"
"</screen>"
msgstr ""
"마찬가지로 PHP5와 함께 <application>PostgreSQL</application>을 사용하고 싶다면 "
"<application>php5-pgsql</application> 꾸러미를 설치하세요. <application>php5-"
"pgsql</application> 꾸러미를 설치하려면 터미널에서 다음과 같이 입력하세요: <screen>\n"
"<command>sudo apt-get install php5-pgsql</command>\n"
"</screen>"

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:727(para)
msgid ""
"Once you install PHP5, you can run PHP5 scripts from your web browser. If "
"you have installed <application>php5-cli</application> package, you can run "
"PHP5 scripts from your command prompt."
msgstr ""
"PHP5 가 설치되면, 웹 브라우저에서 PHP5 스크립트를 실행할 수 있습니다. 만약 <application>php5-"
"cli</application> 꾸러미를 설치했다면, 명령행에서도 PHP5 스크립트를 실행할 수 있습니다."

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:734(para)
msgid ""
"By default, the Apache 2 Web server is configured to run PHP5 scripts. In "
"other words, the PHP5 module is enabled in Apache2 Web server automatically "
"when you install the module. Please verify if the files "
"<filename>/etc/apache2/mods-enabled/php5.conf</filename> and "
"<filename>/etc/apache2/mods-enabled/php5.load</filename> exist. If they do "
"not exists, you can enable the module using <command>a2enmod</command> "
"command."
msgstr ""
"기본적으로 아파치2 웹 서버는 PHP5 스크립트를 실행하도록 설정되어 있습니다. 즉, PHP5 모듈을 설치할 때 아파치2 웹 서버가 "
"자동으로 이 모듈을 활성화하도록 설정되어 있는 것입니다. <filename>/etc/apache2/mods-"
"enabled/php5.conf</filename> 파일과 <filename>/etc/apache2/mods-"
"enabled/php5.load</filename> 파일이 있는지 확인해 주십시오. 만약 이 파일들이 존재하지 않는다면, "
"<command>a2enmod</command> 명령을 사용해서 모듈을 활성화 시킬 수 있습니다."

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:745(para)
msgid ""
"Once you install PHP5 related packages and enabled PHP5 Apache 2 module, you "
"should restart Apache2 Web server to run PHP5 scripts. You can run the "
"following command at a terminal prompt to restart your web server: "
"<screen><command>sudo /etc/init.d/apache2 restart</command> </screen>"
msgstr ""
"PHP5 관련 꾸러미들이 설치되고 PHP5 아파치2 모듈이 활성화되고 나면, PHP5 스크립트를 실행하기 위해 아파치2 웹 서버를 재시작 "
"해야 합니다. 아파치2 웹 서버를 재시작 하려면 터미널에서 다음과 같이 입력하세요: <screen><command>sudo "
"/etc/init.d/apache2 restart</command> </screen>"

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:753(title) serverguide/C/mail.xml:320(title) serverguide/C/mail.xml:1569(title) serverguide/C/dns.xml:343(title) serverguide/C/clustering.xml:184(title)
msgid "Testing"
msgstr "테스팅"

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:754(para)
msgid ""
"To verify your installation, you can run following PHP5 phpinfo script:"
msgstr "설치가 올바로 이루어졌는지 확인하기 위해서 다음의 PHP5 phpinfo 스크립트를 실행해 볼 수 있습니다:"

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:757(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"&lt;?php\n"
"  phpinfo();\n"
"?&gt;\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:762(para)
msgid ""
"You can save the content in a file <filename>phpinfo.php</filename> and "
"place it under <command>DocumentRoot</command> directory of Apache2 Web "
"server. When point your browser to "
"<filename>http://hostname/phpinfo.php</filename>, it would display values of "
"various PHP5 configuration parameters."
msgstr ""
"여러분은 <filename>phpinfo.php</filename> 파일의 내용을 저장해서 아파치2 웹 서버의 "
"<command>DocumentRoot</command> 디렉토리에 둘 수도 있습니다. 그러면 여러분이 웹 브라우저를 통해 "
"<filename>http://hostname/phpinfo.php</filename> 페이지에 접근할 때마다, 다양한 PHP5의 설정 "
"값들을 보여주게 됩니다."

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:776(para)
msgid ""
"For more in depth information see <ulink "
"url=\"http://www.php.net/docs.php\">php.net</ulink> documentation."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:781(para)
msgid ""
"There are a plethora of books on PHP. Two good books from O'Reilly are "
"<ulink url=\"http://oreilly.com/catalog/9780596005603/\">Learning PHP "
"5</ulink> and the <ulink "
"url=\"http://oreilly.com/catalog/9781565926813/\">PHP Cook Book</ulink>."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:788(para)
msgid ""
"Also, see the <ulink "
"url=\"https://help.ubuntu.com/community/ApacheMySQLPHP\">Apache MySQL PHP "
"Ubuntu Wiki</ulink> page for more information."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:799(title)
msgid "Squid - Proxy Server"
msgstr "Squid - 프락시 서버"

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:800(para)
msgid ""
"Squid is a full-featured web proxy cache server application which provides "
"proxy and cache services for Hyper Text Transport Protocol (HTTP), File "
"Transfer Protocol (FTP), and other popular network protocols. Squid can "
"implement caching and proxying of Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) requests and "
"caching of Domain Name Server (DNS) lookups, and perform transparent "
"caching. Squid also supports a wide variety of caching protocols, such as "
"Internet Cache Protocol, (ICP) the Hyper Text Caching Protocol, (HTCP) the "
"Cache Array Routing Protocol (CARP), and the Web Cache Coordination "
"Protocol. (WCCP)"
msgstr ""
"Squid는 완전한 기능을 갖춘 웹 프락시 캐쉬 서버 프로그램이고 Hyper Text Transport Protocol (HTTP), "
"File Transfer Protocol (FTP), 그리고 다른 인기있는 네트워크 프로토콜들을 위한 프락시와 캐쉬 서비스를 제공 "
"합니다. Squid는 Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) 요청의 캐슁과 프락싱 그리고 Domain Name Server "
"(DNS) 조회의 캐슁을 이행할 수 있고, 투명한 캐슁을 수행 합니다. 또한, Squid는 Internet Cache Protocol "
"(ICP), Hyper Text Caching Protocol (HTCP), Cache Array Routing Protocol "
"(CARP), 그리고 Web Cache Coordination Protocol (WCCP) 프로토콜과 같은 다양한 종류의 캐슁 프로토콜을 "
"지원 합니다."

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:808(para)
msgid ""
"The Squid proxy cache server is an excellent solution to a variety of proxy "
"and caching server needs, and scales from the branch office to enterprise "
"level networks while providing extensive, granular access control mechanisms "
"and monitoring of critical parameters via the Simple Network Management "
"Protocol (SNMP). When selecting a computer system for use as a dedicated "
"Squid proxy, or caching servers, ensure your system is configured with a "
"large amount of physical memory, as Squid maintains an in-memory cache for "
"increased performance."
msgstr ""
"Squid 프락시 캐쉬 서버는 다양한 프락시와 캐슁 서버의 요구에 맞는 훌륭한 솔루션이고, 광범위하고 조직적인 접근 조종 기능과 "
"Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP)를 통하여 아주 중요한 것들의 감시 기능을 제공하므로 지점 "
"사무실에서 부터 기업 수준의 네트워크 까지로 확장할 수 있습니다. 전용의 Squid 프락시, 또는 캐슁 서버로 하나의 컴퓨터를 선택하였을 "
"때, Squid는 성능을 향상시키기 위하여 메모리 내의 캐쉬를 관리하므로 많은 양의 실제 메모리를 가지도록 시스템을 설정 합니다."

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:817(para)
msgid ""
"At a terminal prompt, enter the following command to install the Squid "
"server:"
msgstr "터미널 프롬프트에서, Squid 서버를 설치하기 위하여 다음의 명령을 입력 합니다:"

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:822(command)
msgid "sudo apt-get install squid"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:828(para)
msgid ""
"Squid is configured by editing the directives contained within the "
"<filename>/etc/squid/squid.conf</filename> configuration file. The following "
"examples illustrate some of the directives which may be modified to affect "
"the behavior of the Squid server. For more in-depth configuration of Squid, "
"see the References section."
msgstr ""
"Squid는 <filename>/etc/squid/squid.conf</filename> 설정 파일 내의 지시자를 편집하는 것으로 설정 "
"딥니다. 다음의 예는 Squid 서버의 동작에 영향을 주기 위하여 변경될 수 있는 몇 가지의 지시자들을 보여 줍니다. 더 깊은 "
"Squid의 설정에 대한 것은, 참조 영역을 보십시오."

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:834(para)
msgid ""
"Prior to editing the configuration file, you should make a copy of the "
"original file and protect it from writing so you will have the original "
"settings as a reference, and to re-use as necessary."
msgstr ""
"설정 파일을 편집하기 전에, 원래의 파일의 복사본을 만들고 그것을 쓰기에서 보호해야만 합니다. 그래서 참조로서 원래의 설정값을 가질 수 "
"있고, 필요한 경우 재 사용할 수 있습니다."

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:837(para)
msgid ""
"Copy the <filename>/etc/squid/squid.conf</filename> file and protect it from "
"writing with the following commands entered at a terminal prompt:"
msgstr ""
"터미널 프롬프트에서 다음의 명령을 입력하여 <filename>/etc/squid/squid.conf</filename> 파일을 복사하고 "
"그것을 쓰기에서 보호 합니다:"

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:842(command)
msgid "sudo cp /etc/squid/squid.conf /etc/squid/squid.conf.original"
msgstr "sudo cp /etc/squid/squid.conf /etc/squid/squid.conf.original"

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:843(command)
msgid "sudo chmod a-w /etc/squid/squid.conf.original"
msgstr "sudo chmod a-w /etc/squid/squid.conf.original"

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:849(para)
msgid ""
"To set your Squid server to listen on TCP port 8888 instead of the default "
"TCP port 3128, change the http_port directive as such:"
msgstr ""
"Squid 서버가 기본 설정된 TCP 포트 3128 대신에 TCP 포트 8888을 듣게 지정하려면, 다음과 같이 http_port "
"지시자를 변경 합니다:"

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:853(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"http_port 8888\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:858(para)
msgid ""
"Change the visible_hostname directive in order to give the Squid server a "
"specific hostname. This hostname does not necessarily need to be the "
"computer's hostname. In this example it is set to <emphasis>weezie</emphasis>"
msgstr ""
"Squid 서버에 특정 호스트 이름을 주기 위하여 visible_hostname 지시자를 변경 합니다. 이 호스트 이름은 꼭 그 컴퓨터의 "
"호스트 이름일 필요는 없습니다. 이 예에서는 그것은 <emphasis>weezie</emphasis>로 지정 되었습니다."

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:862(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"visible_hostname weezie\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:867(para)
msgid ""
"Using Squid's access control, you may configure use of Internet services "
"proxied by Squid to be available only users with certain Internet Protocol "
"(IP) addresses. For example, we will illustrate access by users of the "
"192.168.42.0/24 subnetwork only:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:872(para) serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:892(para)
msgid ""
"Add the following to the <emphasis role=\"bold\">bottom</emphasis> of the "
"ACL section of your <filename>/etc/squid/squid.conf</filename> file:"
msgstr ""
"다음을 여러분의 <filename>/etc/squid/squid.conf</filename> 파일의 ACL 영역의 <emphasis "
"role=\"bold\">가장 아래</emphasis>에 추가 합니다:"

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:875(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"acl fortytwo_network src 192.168.42.0/24\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:878(para) serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:899(para)
msgid ""
"Then, add the following to the <emphasis role=\"bold\">top</emphasis> of the "
"http_access section of your <filename>/etc/squid/squid.conf</filename> file:"
msgstr ""
"그런 다음, <filename>/etc/squid/squid.conf</filename> 파일의 http_access 영역의 "
"<emphasis role=\"bold\">가장 위</emphasis>에 다음을 추가 합니다:"

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:882(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"http_access allow fortytwo_network\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:887(para)
msgid ""
"Using the excellent access control features of Squid, you may configure use "
"of Internet services proxied by Squid to be available only during normal "
"business hours. For example, we'll illustrate access by employees of a "
"business which is operating between 9:00AM and 5:00PM, Monday through "
"Friday, and which uses the 10.1.42.0/42 subnetwork:"
msgstr ""
"Squid의 훌륭한 접근 조종 기능을 사용하여, 여러분의 오직 정규 업무 시간 동안에만 Squid에 의하여 프락시된 인터넷 서비스가 사용 "
"가능하도록 설정할 수 있습니다. 예를 들어, 월요일부터 금요일까지, 오전 9시에서 오후 5시 동안 근무하는 사업장의 직원들이 "
"10.1.42.0/42 서브 네트워크를 사용하는 경우의 접근법을 보입니다."

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:895(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"acl biz_network src 10.1.42.0/24\n"
"acl biz_hours time M T W T F 9:00-17:00\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:903(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"http_access allow biz_network biz_hours\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:910(para)
msgid ""
"After making changes to the <filename>/etc/squid/squid.conf</filename> file, "
"save the file and restart the <application>squid</application> server "
"application to effect the changes using the following command entered at a "
"terminal prompt:"
msgstr ""
"<filename>/etc/squid/squid.conf</filename> 파일에 변경을 만든 후에는, 그 파일을 저장하고 변경의 "
"효과를 가지도록 터미널 프롬프트에서 다음의 명령을 입력하여 <application>squid</application> 서버 프로그램을 재 "
"시작 합니다:"

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:917(command)
msgid "sudo /etc/init.d/squid restart"
msgstr "sudo /etc/init.d/squid restart"

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:924(ulink)
msgid "Squid Website"
msgstr "Squid 웹사이트"

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:926(para)
msgid ""
"<ulink url=\"https://help.ubuntu.com/community/Squid\">Ubuntu Wiki "
"Squid</ulink> page."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:933(title)
msgid "Ruby on Rails"
msgstr "루비 온 레일스"

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:934(para)
msgid ""
"Ruby on Rails is an open source web framework for developing database backed "
"web applications. It is optimized for sustainable productivity of the "
"programmer since it lets the programmer to write code by favouring "
"convention over configuration."
msgstr ""
"루비 온 레일스(Ruby on Rails)는 데이터베이스를 기반으로 한 웹 애플리케이션을 개발하기 위한 오픈 소스 웹 프레임워크입니다. "
"루비 온 레일스는 프로그래머의 지속적인 생산성을 위해 최적화되었습니다. since it lets the programmer to "
"write code by favouring convention over configuration."

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:941(para)
msgid ""
"Before installing <application>Rails</application> you should install "
"<application>Apache</application> and <application>MySQL</application>. To "
"install the <application>Apache</application> package, please refer to <xref "
"linkend=\"httpd\"/>. For instructions on installing "
"<application>MySQL</application> refer to <xref linkend=\"mysql\"/>."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:949(para)
msgid ""
"Once you have <application>Apache</application> and "
"<application>MySQL</application> packages installed, you are ready to "
"install <application>Ruby on Rails</application> package."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:956(para)
msgid ""
"To install the <application>Ruby</application> base packages and "
"<application>Ruby on Rails</application>, you can enter the following "
"command in the terminal prompt:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:962(command)
msgid "sudo apt-get install rails"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:968(para)
msgid ""
"Modify the <filename>/etc/apache2/sites-available/default</filename> "
"configuration file to setup your domains."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:972(para)
msgid ""
"The first thing to change is the <emphasis>DocumentRoot</emphasis> directive:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:976(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"DocumentRoot /path/to/rails/application/public\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:979(para)
msgid ""
"Next, change the &lt;Directory \"/path/to/rails/application/public\"&gt; "
"directive:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:983(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"&lt;Directory \"/path/to/rails/application/public\"&gt;\n"
"        Options Indexes FollowSymLinks MultiViews ExecCGI\n"
"        AllowOverride All\n"
"        Order allow,deny\n"
"        allow from all\n"
"        AddHandler cgi-script .cgi\n"
"&lt;/Directory&gt;\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:993(para)
msgid ""
"You should also enable the <application>mod_rewrite</application> module for "
"Apache. To enable <application>mod_rewrite</application> module, please "
"enter the following command in a terminal prompt:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:999(command)
msgid "sudo a2enmod rewrite"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:1002(para)
msgid ""
"Finally you will need to change the ownership of the "
"<filename>/path/to/rails/application/public</filename> and "
"<filename>/path/to/rails/application/tmp</filename> directories to the user "
"used to run the <application>Apache</application> process:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:1008(command)
msgid "sudo chown -R www-data:www-data /path/to/rails/application/public"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:1009(command)
msgid "sudo chown -R www-data:www-data /path/to/rails/application/tmp"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:1012(para)
msgid ""
"That's it! Now you have your Server ready for your <application>Ruby on "
"Rails</application> applications."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:1021(para)
msgid ""
"See the <ulink url=\"http://rubyonrails.org/\">Ruby on Rails</ulink> website "
"for more information."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:1026(para)
msgid ""
"Also <ulink url=\"http://pragprog.com/titles/rails3/agile-web-development-"
"with-rails-third-edition\">Agile Development with Rails</ulink> is a great "
"resource."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:1032(para)
msgid ""
"Another place for more information is the <ulink "
"url=\"https://help.ubuntu.com/community/RubyOnRails\">Ruby on Rails Ubuntu "
"Wiki</ulink> page."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:1043(title)
msgid "Apache Tomcat"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:1044(para)
msgid ""
"Apache Tomcat is a web container that allows you to serve Java Servlets and "
"JSP (Java Server Pages) web applications."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:1046(para)
msgid ""
"The <application>Tomcat 6.0</application> packages in Ubuntu support two "
"different ways of running Tomcat. You can install them as a classic unique "
"system-wide instance, that will be started at boot time and will run as the "
"tomcat6 unpriviledged user. But you can also deploy private instances that "
"will run with your own user rights, and that you should start and stop by "
"yourself. This second way is particularly useful in a development server "
"context where multiple users need to test on their own private Tomcat "
"instances."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:1056(title)
msgid "System-wide installation"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:1057(para)
msgid ""
"To install the <application>Tomcat</application> server, you can enter the "
"following command in the terminal prompt:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:1060(command)
msgid "sudo apt-get install tomcat6"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:1062(para)
msgid ""
"This will install a Tomcat server with just a default ROOT webapp that "
"displays a minimal \"It works\" page by default."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:1068(para)
msgid ""
"Tomcat configuration files can be found in "
"<filename>/etc/tomcat6</filename>. Only a few common configuration tweaks "
"will be described here, please see <ulink "
"url=\"http://tomcat.apache.org/tomcat-6.0-doc/index.html\">Tomcat 6.0 "
"documentation</ulink> for more."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:1074(title)
msgid "Changing default ports"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:1075(para)
msgid ""
"By default Tomcat 6.0 runs a HTTP connector on port 8080 and an AJP "
"connector on port 8009. You might want to change those default ports to "
"avoid conflict with another server on the system. This is done by changing "
"the following lines in <filename>/etc/tomcat6/server.xml</filename>:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:1080(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"&lt;Connector port=\"8080\" protocol=\"HTTP/1.1\" \n"
"               connectionTimeout=\"20000\" \n"
"               redirectPort=\"8443\" /&gt;\n"
"...\n"
"&lt;Connector port=\"8009\" protocol=\"AJP/1.3\" redirectPort=\"8443\" "
"/&gt;\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:1089(title)
msgid "Changing JVM used"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:1090(para)
msgid ""
"By default Tomcat will run preferably with OpenJDK-6, then try Sun's JVM, "
"then try some other JVMs. If you have various JVMs installed, you can set "
"which should be used by setting JAVA_HOME in "
"<filename>/etc/default/tomcat6</filename>:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:1094(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"JAVA_HOME=/usr/lib/jvm/java-6-sun\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:1099(title)
msgid "Declaring users and roles"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:1100(para)
msgid ""
"Usernames, passwords and roles (groups) can be defined centrally in a "
"Servlet container. In Tomcat 6.0 this is done in the "
"<filename>/etc/tomcat6/tomcat-users.xml</filename> file:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:1103(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"&lt;role rolename=\"admin\"/&gt;\n"
"&lt;user username=\"tomcat\" password=\"s3cret\" roles=\"admin\"/&gt;\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:1111(title)
msgid "Using Tomcat standard webapps"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:1112(para)
msgid ""
"Tomcat is shipped with webapps that you can install for documentation, "
"administration or demo purposes."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:1115(title)
msgid "Tomcat documentation"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:1116(para)
msgid ""
"The <application>tomcat6-docs</application> package contains Tomcat 6.0 "
"documentation, packaged as a webapp that you can access by default at "
"http://yourserver:8080/docs. You can install it by entering the following "
"command in the terminal prompt:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:1121(command)
msgid "sudo apt-get install tomcat6-docs"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:1125(title)
msgid "Tomcat administration webapps"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:1126(para)
msgid ""
"The <application>tomcat6-admin</application> package contains two webapps "
"that can be used to administer the Tomcat server using a web interface. You "
"can install them by entering the following command in the terminal prompt:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:1131(command)
msgid "sudo apt-get install tomcat6-admin"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:1133(para)
msgid ""
"The first one is the <emphasis>manager</emphasis> webapp, which you can "
"access by default at http://yourserver:8080/manager/html. It is primarily "
"used to get server status and restart webapps."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:1136(para)
msgid ""
"Access to the <emphasis>manager</emphasis> application is protected by "
"default: you need to define a user with the role \"manager\" in "
"<filename>/etc/tomcat6/tomcat-users.xml</filename> before you can access it."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:1140(para)
msgid ""
"The second one is the <emphasis>host-manager</emphasis> webapp, which you "
"can access by default at http://yourserver:8080/host-manager/html. It can be "
"used to create virtual hosts dynamically."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:1144(para)
msgid ""
"Access to the <emphasis>host-manager</emphasis> application is also "
"protected by default: you need to define a user with the role \"admin\" in "
"<filename>/etc/tomcat6/tomcat-users.xml</filename> before you can access it."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:1149(para)
msgid ""
"For security reasons, the tomcat6 user cannot write to the "
"<filename>/etc/tomcat6</filename> directory by default. Some features in "
"these admin webapps (application deployment, virtual host creation) need "
"write access to that directory. If you want to use these features execute "
"the following, to give users in the tomcat6 group the necessary rights:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:1156(command)
msgid "sudo chgrp -R tomcat6 /etc/tomcat6"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:1157(command)
msgid "sudo chmod -R g+w /etc/tomcat6"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:1162(title)
msgid "Tomcat examples webapps"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:1163(para)
msgid ""
"The <application>tomcat6-examples</application> package contains two webapps "
"that can be used to test or demonstrate Servlets and JSP features, which you "
"can access them by default at http://yourserver:8080/examples. You can "
"install them by entering the following command in the terminal prompt:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:1169(command)
msgid "sudo apt-get install tomcat6-examples"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:1175(title)
msgid "Using private instances"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:1176(para)
msgid ""
"Tomcat is heavily used in development and testing scenarios where using a "
"single system-wide instance doesn't meet the requirements of multiple users "
"on a single system. The Tomcat 6.0 packages in Ubuntu come with tools to "
"help deploy your own user-oriented instances, allowing every user on a "
"system to run (without root rights) separate private instances while still "
"using the system-installed libraries."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:1183(para)
msgid ""
"It is possible to run the system-wide instance and the private instances in "
"parallel, as long as they do not use the same TCP ports."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:1187(title)
msgid "Installing private instance support"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:1188(para)
msgid ""
"You can install everything necessary to run private instances by entering "
"the following command in the terminal prompt:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:1191(command)
msgid "sudo apt-get install tomcat6-user"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:1195(title)
msgid "Creating a private instance"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:1196(para)
msgid ""
"You can create a private instance directory by entering the following "
"command in the terminal prompt:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:1199(command)
msgid "tomcat6-instance-create my-instance"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:1201(para)
msgid ""
"This will create a new <filename>my-instance</filename> directory with all "
"the necessary subdirectories and scripts. You can for example install your "
"common libraries in the <filename>lib/</filename> subdirectory and deploy "
"your webapps in the <filename>webapps/</filename> subdirectory. No webapps "
"are deployed by default."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:1209(title)
msgid "Configuring your private instance"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:1210(para)
msgid ""
"You will find the classic Tomcat configuration files for your private "
"instance in the <filename>conf/</filename> subdirectory. You should for "
"example certainly edit the <filename>conf/server.xml</filename> file to "
"change the default ports used by your private Tomcat instance to avoid "
"conflict with other instances that might be running."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:1218(title)
msgid "Starting/stopping your private instance"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:1219(para)
msgid ""
"You can start your private instance by entering the following command in the "
"terminal prompt (supposing your instance is located in the <filename>my-"
"instance</filename> directory):"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:1223(command)
msgid "my-instance/bin/startup.sh"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:1225(para)
msgid ""
"You should check the <filename>logs/</filename> subdirectory for any error. "
"If you have a <emphasis>java.net.BindException: Address already in "
"use&lt;null&gt;:8080</emphasis> error, it means that the port you're using "
"is already taken and that you should change it."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:1230(para)
msgid ""
"You can stop your instance by entering the following command in the terminal "
"prompt (supposing your instance is located in the <filename>my-"
"instance</filename> directory):"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:1234(command)
msgid "my-instance/bin/shutdown.sh"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:1243(para)
msgid ""
"See the <ulink url=\"http://tomcat.apache.org/\">Apache Tomcat</ulink> "
"website for more information."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:1248(para)
msgid ""
"<ulink url=\"http://oreilly.com/catalog/9780596003180/\">Tomcat: The "
"Definitive Guide</ulink> is a good resource for building web applications "
"with Tomcat."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:1254(para)
msgid ""
"For additional books see the <ulink "
"url=\"http://wiki.apache.org/tomcat/Tomcat/Books\">Tomcat Books</ulink> list "
"page."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/web-servers.xml:1259(para)
msgid ""
"Also, see the<ulink "
"url=\"https://help.ubuntu.com/community/ApacheTomcat5\">Ubuntu Wiki Apache "
"Tomcat</ulink> page."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/vpn.xml:13(title)
msgid "VPN"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/vpn.xml:15(para)
msgid ""
"A Virtual Private Network, or <emphasis>VPN</emphasis>, is an encrypted "
"network connection between two or more networks. There are several ways to "
"create a VPN using software as well as dedicated hardware appliances. This "
"chapter will cover installing and configuring "
"<application>OpenVPN</application> to create a VPN between two servers."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/vpn.xml:23(title)
msgid "OpenVPN"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/vpn.xml:25(para)
msgid ""
"OpenVPN uses Public Key Infrastructure (PKI) to encrypt VPN traffic between "
"nodes. A simple way of setting up a VPN with OpenVPN is to connect the "
"clients through a bridge interface on the VPN server. This guide will assume "
"that one VPN node, the server in this case, has a bridge interface "
"configured. For more information on setting up a bridge see <xref "
"linkend=\"bridging\"/>."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/vpn.xml:35(para)
msgid "To install <application>openvpn</application> in a terminal enter:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/vpn.xml:41(command) serverguide/C/vpn.xml:257(command)
msgid "sudo apt-get install openvpn"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/vpn.xml:45(title)
msgid "Server Certificates"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/vpn.xml:47(para)
msgid ""
"Now that the <application>openvpn</application> package is installed, the "
"certificates for the VPN server need to be created."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/vpn.xml:52(para)
msgid ""
"First, copy the <filename>easy-rsa</filename> directory to "
"<filename>/etc/openvpn</filename>. This will ensure that any changes to the "
"scripts will not be lost when the package is updated. You will also need to "
"adjust permissions in the <filename>easy-rsa</filename> directory to allow "
"the current user permission to create files. From a terminal enter:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/vpn.xml:59(command)
msgid "sudo mkdir /etc/openvpn/easy-rsa/"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/vpn.xml:60(command)
msgid ""
"sudo cp -r /usr/share/doc/openvpn/examples/easy-rsa/2.0/* /etc/openvpn/easy-"
"rsa/"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/vpn.xml:61(command)
msgid "sudo chown -R $USER /etc/openvpn/easy-rsa/"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/vpn.xml:64(para)
msgid ""
"Next, edit <filename>/etc/openvpn/easy-rsa/vars</filename> adjusting the "
"following to your environment:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/vpn.xml:68(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"export KEY_COUNTRY=\"US\"\n"
"export KEY_PROVINCE=\"NC\"\n"
"export KEY_CITY=\"Winston-Salem\"\n"
"export KEY_ORG=\"Example Company\"\n"
"export KEY_EMAIL=\"steve@example.com\"\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/vpn.xml:76(para)
msgid "Enter the following to create the server certificates:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/vpn.xml:81(command) serverguide/C/vpn.xml:102(command)
msgid "cd /etc/openvpn/easy-rsa/"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/vpn.xml:82(command) serverguide/C/vpn.xml:103(command)
msgid "source vars"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/vpn.xml:83(command)
msgid "./clean-all"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/vpn.xml:84(command)
msgid "./build-dh"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/vpn.xml:85(command)
msgid "./pkitool --initca"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/vpn.xml:86(command)
msgid "./pkitool --server server"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/vpn.xml:87(command)
msgid "cd keys"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/vpn.xml:88(command)
msgid "openvpn --genkey --secret ta.key"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/vpn.xml:89(command)
msgid "sudo cp server.crt server.key ca.crt dh1024.pem ta.key /etc/openvpn/"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/vpn.xml:94(title)
msgid "Client Certificates"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/vpn.xml:96(para)
msgid ""
"The VPN client will also need a certificate to authenticate itself to the "
"server. To create the certificate, enter the following in a terminal:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/vpn.xml:104(command)
msgid "./pkitool hostname"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/vpn.xml:108(para)
msgid ""
"Replace <emphasis>hostname</emphasis> with the actual hostname of the "
"machine connecting to the VPN."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/vpn.xml:113(para)
msgid "Copy the following files to the client:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/vpn.xml:118(para)
msgid "/etc/openvpn/ca.crt"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/vpn.xml:119(para)
msgid "/etc/openvpn/easy-rsa/keys/hostname.crt"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/vpn.xml:120(para)
msgid "/etc/openvpn/easy-rsa/keys/hostname.key"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/vpn.xml:121(para)
msgid "/etc/openvpn/ta.key"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/vpn.xml:125(para)
msgid ""
"Remember to adjust the above file names for your client machine's "
"<emphasis>hostname</emphasis>."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/vpn.xml:130(para)
msgid ""
"It is best to use a secure method to copy the certificate and key files. The "
"<application>scp</application> utility is a good choice, but copying the "
"files to removable media then to the client, also works well."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/vpn.xml:141(title) serverguide/C/vcs.xml:107(title)
msgid "Server Configuration"
msgstr "서버 설정"

#: serverguide/C/vpn.xml:143(para)
msgid ""
"Now configure the <application>openvpn</application> server by creating "
"<filename>/etc/openvpn/server.conf</filename> from the example file. In a "
"terminal enter:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/vpn.xml:149(command)
msgid ""
"sudo cp /usr/share/doc/openvpn/examples/sample-config-files/server.conf.gz "
"/etc/openvpn/"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/vpn.xml:150(command)
msgid "sudo gzip -d /etc/openvpn/server.conf.gz"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/vpn.xml:153(para)
msgid ""
"Edit <filename>/etc/openvpn/server.conf</filename> changing the following "
"options to:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/vpn.xml:157(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"local 172.18.100.101\n"
"dev tap0\n"
"up \"/etc/openvpn/up.sh br0\"\n"
"down \"/etc/openvpn/down.sh br0\"\n"
";server 10.8.0.0 255.255.255.0\n"
"server-bridge 172.18.100.101 255.255.255.0 172.18.100.105 172.18.100.200\n"
"push \"route 172.18.100.1 255.255.255.0\"\n"
"push \"dhcp-option DNS 172.18.100.20\"\n"
"push \"dhcp-option DOMAIN example.com\"\n"
"tls-auth ta.key 0 # This file is secret\n"
"user nobody\n"
"group nogroup\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/vpn.xml:174(para)
msgid ""
"<emphasis>local</emphasis>: is the IP address of the bridge interface."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/vpn.xml:179(para)
msgid ""
"<emphasis>server-bridge</emphasis>: needed when the configuration uses "
"bridging. The <emphasis>172.18.100.101 255.255.255.0</emphasis> portion is "
"the bridge interface and mask. The IP range <emphasis>172.18.100.105 "
"172.18.100.200</emphasis> is the range of IP addresses that will be assigned "
"to clients."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/vpn.xml:186(para)
msgid ""
"<emphasis>push</emphasis>: are directives to add networking options for "
"clients."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/vpn.xml:191(para)
msgid ""
"<emphasis>user and group</emphasis>: configure which user and group the "
"<application>openvpn</application> daemon executes as."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/vpn.xml:198(para)
msgid ""
"Replace all IP addresses and domain names above with those of your network."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/vpn.xml:203(para)
msgid ""
"Next, create a couple of helper scripts to add the <emphasis>tap</emphasis> "
"interface to the bridge. Create <filename>/etc/openvpn/up.sh</filename>:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/vpn.xml:207(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"#!/bin/sh\n"
"\n"
"BR=$1\n"
"DEV=$2\n"
"MTU=$3\n"
"/sbin/ifconfig $DEV mtu $MTU promisc up\n"
"/usr/sbin/brctl addif $BR $DEV\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/vpn.xml:217(para)
msgid "And <filename>/etc/openvpn/down.sh</filename>:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/vpn.xml:221(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"#!/bin/sh\n"
"\n"
"BR=$1\n"
"DEV=$2\n"
"\n"
"/usr/sbin/brctl delif $BR $DEV\n"
"/sbin/ifconfig $DEV down\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/vpn.xml:231(para)
msgid "Then make them executable:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/vpn.xml:236(command)
msgid "sudo chmod 755 /etc/openvpn/down.sh"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/vpn.xml:237(command)
msgid "sudo chmod 755 /etc/openvpn/up.sh"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/vpn.xml:240(para)
msgid ""
"After configuring the server, restart <application>openvpn</application> by "
"entering:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/vpn.xml:245(command) serverguide/C/vpn.xml:293(command)
msgid "sudo /etc/init.d/openvpn restart"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/vpn.xml:250(title)
msgid "Client Configuration"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/vpn.xml:252(para)
msgid "First, install <application>openvpn</application> on the client:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/vpn.xml:260(para)
msgid ""
"Then with the server configured and the client certificates copied to the "
"<filename>/etc/openvpn/</filename> directory, create a client configuration "
"file by copying the example. In a terminal on the client machine enter:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/vpn.xml:266(command)
msgid ""
"sudo cp /usr/share/doc/openvpn/examples/sample-config-files/client.conf "
"/etc/openvpn"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/vpn.xml:269(para)
msgid ""
"Now edit <filename>/etc/openvpn/client.conf</filename> changing the "
"following options:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/vpn.xml:273(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"dev tap\n"
"remote vpn.example.com 1194\n"
"cert hostname.crt\n"
"key hostname.key\n"
"tls-auth ta.key 1\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/vpn.xml:282(para)
msgid ""
"Replace <emphasis>vpn.example.com</emphasis> with the hostname of your VPN "
"server, and <emphasis>hostname.*</emphasis> with the actual certificate and "
"key filenames."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/vpn.xml:288(para)
msgid "Finally, restart <application>openvpn</application>:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/vpn.xml:296(para)
msgid "You should now be able to connect to the remote LAN through the VPN."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/vpn.xml:307(para)
msgid ""
"See the <ulink url=\"http://openvpn.net/\">OpenVPN</ulink> website for "
"additional information."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/vpn.xml:312(para)
msgid ""
"Also, Pakt's <ulink url=\"http://www.packtpub.com/openvpn/book\">OpenVPN: "
"Building and Integrating Virtual Private Networks</ulink> is a good resource."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/vpn.xml:318(para)
msgid ""
"Another source of further information is the <ulink "
"url=\"https://help.ubuntu.com/community/OpenVPN\">Ubuntu Wiki "
"OpenVPN</ulink> page."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:13(title)
msgid "Virtualization"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:14(para)
msgid ""
"Virtualization is being adopted in many different environments and "
"situations. If you are a developer, virtualization can provide you with a "
"contained environment where you can safely do almost any sort of development "
"safe from messing up your main working environment. If you are a systems "
"administrator, you can use virtualization to more easily separate your "
"services and move them around based on demand."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:20(para)
msgid ""
"The default virtualization technology supported in Ubuntu is "
"<application>KVM</application>, a technology that takes advantage of "
"virtualization extensions built into Intel and AMD hardware. For hardware "
"without virtualization extensions <application>Xen</application> and "
"<application>Qemu</application> are popular solutions."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:27(title)
msgid "libvirt"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:28(para)
msgid ""
"The <application>libvirt</application> library is used to interface with "
"different virtualization technologies. Before getting started with "
"<application>libvirt</application> it is best to make sure your hardware "
"supports the necessary virtualization extensions for "
"<application>KVM</application>. Enter the following from a terminal prompt:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:35(command)
msgid "kvm-ok"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:37(para)
msgid ""
"A message will be printed informing you if your CPU "
"<emphasis>does</emphasis> or <emphasis>does not</emphasis> support hardware "
"virtualization."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:41(para)
msgid ""
"On most computer whose processor supports virtualization, it is necessary to "
"activate an option in the BIOS to enable it."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:47(title)
msgid "Virtual Networking"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:49(para)
msgid ""
"There are a few different ways to allow a virtual machine access to the "
"external network. The default virtual network configuration is "
"<emphasis>usermode</emphasis> networking, which uses the SLIRP protocol and "
"traffic is NATed through the host interface to the outside network."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:54(para)
msgid ""
"To enable external hosts to directly access services on virtual machines a "
"<emphasis>bridge</emphasis> needs to be configured. This allows the virtual "
"interfaces to connect to the outside network through the physical interface, "
"making them appear as normal hosts to the rest of the network. For "
"information on setting up a bridge see <xref linkend=\"bridging\"/>."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:63(para)
msgid "To install the necessary packages, from a terminal prompt enter:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:67(command)
msgid "sudo apt-get install kvm libvirt-bin"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:69(para)
msgid ""
"After installing <application>libvirt-bin</application>, the user used to "
"manage virtual machines will need to be added to the "
"<emphasis>libvirtd</emphasis> group. Doing so will grant the user access to "
"the advanced networking options."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:73(para)
msgid "In a terminal enter:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:77(command)
msgid "sudo adduser $USER libvirtd"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:80(para)
msgid ""
"If the user chosen is the current user, you will need to log out and back in "
"for the new group membership to take effect."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:84(para)
msgid ""
"You are now ready to install a <emphasis>Guest</emphasis> operating system. "
"Installing a virtual machine follows the same process as installing the "
"operating system directly on the hardware. You either need a way to automate "
"the installation, or a keyboard and monitor will need to be attached to the "
"physical machine."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:89(para)
msgid ""
"In the case of virtual machines a Graphical User Interface (GUI) is "
"analogous to using a physical keyboard and mouse. Instead of installing a "
"GUI the <application>virt-viewer</application> application can be used to "
"connect to a virtual machine's console using <application>VNC</application>. "
"See <xref linkend=\"libvirt-virt-viewer\"/> for more information."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:94(para)
msgid ""
"There are several ways to automate the Ubuntu installation process, for "
"example using preseeds, kickstart, etc. Refer to the <ulink "
"url=\"https://help.ubuntu.com/10.04 LTS/installation-guide/\">Ubuntu "
"Installation Guide</ulink> for details."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:98(para)
msgid ""
"Yet another way to install an Ubuntu virtual machine is to use "
"<application>ubuntu-vm-builder</application>. <application>ubuntu-vm-"
"builder</application> allows you to setup advanced partitions, execute "
"custom post-install scripts, etc. For details see <xref linkend=\"jeos-and-"
"vmbuilder\"/>"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:104(title)
msgid "virt-install"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:105(para)
msgid ""
"<application>virt-install</application> is part of the <application>python-"
"virtinst</application> package. To install it, from a terminal prompt enter:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:109(command)
msgid "sudo apt-get install python-virtinst"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:111(para)
msgid ""
"There are several options available when using <application>virt-"
"install</application>. For example:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:115(command)
msgid ""
"sudo virt-install -n web_devel -r 256 -f web_devel.img \\ -s 4 -c jeos.iso --"
"accelerate \\ --connect=qemu:///system --vnc \\ --noautoconsole -v"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:122(para)
msgid ""
"<emphasis>-n web_devel:</emphasis> the name of the new virtual machine will "
"be <emphasis>web_devel</emphasis> in this example."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:127(para)
msgid ""
"<emphasis>-r 256:</emphasis> specifies the amount of memory the virtual "
"machine will use."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:132(para)
msgid ""
"<emphasis>-f web_devel.img:</emphasis> indicates the path to the virtual "
"disk which can be a file, partition, or logical volume. In this example a "
"file named <filename>web_devel.img</filename>."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:138(para)
msgid "<emphasis>-s 4:</emphasis> the size of the virtual disk."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:143(para)
msgid ""
"<emphasis>-c jeos.iso:</emphasis> file to be used as a virtual CDROM. The "
"file can be either an ISO file or the path to the host's CDROM device."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:149(para)
msgid ""
"<emphasis>--accelerate:</emphasis> enables the kernel's acceleration "
"technologies."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:154(para)
msgid ""
"<emphasis>--vnc:</emphasis> exports the guest's virtual console using VNC."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:159(para)
msgid ""
"<emphasis>--noautoconsole:</emphasis> will not automatically connect to the "
"virtual machine's console."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:164(para)
msgid "<emphasis>-v:</emphasis> creates a fully virtualized guest."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:169(para)
msgid ""
"After launching <application>virt-install</application> you can connect to "
"the virtual machine's console either locally using a GUI or with the "
"<application>virt-viewer</application> utility."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:175(title)
msgid "virt-clone"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:176(para)
msgid ""
"The <application>virt-clone</application> application can be used to copy "
"one virtual machine to another. For example:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:180(command)
msgid ""
"sudo virt-clone -o web_devel -n database_devel -f "
"/path/to/database_devel.img --connect=qemu:///system"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:184(para)
msgid "<emphasis>-o:</emphasis> original virtual machine."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:189(para)
msgid "<emphasis>-n:</emphasis> name of the new virtual machine."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:194(para)
msgid ""
"<emphasis>-f:</emphasis> path to the file, logical volume, or partition to "
"be used by the new virtual machine."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:199(para)
msgid ""
"<emphasis>--connect:</emphasis> specifies which hypervisor to connect to."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:204(para)
msgid ""
"Also, use <emphasis>-d</emphasis> or <emphasis>--debug</emphasis> option to "
"help troubleshoot problems with <application>virt-clone</application>."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:209(para)
msgid ""
"Replace <emphasis>web_devel</emphasis> and "
"<emphasis>database_devel</emphasis> with appropriate virtual machine names."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:215(title)
msgid "Virtual Machine Management"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:217(title)
msgid "virsh"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:218(para)
msgid ""
"There are several utilities available to manage virtual machines and "
"<application>libvirt</application>. The <application>virsh</application> "
"utility can be used from the command line. Some examples:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:224(para)
msgid "To list running virtual machines:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:228(command)
msgid "virsh -c qemu:///system list"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:232(para)
msgid "To start a virtual machine:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:236(command)
msgid "virsh -c qemu:///system start web_devel"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:240(para)
msgid "Similarly, to start a virtual machine at boot:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:244(command)
msgid "virsh -c qemu:///system autostart web_devel"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:248(para)
msgid "Reboot a virtual machine with:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:252(command)
msgid "virsh -c qemu:///system reboot web_devel"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:256(para)
msgid ""
"The <emphasis>state</emphasis> of virtual machines can be saved to a file in "
"order to be restored later. The following will save the virtual machine "
"state into a file named according to the date:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:261(command)
msgid "virsh -c qemu:///system save web_devel web_devel-022708.state"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:263(para)
msgid "Once saved the virtual machine will no longer be running."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:268(para)
msgid "A saved virtual machine can be restored using:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:272(command)
msgid "virsh -c qemu:///system restore web_devel-022708.state"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:276(para)
msgid "To shutdown a virtual machine do:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:280(command)
msgid "virsh -c qemu:///system shutdown web_devel"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:284(para)
msgid "A CDROM device can be mounted in a virtual machine by entering:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:288(command)
msgid "virsh -c qemu:///system attach-disk web_devel /dev/cdrom /media/cdrom"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:293(para)
msgid ""
"In the above examples replace <emphasis>web_devel</emphasis> with the "
"appropriate virtual machine name, and <filename>web_devel-"
"022708.state</filename> with a descriptive file name."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:300(title)
msgid "Virtual Machine Manager"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:301(para)
msgid ""
"The <application>virt-manager</application> package contains a graphical "
"utility to manage local and remote virtual machines. To install virt-manager "
"enter:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:306(command)
msgid "sudo apt-get install virt-manager"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:308(para)
msgid ""
"Since <application>virt-manager</application> requires a Graphical User "
"Interface (GUI) environment it is recommended to be installed on a "
"workstation or test machine instead of a production server. To connect to "
"the local <application>libvirt</application> service enter:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:314(command)
msgid "virt-manager -c qemu:///system"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:316(para)
msgid ""
"You can connect to the <application>libvirt</application> service running on "
"another host by entering the following in a terminal prompt:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:320(command)
msgid "virt-manager -c qemu+ssh://virtnode1.mydomain.com/system"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:323(para)
msgid ""
"The above example assumes that <application>SSH</application> connectivity "
"between the management system and virtnode1.mydomain.com has already been "
"configured, and uses SSH keys for authentication. SSH "
"<emphasis>keys</emphasis> are needed because "
"<application>libvirt</application> sends the password prompt to another "
"process. For details on configuring <application>SSH</application> see <xref "
"linkend=\"openssh-server\"/>"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:333(title)
msgid "Virtual Machine Viewer"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:334(para)
msgid ""
"The <application>virt-viewer</application> application allows you to connect "
"to a virtual machine's console. <application>virt-viewer</application> does "
"require a Graphical User Interface (GUI) to interface with the virtual "
"machine."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:338(para)
msgid ""
"To install <application>virt-viewer</application> from a terminal enter:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:342(command)
msgid "sudo apt-get install virt-viewer"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:344(para)
msgid ""
"Once a virtual machine is installed and running you can connect to the "
"virtual machine's console by using:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:348(command)
msgid "virt-viewer -c qemu:///system web_devel"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:350(para)
msgid ""
"Similar to <application>virt-manager</application>, <application>virt-"
"viewer</application> can connect to a remote host using "
"<emphasis>SSH</emphasis> with key authentication, as well:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:355(command)
msgid "virt-viewer -c qemu+ssh://virtnode1.mydomain.com/system web_devel"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:357(para)
msgid ""
"Be sure to replace <emphasis role=\"italic\">web_devel</emphasis> with the "
"appropriate virtual machine name."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:360(para)
msgid ""
"If configured to use a <emphasis>bridged</emphasis> network interface you "
"can also setup <application>SSH</application> access to the virtual machine. "
"See <xref linkend=\"openssh-server\"/> and <xref linkend=\"bridging\"/> for "
"more details."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:369(para)
msgid ""
"See the <ulink url=\"http://kvm.qumranet.com/kvmwiki\">KVM</ulink> home page "
"for more details."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:374(para)
msgid ""
"For more information on <application>libvirt</application> see the <ulink "
"url=\"http://libvirt.org/\">libvirt home page</ulink>"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:379(para)
msgid ""
"The <ulink url=\"http://virt-manager.et.redhat.com/\">Virtual Machine "
"Manager</ulink> site has more information on <application>virt-"
"manager</application> development."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:385(para)
msgid ""
"Also, stop by the <emphasis>#ubuntu-virt</emphasis> IRC channel on <ulink "
"url=\"http://freenode.net/\">freenode</ulink> to discuss virtualization "
"technology in Ubuntu."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:391(para)
msgid ""
"Another good resource is the <ulink "
"url=\"https://help.ubuntu.com/community/KVM\">Ubuntu Wiki KVM</ulink> page."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:399(title)
msgid "JeOS and vmbuilder"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:405(title)
msgid "What is JeOS"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:407(para)
msgid ""
"Ubuntu <emphasis>JeOS</emphasis> (pronounced \"Juice\") is an efficient "
"variant of the Ubuntu Server operating system, configured specifically for "
"virtual appliances. No longer available as a CD-ROM ISO for download, but "
"only as an option either:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:414(para)
msgid ""
"While installing from the Server Edition ISO (pressing "
"<emphasis>F4</emphasis> on the first screen will allow you to pick \"Minimal "
"installation\", which is the package selection equivalent to JeOS)."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:420(para)
msgid "Or to be built using Ubuntu's vmbuilder, which is described here."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:426(para)
msgid ""
"JeOS is a specialized installation of Ubuntu Server Edition with a tuned "
"kernel that only contains the base elements needed to run within a "
"virtualized environment."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:431(para)
msgid ""
"Ubuntu JeOS has been tuned to take advantage of key performance technologies "
"in the latest virtualization products from VMware. This combination of "
"reduced size and optimized performance ensures that Ubuntu JeOS Edition "
"delivers a highly efficient use of server resources in large virtual "
"deployments."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:437(para)
msgid ""
"Without unnecessary drivers, and only the minimal required packages, ISVs "
"can configure their supporting OS exactly as they require. They have the "
"peace of mind that updates, whether for security or enhancement reasons, "
"will be limited to the bare minimum of what is required in their specific "
"environment. In turn, users deploying virtual appliances built on top of "
"JeOS will have to go through fewer updates and therefore less maintenance "
"than they would have had to with a standard full installation of a server."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:446(title)
msgid "What is vmbuilder"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:448(para)
msgid ""
"With vmbuilder, there is no need to download a JeOS ISO anymore. vmbuilder "
"will fetch the various package and build a virtual machine tailored for your "
"needs in about a minute. vmbuilder is a script that automates the process of "
"creating a ready to use Linux based VM. The currently supported hypervisors "
"are KVM and Xen."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:454(para)
msgid ""
"You can pass command line options to add extra packages, remove packages, "
"choose which version of Ubuntu, which mirror etc. On recent hardware with "
"plenty of RAM, tmpdir in <filename>/dev/shm</filename> or using a tmpfs, and "
"a local mirror, you can bootstrap a VM in less than a minute."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:460(para)
msgid ""
"First introduced as a shell script in Ubuntu 8.04 LTS, <application>ubuntu-"
"vm-builder</application> started with little emphasis as a hack to help "
"developers test their new code in a virtual machine without having to "
"restart from scratch each time. As a few Ubuntu administrators started to "
"notice this script, a few of them went on improving it and adapting it for "
"so many use case that Soren Hansen (the author of the script and Ubuntu "
"virtualization specialist, not the golf player) decided to rewrite it from "
"scratch for Intrepid as a python script with a few new design goals:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:470(para)
msgid "Develop it so that it can be reused by other distributions."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:475(para)
msgid ""
"Use a plugin mechanisms for all virtualization interactions so that others "
"can easily add logic for other virtualization environments."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:480(para)
msgid ""
"Provide an easy to maintain web interface as an option to the command line "
"interface."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:486(para)
msgid "But the general principles and commands remain the same."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:493(title)
msgid "Initial Setup"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:495(para)
msgid ""
"It is assumed that you have installed and configured "
"<application>libvirt</application> and <application>KVM</application> "
"locally on the machine you are using. For details on how to perform this, "
"please refer to:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:507(para)
msgid ""
"The <ulink url=\"https://help.ubuntu.com/community/KVM\">KVM</ulink> Wiki "
"page."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:513(para)
msgid ""
"We also assume that you know how to use a text based text editor such as "
"nano or vi. If you have not used any of them before, you can get an overview "
"of the various text editors available by reading the <ulink "
"url=\"https://help.ubuntu.com/community/PowerUsersTextEditors\">PowerUsersTex"
"tEditors</ulink> page. This tutorial has been done on KVM, but the general "
"principle should remain on other virtualization technologies."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:521(title)
msgid "Install vmbuilder"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:523(para)
msgid ""
"The name of the package that we need to install is <application>python-vm-"
"builder</application>. In a terminal prompt enter:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:528(command)
msgid "sudo apt-get install python-vm-builder"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:532(para)
msgid ""
"If you are running Hardy, you can still perform most of this using the older "
"version of the package named <application>ubuntu-vm-builder</application>, "
"there are only a few changes to the syntax of the tool."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:541(title)
msgid "Defining Your Virtual Machine"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:543(para)
msgid ""
"Defining a virtual machine with Ubuntu's vmbuilder is quite simple, but here "
"are a few thing to consider:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:549(para)
msgid ""
"If you plan on shipping a virtual appliance, do not assume that the end-user "
"will know how to extend disk size to fit their need, so either plan for a "
"large virtual disk to allow for your appliance to grow, or explain fairly "
"well in your documentation how to allocate more space. It might actually be "
"a good idea to store data on some separate external storage."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:556(para)
msgid ""
"Given that RAM is much easier to allocate in a VM, RAM size should be set to "
"whatever you think is a safe minimum for your appliance."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:562(para)
msgid ""
"The <application>vmbuilder</application> command has 2 main parameters: the "
"<emphasis>virtualization technology (hypervisor)</emphasis> and the targeted "
"<emphasis>distribution</emphasis>. Optional parameters are quite numerous "
"and can be found using the following command:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:568(command)
msgid "vmbuilder --help"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:572(title)
msgid "Base Parameters"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:574(para)
msgid ""
"As this example is based on <application>KVM</application> and Ubuntu 10.04 "
"LTS (Lucid Lynx), and we are likely to rebuild the same virtual machine "
"multiple time, we'll invoke vmbuilder with the following first parameters:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:580(command)
msgid ""
"sudo vmbuilder kvm ubuntu --suite lucid --flavour virtual --arch i386 -o --"
"libvirt qemu:///system"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:583(para)
msgid ""
"The <emphasis>--suite</emphasis> defines the Ubuntu release, the <emphasis>--"
"flavour</emphasis> specifies that we want to use the virtual kernel (that's "
"the one used to build a JeOS image), the <emphasis>--arch</emphasis> tells "
"that we want to use a 32 bit machine, the <emphasis>-o</emphasis> tells "
"vmbuilder to overwrite the previous version of the VM and the <emphasis>--"
"libvirt</emphasis> tells to inform the local virtualization environment to "
"add the resulting VM to the list of available machines."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:591(para)
msgid "Notes:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:597(para)
msgid ""
"Because of the nature of operations performed by vmbuilder, it needs to have "
"root privilege, hence the use of sudo."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:602(para)
msgid ""
"If your virtual machine needs to use more than 3Gb of ram, you should build "
"a 64 bit machine (--arch amd64)."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:607(para)
msgid ""
"Until Ubuntu 8.10, the virtual kernel was only built for 32 bit "
"architecture, so if you want to define an amd64 machine on Hardy, you should "
"use <emphasis>--flavour</emphasis> server instead."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:615(title)
msgid "JeOS Installation Parameters"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:618(title)
msgid "JeOS Networking"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:621(title)
msgid "Assigning a fixed IP address"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:623(para)
msgid ""
"As a virtual appliance that may be deployed on various very different "
"networks, it is very difficult to know what the actual network will look "
"like. In order to simplify configuration, it is a good idea to take an "
"approach similar to what network hardware vendors usually do, namely "
"assigning an initial fixed IP address to the appliance in a private class "
"network that you will provide in your documentation. An address in the range "
"192.168.0.0/255 is usually a good choice."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:630(para)
msgid "To do this we'll use the following parameters:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:636(para)
msgid ""
"<emphasis>--ip ADDRESS</emphasis>: IP address in dotted form (defaults to "
"dhcp if not specified)"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:641(para)
msgid ""
"<emphasis>--mask VALUE</emphasis>: IP mask in dotted form (default: "
"255.255.255.0)"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:646(para)
msgid "<emphasis>--net VALUE</emphasis>: IP net address (default: X.X.X.0)"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:651(para)
msgid "<emphasis>--bcast VALUE</emphasis>: IP broadcast (default: X.X.X.255)"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:656(para)
msgid "<emphasis>--gw ADDRESS</emphasis>: Gateway address (default: X.X.X.1)"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:661(para)
msgid ""
"<emphasis>--dns ADDRESS</emphasis>: Name server address (default: X.X.X.1)"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:667(para)
msgid ""
"We assume for now that default values are good enough, so the resulting "
"invocation becomes:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:672(command)
msgid ""
"sudo vmbuilder kvm ubuntu --suite lucid --flavour virtual --arch i386 -o --"
"libvirt qemu:///system --ip 192.168.0.100"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:677(title)
msgid "Modifying the libvirt Template to use Bridging"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:679(para)
msgid ""
"Because our appliance will be likely to need to be accessed by remote hosts, "
"we need to configure libvirt so that the appliance uses bridge networking. "
"To do this we use vmbuilder template mechanism to modify the default one."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:684(para)
msgid ""
"In our working directory we create the template hierarchy and copy the "
"default template:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:689(command)
msgid "mkdir -p VMBuilder/plugins/libvirt/templates"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:690(command)
msgid "cp /etc/vmbuilder/libvirt/* VMBuilder/plugins/libvirt/templates/"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:693(para)
msgid ""
"We can then edit "
"<filename>VMBuilder/plugins/libvirt/templates/libvirtxml.tmpl</filename> to "
"change:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:697(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"          &lt;interface type='network'&gt;\n"
"            &lt;source network='default'/&gt;\n"
"          &lt;/interface&gt;\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:703(para)
msgid "To:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:707(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"          &lt;interface type='bridge'&gt;\n"
"            &lt;source bridge='br0'/&gt;\n"
"          &lt;/interface&gt;\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:717(title) serverguide/C/installation.xml:459(title)
msgid "Partitioning"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:719(para)
msgid ""
"Partitioning of the virtual appliance will have to take into consideration "
"what you are planning to do with is. Because most appliances want to have a "
"separate storage for data, having a separate <filename>/var</filename> would "
"make sense."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:724(para)
msgid ""
"In order to do this vmbuilder provides us with <emphasis>--part</emphasis>:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:728(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"--part PATH\n"
"  Allows you to specify a partition table in a partition file, located at "
"PATH. Each line of the partition file should specify\n"
"  (root first):\n"
"      mountpoint size\n"
"  where  size  is  in megabytes. You can have up to 4 virtual disks, a new "
"disk starts on a\n"
"  line with ’---’.  ie :\n"
"      root 1000\n"
"      /opt 1000\n"
"      swap 256\n"
"      ---\n"
"      /var 2000\n"
"      /log 1500\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:743(para)
msgid ""
"In our case we will define a text file name "
"<filename>vmbuilder.partition</filename> which will contain the following:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:747(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"root 8000\n"
"swap 4000\n"
"---\n"
"/var 20000\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:755(para)
msgid ""
"Note that as we are using virtual disk images, the actual sizes that we put "
"here are maximum sizes for these volumes."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:760(para)
msgid "Our command line now looks like:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:765(command)
msgid ""
"sudo vmbuilder kvm ubuntu --suite lucid --flavour virtual --arch i386 \\ -o -"
"-libvirt qemu:///system --ip 192.168.0.100 --part vmbuilder.partition"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:770(para)
msgid ""
"Using a \"\\\" in a command will allow long command strings to wrap to the "
"next line."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:777(title)
msgid "User and Password"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:779(para)
msgid ""
"Again setting up a virtual appliance, you will need to provide a default "
"user and password that is generic so that you can include it in your "
"documentation. We will see later on in this tutorial how we will provide "
"some security by defining a script that will be run the first time a user "
"actually logs in the appliance, that will, among other things, ask him to "
"change his password. In this example I will use <emphasis>'user'</emphasis> "
"as my user name, and <emphasis>'default'</emphasis> as the password."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:787(para)
msgid "To do this we use the following optional parameters:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:793(para)
msgid ""
"<emphasis>--user USERNAME:</emphasis> Sets the name of the user to be added. "
"Default: ubuntu."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:798(para)
msgid ""
"<emphasis>--name FULLNAME:</emphasis> Sets the full name of the user to be "
"added. Default: Ubuntu."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:803(para)
msgid ""
"<emphasis>--pass PASSWORD:</emphasis> Sets the password for the user. "
"Default: ubuntu."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:809(para)
msgid "Our resulting command line becomes:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:814(command)
msgid ""
"sudo vmbuilder kvm ubuntu --suite lucid --flavour virtual --arch i386 \\ -o -"
"-libvirt qemu:///system --ip 192.168.0.100 --part vmbuilder.partition \\ --"
"user user --name user --pass default"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:822(title)
msgid "Installing Required Packages"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:824(para)
msgid ""
"In this example we will be installing a package "
"<application>(Limesurvey)</application> that accesses a "
"<application>MySQL</application> database and has a web interface. We will "
"therefore require our OS to provide us with:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:831(para)
msgid "Apache"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:832(para)
msgid "PHP"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:833(para) serverguide/C/databases.xml:19(trademark) serverguide/C/databases.xml:31(title)
msgid "MySQL"
msgstr "MySQL"

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:834(para) serverguide/C/remote-administration.xml:20(title)
msgid "OpenSSH Server"
msgstr "OpenSSH 서버"

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:835(para)
msgid "Limesurvey (as an example application that we have packaged)"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:838(para)
msgid ""
"This is done using vmbuilder by specifying the --addpkg option multiple "
"times:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:842(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"--addpkg PKG\n"
"  Install PKG into the guest (can be specfied multiple times)\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:847(para)
msgid ""
"However, due to the way vmbuilder operates, packages that have to ask "
"questions to the user during the post install phase are not supported and "
"should instead be installed while interactivity can occur. This is the case "
"of Limesurvey, which we will have to install later, once the user logs in."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:853(para)
msgid ""
"Other packages that ask simple debconf question, such as <application>mysql-"
"server</application> asking to set a password, the package can be installed "
"immediately, but we will have to reconfigure it the first time the user logs "
"in."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:859(para)
msgid ""
"If some packages that we need to install are not in main, we need to enable "
"the additional repositories using --comp and --ppa:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:863(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"--components COMP1,COMP2,...,COMPN\n"
"           A comma separated list of distro components to include (e.g. "
"main,universe). This defaults\n"
"           to \"main\"\n"
"--ppa=PPA  Add ppa belonging to PPA to the vm's sources.list.\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:870(para)
msgid ""
"Limesurvey not being part of the archive at the moment, we'll specify it's "
"PPA (personal package archive) address so that it is added to the VM "
"<filename>/etc/apt/source.list</filename>, so we add the following options "
"to the command line:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:876(command)
msgid ""
"--addpkg apache2 --addpkg apache2-mpm-prefork --addpkg apache2-utils --"
"addpkg apache2.2-common \\ --addpkg dbconfig-common --addpkg libapache2-mod-"
"php5 --addpkg mysql-client --addpkg php5-cli \\ --addpkg php5-gd --addpkg "
"php5-ldap --addpkg php5-mysql --addpkg wwwconfig-common \\ --addpkg mysql-"
"server --ppa nijaba"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:883(title)
msgid "OpenSSH"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:885(para)
msgid ""
"Another convenient tool that we want to have on our appliance is OpenSSH, as "
"it will allow our admins to access the appliance remotely. However, pushing "
"in the wild an appliance with a pre-installed OpenSSH server is a big "
"security risk as all these server will share the same secret key, making it "
"very easy for hackers to target our appliance with all the tools they need "
"to crack it open in a breeze. As for the user password, we will instead rely "
"on a script that will install OpenSSH the first time a user logs in so that "
"the key generated will be different for each appliance. For this we'll use a "
"<emphasis>--firstboot</emphasis> script, as it does not need any user "
"interaction."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:897(title)
msgid "Speed Considerations"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:900(title)
msgid "Package Caching"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:902(para)
msgid ""
"When vmbuilder creates builds your system, it has to go fetch each one of "
"the packages that composes it over the network to one of the official "
"repositories, which, depending on your internet connection speed and the "
"load of the mirror, can have a big impact on the actual build time. In order "
"to reduce this, it is recommended to either have a local repository (which "
"can be created using <application>apt-mirror</application>) or using a "
"caching proxy such as <application>apt-proxy</application>. The later option "
"being much simpler to implement and requiring less disk space, it is the one "
"we will pick in this tutorial. To install it, simply type:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:912(command)
msgid "sudo apt-get install apt-proxy"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:915(para)
msgid ""
"Once this is complete, your (empty) proxy is ready for use on "
"http://mirroraddress:9999 and will find ubuntu repository under /ubuntu. For "
"vmbuilder to use it, we'll have to use the <emphasis>--mirror</emphasis> "
"option:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:920(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"--mirror=URL  Use Ubuntu mirror at URL instead of the default, which\n"
"              is http://archive.ubuntu.com/ubuntu for official\n"
"              arches and http://ports.ubuntu.com/ubuntu-ports\n"
"              otherwise\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:927(para)
msgid "So we add to the command line:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:932(command)
msgid "--mirror http://mirroraddress:9999/ubuntu"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:936(para)
msgid ""
"The mirror address specified here will also be used in the "
"<filename>/etc/apt/sources.list</filename> of the newly created guest, so it "
"is useful to specify here an address that can be resolved by the guest or to "
"plan on reseting this address later on, such as in a <emphasis>--"
"firstboot</emphasis> script."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:945(title)
msgid "Install a Local Mirror"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:947(para)
msgid ""
"If we are in a larger environment, it may make sense to setup a local mirror "
"of the Ubuntu repositories. The package apt-mirror provides you with a "
"script that will handle the mirroring for you. You should plan on having "
"about 20 gigabyte of free space per supported release and architecture."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:953(para)
msgid ""
"By default, <application>apt-mirror</application> uses the configuration "
"file in <filename>/etc/apt/mirror.list</filename>. As it is set up, it will "
"replicate only the architecture of the local machine. If you would like to "
"support other architectures on your mirror, simply duplicate the lines "
"starting with “deb”, replacing the deb keyword by /deb-{arch} where arch can "
"be i386, amd64, etc... For example, on an amd64 machine, to have the i386 "
"archives as well, you will have:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:960(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"deb  http://archive.ubuntu.com/ubuntu lucid main restricted universe "
"multiverse \n"
"/deb-i386  http://archive.ubuntu.com/ubuntu lucid main restricted universe "
"multiverse\n"
"\n"
"deb  http://archive.ubuntu.com/ubuntu lucid-updates main restricted universe "
"multiverse \n"
"/deb-i386  http://archive.ubuntu.com/ubuntu lucid-updates main restricted "
"universe multiverse \n"
"\n"
"deb http://archive.ubuntu.com/ubuntu/ lucid-backports main restricted "
"universe multiverse \n"
"/deb-i386  http://archive.ubuntu.com/ubuntu lucid-backports main restricted "
"universe multiverse \n"
"\n"
"deb http://security.ubuntu.com/ubuntu lucid-security main restricted "
"universe multiverse \n"
"/deb-i386  http://security.ubuntu.com/ubuntu lucid-security main restricted "
"universe multiverse \n"
"\n"
"deb http://archive.ubuntu.com/ubuntu lucid main/debian-installer "
"restricted/debian-installer universe/debian-installer multiverse/debian-"
"installer \n"
"/deb-i386 http://archive.ubuntu.com/ubuntu lucid main/debian-installer "
"restricted/debian-installer universe/debian-installer multiverse/debian-"
"installer \n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:977(para)
msgid ""
"Notice that the source packages are not mirrored as they are seldom used "
"compared to the binaries and they do take a lot more space, but they can be "
"easily added to the list."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:982(para)
msgid ""
"Once the mirror has finished replicating (and this can be quite long), you "
"need to configure Apache so that your mirror files (in "
"<filename>/var/spool/apt-mirror</filename> if you did not change the "
"default), are published by your Apache server. For more information on "
"Apache see <xref linkend=\"httpd\"/>."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:991(title)
msgid "Installing in a RAM Disk"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:993(para)
msgid ""
"As you can easily imagine, writing to RAM is a <emphasis>LOT</emphasis> "
"faster than writing to disk. If you have some free memory, letting vmbuilder "
"perform its operation in a RAMdisk will help a lot and the option <emphasis>-"
"-tmpfs</emphasis> will help you do just that:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:999(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"--tmpfs OPTS  Use a tmpfs as the working directory, specifying its\n"
"              size or \"-\" to use tmpfs default (suid,dev,size=1G).\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1004(para)
msgid ""
"So adding <command>--tmpfs -</command> sounds like a very good idea if you "
"have 1G of free ram."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1011(title)
msgid "Package the Application"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1013(para)
msgid "Two option are available to us:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1019(para)
msgid ""
"The recommended method to do so is to make a <emphasis>Debian</emphasis> "
"package. Since this is outside of the scope of this tutorial, we will not "
"perform this here and invite the reader to read the documentation on how to "
"do this in the <ulink url=\"https://wiki.ubuntu.com/PackagingGuide\">Ubuntu "
"Packaging Guide</ulink>. In this case it is also a good idea to setup a "
"repository for your package so that updates can be conveniently pulled from "
"it. See the <ulink url=\"http://www.debian-"
"administration.org/articles/286\">Debian Administration</ulink> article for "
"a tutorial on this."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1028(para)
msgid ""
"Manually install the application under <filename>/opt</filename> as "
"recommended by the <ulink url=\"http://www.pathname.com/fhs/\">FHS "
"guidelines</ulink>."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1035(para)
msgid ""
"In our case we'll use <application>Limesurvey</application> as example web "
"application for which we wish to provide a virtual appliance. As noted "
"before, we've made a version of the package available in a PPA (Personal "
"Package Archive)."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1042(title)
msgid "Finishing Install"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1045(title)
msgid "First Boot"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1047(para)
msgid ""
"As we mentioned earlier, the first time the machine boots we'll need to "
"install <application>openssh-server</application> so that the key generated "
"for it is unique for each machine. To do this, we'll write a script called "
"<filename>boot.sh</filename> as follows:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1053(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"# This script will run the first time the virtual machine boots\n"
"# It is ran as root.\n"
"\n"
"apt-get update\n"
"apt-get install -qqy --force-yes openssh-server\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1061(para)
msgid ""
"And we add the <command>--firstboot boot.sh</command> option to our command "
"line."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1067(title)
msgid "First Login"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1069(para)
msgid ""
"Mysql and Limesurvey needing some user interaction during their setup, we'll "
"set them up the first time a user logs in using a script named login.sh. "
"We'll also use this script to let the user specify:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1075(para)
msgid "His own password"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1076(para)
msgid "Define the keyboard and other locale info he wants to use"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1079(para)
msgid "So we'll define <filename>login.sh</filename> as follows:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1083(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"# This script is ran the first time a user logs in\n"
"\n"
"echo \"Your appliance is about to be finished to be set up.\"\n"
"echo \"In order to do it, we'll need to ask you a few questions,\"\n"
"echo \"starting by changing your user password.\"\n"
"\n"
"passwd\n"
"\n"
"#give the opportunity to change the keyboard\n"
"sudo dpkg-reconfigure console-setup\n"
"\n"
"#configure the mysql server root password\n"
"sudo dpkg-reconfigure mysql-server-5.0\n"
"\n"
"#install limesurvey\n"
"sudo apt-get install -qqy --force-yes limesurvey\n"
"\n"
"echo \"Your appliance is now configured.  To use it point your\"\n"
"echo \"browser to http://serverip/limesurvey/admin\"\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1105(para)
msgid ""
"And we add the <command>--firstlogin login.sh</command> option to our "
"command line."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1112(title)
msgid "Useful Additions"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1115(title)
msgid "Configuring Automatic Updates"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1117(para)
msgid ""
"To have your system be configured to update itself on a regular basis, we "
"will just install <application>unattended-upgrades</application>, so we add "
"the following option to our command line:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1123(command)
msgid "--addpkg unattended-upgrades"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1126(para)
msgid ""
"As we have put our application package in a PPA, the process will update not "
"only the system, but also the application each time we update the version in "
"the PPA."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1133(title)
msgid "ACPI Event Handling"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1135(para)
msgid ""
"For your virtual machine to be able to handle restart and shutdown events it "
"is being sent, it is a good idea to install the acpid package as well. To do "
"this we just add the following option:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1141(command)
msgid "--addpkg acpid"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1147(title)
msgid "Final Command"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1149(para)
msgid "Here is the command with all the options discussed above:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1154(command)
msgid ""
"sudo vmbuilder kvm ubuntu --suite lucid --flavour virtual --arch i386 -o \\ -"
"-libvirt qemu:///system --ip 192.168.0.100 --part vmbuilder.partition --user "
"user \\ --name user --pass default --addpkg apache2 --addpkg apache2-mpm-"
"prefork \\ --addpkg apache2-utils --addpkg apache2.2-common --addpkg "
"dbconfig-common \\ --addpkg libapache2-mod-php5 --addpkg mysql-client --"
"addpkg php5-cli \\ --addpkg php5-gd --addpkg php5-ldap --addpkg php5-mysql --"
"addpkg wwwconfig-common \\ --addpkg mysql-server --addpkg unattended-"
"upgrades --addpkg acpid --ppa nijaba \\ --mirror "
"http://mirroraddress:9999/ubuntu --tmpfs - --firstboot boot.sh \\ --"
"firstlogin login.sh es"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1169(para)
msgid ""
"If you are interested in learning more, have questions or suggestions, "
"please contact the Ubuntu Server Team at:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1174(para)
msgid "IRC: #ubuntu-server on freenode"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1179(para)
msgid ""
"Mailing list: <ulink url=\"https://lists.ubuntu.com/mailman/listinfo/ubuntu-"
"server\">ubuntu-server at lists.ubuntu.com</ulink>"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1184(para)
msgid ""
"Also, see the <ulink "
"url=\"https://help.ubuntu.com/community/JeOSVMBuilder\">JeOSVMBuilder Ubuntu "
"Wiki</ulink> page."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1192(title)
msgid "UEC"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1195(title) serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:2026(title) serverguide/C/monitoring.xml:15(title) serverguide/C/lamp-applications.xml:17(title) serverguide/C/installation.xml:928(title) serverguide/C/dns.xml:64(title) serverguide/C/chat.xml:17(title) serverguide/C/backups.xml:541(title)
msgid "Overview"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1197(para)
msgid ""
"This tutorial covers <application>UEC</application> installation from the "
"Ubuntu 10.04 LTS Server Edition CD, and assumes a basic network topology, "
"with a single system serving as the <emphasis>\"all-in-one "
"controller\"</emphasis>, and one or more nodes attached."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1202(para)
msgid ""
"From this Tutorial you will learn how to install, configure, register and "
"perform several operations on a basic <application>UEC</application> setup "
"that results in a cloud with a one controller <emphasis>\"front-"
"end\"</emphasis> and one or several node(s) for running Virtual Machine (VM) "
"instances. You will also use examples to help get you started using your own "
"private compute cloud."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1210(title)
msgid "Prerequisites"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1212(para)
msgid ""
"To deploy a minimal cloud infrastructure, you’ll need at least "
"<emphasis>two</emphasis> dedicated systems:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1218(para)
msgid "A front end."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1223(para)
msgid "One or more node(s)."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1229(para)
msgid ""
"The following are recommendations, rather than fixed requirements. However, "
"our experience in developing this documentation indicated the following "
"suggestions."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1234(title)
msgid "Front End Requirements"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1236(para)
msgid "Use the following table for a system that will run one or more of:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1241(para)
msgid "Cloud Controller (CLC)"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1242(para)
msgid "Cluster Controller (CC)"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1243(para)
msgid "Walrus (the S3-like storage service)"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1244(para)
msgid "Storage Controller (SC)"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1248(title)
msgid "UEC Front End Requirements"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1256(para) serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1318(para)
msgid "Hardware"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1257(para) serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1319(para)
msgid "Minimum"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1258(para) serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1320(para)
msgid "Suggested"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1259(para) serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1321(para)
msgid "Notes"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1264(para) serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1326(para)
msgid "CPU"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1265(para)
msgid "1 GHz"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1266(para)
msgid "2 x 2 GHz"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1267(para)
msgid ""
"For an <emphasis>all-in-one</emphasis> front end, it helps to have at least "
"a dual core processor."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1270(para) serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1332(para)
msgid "Memory"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1271(para)
msgid "512 MB"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1272(para)
msgid "2 GB"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1273(para)
msgid "The Java web front end benefits from lots of available memory."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1276(para) serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1338(para)
msgid "Disk"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1277(para) serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1339(para)
msgid "5400 RPM IDE"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1278(para)
msgid "7200 RPM SATA"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1279(para)
msgid ""
"Slower disks will work, but will yield much longer instance startup times."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1282(para) serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1344(para)
msgid "Disk Space"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1283(para) serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1345(para)
msgid "40 GB"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1284(para)
msgid "200 GB"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1285(para)
msgid ""
"40GB is only enough space for only a single image, cache, etc., Eucalyptus "
"does not like to run out of disk space."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1288(para) serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1350(para) serverguide/C/network-config.xml:13(title)
msgid "Networking"
msgstr "네트워킹"

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1289(para) serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1351(para)
msgid "100 Mbps"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1290(para) serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1352(para)
msgid "1000 Mbps"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1291(para) serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1353(para)
msgid ""
"Machine images are hundreds of MB, and need to be copied over the network to "
"nodes."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1299(title)
msgid "Node Requirements"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1301(para)
msgid "The other system(s) are <emphasis>nodes</emphasis>, which will run::"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1306(para)
msgid "the Node Controller (NC)"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1310(title)
msgid "UEC Node Requirements"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1327(para)
msgid "VT Extensions"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1328(para)
msgid "VT, 64-bit, Multicore"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1329(para)
msgid ""
"64-bit can run both i386, and amd64 instances; by default, Eucalyptus will "
"only run 1 VM per CPU core on a Node."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1333(para)
msgid "1 GB"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1334(para)
msgid "4 GB"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1335(para)
msgid "Additional memory means more, and larger guests."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1340(para)
msgid "7200 RPM SATA or SCSI"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1341(para)
msgid ""
"Eucalyptus nodes are disk-intensive; I/O wait will likely be the performance "
"bottleneck."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1346(para)
msgid "100 GB"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1347(para)
msgid ""
"Images will be cached locally, Eucalyptus does not like to run out of disk "
"space."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1363(title)
msgid "Installing the Cloud/Cluster/Storage/Walrus Front End Server"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1367(para)
msgid "Download the Ubuntu 10.04 LTS Server ISO file, and burn it to a CD."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1372(para) serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1418(para)
msgid ""
"When you boot, select <emphasis>“Install Ubuntu Enterprise Cloud”</emphasis>."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1377(para)
msgid ""
"When asked whether you want a <emphasis>“Cluster”</emphasis> or a "
"<emphasis>“Node”</emphasis> install, select <emphasis>“Cluster”</emphasis>."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1383(para)
msgid ""
"It will ask two other cloud-specific questions during the course of the "
"install:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1388(para)
msgid "Name of your cluster."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1391(para)
msgid "e.g. <emphasis>cluster1</emphasis>."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1394(para)
msgid ""
"A range of public IP addresses on the LAN that the cloud can allocate to "
"instances."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1397(para)
msgid "e.g. <emphasis>192.168.1.200-192.168.1.249</emphasis>."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1405(title)
msgid "Installing the Node Controller(s)"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1407(para)
msgid ""
"The node controller install is even simpler. Just make sure that you are "
"connected to the network on which the cloud/cluster controller is already "
"running."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1413(para)
msgid "Boot from the same ISO on the node(s)."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1423(para)
msgid "Select <emphasis>“Install Ubuntu Enterprise Cloud”</emphasis>."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1428(para)
msgid ""
"It should detect the Cluster and preselect <emphasis>“Node”</emphasis> "
"install for you."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1433(para)
msgid "Confirm the partitioning scheme."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1438(para)
msgid ""
"The rest of the installation should proceed uninterrupted; complete the "
"installation and reboot the node."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1446(title)
msgid "Register the Node(s)"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1448(para)
msgid ""
"Nodes are the physical systems within <application>UEC</application> that "
"actually run the virtual machine instances of the cloud."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1452(para)
msgid ""
"Once one or more Ubuntu Server node(s) are installed and running the "
"<application>eucalyptus-nc</application> service, log onto the "
"<emphasis>Cloud Controller (CLC)</emphasis> and run:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1458(command)
msgid "sudo euca_conf --no-rsync --discover-nodes"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1461(para)
msgid ""
"This will discover the systems on the network running the "
"<application>eucalyptus-nc</application> service, and the administrator can "
"confirm the registration of each node by its IP address."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1467(para)
msgid ""
"If you get prompted for passwords, or receive errors from scp, you may need "
"to revisit the key synchronization instructions at <ulink "
"url=\"https://help.ubuntu.com/community/UEC/NodeInstallation\">UEC/NodeInstal"
"lation</ulink>."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1475(title)
msgid "Obtain Credentials"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1477(para)
msgid ""
"After installing and booting the <emphasis>Cloud Controller</emphasis>, "
"users of the cloud will need to retrieve their credentials. This can be done "
"either through a web browser, or at the command line."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1483(title)
msgid "From a Web Browser"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1487(para)
msgid ""
"From your web browser (either remotely or on your Ubuntu server) access the "
"following URL:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1490(programlisting) serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1743(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"https://&lt;cloud-controller-ip-address&gt;:8443/\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1495(para)
msgid ""
"You must use a secure connection, so make sure you use \"https\" not "
"\"http\" in your URL. You will get a security certificate warning. You will "
"have to add an exception to view the page. If you do not accept it you will "
"not be able to view the Eucalyptus configuration page."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1503(para)
msgid ""
"Use username <emphasis>'admin'</emphasis> and password "
"<emphasis>'admin'</emphasis> for the first time login (you will be prompted "
"to change your password)."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1509(para)
msgid ""
"Then follow the on-screen instructions to update the admin password and "
"email address."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1514(para)
msgid ""
"Once the first time configuration process is completed, click the "
"<emphasis>'credentials'</emphasis> tab located in the top-left portion of "
"the screen."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1520(para)
msgid ""
"Click the <emphasis>'Download Credentials'</emphasis> button to get your "
"certificates."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1525(para)
msgid "Save them to <filename>~/.euca</filename>."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1530(para)
msgid ""
"Unzip the downloaded zip file into a safe location "
"(<filename>~/.euca</filename>)."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1534(command)
msgid "unzip -d ~/.euca mycreds.zip"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1541(title)
msgid "From a Command Line"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1545(para)
msgid ""
"Alternatively, if you are on the command line of the <emphasis>Cloud "
"Controller</emphasis>, you can run:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1549(command)
msgid "mkdir -p ~/.euca"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1550(command)
msgid "chmod 700 ~/.euca"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1551(command)
msgid "cd ~/.euca"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1552(command)
msgid "sudo euca_conf --get-credentials mycreds.zip"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1553(command)
msgid "unzip mycreds.zip"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1554(command)
msgid "cd -"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1561(title)
msgid "Extracting and Using Your Credentials"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1563(para)
msgid ""
"Now you will need to setup EC2 API and AMI tools on your server using X.509 "
"certificates."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1569(para)
msgid ""
"Source the included <emphasis>\"eucarc\"</emphasis> file to set up your "
"Eucalyptus environment:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1573(command) serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1600(command)
msgid ". ~/.euca/eucarc"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1577(para)
msgid ""
"You may additionally wish to add this command to your "
"<filename>~/.bashrc</filename> file so that your Eucalyptus environment is "
"set up automatically when you log in. Eucalyptus treats this set of "
"credentials as <emphasis>'administrator'</emphasis> credentials that allow "
"the holder global privileges across the cloud. As such, they should be "
"protected in the same way that other elevated-priority access is protected "
"(e.g. should not be made visible to the general user population)."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1584(command)
msgid ""
"echo \"[ -r ~/.euca/eucarc ] &amp;&amp; . ~/.euca/eucarc\" &gt;&gt; ~/.bashrc"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1588(para)
msgid "Install the required cloud user tools:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1592(command)
msgid "sudo apt-get install euca2ools"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1596(para)
msgid ""
"To validate that everything is working correctly, get the local cluster "
"availability details:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1601(command)
msgid "euca-describe-availability-zones verbose"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1602(computeroutput)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"AVAILABILITYZONE   myowncloud                 192.168.1.1\n"
"AVAILABILITYZONE   |- vm types                free / max   cpu   ram  disk\n"
"AVAILABILITYZONE   |- m1.small                0004 / 0004   1    128     2\n"
"AVAILABILITYZONE   |- c1.medium               0004 / 0004   1    256     5\n"
"AVAILABILITYZONE   |- m1.large                0002 / 0002   2    512    10\n"
"AVAILABILITYZONE   |- m1.xlarge               0002 / 0002   2   1024    20\n"
"AVAILABILITYZONE   |- c1.xlarge               0001 / 0001   4   2048    20"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1612(para)
msgid "Your output from the above command will vary."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1622(title)
msgid "Running an Image"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1624(para)
msgid "There are multiple ways to instantiate an image in UEC:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1629(para)
msgid "Use the command line."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1630(para)
msgid ""
"Use one of the UEC compatible management tools such as "
"<emphasis>Landscape</emphasis>."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1632(para)
msgid ""
"Use the <ulink "
"url=\"https://help.ubuntu.com/community/UEC/ElasticFox\">ElasticFox</ulink> "
"extension to Firefox."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1638(para)
msgid "Here we will describe the process from the command line:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1644(para)
msgid ""
"Before running an instance of your image, you should first create a "
"<emphasis>keypair</emphasis> (ssh key) that you can use to log into your "
"instance as root, once it boots. The key is stored, so you will only have to "
"do this once."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1648(para)
msgid "Run the following command:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1651(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"if [ ! -e ~/.euca/mykey.priv ]; then\n"
"    touch ~/.euca/mykey.priv\n"
"    chmod 0600 ~/.euca/mykey.priv\n"
"    euca-add-keypair mykey &gt; ~/.euca/mykey.priv\n"
"fi\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1659(para)
msgid ""
"You can call your key whatever you like (in this example, the key is called "
"<emphasis>'mykey'</emphasis>), but remember what it is called. If you "
"forget, you can always run <command>euca-describe-keypairs</command> to get "
"a list of created keys stored in the system."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1666(para)
msgid "You must also allow access to port 22 in your instances:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1670(command)
msgid "euca-describe-groups"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1671(command)
msgid "euca-authorize default -P tcp -p 22 -s 0.0.0.0/0"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1675(para)
msgid "Next, you can create instances of your registered image:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1679(command)
msgid "euca-run-instances $EMI -k mykey -t c1.medium"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1682(para)
msgid ""
"If you receive an error regarding <emphasis>image_id</emphasis>, you may "
"find it by viewing Images page or click <emphasis>\"How to Run\"</emphasis> "
"on the <emphasis>Store</emphasis> page to see the sample command."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1689(para)
msgid ""
"The first time you run an instance, the system will be setting up caches for "
"the image from which it will be created. This can often take some time the "
"first time an instance is run given that VM images are usually quite large."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1693(para)
msgid "To monitor the state of your instance, run:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1697(command)
msgid "watch -n5 euca-describe-instances"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1699(para)
msgid ""
"In the output, you should see information about the instance, including its "
"state. While first-time caching is being performed, the instance's state "
"will be <emphasis>'pending'</emphasis>."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1705(para)
msgid ""
"When the instance is fully started, the above state will become "
"<emphasis>'running'</emphasis>. Look at the IP address assigned to your "
"instance in the output, then connect to it:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1710(command)
msgid ""
"IPADDR=$(euca-describe-instances | grep $EMI | grep running | tail -n1 | awk "
"'{print $4}')"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1711(command)
msgid "ssh -i ~/.euca/mykey.priv ubuntu@$IPADDR"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1715(para)
msgid ""
"And when you are done with this instance, exit your SSH connection, then "
"terminate your instance:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1719(command)
msgid ""
"INSTANCEID=$(euca-describe-instances | grep $EMI | grep running | tail -n1 | "
"awk '{print $2}')"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1720(command)
msgid "euca-terminate-instances $INSTANCEID"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1727(title)
msgid "Install an Image from the Store"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1729(para)
msgid ""
"The following is by far the simplest way to install an image. However, "
"advanced users may be interested in learning how to <ulink "
"url=\"https://help.ubuntu.com/community/UEC/BundlingImages\">Bundle their "
"own image</ulink>."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1734(para)
msgid ""
"The simplest way to add an image to <application>UEC</application> is to "
"install it from the Image Store on the UEC web interface."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1740(para)
msgid ""
"Access the web interface at the following URL (Make sure you specify https):"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1748(para)
msgid ""
"Enter your login and password (if requested, as you may still be logged in "
"from earlier)."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1753(para)
msgid "Click on the <emphasis>Store</emphasis> tab."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1758(para)
msgid "Browse available images."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1763(para)
msgid "Click on <emphasis>install</emphasis> for the image you want."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1769(para)
msgid ""
"Once the image has been downloaded and installed, you can click on "
"<emphasis>\"How to run?\"</emphasis> that will be displayed below the image "
"button to view the command to execute to instantiate (start) this image. The "
"image will also appear on the list given on the <emphasis>Image</emphasis> "
"tab."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1777(title) serverguide/C/dns.xml:619(title)
msgid "More Information"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1779(para)
msgid ""
"How to use the <ulink "
"url=\"https://help.ubuntu.com/community/UEC/StorageController\">Storage "
"Controller</ulink>"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1783(para)
msgid "Controlling eucalyptus services:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1788(para)
msgid ""
"sudo service eucalyptus [start|stop|restart] (on the CLC/CC/SC/Walrus side)"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1789(para)
msgid "sudo service eucalyptus-nc [start|stop|restart] (on the Node side)"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1792(para)
msgid "Locations of some important files:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1799(emphasis)
msgid "Log files:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1802(para)
msgid "/var/log/eucalyptus"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1807(emphasis)
msgid "Configuration files:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1810(para)
msgid "/etc/eucalyptus"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1815(emphasis)
msgid "Database:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1818(para)
msgid "/var/lib/eucalyptus/db"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1823(emphasis)
msgid "Keys:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1826(para)
msgid "/var/lib/eucalyptus"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1827(para)
msgid "/var/lib/eucalyptus/.ssh"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1833(para)
msgid ""
"Don't forget to source your <filename>~/.euca/eucarc</filename> before "
"running the client tools."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1844(para)
msgid ""
"For information on loading instances see the <ulink "
"url=\"https://help.ubuntu.com/community/Eucalyptus\">Eucalyptus Wiki</ulink> "
"page."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1849(para)
msgid ""
"<ulink url=\"http://open.eucalyptus.com/\">Eucalyptus Project Site (forums, "
"documentation, downloads)</ulink>."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1854(para)
msgid ""
"<ulink url=\"https://launchpad.net/eucalyptus/\">Eucalyptus on Launchpad "
"(bugs, code)</ulink>."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1859(para)
msgid ""
"<ulink "
"url=\"http://open.eucalyptus.com/wiki/EucalyptusTroubleshooting_v1.5\">Eucaly"
"ptus Troubleshooting (1.5)</ulink>."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1864(para)
msgid ""
"<ulink url=\"http://support.rightscale.com/2._References/02-"
"Cloud_Infrastructures/Eucalyptus/03-"
"Administration_Guide/Register_with_RightScale\"> Register your cloud with "
"RightScale</ulink>."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1870(para)
msgid ""
"You can also find help in the <emphasis>#ubuntu-virt</emphasis>, "
"<emphasis>#eucalyptus</emphasis>, and <emphasis>#ubuntu-server</emphasis> "
"IRC channels on <ulink url=\"http://freenode.net\">Freenode</ulink>."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1879(title)
msgid "Glossary"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1881(para)
msgid ""
"The Ubuntu Enterprise Cloud documentation uses terminology that might be "
"unfamiliar to some readers. This page is intended to provide a glossary of "
"such terms and acronyms."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1888(para)
msgid ""
"<emphasis>Cloud</emphasis> - A federated set of physical machines that offer "
"computing resources through virtual machines, provisioned and recollected "
"dynamically."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1894(para)
msgid ""
"<emphasis>Cloud Controller (CLC)</emphasis> - Eucalyptus component that "
"provides the web UI (an https server on port 8443), and implements the "
"Amazon EC2 API. There should be only one Cloud Controller in an installation "
"of UEC. This service is provided by the Ubuntu <application>eucalyptus-"
"cloud</application> package."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1901(para)
msgid ""
"<emphasis>Cluster</emphasis> - A collection of nodes, associated with a "
"Cluster Controller. There can be more than one Cluster in an installation of "
"UEC. Clusters are sometimes physically separate sets of nodes. (e.g. floor1, "
"floor2, floor2)."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1907(para)
msgid ""
"<emphasis>Cluster Controller (CC)</emphasis> - Eucalyptus component that "
"manages collections of node resources. This service is provided by the "
"Ubuntu <application>eucalyptus-cc</application> package."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1913(para)
msgid "<emphasis>EBS</emphasis> - Elastic Block Storage."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1918(para)
msgid ""
"<emphasis>EC2</emphasis> - Elastic Compute Cloud. Amazon's pay-by-the-hour, "
"pay-by-the-gigabyte public cloud computing offering."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1923(para)
msgid "<emphasis>EKI</emphasis> - Eucalyptus Kernel Image."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1928(para)
msgid "<emphasis>EMI</emphasis> - Eucalyptus Machine Image."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1933(para)
msgid "<emphasis>ERI</emphasis> - Eucalyptus Ramdisk Image."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1938(para)
msgid ""
"<emphasis>Eucalyptus</emphasis> - Elastic Utility Computing Architecture for "
"Linking Your Programs To Useful Systems. An open source project originally "
"from the University of California at Santa Barbara, now supported by "
"Eucalyptus Systems, a Canonical Partner."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1945(para)
msgid ""
"<emphasis>Front-end</emphasis> - Physical machine hosting one (or more) of "
"the high level Eucalyptus components (cloud, walrus, storage controller, "
"cluster controller)."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1951(para)
msgid ""
"<emphasis>Node</emphasis> - A node is a physical machine that's capable of "
"running virtual machines, running a node controller. Within Ubuntu, this "
"generally means that the CPU has VT extensions, and can run the KVM "
"hypervisor."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1957(para)
msgid ""
"<emphasis>Node Controller (NC)</emphasis> - Eucalyptus component that runs "
"on nodes which host the virtual machines that comprise the cloud. This "
"service is provided by the Ubuntu package <application>eucalyptus-"
"nc</application>."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1963(para)
msgid ""
"<emphasis>S3</emphasis> - Simple Storage Service. Amazon's pay-by-the-"
"gigabyte persistent storage solution for EC2."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1968(para)
msgid ""
"<emphasis>Storage Controller (SC)</emphasis> - Eucalyptus component that "
"manages dynamic block storage services (EBS). Each 'cluster' in a Eucalyptus "
"installation can have its own Storage Controller. This component is provided "
"by the <application>eucalyptus-sc</application> package."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1975(para)
msgid ""
"<emphasis>UEC</emphasis> - Ubuntu Enterprise Cloud. Ubuntu's cloud computing "
"solution, based on Eucalyptus."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1980(para)
msgid "<emphasis>VM</emphasis> - Virtual Machine."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1985(para)
msgid ""
"<emphasis>VT</emphasis> - Virtualization Technology. An optional feature of "
"some modern CPUs, allowing for accelerated virtual machine hosting."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:1990(para)
msgid ""
"<emphasis>Walrus</emphasis> - Eucalyptus component that implements the "
"Amazon S3 API, used for storing VM images and user storage using S3 bucket "
"put/get abstractions."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:2000(title)
msgid "OpenNebula"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:2002(para)
msgid ""
"<application>OpenNebula</application> allows virtual machines to be placed "
"and re-placed dynamically on a pool of physical resources. This allows a "
"virtual machine to be hosted from any location available."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:2007(para)
msgid ""
"This section will detail configuring an OpenNebula cluster using three "
"machines: one <emphasis>Front-End</emphasis> host, and two <emphasis>Compute "
"Nodes</emphasis> used to run the virtual machines. The Compute Nodes will "
"also need a bridge configured to allow the virtual machines access to the "
"local network. For details see <xref linkend=\"bridging\"/>."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:2016(para)
msgid "First, from a terminal on the Front-End enter:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:2021(command)
msgid "sudo apt-get install opennebula"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:2024(para)
msgid "On each Compute Node install:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:2029(command)
msgid "sudo apt-get install opennebula-node"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:2032(para)
msgid ""
"In order to copy SSH keys, the <emphasis>oneadmin</emphasis> user will need "
"to have a password. On each machine execute:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:2037(command)
msgid "sudo passwd oneadmin"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:2040(para)
msgid ""
"Next, copy the <emphasis>oneadmin</emphasis> user's SSH key to the Compute "
"Nodes, and to the Front-End's <filename>authorized_keys</filename> file:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:2045(command)
msgid ""
"sudo scp /var/lib/one/.ssh/id_rsa.pub "
"oneadmin@node01:/var/lib/one/.ssh/authorized_keys"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:2046(command)
msgid ""
"sudo scp /var/lib/one/.ssh/id_rsa.pub "
"oneadmin@node02:/var/lib/one/.ssh/authorized_keys"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:2047(command)
msgid ""
"sudo sh -c \"cat /var/lib/one/.ssh/id_rsa.pub &gt;&gt; "
"/var/lib/one/.ssh/authorized_keys\""
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:2050(para)
msgid ""
"The SSH key for the Compute Nodes needs to be added to the "
"<filename>/etc/ssh/ssh_known_hosts</filename> file on the Front-End host. To "
"accomplish this <application>ssh</application> to each Compute Node as a "
"user other than <emphasis>oneadmin</emphasis>. Then exit from the SSH "
"session, and execute the following to copy the SSH key from "
"<filename>~/.ssh/known_hosts</filename> to "
"<filename>/etc/ssh/ssh_known_hosts</filename>:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:2057(command)
msgid ""
"sudo sh -c \"ssh-keygen -f .ssh/known_hosts -F node01 1&gt;&gt; "
"/etc/ssh/ssh_known_hosts\""
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:2058(command)
msgid ""
"sudo sh -c \"ssh-keygen -f .ssh/known_hosts -F node02 1&gt;&gt; "
"/etc/ssh/ssh_known_hosts\""
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:2062(para)
msgid ""
"Replace <emphasis>node01</emphasis> and <emphasis>node02</emphasis> with the "
"appropriate host names."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:2067(para)
msgid ""
"This allows the <emphasis>oneadmin</emphasis> to use "
"<application>scp</application>, without a password or manual intervention, "
"to deploy an image to the Compute Nodes."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:2072(para)
msgid ""
"On the Front-End create a directory to store the VM images, giving the "
"<emphasis>oneadmin</emphasis> user access to the directory:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:2077(command)
msgid "sudo mkdir /var/lib/one/images"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:2078(command)
msgid "sudo chown oneadmin /var/lib/one/images/"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:2081(para)
msgid ""
"Finally, copy a virtual machine disk file into "
"<filename>/var/lib/one/images</filename>. You can create an Ubuntu virtual "
"machine using <application>vmbuilder</application>, see <xref linkend=\"jeos-"
"and-vmbuilder\"/> for details."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:2090(para)
msgid ""
"The <emphasis>OpenNebula Cluster</emphasis> is now ready to be configured, "
"and virtual machines added to the cluster."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:2094(para)
msgid "From a terminal prompt enter:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:2099(command)
msgid "onehost create node01 im_kvm vmm_kvm tm_ssh"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:2100(command)
msgid "onehost create node02 im_kvm vmm_kvm tm_ssh"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:2103(para)
msgid ""
"Next, create a <emphasis>Virtual Network</emphasis> template file named "
"<filename>vnet01.template</filename>:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:2107(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"NAME            = \"LAN\"\n"
"TYPE            = RANGED\n"
"BRIDGE          = br0\n"
"NETWORK_SIZE    = C\n"
"NETWORK_ADDRESS = 192.168.0.0\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:2116(para)
msgid ""
"Be sure to change <emphasis>192.168.0.0</emphasis> to your local network."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:2121(para)
msgid ""
"Using the <application>onevnet</application> utility, add the virtual "
"network to OpenNebula:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:2126(command)
msgid "onevnet create vnet01.template"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:2129(para)
msgid ""
"Now create a <emphasis>VM Template</emphasis> file named "
"<filename>vm01.template</filename>:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:2133(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"NAME   = vm01\n"
"CPU    = 0.5\n"
"MEMORY = 512\n"
"\n"
"OS      = [ BOOT   = hd ]\n"
"\n"
"DISK   = [\n"
"  source   = \"/var/lib/one/images/vm01.qcow2\",\n"
"  target   = \"hda\",\n"
"  readonly = \"no\" ]\n"
"\n"
"NIC    = [ NETWORK=\"LAN\" ]\n"
"\n"
"GRAPHICS = [type=\"vnc\",listen=\"127.0.0.1\",port=\"-1\"]\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:2150(para)
msgid "Start the virtual machine using <application>onevm</application>:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:2155(command)
msgid "onevm submit vm01.template"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:2158(para)
msgid ""
"Use the <application>onevm list</application> option to view information "
"about virtual machines. Also, the <application>onevm show vm01</application> "
"option will display more details about a specific virtual machine."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:2169(para)
msgid ""
"See the <ulink "
"url=\"http://www.opennebula.org/doku.php?id=start\">OpenNebula website</ulink"
"> for more information."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:2174(para)
msgid ""
"You can also find help in the <emphasis>#ubuntu-virt</emphasis> and "
"<emphasis>#ubuntu-server</emphasis> IRC channels on <ulink "
"url=\"http://freenode.net\">Freenode</ulink>."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/virtualization.xml:2180(para)
msgid ""
"Also, the <ulink "
"url=\"https://help.ubuntu.com/community/OpenNebula\">OpenNebula Ubuntu "
"Wiki</ulink> page has more details."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/vcs.xml:13(title)
msgid "Version Control System"
msgstr "버전 관리 시스템"

#: serverguide/C/vcs.xml:14(para)
msgid ""
"Version control is the art of managing changes to information. It has long "
"been a critical tool for programmers, who typically spend their time making "
"small changes to software and then undoing those changes the next day. But "
"the usefulness of version control software extends far beyond the bounds of "
"the software development world. Anywhere you can find people using computers "
"to manage information that changes often, there is room for version control."
msgstr ""
"버전 관리는 정보의 변경을 관리하는 예술적인 작업 입니다. 그것은, 소프트웨어에 적은 변경을 만들고 다음 날에 그 변경을 취소하는 데 "
"그들의 시간을 사용하는 전형적인 프로그래머들을 위하여 오랫 동안 아주 중요한 도구이어 왔습니다. 그러나, 버전 관리의 유용함은 소프트웨어 "
"개발 세상의 범주를 훨씬 넘어 확장되고 있습니다. 어느 곳에서든 여러분은 사람들이 종종 정보를 변경하는 것을 컴퓨터를 사용하여 관리하는 "
"것을 볼 수 있을 겁니다. 거기에 버전 관리를 위한 필요가 있습니다."

#: serverguide/C/vcs.xml:17(title)
msgid "Bazaar"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/vcs.xml:18(para)
msgid ""
"Bazaar is a new version control system sponsored by Canonical, the "
"commercial company behind Ubuntu. Unlike Subversion and CVS that only "
"support a central repository model, Bazaar also supports "
"<emphasis>distributed version control</emphasis>, giving people the ability "
"to collaborate more efficiently. In particular, Bazaar is designed to "
"maximize the level of community participation in open source projects."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/vcs.xml:29(para)
msgid ""
"At a terminal prompt, enter the following command to install "
"<application>bzr</application>: <screen>\n"
"<command>sudo apt-get install bzr</command>\n"
"</screen>"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/vcs.xml:40(para)
msgid ""
"To introduce yourself to <application>bzr</application>, use the "
"<emphasis>whoami</emphasis> command like this: <screen>\n"
"<command>$ bzr whoami 'Joe Doe &lt;joe.doe@gmail.com&gt;'</command>\n"
"</screen>"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/vcs.xml:49(title)
msgid "Learning Bazaar"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/vcs.xml:50(para)
msgid ""
"Bazaar comes with bundled documentation installed into "
"<application>/usr/share/doc/bzr/html</application> by default. The tutorial "
"is a good place to start. The <application>bzr</application> command also "
"comes with built-in help: <screen>\n"
"<command>$ bzr help</command>\n"
"</screen>"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/vcs.xml:60(para)
msgid ""
"To learn more about the <emphasis>foo</emphasis> command: <screen>\n"
"<command>$ bzr help foo</command>\n"
"</screen>"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/vcs.xml:68(title)
msgid "Launchpad Integration"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/vcs.xml:69(para)
msgid ""
"While highly useful as a stand-alone system, Bazaar has good, optional "
"integration with <ulink url=\"https://launchpad.net/\">Launchpad</ulink>, "
"the collaborative development system used by Canonical and the broader open "
"source community to manage and extend Ubuntu itself. For information on how "
"Bazaar can be used with Launchpad to collaborate on open source projects, "
"see <ulink url=\"http://bazaar-vcs.org/LaunchpadIntegration/\"> "
"http://bazaar-vcs.org/LaunchpadIntegration</ulink>."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/vcs.xml:81(title)
msgid "Subversion"
msgstr "Subversion"

#: serverguide/C/vcs.xml:82(para)
msgid ""
"Subversion is an open source version control system. Using Subversion, you "
"can record the history of source files and documents. It manages files and "
"directories over time. A tree of files is placed into a central repository. "
"The repository is much like an ordinary file server, except that it "
"remembers every change ever made to files and directories."
msgstr ""
"Subversion 은 오픈소스 버전 관리 시스템 입니다. Subversion을 사용하여, 소스 파일과 문서의 이력을 기록할 수 "
"있습니다. 그것은 시간에 걸쳐 파일과 디렉토리를 관리 합니다. 파일의 트리는 중앙 저장소로 놓여집니다. 저장소는 보통의 파일 서버와 매우 "
"비슷하지만, 이제껏 만들어진 파일과 디렉토리의 모든 변경을 기억하고 있습니다."

#: serverguide/C/vcs.xml:87(para)
msgid ""
"To access Subversion repository using the HTTP protocol, you must install "
"and configure a web server. Apache2 is proven to work with Subversion. "
"Please refer to the HTTP subsection in the Apache2 section to install and "
"configure Apache2. To access the Subversion repository using the HTTPS "
"protocol, you must install and configure a digital certificate in your "
"Apache 2 web server. Please refer to the HTTPS subsection in the Apache2 "
"section to install and configure the digital certificate."
msgstr ""
"HTTP 프로토콜을 사용하여 Subversion 저장소를 접근하기 위해, 여러분은 반드시 웹 서버를 설치하고 설정하여야 합니다. "
"아파치2는 Subversion과 잘 동작하는 것이 증명 되었습니다. 아파치2를 설치하고 설정하기 위하여 아파치2 영역 내의 HTTP 부 "
"영역을 참조 하십시오. HTTPS 프로토콜을 사용하여 Subversion 저장소에 접근하려면, 반드시 여러분의 아파치2 웹 서버 내에 "
"디지털 인증서를 설치하고 설정하여야 합니다. 디지털 인증서를 설치하고 설정하기 위하여 아파치2 영역 내의 HTTPS 부 영역을 참조 "
"하십시오."

#: serverguide/C/vcs.xml:96(para)
msgid ""
"To install Subversion, run the following command from a terminal prompt:"
msgstr "Subversion은 설치하려면, 터미널 프롬프트에서 다음의 명령을 실행 합니다:"

#: serverguide/C/vcs.xml:101(command)
msgid "sudo apt-get install subversion libapache2-svn"
msgstr "sudo apt-get install subversion libapache2-svn"

#: serverguide/C/vcs.xml:108(para)
msgid ""
"This step assumes you have installed above mentioned packages on your "
"system. This section explains how to create a Subversion repository and "
"access the project."
msgstr ""
"이 절차는 위에서 언급된 꾸러미가 여러분의 시스템에 설치된 것으로 간주 합니다. 이 영역은 Subversion 저장소를 어떻게 만들고 "
"프로젝트를 접근할 수 있는지를 설명 합니다."

#: serverguide/C/vcs.xml:111(title)
msgid "Create Subversion Repository"
msgstr "Subversion 저장소 만들기"

#: serverguide/C/vcs.xml:112(para)
msgid ""
"The Subversion repository can be created using the following command from a "
"terminal prompt:"
msgstr "Subversion 저장소는 터미널 프롬프트에서 다음의 명령을 사용하여 만들 수 있습니다:"

#: serverguide/C/vcs.xml:116(command)
msgid "svnadmin create /path/to/repos/project"
msgstr "svnadmin create /path/to/repos/project"

#: serverguide/C/vcs.xml:121(title)
msgid "Importing Files"
msgstr "파일 임포트(import)하기"

#: serverguide/C/vcs.xml:122(para)
msgid ""
"Once you create the repository you can <emphasis>import</emphasis> files "
"into the repository. To import a directory, enter the following from a "
"terminal prompt: <screen>\n"
"<command>svn import /path/to/import/directory "
"file:///path/to/repos/project</command>\n"
"</screen>"
msgstr ""
"저장소를 만들고 나면 파일들을 저장소로 <emphasis>임포트</emphasis> 할 수 있습니다. 디렉토리를 임포트 하려면 터미널 "
"프롬프트에서 다음을 입력하세요: <screen>\n"
"<command>svn import /path/to/import/directory "
"file:///path/to/repos/project</command>\n"
"</screen>"

#: serverguide/C/vcs.xml:134(title) serverguide/C/vcs.xml:139(title)
msgid "Access Methods"
msgstr "접근 방법"

#: serverguide/C/vcs.xml:135(para)
msgid ""
"Subversion repositories can be accessed (checked out) through many different "
"methods --on local disk, or through various network protocols. A repository "
"location, however, is always a URL. The table describes how different URL "
"schemes map to the available access methods."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/vcs.xml:146(para)
msgid "Schema"
msgstr "Schema"

#: serverguide/C/vcs.xml:147(para)
msgid "Access Method"
msgstr "Access Method"

#: serverguide/C/vcs.xml:152(para)
msgid "file://"
msgstr "file://"

#: serverguide/C/vcs.xml:153(para)
msgid "direct repository access (on local disk)"
msgstr "직접 저장소 접근 (로컬 디스크 상)"

#: serverguide/C/vcs.xml:156(para)
msgid "http://"
msgstr "http://"

#: serverguide/C/vcs.xml:157(para)
msgid "Access via WebDAV protocol to Subversion-aware Apache2 web server"
msgstr "Subversion을 인식하는 아파치2 웹 서버로 WebDAV를 통하여 접근"

#: serverguide/C/vcs.xml:160(para)
msgid "https://"
msgstr "https://"

#: serverguide/C/vcs.xml:161(para)
msgid "Same as http://, but with SSL encryption"
msgstr "http://와 같으나, SSL 암호화를 사용"

#: serverguide/C/vcs.xml:164(para)
msgid "svn://"
msgstr "svn://"

#: serverguide/C/vcs.xml:165(para)
msgid "Access via custom protocol to an svnserve server"
msgstr "svn를 사용하는 서버로 Subversion 프토토콜을 통하여 접근"

#: serverguide/C/vcs.xml:168(para)
msgid "svn+ssh://"
msgstr "svn+ssh://"

#: serverguide/C/vcs.xml:169(para)
msgid "Same as svn://, but through an SSH tunnel"
msgstr "svn://와 같으나, SSH 터널을 사용"

#: serverguide/C/vcs.xml:175(para)
msgid ""
"In this section, we will see how to configure Subversion for all these "
"access methods. Here, we cover the basics. For more advanced usage details, "
"refer to the <ulink url=\"http://svnbook.red-bean.com/\">svn book</ulink>."
msgstr ""
"이 영역에서는, 모든 접근 방법을 위하여 Subversion을 어떻게 설정하는 지를 보일 겁니다. 여기서는, 그 기초를 다룹니다. 좀 더 "
"고급의 사용예에 대한 자세한 것은, <ulink url=\"http://svnbook.red-bean.com/\">svn "
"책</ulink>을 참고 하십시오."

#: serverguide/C/vcs.xml:182(title)
msgid "Direct repository access (file://)"
msgstr "직접 저장소 접근 (file://)"

#: serverguide/C/vcs.xml:183(para)
msgid ""
"This is the simplest of all access methods. It does not require any "
"Subversion server process to be running. This access method is used to "
"access Subversion from the same machine. The syntax of the command, entered "
"at a terminal prompt, is as follows:"
msgstr ""
"이것은 모든 접근 방법 중의 가장 단순한 것 입니다. 이것은 Subversion 서버의 프로세스가 실행 중인 것을 필요로 하지 않습니다. "
"이 접근 방법은 같은 기계에서 Subversion을 접근할 때 사용 됩니다. 명령의 문법은, 터미널 프롬프트에서, 다음과 같이 입력 "
"합니다:"

#: serverguide/C/vcs.xml:190(command)
msgid "svn co file:///path/to/repos/project"
msgstr "svn co file:///path/to/repos/project"

#: serverguide/C/vcs.xml:193(para)
msgid "or"
msgstr "또는"

#: serverguide/C/vcs.xml:196(command)
msgid "svn co file://localhost/path/to/repos/project"
msgstr "svn co file://localhost/path/to/repos/project"

#: serverguide/C/vcs.xml:200(para)
msgid ""
"If you do not specify the hostname, there are three forward slashes (///) -- "
"two for the protocol (file, in this case) plus the leading slash in the "
"path. If you specify the hostname, you must use two forward slashes (//)."
msgstr ""
"만약 호스트 이름을 지정하지 않았다면, 세 개의 슬래쉬 (///)가 있습니다. 두 개는 프로토콜을 위한 것이고 (이 경우는 file), "
"마지막 하나는 경로를 나타내는 슬래쉬 입니다. 만약 호스트 이름을 지정한다면, 반드시 두 개의 슬래쉬(//)를 사용 합니다."

#: serverguide/C/vcs.xml:202(para)
msgid ""
"The repository permissions depend on filesystem permissions. If the user has "
"read/write permission, he can checkout from and commit to the repository."
msgstr ""
"저장소의 접근 권한은 파일 시스템의 접근 권한에 의존 합니다. 만약 사용자가 읽기/쓰기 접근 권한을 가지고 있다면, 그 저장소에서 "
"체크아웃을 하고 저장소로 커밋을 할 수 있습니다."

#: serverguide/C/vcs.xml:205(title)
msgid "Access via WebDAV protocol (http://)"
msgstr "WebDAV 프로토콜을 사용하여 접근 (http://)"

#: serverguide/C/vcs.xml:206(para)
msgid ""
"To access the Subversion repository via WebDAV protocol, you must configure "
"your Apache 2 web server. Add the following snippet between the "
"<emphasis>&lt;VirtualHost&gt;</emphasis> and "
"<emphasis>&lt;/VirtualHost&gt;</emphasis> elements in "
"<filename>/etc/apache2/sites-available/default</filename>, or another "
"VirtualHost file:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/vcs.xml:212(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
" &lt;Location /svn&gt;\n"
"  DAV svn\n"
"  SVNPath /home/svn\n"
"  AuthType Basic\n"
"  AuthName \"Your repository name\"\n"
"  AuthUserFile /etc/subversion/passwd\n"
"  Require valid-user\n"
" &lt;/Location&gt; \n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/vcs.xml:223(para)
msgid ""
"The above configuration snippet assumes that Subversion repositories are "
"created under <filename>/home/svn/</filename> directory using "
"<command>svnadmin</command> command. They can be accessible using "
"<command>http://hostname/svn/repos_name</command> url."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/vcs.xml:229(para)
msgid ""
"To import or commit files to your Subversion repository over HTTP, the "
"repository should be owned by the HTTP user. In Ubuntu systems, normally the "
"HTTP user is <command>www-data</command>. To change the ownership of the "
"repository files enter the following command from terminal prompt:"
msgstr ""
"HTTP 를 통해 서브버전 저장소에서 파일을 임포트 하거나 커밋하려면, 저장소의 소유자가 HTTP 사용자여야 합니다. 우분투 시스템에서, "
"보통 HTTP 사용자는 <command>www-data</command> 입니다. 저장소 파일들의 소유자를 변경하려면 터미널 프롬프트에서 "
"다음을 입력하세요:"

#: serverguide/C/vcs.xml:238(command)
msgid "sudo chown -R www-data:www-data /path/to/repos"
msgstr "sudo chown -R www-data:www-data /path/to/repos"

#: serverguide/C/vcs.xml:241(para)
msgid ""
"By changing the ownership of repository as <command>www-data</command> you "
"will not be able to import or commit files into the repository by running "
"<command>svn import file:///</command> command as any user other than "
"<command>www-data</command>."
msgstr ""
"저장소의 소유자를 <command>www-data</command> 로 변경하면, <command>www-data</command> "
"이외의 사용자로는 <command>svn import file:///</command> 명령을 통해 파일 임포트 혹은 커밋할 수 없습니다."

#: serverguide/C/vcs.xml:250(para)
msgid ""
"Next, you must create the <filename>/etc/subversion/passwd</filename> file "
"that will contain user authentication details. To create a file issue the "
"following command at a command prompt (which will create the file and add "
"the first user):"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/vcs.xml:256(command)
msgid "sudo htpasswd -c /etc/subversion/passwd user_name"
msgstr "sudo htpasswd -c /etc/subversion/passwd user_name"

#: serverguide/C/vcs.xml:259(para)
msgid ""
"To add additional users omit the <emphasis>\"-c\"</emphasis> option as this "
"option replaces the old file. Instead use this form:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/vcs.xml:264(command)
msgid "sudo htpasswd /etc/subversion/password user_name"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/vcs.xml:268(para)
msgid ""
"This command will prompt you to enter the password. Once you enter the "
"password, the user is added. Now, to access the repository you can run the "
"following command:"
msgstr ""
"이 명령은 여러분이 암호를 입력하도록 물어 봅니다. 암호를 입력한 후, 그 사용자는 더해 집니다. 이제, 다음의 명령을 실행하여 저장소를 "
"접근할 수 있습니다:"

#: serverguide/C/vcs.xml:269(command)
msgid "svn co http://servername/svn"
msgstr "svn co http://servername/svn"

#: serverguide/C/vcs.xml:271(para)
msgid ""
"The password is transmitted as plain text. If you are worried about password "
"snooping, you are advised to use SSL encryption. For details, please refer "
"next section."
msgstr ""
"암호는 일반 텍스트로 전송 됩니다. 만약 암호를 훔쳐보는 것을 걱정한다면, SSL 암호화를 사용할 것을 권고 합니다. 자세한 것은, 다음 "
"부분을 참고 하십시오."

#: serverguide/C/vcs.xml:277(title)
msgid "Access via WebDAV protocol with SSL encryption (https://)"
msgstr "SSL 암호화와 함께 WebDAV 프로토콜을 사용하여 접근 (https://)"

#: serverguide/C/vcs.xml:278(para)
msgid ""
"Accessing Subversion repository via WebDAV protocol with SSL encryption "
"(https://) is similar to http:// except that you must install and configure "
"the digital certificate in your Apache2 web server. To use SSL with "
"Subversion add the above Apache2 configuration to "
"<filename>/etc/apache2/sites-available/default-ssl</filename>. For more "
"information on setting up Apache2 with SSL see <xref linkend=\"https-"
"configuration\"/>."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/vcs.xml:287(para)
msgid ""
"You can install a digital certificate issued by a signing authority. "
"Alternatively, you can install your own self-signed certificate."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/vcs.xml:292(para)
msgid ""
"This step assumes you have installed and configured a digital certificate in "
"your Apache 2 web server. Now, to access the Subversion repository, please "
"refer to the above section! The access methods are exactly the same, except "
"the protocol. You must use https:// to access the Subversion repository."
msgstr ""
"이 절차는 여러분의 아파치2 웹 서버에 디지털 인증서를 설치하고 설정하였다고 간주 합니다. 이제, Subversion 저장소를 접근하기 "
"위하여, 윗 부분을 참조 하십시오! 접근 방법은 정확히 똑같고, 단지 프로토콜이 다릅니다. 여러분은 반드시 Subversion 저장소를 "
"접근하기 위하여 https://를 사용하여야 합니다."

#: serverguide/C/vcs.xml:302(title)
msgid "Access via custom protocol (svn://)"
msgstr "Subversion 프로토콜을 사용하여 접근 (svn://)"

#: serverguide/C/vcs.xml:303(para)
msgid ""
"Once the Subversion repository is created, you can configure the access "
"control. You can edit the <filename> "
"/path/to/repos/project/conf/svnserve.conf</filename> file to configure the "
"access control. For example, to set up authentication, you can uncomment the "
"following lines in the configuration file:"
msgstr ""
"Subversion 저장소가 만들어진 후, 여러분은 접근 조종을 설정할 수 있습니다. 접근 조종을 설정하기 위하여 <filename> "
"/path/to/repos/project/conf/svnserve.conf</filename> 파일을 편집할 수 있습니다. 예를 들어, "
"인증을 설정하는 것은, 그 설정 파일의 다음 줄들을 주석 해제 합니다:"

#: serverguide/C/vcs.xml:310(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"# [general]\n"
"# password-db = passwd"
msgstr ""
"# [general]\n"
"# password-db = passwd"

#: serverguide/C/vcs.xml:313(para)
msgid ""
"After uncommenting the above lines, you can maintain the user list in the "
"passwd file. So, edit the file <filename>passwd </filename> in the same "
"directory and add the new user. The syntax is as follows:"
msgstr ""
"위의 줄들을 주석 해제한 후에, passwd 파일에 사용자 목록을 관리할 수 있습니다. 그러므로, 같은 디렉토리 내의 "
"<filename>passwd </filename> 파일을 편집하기 위하여 열고 새로운 사용자를 추가 합니다. 문법은 다음과 같습니다:"

#: serverguide/C/vcs.xml:319(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid "username = password"
msgstr "username = password"

#: serverguide/C/vcs.xml:320(para)
msgid "For more details, please refer to the file."
msgstr "더 자세한 것은, 그 파일을 참조 하십시오."

#: serverguide/C/vcs.xml:324(para)
msgid ""
"Now, to access Subversion via the svn:// custom protocol, either from the "
"same machine or a different machine, you can run svnserver using svnserve "
"command. The syntax is as follows:"
msgstr ""
"이제, svn:// 프로토콜을 사용하여, 같은 기계 또는 다른 기계에 있는 Subversion 저장소를 접근하고, svnserve 명령을 "
"사용하여 svn 서버를 실행할 수 있습니다. 문법은 다음과 같습니다:"

#: serverguide/C/vcs.xml:329(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"$ svnserve -d --foreground -r /path/to/repos\n"
"# -d -- daemon mode\n"
"# --foreground -- run in foreground (useful for debugging)\n"
"# -r -- root of directory to serve\n"
"\n"
"For more usage details, please refer to:\n"
"$ svnserve --help"
msgstr ""
"$ svnserve -d --foreground -r /path/to/repos\n"
"# -d -- daemon mode\n"
"# --foreground -- run in foreground (useful for debugging)\n"
"# -r -- root of directory to serve\n"
"\n"
"For more usage details, please refer to:\n"
"$ svnserve --help"

#: serverguide/C/vcs.xml:337(para)
msgid ""
"Once you run this command, Subversion starts listening on default port "
"(3690). To access the project repository, you must run the following command "
"from a terminal prompt:"
msgstr ""
"이 명령이 수행된 후, Subversion은 기본 설정 포트 (3690)을 듣기 시작 합니다. 프로젝트 저장소를 접근하려면, 터미널 "
"프롬프트에서 다음의 명령을 반드시 실행하여야 합니다:"

#: serverguide/C/vcs.xml:340(command)
msgid "svn co svn://hostname/project project --username user_name"
msgstr "svn co svn://hostname/project project --username user_name"

#: serverguide/C/vcs.xml:343(para)
msgid ""
"Based on server configuration, it prompts for password. Once you are "
"authenticated, it checks out the code from Subversion repository. To "
"synchronize the project repository with the local copy, you can run the "
"<command>update</command> sub-command. The syntax of the command, entered at "
"a terminal prompt, is as follows:"
msgstr ""
"서버 설정에 따라, 암호를 물어 봅니다. 인증이 된 후, Subversion 저장소에서 코드를 체크 아웃 합니다. 로컬 복사본과 프로젝트 "
"저장소를 동기화 하는 것은, <command>update</command> 부 명령을 실행 합니다. 그 명령의 문법은, 다음과 같이 "
"터미널 프롬프트에서 입력 합니다:"

#: serverguide/C/vcs.xml:351(command)
msgid "cd project_dir ; svn update"
msgstr "cd project_dir ; svn update"

#: serverguide/C/vcs.xml:354(para)
msgid ""
"For more details about using each Subversion sub-command, you can refer to "
"the manual. For example, to learn more about the co (checkout) command, "
"please run the following command from a terminal prompt:"
msgstr ""
"각각의 Subversion 부 명령을 사용하는 것에 대한 더 자세한 것은, 매뉴얼을 참조 하십시오. 예를 들어, co (checkout) "
"명령에 대한 것을 배우려면, 터미널 프롬프트에서 다음의 명령을 실행 합니다:"

#: serverguide/C/vcs.xml:358(command)
msgid "svn co help"
msgstr "svn co help"

#: serverguide/C/vcs.xml:362(title)
msgid "Access via custom protocol with SSL encryption (svn+ssh://)"
msgstr "SSL 암호화와 함께 Subversion 프로토콜을 사용하여 접근 (svn+ssh://)"

#: serverguide/C/vcs.xml:363(para)
msgid ""
"The configuration and server process is same as in the svn:// method. For "
"details, please refer to the above section. This step assumes you have "
"followed the above step and started the Subversion server using "
"<application>svnserve</application> command."
msgstr ""
"설정과 서버 절차는 svn:// 접근 방법 내의 것과 같습니다. 자세한 것은, 위의 영역을 참조 하십시오. 이 절차는 여러분이 위의 "
"절차를 따라왔고 <application>svnserve</application> 명령을 사용하여 Subversion 서버을 실행하였다고 "
"간주 합니다."

#: serverguide/C/vcs.xml:369(para)
msgid ""
"It is also assumed that the ssh server is running on that machine and that "
"it is allowing incoming connections. To confirm, please try to login to that "
"machine using ssh. If you can login, everything is perfect. If you cannot "
"login, please address it before continuing further."
msgstr ""
"또한 그 기계에 ssh 서버가 실행 중이고 들어오는 접속을 허용하는 중이라는 것도 가정 합니다. 확인을 하려면, ssh를 사용하여 그 "
"기계에 로그인을 시도해 보십시오. 만약 로그인을 할 수 있으면, 모든 것은 완벽 합니다. 만약 로그인을 할 수 없다면, 더 진행하기 전에 "
"그것을 먼저 고치십시오."

#: serverguide/C/vcs.xml:375(para)
msgid ""
"The svn+ssh:// protocol is used to access the Subversion repository using "
"SSL encryption. The data transfer is encrypted using this method. To access "
"the project repository (for example with a checkout), you must use the "
"following command syntax:"
msgstr ""
"svn+ssh:// 프로토콜은 SSL 암호화와 함께 Subversion 저장소를 접근하기 위하여 사용 됩니다. 자료 전송은 이 방법을 "
"사용하여 암호화 됩니다. 프로젝트 저장소를 접근하려면 (예를 들어 체크 아웃으로), 여러분은 반드시 다음의 명령 문법을 사용하여야 합니다:"

#: serverguide/C/vcs.xml:382(command)
msgid "svn co svn+ssh://hostname/var/svn/repos/project"
msgstr "svn co svn+ssh://hostname/var/svn/repos/project"

#: serverguide/C/vcs.xml:386(para)
msgid ""
"You must use the full path (/path/to/repos/project) to access the Subversion "
"repository using this access method."
msgstr ""
"이 접근 방법을 사용하여 Subversion 저장소를 접근하려면 반드시 완전한 경로명을 (/path/to/repos/project) "
"사용하여야 합니다."

#: serverguide/C/vcs.xml:389(para)
msgid ""
"Based on server configuration, it prompts for password. You must enter the "
"password you use to login via ssh. Once you are authenticated, it checks out "
"the code from the Subversion repository."
msgstr ""
"서버 설정에 따라, 암호를 물어 봅니다. 반드시 ssh 통하여 로그인 할 때 사용하는 암호를 입력 합니다. 인증이 된 후, "
"Subversion 저장소에서 코드를 체크 아웃 합니다."

#: serverguide/C/vcs.xml:399(title)
msgid "CVS Server"
msgstr "CVS 서버"

#: serverguide/C/vcs.xml:400(para)
msgid ""
"CVS is a version control system. You can use it to record the history of "
"source files."
msgstr "CVS는 버전 관리 시스템 입니다. 소스 파일의 이력을 기록하기 위하여 그것을 사용할 수 있습니다."

#: serverguide/C/vcs.xml:406(para)
msgid ""
"To install <application>CVS</application>, run the following command from a "
"terminal prompt: <screen>\n"
"<command>sudo apt-get install cvs</command>\n"
"</screen> After you install <application>cvs</application>, you should "
"install <application>xinetd</application> to start/stop the cvs server. At "
"the prompt, enter the following command to install "
"<application>xinetd</application>: <screen>\n"
"<command>sudo apt-get install xinetd</command>\n"
"</screen>"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/vcs.xml:439(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"service cvspserver\n"
"{\n"
"     port = 2401\n"
"     socket_type = stream\n"
"     protocol = tcp\n"
"     user = root\n"
"     wait = no\n"
"     type = UNLISTED\n"
"     server = /usr/bin/cvs\n"
"     server_args = -f --allow-root /var/lib/cvs pserver\n"
"     disable = no\n"
"}\n"
msgstr ""
"\n"
"service cvspserver\n"
"{\n"
"     port = 2401\n"
"     socket_type = stream\n"
"     protocol = tcp\n"
"     user = root\n"
"     wait = no\n"
"     type = UNLISTED\n"
"     server = /usr/bin/cvs\n"
"     server_args = -f --allow-root /var/lib/cvs pserver\n"
"     disable = no\n"
"}\n"

#: serverguide/C/vcs.xml:455(para)
msgid ""
"Be sure to edit the repository if you have changed the default repository "
"(<application>/var/lib/cvs</application>) directory."
msgstr ""
"만약 기본 지정된 저장소 (<application>/var/lib/cvs</application>) 디렉토리를 변경하였다면 그 저장소를 "
"편집하는 것을 확신 하십시오."

#: serverguide/C/vcs.xml:424(para)
msgid ""
"Once you install cvs, the repository will be automatically initialized. By "
"default, the repository resides under the "
"<application>/var/lib/cvs</application> directory. You can change this path "
"by running following command: <screen>\n"
"<command>cvs -d /your/new/cvs/repo init</command>\n"
"</screen> Once the initial repository is set up, you can configure "
"<application>xinetd</application> to start the CVS server. You can copy the "
"following lines to the <filename> /etc/xinetd.d/cvspserver</filename> file. "
"<placeholder-1/><placeholder-2/> Once you have configured "
"<application>xinetd</application> you can start the cvs server by running "
"following command: <screen>\n"
"<command>sudo /etc/init.d/xinetd restart</command>\n"
"</screen>"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/vcs.xml:468(para)
msgid ""
"You can confirm that the CVS server is running by issuing the following "
"command:"
msgstr "다음의 명령을 수행하여 CVS 서버가 실행 중인 것을 확인할 수 있습니다:"

#: serverguide/C/vcs.xml:475(command)
msgid "sudo netstat -tap | grep cvs"
msgstr "sudo netstat -tap | grep cvs"

#: serverguide/C/vcs.xml:479(para) serverguide/C/databases.xml:65(para)
msgid ""
"When you run this command, you should see the following line or something "
"similar:"
msgstr "이 명령을 실행할 때, 여러분은 다음 줄 또는 그와 유사한 것을 보아야 합니다:"

#: serverguide/C/vcs.xml:484(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"tcp        0      0 *:cvspserver            *:* LISTEN \n"
msgstr ""
"\n"
"tcp 0 0 *:cvspserver *:* LISTEN \n"

#: serverguide/C/vcs.xml:488(para)
msgid ""
"From here you can continue to add users, add new projects, and manage the "
"CVS server."
msgstr "이제 여기서 여러분은 사용자를 더하고, 새로운 프로젝트를 더하며, 그 CVS 서버를 관리하는 것을 계속할 수 있습니다."

#: serverguide/C/vcs.xml:493(para)
msgid ""
"CVS allows the user to add users independently of the underlying OS "
"installation. Probably the easiest way is to use the Linux Users for CVS, "
"although it has potential security issues. Please refer to the CVS manual "
"for details."
msgstr ""
"CVS는 OS 설치와는 무관하게 사용자를 추가할 수 있습니다. 아마도 가장 쉬운 것은 CVS를 위하여 리눅스 사용자를 사용하는 것이지만, "
"이것은 가능한 보안의 문제를 가지고 있습니다. 자세한 것은 CVS 매뉴얼을 참조 하십시오."

#: serverguide/C/vcs.xml:503(title)
msgid "Add Projects"
msgstr "프로젝트 더하기"

#: serverguide/C/vcs.xml:515(para)
msgid ""
"You can use the CVSROOT environment variable to store the CVS root "
"directory. Once you export the CVSROOT environment variable, you can avoid "
"using -d option in the above cvs command."
msgstr ""
"CVS 루트 디렉토리를 저장하기 위해 CVSROOT 환경 변수를 사용할 수 있습니다. CVSROOT 환경 변수를 익스포트(export) "
"하고 나면, 위의 cvs 명령에서 -d 옵션을 제거할 수 있습니다."

#: serverguide/C/vcs.xml:527(para)
msgid ""
"When you add a new project, the CVS user you use must have write access to "
"the CVS repository (<application>/var/lib/cvs</application>). By default, "
"the <application>src</application> group has write access to the CVS "
"repository. So, you can add the user to this group, and he can then add and "
"manage projects in the CVS repository."
msgstr ""
"새로운 프로젝트를 추가할 때, 여러분이 사용하는 CVS 사용자는 반드시 CVS 저장소 "
"<application>/var/lib/cvs</application>) 의 쓰기 권한을 가져야 합니다. 기본 설정으로, "
"<application>src</application> 그룹은 그 CVS 저장소로의 쓰기 권한을 가지고 있습니다. 그러므로, 여러분은 그 "
"사용자를 이 그룹에 추가할 수 있고, 그런 후 그 사용자는 CVS 저장소 내의 프로젝트를 관리할 수 있습니다."

#: serverguide/C/vcs.xml:504(para)
msgid ""
"This section explains how to add new project to the CVS repository. Create "
"the directory and add necessary document and source files to the directory. "
"Now, run the following command to add this project to CVS repository: "
"<screen>\n"
"<command>cd your/project</command>\n"
"<command>cvs -d :pserver:username@hostname.com:/var/lib/cvs import -m "
"\"Importing my project to CVS repository\" . new_project start</command>\n"
"</screen><placeholder-1/> The string <emphasis>new_project</emphasis> is a "
"vendor tag, and <emphasis>start</emphasis> is a release tag. They serve no "
"purpose in this context, but since CVS requires them, they must be present. "
"<placeholder-2/>"
msgstr ""
"이 부분에서는 새로운 프로젝트를 CVS 저장소에 추가하는 방법을 설명합니다. 먼저 디렉토리를 만들고 필요한 문서와 소스 파일들을 해당 "
"디렉토리에 복사합니다. 이제 다음 명령을 입력하여 이 프로젝트를 CVS 저장소에 추가합니다: <screen>\n"
"<command>cd your/project</command>\n"
"<command>cvs -d :pserver:username@hostname.com:/var/lib/cvs import -m "
"\"Importing my project to CVS repository\" . new_project start</command>\n"
"</screen><placeholder-1/> 여기서 <emphasis>new_project</emphasis> 는 제작자 태그이고, "
"<emphasis>start</emphasis> 는 배포용 태그입니다. 이들은 아무 의미가 없지만, CVS 가 필요로 하기 때문에 "
"입력해야 합니다. <placeholder-2/>"

#: serverguide/C/vcs.xml:540(ulink)
msgid "Bazaar Home Page"
msgstr "Bazaar 홈 페이지"

#: serverguide/C/vcs.xml:541(ulink)
msgid "Launchpad"
msgstr "Launchpad"

#: serverguide/C/vcs.xml:542(ulink)
msgid "Subversion Home Page"
msgstr "Subversion 홈 페이지"

#: serverguide/C/vcs.xml:543(ulink)
msgid "Subversion Book"
msgstr "Subversion 책"

#: serverguide/C/vcs.xml:545(ulink)
msgid "CVS Manual"
msgstr "CVS 매뉴얼"

#: serverguide/C/vcs.xml:546(ulink)
msgid "Easy Bazaar Ubuntu Wiki page"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/vcs.xml:547(ulink)
msgid "Ubuntu Wiki Subversion page"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/serverguide.xml:3(title) serverguide/C/bookinfo.xml:3(title)
msgid "Credits and License"
msgstr "만든 사람들과 저작권"

#: serverguide/C/serverguide.xml:4(para) serverguide/C/bookinfo.xml:4(para)
msgid ""
"This document is maintained by the Ubuntu documentation team "
"(https://wiki.ubuntu.com/DocumentationTeam). For a list of contributors, see "
"the <ulink url=\"../../libs/C/contributors.xml\">contributors page</ulink>"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/serverguide.xml:5(para) serverguide/C/bookinfo.xml:5(para)
msgid ""
"This document is made available under the Creative Commons ShareAlike 2.5 "
"License (CC-BY-SA)."
msgstr "이 문서는 크리에이티브 커먼즈 저작자표시-동일조건변경허락 2.5 라이센스(CC-BY-SA)에 따라 이용가능합니다."

#: serverguide/C/serverguide.xml:6(para) serverguide/C/bookinfo.xml:6(para)
msgid ""
"You are free to modify, extend, and improve the Ubuntu documentation source "
"code under the terms of this license. All derivative works must be released "
"under this license."
msgstr ""
"여러분은 이 라이센스의 규정에 따라 얼마든지 우분투 문서의 소스 코드를 변경, 확장, 개선할 수 있습니다. 다만, 이러한 작업에 따른 "
"모든 결과물들은 이 라이센스와 함께 배포되어야 합니다."

#: serverguide/C/serverguide.xml:8(para) serverguide/C/bookinfo.xml:8(para)
msgid ""
"This documentation is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but "
"WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY "
"or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AS DESCRIBED IN THE DISCLAIMER."
msgstr ""
"이 문서는 유용하게 사용될 수 있으리라는 희망에서 배포되고 있지만, 특정한 목적에 맞는 적합성 여부나 판매용으로 사용할 수 있으리라는 "
"묵시적인 보증을 포함한 어떠한 형태의 보증도 제공하지 않습니다."

#: serverguide/C/serverguide.xml:11(para) serverguide/C/bookinfo.xml:11(para)
msgid ""
"A copy of the license is available here: <ulink url=\"/usr/share/ubuntu-"
"docs/libs/C/ccbysa.xml\">Creative Commons ShareAlike License</ulink>."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/serverguide.xml:14(year) serverguide/C/bookinfo.xml:14(year)
msgid "2008"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/serverguide.xml:15(ulink) serverguide/C/bookinfo.xml:15(ulink)
msgid "Ubuntu Documentation Project"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/serverguide.xml:15(holder) serverguide/C/bookinfo.xml:15(holder)
msgid "Canonical Ltd. and members of the <placeholder-1/>"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/serverguide.xml:18(publishername) serverguide/C/bookinfo.xml:18(publishername)
msgid "The Ubuntu Documentation Project"
msgstr "우분투 문서화 프로젝트"

#: serverguide/C/serverguide.xml:17(para)
msgid ""
"Welcome to the <emphasis>Ubuntu Server Guide</emphasis>! It contains "
"information on how to install and configure various server applications on "
"your Ubuntu system to fit your needs. It is a step-by-step, task-oriented "
"guide for configuring and customizing your system."
msgstr ""
"<emphasis>우분투 서버 안내서</emphasis>에 온 것을 환영합니다! 이 문서는 여러분이 원하는 다양한 서버 프로그램들을 "
"우분투 시스템에 설치 및 설정하는 방법들을 포함하고 있습니다. 이 문서는 여러분의 시스템을 설정하고 최적화하기 위해 단계 별로 각 작업에 "
"중점을 두어 설명합니다."

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:13(title)
msgid "Security"
msgstr "보안"

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:14(para)
msgid ""
"Security should always be considered when installing, deploying, and using "
"any type of computer system. Although a fresh installation of Ubuntu is "
"relatively safe for immediate use on the Internet, it is important to have a "
"balanced understanding of your systems security posture based on how it will "
"be used after deployment."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:17(para)
msgid ""
"This chapter provides an overview of security related topics as they pertain "
"to Ubuntu 10.04 LTS Server Edition, and outlines simple measures you may use "
"to protect your server and network from any number of potential security "
"threats."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:21(title)
msgid "User Management"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:22(para)
msgid ""
"User management is a critical part of maintaining a secure system. "
"Ineffective user and privilege management often lead many systems into being "
"compromised. Therefore, it is important that you understand how you can "
"protect your server through simple and effective user account management "
"techniques."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:26(title)
msgid "Where is root?"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:27(para)
msgid ""
"Ubuntu developers made a conscientious decision to disable the "
"administrative root account by default in all Ubuntu installations. This "
"does not mean that the root account has been deleted or that it may not be "
"accessed. It merely has been given a password which matches no possible "
"encrypted value, therefore may not log in directly by itself."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:30(para)
msgid ""
"Instead, users are encouraged to make use of a tool by the name of "
"<application>sudo</application> to carry out system administrative duties. "
"<application>Sudo</application> allows an authorized user to temporarily "
"elevate their privileges using their own password instead of having to know "
"the password belonging to the root account. This simple yet effective "
"methodology provides accountability for all user actions, and gives the "
"administrator granular control over which actions a user can perform with "
"said privileges."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:35(para)
msgid ""
"If for some reason you wish to enable the root account, simply give it a "
"password:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:39(command)
msgid "sudo passwd"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:41(para)
msgid ""
"Sudo will prompt you for your password, and then ask you to supply a new "
"password for root as shown below:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:44(userinput)
#, no-wrap
msgid "(enter your own password)"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:45(userinput)
#, no-wrap
msgid "(enter a new password for root)"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:46(userinput)
#, no-wrap
msgid "(repeat new password for root)"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:44(computeroutput)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"[sudo] password for username: <placeholder-1/>\n"
"Enter new UNIX password: <placeholder-2/>\n"
"Retype new UNIX password: <placeholder-3/>\n"
"passwd: password updated successfully"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:51(para)
msgid "To disable the root account, use the following passwd syntax:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:55(command)
msgid "sudo passwd -l root"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:59(para)
msgid ""
"You should read more on <application>Sudo</application> by checking out it's "
"man page:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:63(command)
msgid "man sudo"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:67(para)
msgid ""
"By default, the initial user created by the Ubuntu installer is a member of "
"the group \"admin\" which is added to the file "
"<filename>/etc/sudoers</filename> as an authorized sudo user. If you wish to "
"give any other account full root access through "
"<application>sudo</application>, simply add them to the admin group."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:73(title)
msgid "Adding and Deleting Users"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:74(para)
msgid ""
"The process for managing local users and groups is straight forward and "
"differs very little from most other GNU/Linux operating systems. Ubuntu and "
"other Debian based distributions, encourage the use of the \"adduser\" "
"package for account management."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:79(para)
msgid ""
"To add a user account, use the following syntax, and follow the prompts to "
"give the account a password and identifiable characteristics such as a full "
"name, phone number, etc."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:83(command)
msgid "sudo adduser username"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:87(para)
msgid ""
"To delete a user account and its primary group, use the following syntax:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:91(command)
msgid "sudo deluser username"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:93(para)
msgid ""
"Deleting an account does not remove their respective home folder. It is up "
"to you whether or not you wish to delete the folder manually or keep it "
"according to your desired retention policies."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:96(para)
msgid ""
"Remember, any user added later on with the same UID/GID as the previous "
"owner will now have access to this folder if you have not taken the "
"necessary precautions."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:99(para)
msgid ""
"You may want to change these UID/GID values to something more appropriate, "
"such as the root account, and perhaps even relocate the folder to avoid "
"future conflicts:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:103(command)
msgid "sudo chown -R root:root /home/username/"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:104(command)
msgid "sudo mkdir /home/archived_users/"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:105(command)
msgid "sudo mv /home/username /home/archived_users/"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:109(para)
msgid ""
"To temporarily lock or unlock a user account, use the following syntax, "
"respectively:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:113(command)
msgid "sudo passwd -l username"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:114(command)
msgid "sudo passwd -u username"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:118(para)
msgid ""
"To add or delete a personalized group, use the following syntax, "
"respectively:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:122(command)
msgid "sudo addgroup groupname"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:123(command)
msgid "sudo delgroup groupname"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:127(para)
msgid "To add a user to a group, use the following syntax:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:131(command)
msgid "sudo adduser username groupname"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:138(title)
msgid "User Profile Security"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:139(para)
msgid ""
"When a new user is created, the adduser utility creates a brand new home "
"directory named <filename class=\"directory\">/home/username</filename>, "
"respectively. The default profile is modeled after the contents found in the "
"directory of <filename class=\"directory\">/etc/skel</filename>, which "
"includes all profile basics."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:142(para)
msgid ""
"If your server will be home to multiple users, you should pay close "
"attention to the user home directory permissions to ensure confidentiality. "
"By default, user home directories in Ubuntu are created with world "
"read/execute permissions. This means that all users can browse and access "
"the contents of other users home directories. This may not be suitable for "
"your environment."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:147(para)
msgid ""
"To verify your current users home directory permissions, use the following "
"syntax:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:151(command) serverguide/C/security.xml:183(command)
msgid "ls -ld /home/username"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:153(para)
msgid ""
"The following output shows that the directory <filename "
"class=\"directory\">/home/username</filename> has world readable permissions:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:156(computeroutput)
#, no-wrap
msgid "drwxr-xr-x  2 username username    4096 2007-10-02 20:03 username"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:160(para)
msgid ""
"You can remove the world readable permissions using the following syntax:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:164(command)
msgid "sudo chmod 0750 /home/username"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:167(para)
msgid ""
"Some people tend to use the recursive option (-R) indiscriminately which "
"modifies all child folders and files, but this is not necessary, and may "
"yield other undesirable results. The parent directory alone is sufficient "
"for preventing unauthorized access to anything below the parent."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:171(para)
msgid ""
"A much more efficient approach to the matter would be to modify the "
"<application>adduser</application> global default permissions when creating "
"user home folders. Simply edit the file "
"<filename>/etc/adduser.conf</filename> and modify the "
"<varname>DIR_MODE</varname> variable to something appropriate, so that all "
"new home directories will receive the correct permissions."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:174(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"DIR_MODE=0750\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:179(para)
msgid ""
"After correcting the directory permissions using any of the previously "
"mentioned techniques, verify the results using the following syntax:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:185(para)
msgid ""
"The results below show that world readable permissions have been removed:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:188(computeroutput)
#, no-wrap
msgid "drwxr-x---   2 username username    4096 2007-10-02 20:03 username"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:195(title)
msgid "Password Policy"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:196(para)
msgid ""
"A strong password policy is one of the most important aspects of your "
"security posture. Many successful security breaches involve simple brute "
"force and dictionary attacks against weak passwords. If you intend to offer "
"any form of remote access involving your local password system, make sure "
"you adequately address minimum password complexity requirements, maximum "
"password lifetimes, and frequent audits of your authentication systems."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:200(title)
msgid "Minimum Password Length"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:201(para)
msgid ""
"By default, Ubuntu requires a minimum password length of 4 characters, as "
"well as some basic entropy checks. These values are controlled in the file "
"<filename>/etc/pam.d/common-password</filename>, which is outlined below."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:204(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"password   required   pam_unix.so nullok obscure min=4 max=8 md5\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:207(para)
msgid ""
"If you would like to adjust the minimum length to 6 characters, change the "
"appropriate variable to min=6. The modification is outlined below."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:210(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"password   required   pam_unix.so nullok obscure min=6 max=8 md5\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:214(para)
msgid ""
"The <varname>max=8</varname> variable does not represent the maximum length "
"of a password. It only means that complexity requirements will not be "
"checked on passwords over 8 characters. You may want to look at the "
"<application>libpam-cracklib</application> package for additional password "
"entropy assistance."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:220(title)
msgid "Password Expiration"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:221(para)
msgid ""
"When creating user accounts, you should make it a policy to have a minimum "
"and maximum password age forcing users to change their passwords when they "
"expire."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:226(para)
msgid ""
"To easily view the current status of a user account, use the following "
"syntax:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:230(command) serverguide/C/security.xml:263(command)
msgid "sudo chage -l username"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:232(para)
msgid ""
"The output below shows interesting facts about the user account, namely that "
"there are no policies applied:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:235(computeroutput)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"Last password change                                    : Jan 20, 2008\n"
"Password expires                                        : never\n"
"Password inactive                                       : never\n"
"Account expires                                         : never\n"
"Minimum number of days between password change          : 0\n"
"Maximum number of days between password change          : 99999\n"
"Number of days of warning before password expires       : 7"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:245(para)
msgid ""
"To set any of these values, simply use the following syntax, and follow the "
"interactive prompts:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:249(command)
msgid "sudo chage username"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:251(para)
msgid ""
"The following is also an example of how you can manually change the explicit "
"expiration date (-E) to 01/31/2008, minimum password age (-m) of 5 days, "
"maximum password age (-M) of 90 days, inactivity period (-I) of 5 days after "
"password expiration, and a warning time period (-W) of 14 days before "
"password expiration."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:255(command)
msgid "sudo chage -E 01/31/2008 -m 5 -M 90 -I 30 -W 14 username"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:259(para)
msgid "To verify changes, use the same syntax as mentioned previously:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:265(para)
msgid ""
"The output below shows the new policies that have been established for the "
"account:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:268(computeroutput)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"Last password change                                    : Jan 20, 2008\n"
"Password expires                                        : Apr 19, 2008\n"
"Password inactive                                       : May 19, 2008\n"
"Account expires                                         : Jan 31, 2008\n"
"Minimum number of days between password change          : 5\n"
"Maximum number of days between password change          : 90\n"
"Number of days of warning before password expires       : 14"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:284(title)
msgid "Other Security Considerations"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:285(para)
msgid ""
"Many applications use alternate authentication mechanisms that can be easily "
"overlooked by even experienced system administrators. Therefore, it is "
"important to understand and control how users authenticate and gain access "
"to services and applications on your server."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:290(title)
msgid "SSH Access by Disabled Users"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:291(para)
msgid ""
"Simply disabling/locking a user account will not prevent a user from logging "
"into your server remotely if they have previously set up RSA public key "
"authentication. They will still be able to gain shell access to the server, "
"without the need for any password. Remember to check the users home "
"directory for files that will allow for this type of authenticated SSH "
"access. e.g. <filename>/home/username/.ssh/authorized_keys</filename>."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:294(para)
msgid ""
"Remove or rename the directory <filename "
"class=\"directory\">.ssh/</filename> in the user's home folder to prevent "
"further SSH authentication capabilities."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:297(para)
msgid ""
"Be sure to check for any established SSH connections by the disabled user, "
"as it is possible they may have existing inbound or outbound connections. "
"Kill any that are found."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:300(para)
msgid ""
"Restrict SSH access to only user accounts that should have it. For example, "
"you may create a group called \"sshlogin\" and add the group name as the "
"value associated with the <varname>AllowGroups</varname> variable located in "
"the file <filename>/etc/ssh/sshd_config</filename>."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:303(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"AllowGroups sshlogin\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:306(para)
msgid ""
"Then add your permitted SSH users to the group \"sshlogin\", and restart the "
"SSH service."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:310(command)
msgid "sudo adduser username sshlogin"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:311(command) serverguide/C/remote-administration.xml:150(command)
msgid "sudo /etc/init.d/ssh restart"
msgstr "sudo /etc/init.d/ssh restart"

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:315(title)
msgid "External User Database Authentication"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:316(para)
msgid ""
"Most enterprise networks require centralized authentication and access "
"controls for all system resources. If you have configured your server to "
"authenticate users against external databases, be sure to disable the user "
"accounts both externally and locally, this way you ensure that local "
"fallback authentication is not possible."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:325(title)
msgid "Console Security"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:326(para)
msgid ""
"As with any other security barrier you put in place to protect your server, "
"it is pretty tough to defend against untold damage caused by someone with "
"physical access to your environment, for example, theft of hard drives, "
"power or service disruption and so on. Therefore, console security should be "
"addressed merely as one component of your overall physical security "
"strategy. A locked \"screen door\" may deter a casual criminal, or at the "
"very least slow down a determined one, so it is still advisable to perform "
"basic precautions with regard to console security."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:329(para)
msgid ""
"The following instructions will help defend your server against issues that "
"could otherwise yield very serious consequences."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:334(title)
msgid "Disable Ctrl+Alt+Delete"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:335(para)
msgid ""
"First and foremost, anyone that has physical access to the keyboard can "
"simply use the "
"<keycombo><keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keycap>Alt</keycap><keycap>Delete</keycap></k"
"eycombo> key combination to reboot the server without having to log on. "
"Sure, someone could simply unplug the power source, but you should still "
"prevent the use of this key combination on a production server. This forces "
"an attacker to take more drastic measures to reboot the server, and will "
"prevent accidental reboots at the same time."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:340(para)
msgid ""
"To disable the reboot action taken by pressing the "
"<keycombo><keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keycap>Alt</keycap><keycap>Delete</keycap></k"
"eycombo> key combination, comment out the following line in the file "
"<filename>/etc/init/control-alt-delete.conf</filename>."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:343(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"#exec shutdown -r now \"Control-Alt-Delete pressed\"\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:352(title)
msgid "Firewall"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:355(para)
msgid ""
"The Linux kernel includes the <emphasis>Netfilter</emphasis> subsystem, "
"which is used to manipulate or decide the fate of network traffic headed "
"into or through your server. All modern Linux firewall solutions use this "
"system for packet filtering."
msgstr ""
"리눅스 커널은 <emphasis>Netfilter</emphasis> 서브 시스템을 포함하고, 이것은 여러분 서버로 오는 또는 경유하는 "
"네트워크 트래픽을 조작하거나 운명을 결정하는데 사용 됩니다. 모든 현대적인 리눅스 방화벽 솔루션은 패킷을 걸러내기 위하여 이 시스템을 "
"사용 합니다."

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:360(para)
msgid ""
"The kernel's packet filtering system would be of little use to "
"administrators without a userspace interface to manage it. This is the "
"purpose of iptables. When a packet reaches your server, it will be handed "
"off to the Netfilter subsystem for acceptance, manipulation, or rejection "
"based on the rules supplied to it from userspace via iptables. Thus, "
"iptables is all you need to manage your firewall if you're familiar with it, "
"but many frontends are available to simplify the task."
msgstr ""
"커널의 패킷 필터링 시스템은 그것을 관리하기 위한 사용자 공간의 인터페이스가 없이 시스템 관리자가 약간의 작업을 하는 것이 필요 합니다. "
"이것은 iptables의 목적 입니다. 패킷이 여러분의 서버에 도착할 때, 패킷은 iptables를 통하여 사용자 공간에서 패킷에 "
"제공되는 규칙에 근거하여 패킷의 수용, 조작 또는 거절을 위한 Netfilter 서브 시스템을 거치게 됩니다. 그러므로, "
"iptables는, 만약 여러분이 그것에 익숙하다면, 여러분의 방화벽을 관리하기 위하여 필요한 전부이고, 작업을 단순화하기 위한 많은 "
"프론트엔드들이 있습니다."

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:370(title)
msgid "ufw - Uncomplicated Firewall"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:371(para)
msgid ""
"The default firewall configuration tool for Ubuntu is "
"<application>ufw</application>. Developed to ease iptables firewall "
"configuration, <application>ufw</application> provides a user friendly way "
"to create an IPv4 or IPv6 host-based firewall."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:375(para)
msgid ""
"<application>ufw</application> by default is initially disabled. From the "
"<application>ufw</application> man page:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:379(quote)
msgid ""
"ufw is not intended to provide complete firewall functionality via its "
"command interface, but instead provides an easy way to add or remove simple "
"rules. It is currently mainly used for host-based firewalls."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:383(para)
msgid ""
"The following are some examples of how to use <application>ufw</application>:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:388(para)
msgid ""
"First, <application>ufw</application> needs to be enabled. From a terminal "
"prompt enter:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:392(command)
msgid "sudo ufw enable"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:396(para)
msgid "To open a port (ssh in this example):"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:400(command)
msgid "sudo ufw allow 22"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:404(para)
msgid "Rules can also be added using a <emphasis>numbered</emphasis> format:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:408(command)
msgid "sudo ufw insert 1 allow 80"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:412(para)
msgid "Similarly, to close an opened port:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:416(command)
msgid "sudo ufw deny 22"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:420(para)
msgid "To remove a rule, use delete followed by the rule:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:424(command)
msgid "sudo ufw delete deny 22"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:428(para)
msgid ""
"It is also possible to allow access from specific hosts or networks to a "
"port. The following example allows ssh access from host 192.168.0.2 to any "
"ip address on this host:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:433(command)
msgid "sudo ufw allow proto tcp from 192.168.0.2 to any port 22"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:435(para)
msgid ""
"Replace 192.168.0.2 with 192.168.0.0/24 to allow ssh access from the entire "
"subnet."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:441(para)
msgid ""
"Adding the <emphasis>--dry-run</emphasis> option to a "
"<emphasis>ufw</emphasis> command will output the resulting rules, but not "
"apply them. For example, the following is what would be applied if opening "
"the HTTP port:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:447(command)
msgid "sudo ufw --dry-run allow http"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:451(computeroutput)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"*filter\n"
":ufw-user-input - [0:0]\n"
":ufw-user-output - [0:0]\n"
":ufw-user-forward - [0:0]\n"
":ufw-user-limit - [0:0]\n"
":ufw-user-limit-accept - [0:0]\n"
"### RULES ###\n"
"\n"
"### tuple ### allow tcp 80 0.0.0.0/0 any 0.0.0.0/0\n"
"-A ufw-user-input -p tcp --dport 80 -j ACCEPT\n"
"\n"
"### END RULES ###\n"
"-A ufw-user-input -j RETURN\n"
"-A ufw-user-output -j RETURN\n"
"-A ufw-user-forward -j RETURN\n"
"-A ufw-user-limit -m limit --limit 3/minute -j LOG --log-prefix \"[UFW "
"LIMIT]: \"\n"
"-A ufw-user-limit -j REJECT\n"
"-A ufw-user-limit-accept -j ACCEPT\n"
"COMMIT\n"
"Rules updated"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:475(para)
msgid "<application>ufw</application> can be disabled by:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:479(command)
msgid "sudo ufw disable"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:483(para)
msgid "To see the firewall status, enter:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:487(command)
msgid "sudo ufw status"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:491(para)
msgid "And for more verbose status information use:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:495(command)
msgid "sudo ufw status verbose"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:499(para)
msgid "To view the <emphasis>numbered</emphasis> format:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:503(command)
msgid "sudo ufw status numbered"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:508(para)
msgid ""
"If the port you want to open or close is defined in "
"<filename>/etc/services</filename>, you can use the port name instead of the "
"number. In the above examples, replace <emphasis>22</emphasis> with "
"<emphasis>ssh</emphasis>."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:514(para)
msgid ""
"This is a quick introduction to using <application>ufw</application>. Please "
"refer to the <application>ufw</application> man page for more information."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:520(title)
msgid "ufw Application Integration"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:522(para)
msgid ""
"Applications that open ports can include an <application>ufw</application> "
"profile, which details the ports needed for the application to function "
"properly. The profiles are kept in <filename "
"role=\"directory\">/etc/ufw/applications.d</filename>, and can be edited if "
"the default ports have been changed."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:531(para)
msgid ""
"To view which applications have installed a profile, enter the following in "
"a terminal:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:536(command)
msgid "sudo ufw app list"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:542(para)
msgid ""
"Similar to allowing traffic to a port, using an application profile is "
"accomplished by entering:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:547(command)
msgid "sudo ufw allow Samba"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:553(para)
msgid "An extended syntax is available as well:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:558(command)
msgid "ufw allow from 192.168.0.0/24 to any app Samba"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:561(para)
msgid ""
"Replace <emphasis>Samba</emphasis> and <emphasis>192.168.0.0/24</emphasis> "
"with the application profile you are using and the IP range for your network."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:567(para)
msgid ""
"There is no need to specify the <emphasis>protocol</emphasis> for the "
"application, because that information is detailed in the profile. Also, note "
"that the <emphasis>app</emphasis> name replaces the "
"<emphasis>port</emphasis> number."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:576(para)
msgid ""
"To view details about which ports, protocols, etc are defined for an "
"application, enter:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:581(command)
msgid "sudo ufw app info Samba"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:587(para)
msgid ""
"Not all applications that require opening a network port come with "
"<application>ufw</application> profiles, but if you have profiled an "
"application and want the file to be included with the package, please file a "
"bug against the package in <ulink "
"url=\"https://launchpad.net/\">Launchpad</ulink>."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:596(title)
msgid "IP Masquerading"
msgstr "IP 마스커레이딩"

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:597(para)
msgid ""
"The purpose of IP Masquerading is to allow machines with private, non-"
"routable IP addresses on your network to access the Internet through the "
"machine doing the masquerading. Traffic from your private network destined "
"for the Internet must be manipulated for replies to be routable back to the "
"machine that made the request. To do this, the kernel must modify the "
"<emphasis>source</emphasis> IP address of each packet so that replies will "
"be routed back to it, rather than to the private IP address that made the "
"request, which is impossible over the Internet. Linux uses "
"<emphasis>Connection Tracking</emphasis> (conntrack) to keep track of which "
"connections belong to which machines and reroute each return packet "
"accordingly. Traffic leaving your private network is thus \"masqueraded\" as "
"having originated from your Ubuntu gateway machine. This process is referred "
"to in Microsoft documentation as Internet Connection Sharing."
msgstr ""
"IP 마스커레이딩(Masquerading:가장)의 목적은 여러분의 네트워크 상의 사설, 라우팅이 안되는 IP 주소를 가진 기계들이 IP의 "
"가장을 통하여 인터넷을 접근하는 것을 허용하기 위해서 입니다. 여러분의 사설 네트워크에서 인터넷을 목적지로 하는 트래픽은 반드시, 그 "
"요청을 만든 기계로 경로가 되돌아갈 수 있는 응답들을 위하여, 조작되어져야 합니다. 이것을 하기 위하여, 커널은 반드시 각각의 패킷의 "
"<emphasis>source</emphasis> IP 어드레스를 변경하고, 그러므로 응답은 인터넷에서 사용 가능하지 않은 요청을 만든 "
"사설 IP 주소 대신에 변경된 것에 따라 다시 되돌아오게 됩니다. 리눅스는 기계가 속하는 접속과 되돌와오는 패킷을 적절하게 재경로하는 "
"것을 추적하기 위하여 <emphasis>접속 추적</emphasis> (conntrack)을 사용 합니다. 그러므로 여러분의 사설 "
"네트워크를 떠난 트래픽은 여러분의 우분투 게이트웨이 기계로 향할 때 \"가장\"이 됩니다. 이 절차는 인터넷 접속 공유로 마이크로소프트의 "
"문서에서는 알려져 있습니다."

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:613(title)
msgid "ufw Masquerading"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:614(para)
msgid ""
"IP Masquerading can be achieved using custom <application>ufw</application> "
"rules. This is possible because the current back-end for "
"<application>ufw</application> is <application>iptables-"
"restore</application> with the rules files located in "
"<filename>/etc/ufw/*.rules</filename>. These files are a great place to add "
"legacy iptables rules used without <application>ufw</application>, and rules "
"that are more network gateway or bridge related."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:620(para)
msgid ""
"The rules are split into two different files, rules that should be executed "
"before <application>ufw</application> command line rules, and rules that are "
"executed after <application>ufw</application> command line rules."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:626(para)
msgid ""
"First, packet forwarding needs to be enabled in "
"<application>ufw</application>. Two configuration files will need to be "
"adjusted, in <filename>/etc/default/ufw</filename> change the "
"<emphasis>DEFAULT_FORWARD_POLICY</emphasis> to <quote>ACCEPT</quote>:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:630(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"DEFAULT_FORWARD_POLICY=\"ACCEPT\"\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:633(para)
msgid "Then edit <filename>/etc/ufw/sysctl.conf</filename> and uncomment:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:636(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"net/ipv4/ip_forward=1\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:639(para)
msgid "Similarly, for IPv6 forwarding uncomment:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:642(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"net/ipv6/conf/default/forwarding=1\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:647(para)
msgid ""
"Now we will add rules to the <filename>/etc/ufw/before.rules</filename> "
"file. The default rules only configure the <emphasis>filter</emphasis> "
"table, and to enable masquerading the <emphasis>nat</emphasis> table will "
"need to be configured. Add the following to the top of the file just after "
"the header comments:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:652(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"# nat Table rules\n"
"*nat\n"
":POSTROUTING ACCEPT [0:0]\n"
"\n"
"# Forward traffic from eth1 through eth0.\n"
"-A POSTROUTING -s 192.168.0.0/24 -o eth0 -j MASQUERADE\n"
"\n"
"# don't delete the 'COMMIT' line or these nat table rules won't be "
"processed\n"
"COMMIT\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:663(para)
msgid ""
"The comments are not strictly necessary, but it is considered good practice "
"to document your configuration. Also, when modifying any of the "
"<emphasis>rules</emphasis> files in <filename "
"class=\"directory\">/etc/ufw</filename>, make sure these lines are the last "
"line for each table modified:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:669(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"# don't delete the 'COMMIT' line or these rules won't be processed\n"
"COMMIT\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:674(para)
msgid ""
"For each <emphasis>Table</emphasis> a corresponding "
"<emphasis>COMMIT</emphasis> statement is required. In these examples only "
"the <emphasis>nat</emphasis> and <emphasis>filter</emphasis> tables are "
"shown, but you can also add rules for the <emphasis>raw</emphasis> and "
"<emphasis>mangle</emphasis> tables."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:681(para)
msgid ""
"In the above example replace <emphasis>eth0</emphasis>, "
"<emphasis>eth1</emphasis>, and <emphasis>192.168.0.0/24</emphasis> with the "
"appropriate interfaces and IP range for your network."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:689(para)
msgid ""
"Finally, disable and re-enable <application>ufw</application> to apply the "
"changes:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:693(command)
msgid "sudo ufw disable &amp;&amp; sudo ufw enable"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:697(para)
msgid ""
"IP Masquerading should now be enabled. You can also add any additional "
"FORWARD rules to the <filename>/etc/ufw/before.rules</filename>. It is "
"recommended that these additional rules be added to the <emphasis>ufw-before-"
"forward</emphasis> chain."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:704(title)
msgid "iptables Masquerading"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:705(para)
msgid ""
"<application>iptables</application> can also be used to enable masquerading."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:710(para)
msgid ""
"Similar to <application>ufw</application>, the first step is to enable IPv4 "
"packet forwarding by editing <filename>/etc/sysctl.conf</filename> and "
"uncomment the following line"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:714(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"net.ipv4.ip_forward=1\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:717(para)
msgid "If you wish to enable IPv6 forwarding also uncomment:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:720(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"net.ipv6.conf.default.forwarding=1\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:725(para)
msgid ""
"Next, execute the <application>sysctl</application> command to enable the "
"new settings in the configuration file:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:729(command)
msgid "sudo sysctl -p"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:733(para)
msgid ""
"IP Masquerading can now be accomplished with a single iptables rule, which "
"may differ slightly based on your network configuration:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:736(screen)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"sudo iptables -t nat -A POSTROUTING -s 192.168.0.0/16 -o ppp0 -j MASQUERADE\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:739(para)
msgid ""
"The above command assumes that your private address space is 192.168.0.0/16 "
"and that your Internet-facing device is ppp0. The syntax is broken down as "
"follows:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:744(para)
msgid "-t nat -- the rule is to go into the nat table"
msgstr "-t nat -- nat 테이블로 가기 위한 규칙"

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:745(para)
msgid ""
"-A POSTROUTING -- the rule is to be appended (-A) to the POSTROUTING chain"
msgstr "-A POSTROUTING -- POSTROUTING chain에 덧붙이는(-A) 규칙"

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:746(para)
msgid ""
"-s 192.168.0.0/16 -- the rule applies to traffic originating from the "
"specified address space"
msgstr "-s 192.168.0.0/16 --  지정된 주소 공간에서 향하는 트래픽에 적용하는 규칙"

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:747(para)
msgid ""
"-o ppp0 -- the rule applies to traffic scheduled to be routed through the "
"specified network device"
msgstr "-o ppp0 -- 지정된 네트워크 장치를 통하여 경유하도록 스케쥴된 트래픽에 적용하는 규칙"

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:749(para)
msgid ""
"-j MASQUERADE -- traffic matching this rule is to \"jump\" (-j) to the "
"MASQUERADE target to be manipulated as described above"
msgstr ""
"-j MASQUERADE -- 위에 설명된 대로 이 규칙에 일치하는 트래픽은 조작되기 위한 MASQUERADE 타켓으로 \"jump\" "
"(-j)"

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:757(para)
msgid ""
"Also, each chain in the filter table (the default table, and where most or "
"all packet filtering occurs) has a default <emphasis>policy</emphasis> of "
"ACCEPT, but if you are creating a firewall in addition to a gateway device, "
"you may have set the policies to DROP or REJECT, in which case your "
"masqueraded traffic needs to be allowed through the FORWARD chain for the "
"above rule to work:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:764(screen)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"sudo iptables -A FORWARD -s 192.168.0.0/16 -o ppp0 -j ACCEPT\n"
"sudo iptables -A FORWARD -d 192.168.0.0/16 -m state --state "
"ESTABLISHED,RELATED -i ppp0 -j ACCEPT\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:768(para)
msgid ""
"The above commands will allow all connections from your local network to the "
"Internet and all traffic related to those connections to return to the "
"machine that initiated them."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:775(para)
msgid ""
"If you want masquerading to be enabled on reboot, which you probably do, "
"edit <filename>/etc/rc.local</filename> and add any commands used above. For "
"example add the first command with no filtering:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:779(screen)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"iptables -t nat -A POSTROUTING -s 192.168.0.0/16 -o ppp0 -j MASQUERADE\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:787(title)
msgid "Logs"
msgstr "로그"

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:788(para)
msgid ""
"Firewall logs are essential for recognizing attacks, troubleshooting your "
"firewall rules, and noticing unusual activity on your network. You must "
"include logging rules in your firewall for them to be generated, though, and "
"logging rules must come before any applicable terminating rule (a rule with "
"a target that decides the fate of the packet, such as ACCEPT, DROP, or "
"REJECT)."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:795(para)
msgid ""
"If you are using <application>ufw</application>, you can turn on logging by "
"entering the following in a terminal:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:799(command)
msgid "sudo ufw logging on"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:801(para)
msgid ""
"To turn logging off in <application>ufw</application>, simply replace "
"<emphasis role=\"italic\">on</emphasis> with <emphasis "
"role=\"italic\">off</emphasis> in the above command."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:804(para)
msgid ""
"If using <application>iptables</application> instead of "
"<application>ufw</application>, enter:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:807(screen)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"sudo iptables -A INPUT -m state --state NEW -p tcp --dport 80 -j LOG --log-"
"prefix \"NEW_HTTP_CONN: \"\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:810(para)
msgid ""
"A request on port 80 from the local machine, then, would generate a log in "
"dmesg that looks like this:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:815(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"[4304885.870000] NEW_HTTP_CONN: IN=lo OUT= "
"MAC=00:00:00:00:00:00:00:00:00:00:00:00:08:00 SRC=127.0.0.1 DST=127.0.0.1 "
"LEN=60 TOS=0x00 PREC=0x00 TTL=64 ID=58288 DF PROTO=TCP SPT=53981 DPT=80 "
"WINDOW=32767 RES=0x00 SYN URGP=0"
msgstr ""
"[4304885.870000] NEW_HTTP_CONN: IN=lo OUT= "
"MAC=00:00:00:00:00:00:00:00:00:00:00:00:08:00 SRC=127.0.0.1 DST=127.0.0.1 "
"LEN=60 TOS=0x00 PREC=0x00 TTL=64 ID=58288 DF PROTO=TCP SPT=53981 DPT=80 "
"WINDOW=32767 RES=0x00 SYN URGP=0"

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:817(para)
msgid ""
"The above log will also appear in <filename>/var/log/messages</filename>, "
"<filename>/var/log/syslog</filename>, and "
"<filename>/var/log/kern.log</filename>. This behavior can be modified by "
"editing <filename>/etc/syslog.conf</filename> appropriately or by installing "
"and configuring <application>ulogd</application> and using the ULOG target "
"instead of LOG. The <application>ulogd</application> daemon is a userspace "
"server that listens for logging instructions from the kernel specifically "
"for firewalls, and can log to any file you like, or even to a "
"<application>PostgreSQL</application> or <application>MySQL</application> "
"database. Making sense of your firewall logs can be simplified by using a "
"log analyzing tool such as <application>fwanalog</application>, "
"<application> fwlogwatch</application>, or <application>lire</application>."
msgstr ""
"위의 로그는 또한 <filename>/var/log/messages</filename>, "
"<filename>/var/log/syslog</filename>, 그리고 "
"<filename>/var/log/kern.log</filename> 파일에도 나타납니다. 이 동작은 "
"<filename>/etc/syslog.conf</filename> 파일을 적당하게 편집하거나, "
"<application>ulogd</application> 를 설치/설정하고 LOG 대신에 ULOG 타켓을 사용하는 것으로 변경될 수 "
"있습니다.  <application>ulogd</application> 데몬은 사용자 공간의 서버이고 특별히 방화벽을 위한 커널에서 오는 "
"로깅 지시를 듣고, 여러분이 원하는 어떠한 파일, 또는 심지어 <application>PostgreSQL</application> 과 "
"<application>MySQL</application> 데이타베이스로 기록을 할 수 있습니다. 방화벽 로그를 알아보기 쉽게 꾸미는 "
"것은 <application>fwanalog</application>, <application> "
"fwlogwatch</application>, 또는 <application>lire</application> 같은 로그 분석 도구를 "
"사용하는 것으로 간단해 질 수 있습니다."

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:832(title)
msgid "Other Tools"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:833(para)
msgid ""
"There are many tools available to help you construct a complete firewall "
"without intimate knowledge of iptables. For the GUI-inclined:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:839(para)
msgid ""
"<ulink url=\"http://www.fs-security.com/\">Firestarter</ulink> is quite "
"popular and easy to use."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:844(para)
msgid ""
"<ulink url=\"http://www.fwbuilder.org/\">fwbuilder</ulink> is very powerful "
"and will look familiar to an administrator who has used a commercial "
"firewall utility such as <application>Checkpoint FireWall-1</application>."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:850(para)
msgid ""
"If you prefer a command-line tool with plain-text configuration files:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:855(para)
msgid ""
"<ulink url=\"http://www.shorewall.net/\">Shorewall</ulink> is a very "
"powerful solution to help you configure an advanced firewall for any network."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:861(para)
msgid ""
"<ulink url=\"http://www.linuxkungfu.org/\">ipkungfu</ulink> should give you "
"a working firewall \"out of the box\" with zero configuration, and will "
"allow you to easily set up a more advanced firewall by editing simple, well-"
"documented configuration files."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:868(para)
msgid ""
"<ulink url=\"http://fireflier.sourceforge.net/\">fireflier</ulink> is "
"designed to be a desktop firewall application. It is made up of a server "
"(fireflier-server) and your choice of GUI clients (GTK or QT), and behaves "
"like many popular interactive firewall applications for Windows."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:880(para)
msgid ""
"The <ulink url=\"https://wiki.ubuntu.com/UbuntuFirewall\">Ubuntu "
"Firewall</ulink> wiki page contains information on the development of "
"<application>ufw</application>."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:886(para)
msgid ""
"Also, the <application>ufw</application> manual page contains some very "
"useful information: <command>man ufw</command>."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:891(para)
msgid ""
"See the <ulink url=\"http://www.netfilter.org/documentation/HOWTO/packet-"
"filtering-HOWTO.html\">packet-filtering-HOWTO</ulink> for more information "
"on using <application>iptables</application>."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:897(para)
msgid ""
"The <ulink url=\"http://www.netfilter.org/documentation/HOWTO/NAT-"
"HOWTO.html\">nat-HOWTO</ulink> contains further details on masquerading."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:903(para)
msgid ""
"The <ulink url=\"https://help.ubuntu.com/community/IptablesHowTo\">IPTables "
"HowTo</ulink> in the Ubuntu wiki is a great resource."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:911(title)
msgid "AppArmor"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:912(para)
msgid ""
"<application>AppArmor</application> is a Linux Security Module "
"implementation of name-based mandatory access controls. AppArmor confines "
"individual programs to a set of listed files and posix 1003.1e draft "
"capabilities."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:916(para)
msgid ""
"<application>AppArmor</application> is installed and loaded by default. It "
"uses <emphasis>profiles</emphasis> of an application to determine what files "
"and permissions the application requires. Some packages will install their "
"own profiles, and additional profiles can be found in the "
"<application>apparmor-profiles</application> package."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:921(para)
msgid ""
"To install the <application>apparmor-profiles</application> package from a "
"terminal prompt:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:927(para)
msgid "AppArmor profiles have two modes of execution:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:932(para)
msgid ""
"Complaining/Learning: profile violations are permitted and logged. Useful "
"for testing and developing new profiles."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:937(para)
msgid ""
"Enforced/Confined: enforces profile policy as well as logging the violation."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:943(title)
msgid "Using AppArmor"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:944(para)
msgid ""
"The <application>apparmor-utils</application> package contains command line "
"utilities that you can use to change the <application>AppArmor</application> "
"execution mode, find the status of a profile, create new profiles, etc."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:950(para)
msgid ""
"<application>apparmor_status</application> is used to view the current "
"status of AppArmor profiles."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:954(command)
msgid "sudo apparmor_status"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:958(para)
msgid ""
"<application>aa-complain</application> places a profile into "
"<emphasis>complain</emphasis> mode."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:962(command)
msgid "sudo aa-complain /path/to/bin"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:966(para)
msgid ""
"<application>aa-enforce</application> places a profile into "
"<emphasis>enforce</emphasis> mode."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:970(command)
msgid "sudo aa-enforce /path/to/bin"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:974(para)
msgid ""
"The <filename>/etc/apparmor.d</filename> directory is where the AppArmor "
"profiles are located. It can be used to manipulate the "
"<emphasis>mode</emphasis> of all profiles."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:978(para)
msgid "Enter the following to place all profiles into complain mode:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:982(command)
msgid "sudo aa-complain /etc/apparmor.d/*"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:984(para)
msgid "To place all profiles in enforce mode:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:988(command)
msgid "sudo aa-enforce /etc/apparmor.d/*"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:992(para)
msgid ""
"<application>apparmor_parser</application> is used to load a profile into "
"the kernel. It can also be used to reload a currently loaded profile using "
"the <emphasis>-r</emphasis> option. To load a profile:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:997(command) serverguide/C/security.xml:1029(command)
msgid "cat /etc/apparmor.d/profile.name | sudo apparmor_parser -a"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:999(para)
msgid "To reload a profile:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:1003(command)
msgid "cat /etc/apparmor.d/profile.name | sudo apparmor_parser -r"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:1007(para)
msgid ""
"<filename>/etc/init.d/apparmor</filename> can be used to "
"<emphasis>reload</emphasis> all profiles:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:1011(command) serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:632(command)
msgid "sudo /etc/init.d/apparmor reload"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:1015(para)
msgid ""
"The <filename>/etc/apparmor.d/disable</filename> directory can be used along "
"with the <application>apparmor_parser -R</application> option to "
"<emphasis>disable</emphasis> a profile."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:1020(command)
msgid "sudo ln -s /etc/apparmor.d/profile.name /etc/apparmor.d/disable/"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:1021(command)
msgid "sudo apparmor_parser -R /etc/apparmor.d/profile.name"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:1023(para)
msgid ""
"To <emphasis>re-enable</emphasis> a disabled profile remove the symbolic "
"link to the profile in <filename>/etc/apparmor.d/disable/</filename>. Then "
"load the profile using the <emphasis>-a</emphasis> option."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:1028(command)
msgid "sudo rm /etc/apparmor.d/disable/profile.name"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:1033(para)
msgid ""
"<application>AppArmor</application> can be disabled, and the kernel module "
"unloaded by entering the following:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:1037(command)
msgid "sudo /etc/init.d/apparmor stop"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:1038(command)
msgid "sudo update-rc.d -f apparmor remove"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:1042(para)
msgid "To re-enable <application>AppArmor</application> enter:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:1046(command)
msgid "sudo /etc/init.d/apparmor start"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:1047(command)
msgid "sudo update-rc.d apparmor defaults"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:1052(para)
msgid ""
"Replace <emphasis>profile.name</emphasis> with the name of the profile you "
"want to manipulate. Also, replace <filename>/path/to/bin/</filename> with "
"the actual executable file path. For example for the "
"<application>ping</application> command use <filename>/bin/ping</filename>"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:1060(title)
msgid "Profiles"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:1061(para)
msgid ""
"<application>AppArmor</application> profiles are simple text files located "
"in <filename>/etc/apparmor.d/</filename>. The files are named after the full "
"path to the executable they profile replacing the \"/\" with \".\". For "
"example <filename>/etc/apparmor.d/bin.ping</filename> is the AppArmor "
"profile for the <filename>/bin/ping</filename> command."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:1067(para)
msgid "There are two main type of rules used in profiles:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:1072(para)
msgid ""
"<emphasis>Path entries:</emphasis> which detail which files an application "
"can access in the file system."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:1077(para)
msgid ""
"<emphasis>Capability entries:</emphasis> determine what privileges a "
"confined process is allowed to use."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:1082(para)
msgid ""
"As an example take a look at <filename>/etc/apparmor.d/bin.ping</filename>:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:1085(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"#include &lt;tunables/global&gt;\n"
"/bin/ping flags=(complain) {\n"
"  #include &lt;abstractions/base&gt;\n"
"  #include &lt;abstractions/consoles&gt;\n"
"  #include &lt;abstractions/nameservice&gt;\n"
"\n"
"  capability net_raw,\n"
"  capability setuid,\n"
"  network inet raw,\n"
"  \n"
"  /bin/ping mixr,\n"
"  /etc/modules.conf r,\n"
"}\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:1102(para)
msgid ""
"<emphasis>#include &lt;tunables/global&gt;:</emphasis> include statements "
"from other files. This allows statements pertaining to multiple applications "
"to be placed in a common file."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:1108(para)
msgid ""
"<emphasis>/bin/ping flags=(complain):</emphasis> path to the profiled "
"program, also setting the mode to <emphasis>complain</emphasis>."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:1114(para)
msgid ""
"<emphasis>capability net_raw,:</emphasis> allows the application access to "
"the CAP_NET_RAW Posix.1e capability."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:1119(para)
msgid ""
"<emphasis>/bin/ping mixr,:</emphasis> allows the application read and "
"execute access to the file."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:1125(para)
msgid ""
"After editing a profile file the profile must be reloaded. See <xref "
"linkend=\"apparmor-usage\"/> for details."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:1130(title)
msgid "Creating a Profile"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:1133(para)
msgid ""
"<emphasis>Design a test plan:</emphasis> Try to think about how the "
"application should be exercised. The test plan should be divided into small "
"test cases. Each test case should have a small description and list the "
"steps to follow."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:1137(para)
msgid "Some standard test cases are:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:1142(para)
msgid "Starting the program."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:1147(para)
msgid "Stopping the program."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:1152(para)
msgid "Reloading the program."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:1157(para)
msgid "Testing all the commands supported by the init script."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:1164(para)
msgid ""
"<emphasis>Generate the new profile:</emphasis> Use <application>aa-"
"genprof</application> to generate a new profile. From a terminal:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:1169(command)
msgid "sudo aa-genprof executable"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:1171(para)
msgid "For example:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:1175(command)
msgid "sudo aa-genprof slapd"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:1179(para)
msgid ""
"To get your new profile included in the <application>apparmor-"
"profiles</application> package, file a bug in <emphasis>Launchpad</emphasis> "
"against the <ulink "
"url=\"https://bugs.launchpad.net/ubuntu/+source/apparmor/+filebug\">AppArmor<"
"/ulink> package:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:1186(para)
msgid "Include your test plan and test cases."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:1191(para)
msgid "Attach your new profile to the bug."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:1200(title)
msgid "Updating Profiles"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:1201(para)
msgid ""
"When the program is misbehaving, audit messages are sent to the log files. "
"The program <application>aa-logprof</application> can be used to scan log "
"files for <application>AppArmor</application> audit messages, review them "
"and update the profiles. From a terminal:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:1206(command)
msgid "sudo aa-logprof"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:1214(para)
msgid ""
"See the <ulink "
"url=\"http://www.novell.com/documentation/apparmor/apparmor201_sp10_admin/ind"
"ex.html?page=/documentation/apparmor/apparmor201_sp10_admin/data/book_apparmo"
"r_admin.html\">AppArmor Administration Guide</ulink> for advanced "
"configuration options."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:1221(para)
msgid ""
"For details using AppArmor with other Ubuntu releases see the <ulink "
"url=\"https://help.ubuntu.com/community/AppArmor\"> AppArmor Community "
"Wiki</ulink> page."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:1229(para)
msgid ""
"The <ulink url=\"http://en.opensuse.org/AppArmor\">OpenSUSE AppArmor</ulink> "
"page is another introduction to AppArmor."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:1236(para)
msgid ""
"A great place to ask for <application>AppArmor</application> assistance, and "
"get involved with the Ubuntu Server community, is the <emphasis>#ubuntu-"
"server</emphasis> IRC channel on <ulink "
"url=\"http://freenode.net\">freenode</ulink>."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:1246(title)
msgid "Certificates"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:1247(para)
msgid ""
"One of the most common forms of cryptography today is <emphasis>public-"
"key</emphasis> cryptography. Public-key cryptography utilizes a "
"<emphasis>public key</emphasis> and a <emphasis>private key</emphasis>. The "
"system works by <emphasis>encrypting</emphasis> information using the public "
"key. The information can then only be <emphasis>decrypted</emphasis> using "
"the private key."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:1253(para)
msgid ""
"A common use for public-key cryptography is encrypting application traffic "
"using a Secure Socket Layer (SSL) or Transport Layer Security (TLS) "
"connection. For example, configuring Apache to provide "
"<emphasis>HTTPS</emphasis>, the HTTP protocol over SSL. This allows a way to "
"encrypt traffic using a protocol that does not itself provide encryption."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:1258(para)
msgid ""
"A <emphasis>Certificate</emphasis> is a method used to distribute a "
"<emphasis>public key</emphasis> and other information about a server and the "
"organization who is responsible for it. Certificates can be digitally signed "
"by a <emphasis>Certification Authority</emphasis> or CA. A CA is a trusted "
"third party that has confirmed that the information contained in the "
"certificate is accurate."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:1265(title)
msgid "Types of Certificates"
msgstr "인증서의 종류"

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:1266(para)
msgid ""
"To set up a secure server using public-key cryptography, in most cases, you "
"send your certificate request (including your public key), proof of your "
"company's identity, and payment to a CA. The CA verifies the certificate "
"request and your identity, and then sends back a certificate for your secure "
"server. Alternatively, you can create your own <emphasis>self-"
"signed</emphasis> certificate."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:1276(para)
msgid ""
"Note, that self-signed certificates should not be used in most production "
"environments."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:1280(para)
msgid ""
"Continuing the HTTPS example, a CA-signed certificate provides two important "
"capabilities that a self-signed certificate does not:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:1287(para)
msgid ""
"Browsers (usually) automatically recognize the certificate and allow a "
"secure connection to be made without prompting the user."
msgstr "웹브라우저들은 (대개) 사용자에게 묻는 것 없이 자동적으로 인증서와 만들어진 보안 연결을 인식 합니다."

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:1294(para)
msgid ""
"When a CA issues a signed certificate, it is guaranteeing the identity of "
"the organization that is providing the web pages to the browser."
msgstr "CA가 사인된 인증을 발행하였을 때, 그것은 웹 페이지를 브라우저에 제공하는 단체의 식별을 보장 합니다."

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:1302(para)
msgid ""
"Most Web browsers, and computers, that support SSL have a list of CAs whose "
"certificates they automatically accept. If a browser encounters a "
"certificate whose authorizing CA is not in the list, the browser asks the "
"user to either accept or decline the connection. Also, other applications "
"may generate an error message when using a self-singed certificate."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:1310(para)
msgid ""
"The process of getting a certificate from a CA is fairly easy. A quick "
"overview is as follows:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:1317(para)
msgid "Create a private and public encryption key pair."
msgstr "사적 그리고 공개 암호 키 쌍을 만듭니다."

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:1320(para)
msgid ""
"Create a certificate request based on the public key. The certificate "
"request contains information about your server and the company hosting it."
msgstr "공개 키에 근거하여 인증서 요청을 만듭니다. 인증서 요청은 여러분의 서버와 그것을 호스팅하는 회사에 대한 정보를 가집니다."

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:1325(para)
msgid ""
"Send the certificate request, along with documents proving your identity, to "
"a CA. We cannot tell you which certificate authority to choose. Your "
"decision may be based on your past experiences, or on the experiences of "
"your friends or colleagues, or purely on monetary factors."
msgstr ""
"인증서 요청을, 여러분의 인적 사항을 제공하는 문서와 함께 CA로 보냅니다. 우리는 여러분에게 어떤 인증 기관을 선택할 지를 이야기할 수 "
"없습니다. 여러분의 결정은 아마 여러분의 과거 경험, 친구나 동료의 경험, 또는 순전히 금전상의 요인에 근거할 겁니다."

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:1331(para)
msgid ""
"Once you have decided upon a CA, you need to follow the instructions they "
"provide on how to obtain a certificate from them."
msgstr "CA를 결정하였다면, 그들에게서 어떻게 인증서를 얻을 수 있는지를 그들이 제공한 지시에 따르는 것이 필요 합니다."

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:1336(para)
msgid ""
"When the CA is satisfied that you are indeed who you claim to be, they send "
"you a digital certificate."
msgstr "CA가 여러분이 정말로 요청을 한 사람임을 만족하게 되면, 그들은 디지털 인증서를 여러분에게 보냅니다."

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:1340(para)
msgid ""
"Install this certificate on your secure server, and configure the "
"appropriate applications to use the certificate."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:1349(title)
msgid "Generating a Certificate Signing Request (CSR)"
msgstr "Certificate Signing Request (CSR) 만들기"

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:1351(para)
msgid ""
"Whether you are getting a certificate from a CA or generating your own self-"
"signed certificate, the first step is to generate a key."
msgstr "CA에서 인증서를 받던지 또는 여러분 스스로 자가-사인 인증서를 만들던지, 첫 번째 단계는 키를 만드는 것 입니다."

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:1356(para)
msgid ""
"If the certificate will be used by service daemons, such as Apache, Postfix, "
"Dovecot, etc, a key without a passphrase is often appropriate. Not having a "
"passphrase allows the services to start without manual intervention, usually "
"the preferred way to start a daemon."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:1362(para)
msgid ""
"This section will cover generating a key with a passphrase, and one without. "
"The non-passphrase key will then be used to generate a certificate that can "
"be used with various service daemons."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:1368(para)
msgid ""
"Running your secure service without a passphrase is convenient because you "
"will not need to enter the passphrase every time you start your secure "
"service. But it is insecure and a compromise of the key means a compromise "
"of the server as well."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:1375(para)
msgid ""
"To generate the <emphasis>keys</emphasis> for the Certificate Signing "
"Request (CSR) run the following command from a terminal prompt:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:1381(command)
msgid "openssl genrsa -des3 -out server.key 1024"
msgstr "openssl genrsa -des3 -out server.key 1024"

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:1384(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"Generating RSA private key, 1024 bit long modulus\n"
".....................++++++\n"
".................++++++\n"
"unable to write 'random state'\n"
"e is 65537 (0x10001)\n"
"Enter pass phrase for server.key:\n"
msgstr ""
"\n"
"Generating RSA private key, 1024 bit long modulus\n"
".....................++++++\n"
".................++++++\n"
"unable to write 'random state'\n"
"e is 65537 (0x10001)\n"
"Enter pass phrase for server.key:\n"

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:1393(para)
msgid ""
"You can now enter your passphrase. For best security, it should at least "
"contain eight characters. The minimum length when specifying -des3 is four "
"characters. It should include numbers and/or punctuation and not be a word "
"in a dictionary. Also remember that your passphrase is case-sensitive."
msgstr ""
"이제 여러분의 암호 문구를 입력 합니다. 최선의 보안을 위하여, 그것은 최소한 8자리 문자여야 합니다. -deb3을 지정하는 경우 "
"최소한의 길이는 4자리 문자 입니다. 그것은 숫자 그리고/또는 구두점을 포함하고 사전내의 단어여서는 안됩니다. 암호 문구는 대소문자 "
"구별을 하는 것을 기억 하십시오."

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:1401(para)
msgid ""
"Re-type the passphrase to verify. Once you have re-typed it correctly, the "
"server key is generated and stored in the <filename>server.key</filename> "
"file."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:1407(para)
msgid ""
"Now create the insecure key, the one without a passphrase, and shuffle the "
"key names:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:1413(command)
msgid "openssl rsa -in server.key -out server.key.insecure"
msgstr "openssl rsa -in server.key -out server.key.insecure"

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:1414(command)
msgid "mv server.key server.key.secure"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:1415(command)
msgid "mv server.key.insecure server.key"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:1418(para)
msgid ""
"The insecure key is now named <filename>server.key</filename>, and you can "
"use this file to generate the CSR without passphrase."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:1423(para)
msgid "To create the CSR, run the following command at a terminal prompt:"
msgstr "CSR을 만드려면, 터미널 프롬프트에서 다음의 명령을 실행 합니다:"

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:1428(command)
msgid "openssl req -new -key server.key -out server.csr"
msgstr "openssl req -new -key server.key -out server.csr"

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:1431(para)
msgid ""
"It will prompt you enter the passphrase. If you enter the correct "
"passphrase, it will prompt you to enter Company Name, Site Name, Email Id, "
"etc. Once you enter all these details, your CSR will be created and it will "
"be stored in the <filename>server.csr</filename> file."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:1439(para)
msgid ""
"You can now submit this CSR file to a CA for processing. The CA will use "
"this CSR file and issue the certificate. On the other hand, you can create "
"self-signed certificate using this CSR."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:1447(title)
msgid "Creating a Self-Signed Certificate"
msgstr "자가-사인 인증서 만들기"

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:1448(para)
msgid ""
"To create the self-signed certificate, run the following command at a "
"terminal prompt:"
msgstr "자가-사인 인증서를 만들기 위하여, 터미널 프롬프트에서 다음의 명령을 실행 합니다:"

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:1453(command)
msgid ""
"openssl x509 -req -days 365 -in server.csr -signkey server.key -out "
"server.crt"
msgstr ""
"openssl x509 -req -days 365 -in server.csr -signkey server.key -out "
"server.crt"

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:1456(para)
msgid ""
"The above command will prompt you to enter the passphrase. Once you enter "
"the correct passphrase, your certificate will be created and it will be "
"stored in the <filename>server.crt</filename> file."
msgstr ""
"위의 명령은 여러분이 암호 구문을 입력하도록 물어 봅니다. 정확한 암호 구문이 입력된 후, 여러분의 인증서가 만들어지고 그것은 "
"<filename>server.crt</filename> 파일에 저장 됩니다."

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:1461(para)
msgid ""
"If your secure server is to be used in a production environment, you "
"probably need a CA-signed certificate. It is not recommended to use self-"
"signed certificate."
msgstr ""
"만약 여러분의 보안 서버가 현업 환경에서 사용이 된다면, 아마도 CA가 사인한 인증서가 필요할 겁니다. 자가-사인한 인증서를 사용하는 "
"것은 권장되지 않습니다."

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:1469(title)
msgid "Installing the Certificate"
msgstr "인증서 설치"

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:1471(para)
msgid ""
"You can install the key file <filename>server.key</filename> and certificate "
"file <filename>server.crt</filename>, or the certificate file issued by your "
"CA, by running following commands at a terminal prompt:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:1477(command)
msgid "sudo cp server.crt /etc/ssl/certs"
msgstr "sudo cp server.crt /etc/ssl/certs"

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:1478(command)
msgid "sudo cp server.key /etc/ssl/private"
msgstr "sudo cp server.key /etc/ssl/private"

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:1480(para)
msgid ""
"Now simply configure any applications, with the ability to use public-key "
"cryptography, to use the <emphasis>certificate</emphasis> and "
"<emphasis>key</emphasis> files. For example, "
"<application>Apache</application> can provide HTTPS, "
"<application>Dovecot</application> can provide IMAPS and POP3S, etc."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:1487(title)
msgid "Certification Authority"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:1489(para)
msgid ""
"If the services on your network require more than a few self-signed "
"certificates it may be worth the additional effort to setup your own "
"internal <emphasis>Certification Authority (CA)</emphasis>. Using "
"certificates signed by your own CA, allows the various services using the "
"certificates to easily trust other services using certificates issued from "
"the same CA."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:1499(para)
msgid ""
"First, create the directories to hold the CA certificate and related files:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:1504(command)
msgid "sudo mkdir /etc/ssl/CA"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:1505(command)
msgid "sudo mkdir /etc/ssl/newcerts"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:1511(para)
msgid ""
"The CA needs a few additional files to operate, one to keep track of the "
"last serial number used by the CA, each certificate must have a unique "
"serial number, and another file to record which certificates have been "
"issued:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:1518(command)
msgid "sudo sh -c \"echo '01' &gt; /etc/ssl/CA/serial\""
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:1519(command)
msgid "sudo touch /etc/ssl/CA/index.txt"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:1525(para)
msgid ""
"The third file is a CA configuration file. Though not strictly necessary, it "
"is very convenient when issuing multiple certificates. Edit "
"<filename>/etc/ssl/openssl.cnf</filename>, and in the <emphasis>[ CA_default "
"]</emphasis> change:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:1531(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"dir             = /etc/ssl/             # Where everything is kept\n"
"database        = $dir/CA/index.txt     # database index file.\n"
"certificate     = $dir/certs/cacert.pem # The CA certificate\n"
"serial          = $dir/CA/serial        # The current serial number\n"
"private_key     = $dir/private/cakey.pem# The private key\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:1542(para)
msgid "Next, create the self-singed root certificate:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:1547(command)
msgid ""
"openssl req -new -x509 -extensions v3_ca -keyout cakey.pem -out cacert.pem -"
"days 3650"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:1550(para)
msgid "You will then be asked to enter the details about the certificate."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:1557(para)
msgid "Now install the root certificate and key:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:1562(command)
msgid "sudo mv cakey.pem /etc/ssl/private/"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:1563(command)
msgid "sudo mv cacert.pem /etc/ssl/certs/"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:1569(para)
msgid ""
"You are now ready to start signing certificates. The first item needed is a "
"Certificate Signing Request (CSR), see <xref linkend=\"generating-a-csr\"/> "
"for details. Once you have a CSR, enter the following to generate a "
"certificate signed by the CA:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:1576(command)
msgid "sudo openssl ca -in server.csr -config /etc/ssl/openssl.cnf"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:1579(para)
msgid ""
"After entering the password for the CA key, you will be prompted to sign the "
"certificate, and again to commit the new certificate. You should then see a "
"somewhat large amount of output related to the certificate creation."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:1588(para)
msgid ""
"There should now be a new file, "
"<filename>/etc/ssl/newcerts/01.pem</filename>, containing the same output. "
"Copy and paste everything between the <emphasis>-----BEGIN CERTIFICATE-----"
"</emphasis> and <emphasis>----END CERTIFICATE-----</emphasis> lines to a "
"file named after the hostname of the server where the certificate will be "
"installed. For example <filename>mail.example.com.crt</filename>, is a nice "
"descriptive name."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:1596(para)
msgid ""
"Subsequent certificates will be named <filename>02.pem</filename>, "
"<filename>03.pem</filename>, etc."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:1601(para)
msgid ""
"Replace <emphasis>mail.example.com.crt</emphasis> with your own descriptive "
"name."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:1609(para)
msgid ""
"Finally, copy the new certificate to the host that needs it, and configure "
"the appropriate applications to use it. The default location to install "
"certificates is <filename role=\"directory\">/etc/ssl/certs</filename>. This "
"enables multiple services to use the same certificate without overly "
"complicated file permissions."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:1615(para)
msgid ""
"For applications that can be configured to use a CA certificate, you should "
"also copy the <filename>/etc/ssl/certs/cacert.pem</filename> file to the "
"<filename role=\"directory\">/etc/ssl/certs/</filename> directory on each "
"server."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:1629(para)
msgid ""
"For more detailed instructions on using cryptography see the <ulink "
"url=\"http://tldp.org/HOWTO/SSL-Certificates-HOWTO/index.html\">SSL "
"Certificates HOWTO</ulink> by tlpd.org"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:1635(para)
msgid ""
"<ulink url=\"http://www.pki-page.org/\">The PKI Page</ulink> contains a list "
"of Certificate Authorities."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:1640(para)
msgid ""
"The Wikipedia <ulink "
"url=\"http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Https\">HTTPS</ulink> page has more "
"information regarding HTTPS."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:1645(para)
msgid ""
"For more information on <emphasis>OpenSSL</emphasis> see the <ulink "
"url=\"http://www.openssl.org/\">OpenSSL Home Page</ulink>."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:1650(para)
msgid ""
"Also, O'Reilly's <ulink "
"url=\"http://oreilly.com/catalog/9780596002701/\">Network Security with "
"OpenSSL</ulink> is a good in depth reference."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:1659(title)
msgid "eCryptfs"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:1661(para)
msgid ""
"<emphasis>eCryptfs</emphasis> is a POSIX-compliant enterprise-class stacked "
"cryptographic filesystem for Linux.  Layering on top of the filesystem layer "
"<emphasis>eCryptfs</emphasis> protects files no matter the underlying "
"filesystem, partition type, etc."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:1667(para)
msgid ""
"During installation there is an option to encrypt the <filename "
"role=\"directory\">/home</filename> partition. This will automatically "
"configure everything needed to encrypt and mount the partition."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:1672(para)
msgid ""
"As an example, this section will cover configuring <filename "
"role=\"directory\">/srv</filename> to be encrypted using eCryptfs."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:1677(title)
msgid "Using eCryptfs"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:1679(para)
msgid "First, install the necessary packages. From a terminal prompt enter:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:1684(command)
msgid "sudo apt-get install ecryptfs-utils"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:1687(para)
msgid "Now mount the partition to be encrypted:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:1692(command)
msgid "sudo mount -t ecryptfs /srv /srv"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:1695(para)
msgid ""
"You will then be prompted for some details on how "
"<application>ecryptfs</application> should encrypt the data."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:1699(para)
msgid ""
"To test that files placed in <filename>/srv</filename> are indeed encrypted "
"copy the <filename>/etc/default</filename> folder to "
"<filename>/srv</filename>:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:1705(command) serverguide/C/clustering.xml:192(command)
msgid "sudo cp -r /etc/default /srv"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:1708(para)
msgid "Now unmount <filename>/srv</filename>, and try to view a file:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:1713(command) serverguide/C/installation.xml:1138(command) serverguide/C/clustering.xml:200(command)
msgid "sudo umount /srv"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:1714(command)
msgid "cat /srv/default/cron"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:1717(para)
msgid ""
"Remounting <filename>/srv</filename> using "
"<application>ecryptfs</application> will make the data viewable once again."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:1723(title)
msgid "Automatically Mounting Encrypted Partitions"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:1725(para)
msgid ""
"There are a couple of ways to automatically mount an "
"<application>ecryptfs</application> encrypted filesystem at boot. This "
"example will use a <filename>/root/.ecryptfsrc</filename> file containing "
"mount options, along with a passphrase file residing on a USB key."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:1731(para)
msgid "First, create <filename>/root/.ecryptfsrc</filename> containing:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:1735(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"key=passphrase:passphrase_passwd_file=/mnt/usb/passwd_file.txt\n"
"ecryptfs_sig=5826dd62cf81c615\n"
"ecryptfs_cipher=aes\n"
"ecryptfs_key_bytes=16\n"
"ecryptfs_passthrough=n\n"
"ecryptfs_enable_filename_crypto=n\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:1745(para)
msgid ""
"Adjust the <emphasis>ecryptfs_sig</emphasis> to the signature in "
"<filename>/root/.ecryptfs/sig-cache.txt</filename>."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:1750(para)
msgid ""
"Next, create the <filename>/mnt/usb/passwd_file.txt</filename> passphrase "
"file:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:1754(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"passphrase_passwd=[secrets]\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:1758(para)
msgid "Now add the necessary lines to <filename>/etc/fstab</filename>:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:1762(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"/dev/sdb1       /mnt/usb        ext3    ro      0 0\n"
"/srv /srv ecryptfs defaults 0 0\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:1767(para)
msgid "Make sure the USB drive is mounted before the encrypted partition."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:1771(para)
msgid ""
"Finally, reboot and the <filename>/srv</filename> should be mounted using "
"ecryptfs."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:1779(para)
msgid ""
"The <application>ecryptfs-utils</application> package includes several other "
"useful utilities:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:1785(para)
msgid ""
"<emphasis>ecryptfs-setup-private:</emphasis> creates a "
"<filename>~/Private</filename> directory to contain encrypted information. "
"This utility can be run by unprivileged users to keep data private from "
"other users on the system."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:1792(para)
msgid ""
"<emphasis>ecryptfs-mount-private and ecryptfs-umount-private:</emphasis> "
"will mount and unmount respectively, a users <filename>~/Private</filename> "
"directory."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:1798(para)
msgid ""
"<emphasis>ecryptfs-add-passphrase:</emphasis> adds a new passphrase to the "
"kernel keyring."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:1803(para)
msgid ""
"<emphasis>ecryptfs-manager:</emphasis> manages "
"<application>eCryptfs</application> objects such as keys."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:1808(para)
msgid ""
"<emphasis>ecryptfs-stat:</emphasis> allows you to view the "
"<application>ecryptfs</application> meta information for a file."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:1821(para)
msgid ""
"For more information on eCryptfs see the <ulink "
"url=\"https://launchpad.net/ecryptfs\">Launchpad project page</ulink>."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:1826(para)
msgid ""
"There is also a <ulink "
"url=\"http://www.linuxjournal.com/article/9400\">Linux Journal</ulink> "
"article covering eCryptfs."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:1831(para)
msgid ""
"Also, for more <application>ecryptfs</application> options see the <ulink "
"url=\"http://manpages.ubuntu.com/manpages/lucid/en/man7/ecryptfs.7.html\">ecr"
"yptfs man page</ulink>."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/security.xml:1837(para)
msgid ""
"The <ulink url=\"https://help.ubuntu.com/community/eCryptfs\">eCryptfs "
"Ubuntu Wiki</ulink> page also has more details."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/reporting-bugs.xml:13(title)
msgid "Appendix"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/reporting-bugs.xml:16(title)
msgid "Reporting Bugs in Ubuntu Server Edition"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/reporting-bugs.xml:18(para)
msgid ""
"While the Ubuntu Project attempts to release software with as few bugs as "
"possible, they do occur. You can help fix these bugs by reporting ones that "
"you find to the project. The Ubuntu Project uses <ulink "
"url=\"https://launchpad.net/\">Launchpad</ulink> to track its bug reports. "
"In order to file a bug about Ubuntu Server on Launchpad, you will need to "
"<ulink url=\"https://help.launchpad.net/YourAccount/NewAccount\">create an "
"account</ulink>."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/reporting-bugs.xml:30(title)
msgid "Reporting Bugs With ubuntu-bug"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/reporting-bugs.xml:32(para)
msgid ""
"The preferred way to report a bug is with the <application>ubuntu-"
"bug</application> command. The ubuntu-bug tool gathers information about the "
"system useful to developers in diagnosing the reported problem that will "
"then be included in the bug report filed on Launchpad. Bug reports in Ubuntu "
"need to be filed against a specific software package, thus the name of the "
"package that the bug occurs in needs to be given to ubuntu-bug:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/reporting-bugs.xml:43(command)
msgid "ubuntu-bug PACKAGENAME"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/reporting-bugs.xml:46(para)
msgid ""
"For example, to file a bug against the openssh-server package, you would do:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/reporting-bugs.xml:51(command)
msgid "ubuntu-bug openssh-server"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/reporting-bugs.xml:54(para)
msgid ""
"You can specify either a binary package or the source package for ubuntu-"
"bug. Again using openssh-server as an example, you could also generate the "
"report against the source package for openssh-server, openssh:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/reporting-bugs.xml:62(command)
msgid "ubuntu-bug openssh"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/reporting-bugs.xml:66(para)
msgid ""
"See <xref linkend=\"package-management\"/> for more information about "
"packages in Ubuntu."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/reporting-bugs.xml:72(para)
msgid ""
"The ubuntu-bug command will gather information about the system in question, "
"possibly including information specific to the specified package, and then "
"ask you what you would like to do with collected information:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/reporting-bugs.xml:80(command)
msgid "ubuntu-bug postgresql"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/reporting-bugs.xml:79(screen)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"<placeholder-1/>\n"
"\n"
"*** Collecting problem information\n"
"\n"
"The collected information can be sent to the developers to improve the\n"
"application. This might take a few minutes.\n"
"..........\n"
"\n"
"*** Send problem report to the developers?\n"
"\n"
"After the problem report has been sent, please fill out the form in the\n"
"automatically opened web browser.\n"
"\n"
"What would you like to do? Your options are:\n"
"  S: Send report (1.7 KiB)\n"
"  V: View report\n"
"  K: Keep report file for sending later or copying to somewhere else\n"
"  C: Cancel\n"
"Please choose (S/V/K/C):\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/reporting-bugs.xml:101(para)
msgid "The options available are:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/reporting-bugs.xml:108(para)
msgid ""
"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Send Report</emphasis> Selecting Send Report submits "
"the collected information to Launchpad as part of the the process of filing "
"a bug report. You will be given the opportunity to describe the situation "
"that led up to the occurrance of the bug."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/reporting-bugs.xml:115(screen)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"*** Uploading problem information\n"
"\n"
"The collected information is being sent to the bug tracking system.\n"
"This might take a few minutes.\n"
"91%\n"
"\n"
"*** To continue, you must visit the following URL:\n"
"\n"
"  https://bugs.launchpad.net/ubuntu/+source/postgresql-"
"8.4/+filebug/kc6eSnTLnLxF8u0t3e56EukFeqJ?\n"
"\n"
"You can launch a browser now, or copy this URL into a browser on another\n"
"computer.\n"
"\n"
"Choices:\n"
"  1: Launch a browser now\n"
"  C: Cancel\n"
"Please choose (1/C):\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/reporting-bugs.xml:135(para)
msgid ""
"If you choose to start a browser, by default the text based web browser "
"<application>w3m</application> will be used to finish filing the bug report. "
"Alternately, you can copy the given URL to a currently running web browser."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/reporting-bugs.xml:144(para)
msgid ""
"<emphasis role=\"bold\">View Report</emphasis> Selecting View Report causes "
"the collected information to be displayed to the terminal for review."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/reporting-bugs.xml:150(screen)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"Package: postgresql 8.4.2-2\n"
"PackageArchitecture: all\n"
"Tags: lucid\n"
"ProblemType: Bug\n"
"ProcEnviron:\n"
"  LANG=en_US.UTF-8\n"
"  SHELL=/bin/bash\n"
"Uname: Linux 2.6.32-16-server x86_64\n"
"Dependencies:\n"
"  adduser 3.112ubuntu1\n"
"  base-files 5.0.0ubuntu10\n"
"  base-passwd 3.5.22\n"
"  coreutils 7.4-2ubuntu2\n"
"...\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/reporting-bugs.xml:167(para)
msgid ""
"After viewing the report, you will be brought back to the same menu asking "
"what you would like to do with the report."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/reporting-bugs.xml:174(para)
msgid ""
"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Keep Report File</emphasis> Selecting Keep Report "
"File causes the gathered information to be written to a file. This file can "
"then be used to later file a bug report or transferred to a different Ubuntu "
"system for reporting. To submit the report file, simply give it as an "
"argument to the ubuntu-bug command:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/reporting-bugs.xml:189(userinput)
#, no-wrap
msgid "k"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/reporting-bugs.xml:192(command)
msgid "ubuntu-bug /tmp/apport.postgresql.v4MQas.apport"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/reporting-bugs.xml:183(screen)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"What would you like to do? Your options are:\n"
"  S: Send report (1.7 KiB)\n"
"  V: View report\n"
"  K: Keep report file for sending later or copying to somewhere else\n"
"  C: Cancel\n"
"Please choose (S/V/K/C): <placeholder-1/>\n"
"Problem report file: /tmp/apport.postgresql.v4MQas.apport\n"
"\n"
"<placeholder-2/>\n"
"\n"
"*** Send problem report to the developers?\n"
"...\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/reporting-bugs.xml:200(para)
msgid ""
"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Cancel</emphasis> Selecting Cancel causes the "
"collected information to be discarded."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/reporting-bugs.xml:210(title)
msgid "Reporting Application Crashes"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/reporting-bugs.xml:212(para)
msgid ""
"The software package that provides the ubuntu-bug utility, "
"<application>apport</application>, can be configured to trigger when "
"applications crash. This is disabled by default, as capturing a crash can be "
"resource intensive depending on how much memory the application that crashed "
"was using as apport captures and processes the core dump."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/reporting-bugs.xml:221(para)
msgid ""
"Configuring apport to capture information about crashing applications "
"requires a couple of steps. First, <application>gdb</application> needs to "
"be installed; it is not installed by default in Ubuntu Server Edition."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/reporting-bugs.xml:229(command)
msgid "sudo apt-get install gdb"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/reporting-bugs.xml:232(para)
msgid ""
"See <xref linkend=\"package-management\"/> for more information about "
"managing packages in Ubuntu."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/reporting-bugs.xml:237(para)
msgid ""
"Once you have ensured that gdb is installed, open the file "
"<filename>/etc/default/apport</filename> in your text editor, and change the "
"<emphasis>enabled</emphasis> setting to be <emphasis "
"role=\"bold\">1</emphasis> like so:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/reporting-bugs.xml:244(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"# set this to 0 to disable apport, or to 1 to enable it\n"
"# you can temporarily override this with\n"
"# sudo service apport start force_start=1\n"
"enabled=<userinput>1</userinput>\n"
"\n"
"# set maximum core dump file size (default: 209715200 bytes == 200 MB)\n"
"maxsize=209715200\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/reporting-bugs.xml:254(para)
msgid ""
"Once you have completed editing <filename>/etc/default/apport</filename>, "
"start the apport service:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/reporting-bugs.xml:261(command)
msgid "sudo start apport"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/reporting-bugs.xml:264(para)
msgid ""
"After an application crashes, use the <application>apport-cli</application> "
"command to search for the existing saved crash report information:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/reporting-bugs.xml:271(command)
msgid "apport-cli"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/reporting-bugs.xml:270(screen)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"<placeholder-1/>\n"
"\n"
"*** dash closed unexpectedly on 2010-03-11 at 21:40:59.\n"
"\n"
"If you were not doing anything confidential (entering passwords or other\n"
"private information), you can help to improve the application by\n"
"reporting\n"
"the problem.\n"
"\n"
"What would you like to do? Your options are:\n"
"  R: Report Problem...\n"
"  I: Cancel and ignore future crashes of this program version\n"
"  C: Cancel\n"
"Please choose (R/I/C):\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/reporting-bugs.xml:287(para)
msgid ""
"Selecting <emphasis>Report Problem</emphasis> will walk you through similar "
"steps as when using ubuntu-bug. One important difference is that a crash "
"report will be marked as private when filed on Launchpad, meaning that it "
"will be visible to only a limited set of bug triagers. These triagers will "
"review the gathered data for private information before making the bug "
"report publicly visible."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/reporting-bugs.xml:307(para)
msgid ""
"See the <ulink "
"url=\"https://help.ubuntu.com/community/ReportingBugs\">Reporting "
"Bugs</ulink> Ubuntu wiki page."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/reporting-bugs.xml:313(para)
msgid ""
"Also, the <ulink url=\"https://wiki.ubuntu.com/Apport\">Apport</ulink> page "
"has some useful information. Though some of it pertains to using a GUI."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/remote-administration.xml:13(title)
msgid "Remote Administration"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/remote-administration.xml:14(para)
msgid ""
"There are many ways to remotely administer a Linux server. This chapter will "
"cover one of the most popular <application>SSH</application> as well as "
"<application>eBox</application>, a web based administration framework."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/remote-administration.xml:23(para)
msgid ""
"This section of the Ubuntu Server Guide introduces a powerful collection of "
"tools for the remote control of networked computers and transfer of data "
"between networked computers, called <emphasis>OpenSSH</emphasis>. You will "
"also learn about some of the configuration settings possible with the "
"OpenSSH server application and how to change them on your Ubuntu system."
msgstr ""
"우분투 서버 안내서의 이 부분에서는 네트워크에 연결된 컴퓨터를 원격으로 제어하고, 컴퓨터들 간에 데이터를 전송할 수 있는 강력한 도구들의 "
"집합인 <emphasis>OpenSSH</emphasis>에 대해서 소개합니다. 또한 OpenSSH 서버 프로그램을 위해 필요한 몇 가지 "
"설정과 우분투에서 이들을 변경하는 방법에 대해서도 배울 것입니다."

#: serverguide/C/remote-administration.xml:30(para)
msgid ""
"OpenSSH is a freely available version of the Secure Shell (SSH) protocol "
"family of tools for remotely controlling a computer or transferring files "
"between computers. Traditional tools used to accomplish these functions, "
"such as <application>telnet</application> or <application>rcp</application>, "
"are insecure and transmit the user's password in cleartext when used. "
"OpenSSH provides a server daemon and client tools to facilitate secure, "
"encrypted remote control and file transfer operations, effectively replacing "
"the legacy tools."
msgstr ""
"OpenSSH는 원격으로 컴퓨터를 조종하거나 컴퓨터 간의 파일을 전송하기 위한 Secure Shell (SSH) 프토토콜 도구들의 "
"자유롭게 사용할 수 있는 버전 입니다. 이러한 기능을 가지는 전통적인 도구들로는, "
"<application>telnet</application> 이나 <application>rcp</application> 가 있지만, "
"보안이 적용되지 않고 사용될 때 사용자의 암호를 들여다 볼수 있는 텍스트로 전송 합니다. OpenSSH는, 이러한 전통적인 도구들을 "
"효과적으로 대체하는, 서버 데몬과 보안, 암호화된 원격 조종과 파일 전송 동작 기능을 가지는 클라이언트 도구들을 제공 합니다."

#: serverguide/C/remote-administration.xml:39(para)
msgid ""
"The OpenSSH server component, <application>sshd</application>, listens "
"continuously for client connections from any of the client tools. When a "
"connection request occurs, <application>sshd</application> sets up the "
"correct connection depending on the type of client tool connecting. For "
"example, if the remote computer is connecting with the "
"<application>ssh</application> client application, the OpenSSH server sets "
"up a remote control session after authentication. If a remote user connects "
"to an OpenSSH server with <application>scp</application>, the OpenSSH server "
"daemon initiates a secure copy of files between the server and client after "
"authentication. OpenSSH can use many authentication methods, including plain "
"password, public key, and <application>Kerberos</application> tickets."
msgstr ""
"OpenSSH 서버 구성 요소는, <application>sshd</application> 이고, 어떠한 클라이언트 도구이던 클라이언트 "
"접속을 위하여 끊임없이 듣습니다. 접속 요청이 일어났을 때, <application>sshd</application> 는 연결하는 "
"클라이언트 도구의 종류에 따라 올바른 접속을 만듭니다. 예를 들어, 원격 컴퓨터가 <application>ssh</application> "
"클라이언트 프로그램을 가지고 접속을 한다면, 그 OpenSSH 서버는 인증 후에 원격 조종 세션을 만듭니다. 만약 원격 사용자가 "
"<application>scp</application> 를 가지고 OpenSSH 서버를 연결하면, 그 OpenSSH 서버 데몬은 인증 "
"후에 서버와 클라이언트 간에 안전한 파일 복사를 시작 합니다. OpenSSH는 일반 암호, 공개 키, 그리고 "
"<application>Kerberos</application> 티켓을 포함하는 여러가지 인증 방법을 사용할 수 있습니다."

#: serverguide/C/remote-administration.xml:53(para)
msgid ""
"Installation of the OpenSSH client and server applications is simple. To "
"install the OpenSSH client applications on your Ubuntu system, use this "
"command at a terminal prompt:"
msgstr ""
"OpenSSH 클라이언트와 서버 프로그램의 설치는 간단합니다. 우분투 시스템에 OpenSSH 클라이언트 프로그램을 설치하려면, 다음의 "
"명령을 터미널 프롬프트에서 사용합니다:"

#: serverguide/C/remote-administration.xml:59(command)
msgid "sudo apt-get install openssh-client"
msgstr "sudo apt-get install openssh-client"

#: serverguide/C/remote-administration.xml:61(para)
msgid ""
"To install the OpenSSH server application, and related support files, use "
"this command at a terminal prompt:"
msgstr "OpenSSH 서버 프로그램과 관련되는 지원 파일을 설치하려면, 다음의 명령을 터미널 프롬프트에서 사용합니다:"

#: serverguide/C/remote-administration.xml:66(command)
msgid "sudo apt-get install openssh-server"
msgstr "sudo apt-get install openssh-server"

#: serverguide/C/remote-administration.xml:68(para)
msgid ""
"The <application>openssh-server</application> package can also be selected "
"to install during the Server Edition installation process."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/remote-administration.xml:75(para)
msgid ""
"You may configure the default behavior of the OpenSSH server application, "
"<application>sshd</application>, by editing the file "
"<filename>/etc/ssh/sshd_config</filename>. For information about the "
"configuration directives used in this file, you may view the appropriate "
"manual page with the following command, issued at a terminal prompt:"
msgstr ""
"여러분은 OpenSSH 서버 프로그램, <application>sshd</application>, 의 기본 동작을 "
"<filename>/etc/ssh/sshd_config</filename> 파일을 편집하는 것으로 설정할 수 있습니다. 이 파일에서 "
"사용되는 설정 지시자에 대한 정보는, 터미널 프롬프트에서 다음의 명령을 입력하여 해당 매뉴얼 페이지를 보십시오:"

#: serverguide/C/remote-administration.xml:83(command)
msgid "man sshd_config"
msgstr "man sshd_config"

#: serverguide/C/remote-administration.xml:85(para)
msgid ""
"There are many directives in the <application>sshd</application> "
"configuration file controlling such things as communication settings and "
"authentication modes. The following are examples of configuration directives "
"that can be changed by editing the <filename>/etc/ssh/sshd_config</filename> "
"file."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/remote-administration.xml:92(para)
msgid ""
"Prior to editing the configuration file, you should make a copy of the "
"original file and protect it from writing so you will have the original "
"settings as a reference and to reuse as necessary."
msgstr ""
"설정 파일을 편집하기 전에, 원래의 파일을 복사본을 만들고 쓰기에서 그것을 보호해야만 합니다. 그래서 원래의 설정을 참고로 그리고 필요한 "
"경우 재사용할 수 있습니다."

#: serverguide/C/remote-administration.xml:96(para)
msgid ""
"Copy the <filename>/etc/ssh/sshd_config</filename> file and protect it from "
"writing with the following commands, issued at a terminal prompt:"
msgstr ""
"<filename>/etc/ssh/sshd_config</filename> 파일을 복사하고 쓰기에서 그것을 보호하려면, 터미널 "
"프롬프트에서 다음의 명령을 입력 합니다:"

#: serverguide/C/remote-administration.xml:101(command)
msgid "sudo cp /etc/ssh/sshd_config /etc/ssh/sshd_config.original"
msgstr "sudo cp /etc/ssh/sshd_config /etc/ssh/sshd_config.original"

#: serverguide/C/remote-administration.xml:102(command)
msgid "sudo chmod a-w /etc/ssh/sshd_config.original"
msgstr "sudo chmod a-w /etc/ssh/sshd_config.original"

#: serverguide/C/remote-administration.xml:104(para)
msgid ""
"The following are examples of configuration directives you may change:"
msgstr "다음은 여러분이 변경할 수 있는 설정 지시자의 예 입니다:"

#: serverguide/C/remote-administration.xml:109(para)
msgid ""
"To set your OpenSSH to listen on TCP port 2222 instead of the default TCP "
"port 22, change the Port directive as such:"
msgstr ""
"여러분의 OpenSSH가 기본 설정된 TCP 포트 22 대신에 TCP 포트 2222를 사용하게 하려면, 다음과 같이 Port 지시자를 "
"변경 합니다:"

#: serverguide/C/remote-administration.xml:113(para)
msgid "Port 2222"
msgstr "Port 2222"

#: serverguide/C/remote-administration.xml:118(para)
msgid ""
"To have <application>sshd</application> allow public key-based login "
"credentials, simply add or modify the line:"
msgstr ""
"<application>sshd</application> 가 공개 키 기반의 로그인 신뢰서를 허용하게 하려면, "
"<filename>/etc/ssh/sshd_config</filename> 파일에서 간단히 이 줄을 더하거나 변경 합니다:"

#: serverguide/C/remote-administration.xml:122(para)
msgid "PubkeyAuthentication yes"
msgstr "PubkeyAuthentication yes"

#: serverguide/C/remote-administration.xml:125(para)
msgid ""
"In the <filename>/etc/ssh/sshd_config</filename> file, or if already "
"present, ensure the line is not commented out."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/remote-administration.xml:131(para)
msgid ""
"To make your OpenSSH server display the contents of the "
"<filename>/etc/issue.net</filename> file as a pre-login banner, simply add "
"or modify the line:"
msgstr ""
"여러분의 OpenSSH 서버에서 로그인하기 전에 보여줄 배너로 <filename>/etc/issue.net</filename> 파일의 "
"내용을 표시하게 만드려면, 간단히 이 줄을 더하거나 변경 합니다:"

#: serverguide/C/remote-administration.xml:136(para)
msgid "Banner /etc/issue.net"
msgstr "Banner /etc/issue.net"

#: serverguide/C/remote-administration.xml:139(para)
msgid "In the <filename>/etc/ssh/sshd_config</filename> file."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/remote-administration.xml:144(para)
msgid ""
"After making changes to the <filename>/etc/ssh/sshd_config</filename> file, "
"save the file, and restart the <application>sshd</application> server "
"application to effect the changes using the following command at a terminal "
"prompt:"
msgstr ""
"<filename>/etc/ssh/sshd_config</filename> 파일에 변경을 만든 후에, 그 파일을 저장하고, 변경의 효과를 "
"가지려면 다음 명령을 터미널 프롬프트에서 사용하여 <application>sshd</application> 서버 프로그램을 재시작 합니다:"

#: serverguide/C/remote-administration.xml:153(para)
msgid ""
"Many other configuration directives for <application>sshd</application> are "
"available for changing the server application's behavior to fit your needs. "
"Be advised, however, if your only method of access to a server is "
"<application>ssh</application>, and you make a mistake in configuring "
"<application>sshd</application> via the "
"<filename>/etc/ssh/sshd_config</filename> file, you may find you are locked "
"out of the server upon restarting it, or that the "
"<application>sshd</application> server refuses to start due to an incorrect "
"configuration directive, so be extra careful when editing this file on a "
"remote server."
msgstr ""
"<application>sshd</application> 를 위한 많은 다른 설정 지시자는 여러분의 필요에 맞게 그 서버 프로그램의 "
"동작을 변경하는 것을 위하여 사용가능 합니다. 그러나, 만약 여러분이 서버를 접근할 수 있는 오직 한 가지 방법이 "
"<application>ssh</application> 이고, <filename>/etc/ssh/sshd_config</filename> "
"파일을 통해 <application>sshd</application> 를 설정하는데 실수를 하였다면, 서버를 재시작할 때 잠겨지거나 "
"<application>sshd</application> 서버가 부정확한 설정 지시자 때문에 시작하는 것이 거부될 수 있음을 조언 "
"합니다. 그러므로 원격 서버 상의 이 파일을 편집할 때는 정말로 조심스럽게 하시기 바랍니다."

#: serverguide/C/remote-administration.xml:168(title)
msgid "SSH Keys"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/remote-administration.xml:169(para)
msgid ""
"SSH <emphasis>keys</emphasis> allow authentication between two hosts without "
"the need of a password. SSH key authentication uses two keys a "
"<emphasis>private</emphasis> key and a <emphasis>public</emphasis> key."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/remote-administration.xml:173(para)
msgid "To generate the keys, from a terminal prompt enter:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/remote-administration.xml:177(command)
msgid "ssh-keygen -t dsa"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/remote-administration.xml:179(para)
msgid ""
"This will generate the keys using a <emphasis>DSA</emphasis> authentication "
"identity of the user. During the process you will be prompted for a "
"password. Simply hit <emphasis>Enter</emphasis> when prompted to create the "
"key."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/remote-administration.xml:183(para)
msgid ""
"By default the <emphasis>public</emphasis> key is saved in the file "
"<filename>~/.ssh/id_dsa.pub</filename>, while "
"<filename>~/.ssh/id_dsa</filename> is the <emphasis>private</emphasis> key. "
"Now copy the <filename>id_dsa.pub</filename> file to the remote host and "
"append it to <filename>~/.ssh/authorized_keys</filename> by entering:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/remote-administration.xml:189(command)
msgid "ssh-copy-id username@remotehost"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/remote-administration.xml:191(para)
msgid ""
"Finally, double check the permissions on the "
"<filename>authorized_keys</filename> file, only the authenticated user "
"should have read and write permissions. If the permissions are not correct "
"change them by:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/remote-administration.xml:196(command)
msgid "chmod 600 .ssh/authorized_keys"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/remote-administration.xml:198(para)
msgid ""
"You should now be able to SSH to the host without being prompted for a "
"password."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/remote-administration.xml:207(para)
msgid ""
"<ulink url=\"https://help.ubuntu.com/community/SSH\">Ubuntu Wiki SSH</ulink> "
"page."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/remote-administration.xml:213(ulink)
msgid "OpenSSH Website"
msgstr "OpenSSH 웹사이트"

#: serverguide/C/remote-administration.xml:218(ulink)
msgid "Advanced OpenSSH Wiki Page"
msgstr "진보한 OpenSSH 위키 페이지"

#: serverguide/C/remote-administration.xml:226(title)
msgid "eBox"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/remote-administration.xml:227(para)
msgid ""
"<application>eBox</application> is a web framework used to manage server "
"application configuration. The modular design of eBox allows you to pick and "
"choose which services you want to configure using eBox."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/remote-administration.xml:234(para)
msgid ""
"The different <application>eBox</application> modules are split into "
"different packages, allowing you to only install those necessary. One way to "
"view the available packages is to enter the following from a terminal:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/remote-administration.xml:240(command)
msgid "apt-cache rdepends ebox | uniq"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/remote-administration.xml:242(para)
msgid ""
"To install the <application>ebox</application> package, which contains the "
"default modules, enter the following:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/remote-administration.xml:247(command)
msgid "sudo apt-get install ebox"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/remote-administration.xml:250(para)
msgid ""
"During the installation you will be asked to supply a password for the ebox "
"user. After installing eBox the web interface can be accessed from: "
"<emphasis>https://yourserver/ebox</emphasis>."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/remote-administration.xml:259(para)
msgid ""
"An important thing to remember when using <application>eBox</application> is "
"that when configuring most modules there is a <emphasis>Change</emphasis> "
"button that implements the new configuration. After clicking the Change "
"button most, but not all, modules will then need to be "
"<emphasis>Saved</emphasis>. To save the new configuration click on the "
"<quote>Save changes</quote> link in the top right hand corner."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/remote-administration.xml:267(para)
msgid ""
"Once you make a change that requires a Save, the link will change from green "
"to red."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/remote-administration.xml:273(title)
msgid "eBox Modules"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/remote-administration.xml:274(para)
msgid ""
"By default all eBox <emphasis>Modules</emphasis> are not enabled, and when a "
"new module is installed it will not be automatically enabled."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/remote-administration.xml:278(para)
msgid ""
"To enable a disabled module click on the <emphasis>Module status</emphasis> "
"link in the left hand menu. Then <emphasis role=\"italic\">check</emphasis> "
"which modules you would like to enable and click the <quote>Save</quote> "
"link."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/remote-administration.xml:284(title)
msgid "Default Modules"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/remote-administration.xml:285(para)
msgid ""
"This section provides a quick summary of the default "
"<application>eBox</application> modules."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/remote-administration.xml:291(para)
msgid ""
"<emphasis>System:</emphasis> contains options allowing configuration of "
"general eBox items."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/remote-administration.xml:297(para)
msgid ""
"<emphasis>General:</emphasis> allows you to set the language, port number, "
"and contains a change password form."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/remote-administration.xml:303(para)
msgid ""
"<emphasis>Disk Usage:</emphasis> displays a graph detailing information "
"about disk usage."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/remote-administration.xml:309(para)
msgid ""
"<emphasis>Backup:</emphasis> is used to backup "
"<application>eBox</application> configuration information, and the "
"<emphasis>Full Backup</emphasis> option allows you to save all eBox "
"information not included in the <emphasis>Configuration</emphasis> option "
"such as log files."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/remote-administration.xml:317(para)
msgid ""
"<emphasis>Halt/Reboot:</emphasis> will shutdown the system or reboot it."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/remote-administration.xml:322(para)
msgid ""
"<emphasis>Bug Report:</emphasis> creates a file containing details helpful "
"when reporting bugs to the eBox developers."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/remote-administration.xml:330(para)
msgid ""
"<emphasis>Logs:</emphasis> allows <application>eBox</application> logs to be "
"queried depending on the purge time configured."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/remote-administration.xml:336(para)
msgid ""
"<emphasis>Events:</emphasis> this module has the ability to send alerts "
"through rss, jabber, and log file."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/remote-administration.xml:343(emphasis)
msgid "Available Events:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/remote-administration.xml:347(para)
msgid ""
"<emphasis>Free Storage Space:</emphasis> will send alert if free disk space "
"drops below a configured percentage, 10% by default."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/remote-administration.xml:353(para)
msgid ""
"<emphasis>Log Observer:</emphasis> sends an alert when a configured logger "
"has logged something."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/remote-administration.xml:359(para)
msgid ""
"<emphasis>RAID:</emphasis> will monitor the RAID system and send alerts if "
"any issues arise."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/remote-administration.xml:365(para)
msgid ""
"<emphasis>Service:</emphasis> sends alerts if a service restarts multiple "
"times in a short time period."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/remote-administration.xml:371(para)
msgid ""
"<emphasis>State:</emphasis> alerts on the state of "
"<application>eBox</application>, either up or down."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/remote-administration.xml:380(emphasis)
msgid "Dispatchers:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/remote-administration.xml:384(para)
msgid ""
"<emphasis>Log:</emphasis> this dispatcher will send event messages to the "
"<application>eBox</application> log file "
"<filename>/var/log/ebox/ebox.log</filename>."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/remote-administration.xml:391(para)
msgid ""
"<emphasis>Jabber:</emphasis> before enabling this dispatcher you must first "
"configure it by clicking on the <quote>Configure</quote> icon."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/remote-administration.xml:397(para)
msgid ""
"<emphasis>RSS:</emphasis> once this dispatcher is configured you can "
"subscribe to the link in order to view event alerts."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/remote-administration.xml:410(title)
msgid "Additional Modules"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/remote-administration.xml:411(para)
msgid ""
"Here is a quick description of other available "
"<application>eBox</application> modules:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/remote-administration.xml:416(para)
msgid ""
"<emphasis>Network:</emphasis> allows configuration of the server's network "
"options through eBox."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/remote-administration.xml:422(para)
msgid ""
"<emphasis>Firewall:</emphasis> configures firewall options for the eBox host."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/remote-administration.xml:427(para)
msgid ""
"<emphasis>UsersandGroups:</emphasis> this module will manage users and "
"groups contained in an <application>OpenLDAP</application> LDAP directory."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/remote-administration.xml:433(para)
msgid ""
"<emphasis>DHCP:</emphasis> provides an interface for configuring a DHCP "
"server."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/remote-administration.xml:438(para)
msgid ""
"<emphasis>DNS:</emphasis> provides <application>BIND9</application> DNS "
"server configuration options."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/remote-administration.xml:444(para)
msgid ""
"<emphasis>Objects:</emphasis> allow configuration of eBox <emphasis>Network "
"Objects</emphasis>, which allow you to assign a name to an IP address or "
"group of IPs."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/remote-administration.xml:451(para)
msgid ""
"<emphasis>Services:</emphasis> displays configuration information for "
"services that are available to the network."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/remote-administration.xml:457(para)
msgid ""
"<emphasis>Squid:</emphasis> configuration options for the "
"<application>Squid</application> proxy server."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/remote-administration.xml:463(para)
msgid ""
"<emphasis>CA:</emphasis> configures a Certificate Authority for the server."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/remote-administration.xml:468(para)
msgid "<emphasis>NTP:</emphasis> set Network Time Protocol options."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/remote-administration.xml:473(para)
msgid "<emphasis>Printers:</emphasis> allows the configuration of printers."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/remote-administration.xml:478(para)
msgid "<emphasis>Samba:</emphasis> configuration options for Samba."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/remote-administration.xml:483(para)
msgid ""
"<emphasis>OpenVPN:</emphasis> setup options for OpenVPN Virtual Private "
"Network application."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/remote-administration.xml:494(para)
msgid ""
"The <ulink url=\"https://help.ubuntu.com/community/eBox\">eBox Ubuntu "
"Wiki</ulink> page has more details."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/remote-administration.xml:499(para)
msgid ""
"For more information also see the <ulink url=\"http://ebox-"
"platform.com/\">eBox Home Page</ulink>."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/package-management.xml:13(title)
msgid "Package Management"
msgstr "꾸러미 관리"

#: serverguide/C/package-management.xml:14(para)
msgid ""
"Ubuntu features a comprehensive package management system for the "
"installation, upgrade, configuration, and removal of software. In addition "
"to providing access to an organized base of over 24,000 software packages "
"for your Ubuntu computer, the package management facilities also feature "
"dependency resolution capabilities and software update checking."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/package-management.xml:16(para)
msgid ""
"Several tools are available for interacting with Ubuntu's package management "
"system, from simple command-line utilities which may be easily automated by "
"system administrators, to a simple graphical interface which is easy to use "
"by those new to Ubuntu."
msgstr ""
"우분투의 꾸러미 관리 시스템과 상호 작용하는 여러가지, 시스템 관리자에 의해 쉽게 자동화될 수 있는 간단한 명령행 도구에서부터 우분투를 "
"새롭게 접하는 사용자들이 쉽게 사용할 수 있는 간단한 그래픽 인터페이스까지의 도구들을 사용할 수 있도록 준비되어 있습니다."

#: serverguide/C/package-management.xml:21(para)
msgid ""
"Ubuntu's package management system is derived from the same system used by "
"the Debian GNU/Linux distribution. The package files contain all of the "
"necessary files, meta-data, and instructions to implement a particular "
"functionality or software application on your Ubuntu computer."
msgstr ""
"우분투의 꾸러미 관리 시스템은 데비안 GNU/Linux 배포판에서 사용되는 같은 시스템에서 파생 되었습니다. 꾸러미 파일은 여러분의 "
"우분투 컴퓨터 상에 특정 기능을 구현하거나 소프트웨어 프로그램을 실행하기 위해 필요한 모든 파일, 메타 데이터, 명령 지시들을 가지고 "
"있습니다."

#: serverguide/C/package-management.xml:24(para)
msgid ""
"Debian package files typically have the extension '.deb', and typically "
"exist in <emphasis role=\"italics\">repositories</emphasis> which are "
"collections of packages found on various media, such as CD-ROM discs, or "
"online. Packages are normally of the pre-compiled binary format; thus "
"installation is quick and requires no compiling of software."
msgstr ""
"데비안 꾸러미 파일은 일반적으로 .deb 확장자를 가지고, 일반적으로 <emphasis "
"role=\"italics\">저장소</emphasis> 상에 존재 합니다. 저장소는 CD-ROM 디스크 또는 온라인과 같은 다양한 "
"매체에서 찾을 수 있는 꾸러미들의 집합입니다. 꾸러미는 보통 바이너리 형태로 미리 컴파일이 되어 있으므로, 설치 과정은 빨리 이루어지며, "
"소프트웨어의 컴파일을 필요로 하지 않습니다."

#: serverguide/C/package-management.xml:27(para)
msgid ""
"Many complex packages use the concept of <emphasis "
"role=\"italics\">dependencies</emphasis>. Dependencies are additional "
"packages required by the principal package in order to function properly. "
"For example, the speech synthesis package "
"<application>Festival</application> depends upon the package "
"<application>libasound2</application>, which is a package supplying the "
"<application>ALSA</application> sound library needed for audio playback. In "
"order for <application>Festival</application> to function, it and all of its "
"dependencies must be installed. The software management tools in Ubuntu will "
"do this automatically."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/package-management.xml:32(title)
msgid "dpkg"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/package-management.xml:34(para)
msgid ""
"<application>dpkg</application> is a package manager for "
"<emphasis>Debian</emphasis> based systems. It can install, remove, and build "
"packages, but unlike other package management system's it can not "
"automatically download and install packages and their dependencies. This "
"section covers using <application>dpkg</application> to manage locally "
"installed packages:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/package-management.xml:43(para)
msgid ""
"To list all packages installed on the system, from a terminal prompt enter:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/package-management.xml:48(command)
msgid "dpkg -l"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/package-management.xml:54(para)
msgid ""
"Depending on the amount of packages on your system, this can generate a "
"large amount of output. Pipe the output through "
"<application>grep</application> to see if a specific package is installed:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/package-management.xml:60(command)
msgid "dpkg -l | grep apache2"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/package-management.xml:63(para)
msgid ""
"Replace <emphasis>apache2</emphasis> with any package name, part of a "
"package name, or other regular expression."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/package-management.xml:70(para)
msgid ""
"To list the files installed by a package, in this case the "
"<application>ufw</application> package, enter:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/package-management.xml:75(command)
msgid "dpkg -L ufw"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/package-management.xml:81(para)
msgid ""
"If you are not sure which package installed a file, <application>dpkg -"
"S</application> may be able to tell you. For example:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/package-management.xml:87(command)
msgid "dpkg -S /etc/host.conf"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/package-management.xml:88(computeroutput)
#, no-wrap
msgid "base-files: /etc/host.conf"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/package-management.xml:91(para)
msgid ""
"The output shows that the <filename>/etc/host.conf</filename> belongs to the "
"<application>base-files</application> package."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/package-management.xml:96(para)
msgid ""
"Many files are automatically generated during the package install process, "
"and even though they are on the filesystem <command>dpkg -S</command> may "
"not know which package they belong to."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/package-management.xml:105(para)
msgid "You can install a local <emphasis>.deb</emphasis> file by entering:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/package-management.xml:110(command)
msgid "sudo dpkg -i zip_2.32-1_i386.deb"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/package-management.xml:113(para)
msgid ""
"Change <filename>zip_2.32-1_i386.deb</filename> to the actual file name of "
"the local .deb file."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/package-management.xml:120(para)
msgid "Uninstalling a package can be accomplished by:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/package-management.xml:125(command)
msgid "sudo dpkg -r zip"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/package-management.xml:129(para)
msgid ""
"Uninstalling packages using <application>dpkg</application>, in most cases, "
"is <emphasis>NOT</emphasis> recommended. It is better to use a package "
"manager that handles dependencies, to ensure that the system is in a "
"consistent state. For example using <command>dpkg -r</command> you can "
"remove the <application>zip</application> package, but any packages that "
"depend on it will still be installed and may no longer function correctly."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/package-management.xml:140(para)
msgid ""
"For more <application>dpkg</application> options see the man page: "
"<command>man dpkg</command>."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/package-management.xml:146(title)
msgid "Apt-Get"
msgstr "Apt-Get"

#: serverguide/C/package-management.xml:147(para)
msgid ""
"The <application>apt-get</application> command is a powerful command-line "
"tool used to work with Ubuntu's <emphasis>Advanced Packaging Tool</emphasis> "
"(APT) performing such functions as installation of new software packages, "
"upgrade of existing software packages, updating of the package list index, "
"and even upgrading the entire Ubuntu system."
msgstr ""
"<application>apt-get</application> 명령은, 새로운 소프트웨어 꾸러미의 설치, 존재하는 소프트웨어 꾸러미의 "
"업그레이드, 꾸러미 목록 인덱스의 업데이트, 그리고 심지어 전체 우분투 시스템의 업그레이드를 수행하는 우분투의 "
"<emphasis>Advanced Packaging Tool</emphasis> (APT) 에 사용되는, 강력한 명령행 도구 입니다."

#: serverguide/C/package-management.xml:150(para)
msgid ""
"Being a simple command-line tool, <application>apt-get</application> has "
"numerous advantages over other package management tools available in Ubuntu "
"for server administrators. Some of these advantages include ease of use over "
"simple terminal connections (SSH) and the ability to be used in system "
"administration scripts, which can in turn be automated by the "
"<application>cron</application> scheduling utility."
msgstr ""
"단순한 명령행 도구로서, <application>apt-get</application> 은 서버 관리자를 위하여 우분투 내에서 사용할 수 "
"있는 다른 꾸러미 관리 도구들에 비해 많은 장점을 가지고 있습니다. 이러한 장점 중의 하나는 간단한 터미널 연결(SSH)로 쉽게 사용할 "
"수 있는 것과 <application>cron</application> 스케쥴링 도구에 의해 자동화 할 수 있도록 시스템 관리 "
"스크립트에서 사용될 수 있다는 것 입니다."

#: serverguide/C/package-management.xml:157(para)
msgid ""
"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Install a Package</emphasis>: Installation of "
"packages using the <application>apt-get</application> tool is quite simple. "
"For example, to install the network scanner <emphasis "
"role=\"italics\">nmap</emphasis>, type the following: <screen>\n"
"<command>sudo apt-get install nmap</command>\n"
"</screen>"
msgstr ""
"<emphasis role=\"bold\">꾸러미 설치</emphasis>: <application>apt-"
"get</application> 을 사용하여 꾸러미를 설치하는 것은 아주 간단 합니다. 예를 들어, 네트워크 스캐너인 <emphasis "
"role=\"italics\">nmap</emphasis> 을 설치하려면, 다음을 입력 합니다: <screen>\n"
"<command>sudo apt-get install nmap</command>\n"
"</screen>"

#: serverguide/C/package-management.xml:165(para)
msgid ""
"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Remove a Package</emphasis>: Removal of a package or "
"packages is also a straightforward and simple process. To remove the nmap "
"package installed in the previous example, type the following: <screen>\n"
"<command>sudo apt-get remove nmap</command>\n"
"</screen>"
msgstr ""
"<emphasis role=\"bold\">꾸러미 삭제</emphasis>: 꾸러미(들)을 삭제하는 것도 또한 직선적이고 간단한 작업 "
"입니다. 이전 예제에서 설치하였던 nmap 꾸러미를 삭제하려면, 다음을 입력 합니다: <screen>\n"
"<command>sudo apt-get remove nmap</command>\n"
"</screen>"

#: serverguide/C/package-management.xml:172(para)
msgid ""
"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Multiple Packages</emphasis>: You may specify "
"multiple packages to be installed or removed, separated by spaces."
msgstr ""
"<emphasis role=\"bold\">복수 꾸러미</emphasis>: 설치나 삭제를 위해 복수의 꾸러미를 지정할 때는, "
"공백(스페이스 키로)으로 구분 합니다."

#: serverguide/C/package-management.xml:175(para)
msgid ""
"Also, adding the <emphasis>--purge</emphasis> options to <command>apt-get "
"remove</command> will remove the package configuration files as well. This "
"may or may not be the desired effect so use with caution."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/package-management.xml:181(para)
msgid ""
"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Update the Package Index</emphasis>: The APT package "
"index is essentially a database of available packages from the repositories "
"defined in the <filename>/etc/apt/sources.list</filename> file. To update "
"the local package index with the latest changes made in repositories, type "
"the following: <screen>\n"
"<command>sudo apt-get update</command>\n"
"</screen>"
msgstr ""
"<emphasis role=\"bold\">꾸러미 인덱스 업데이트</emphasis>: APT 꾸러미 인덱스는 "
"<filename>/etc/apt/sources.list</filename> 파일에 지정된 저장소에서 사용 가능한 꾸러미들의 필수적인 "
"데이타베이스 입니다. 저장소에 최근의 변경된 것으로 로컬(여러분의 컴퓨터에 저장되는) 꾸러미 인덱스를 업데이트 하려면, 다음을 입력 "
"합니다: <screen>\n"
"<command>sudo apt-get update</command>\n"
"</screen>"

#: serverguide/C/package-management.xml:189(para)
msgid ""
"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Upgrade Packages</emphasis>: Over time, updated "
"versions of packages currently installed on your computer may become "
"available from the package repositories (for example security updates). To "
"upgrade your system, first update your package index as outlined above, and "
"then type: <screen>\n"
"<command>sudo apt-get upgrade</command>\n"
"</screen>"
msgstr ""
"<emphasis role=\"bold\">꾸러미 업그레이드</emphasis>: 시간이 흐르면, 여러분의 컴퓨터에 설치된 꾸러미들의 "
"업데이트된 버전이 꾸러미 저장소에서 이용 가능하게 됩니다(예를 들면 보안 업데이트). 시스템을 업그레이드하려면, 먼저 여러분의 꾸러미 "
"인덱스를 업데이트한 후에, 다음을 입력합니다: <screen>\n"
"<command>sudo apt-get upgrade</command>\n"
"</screen>"

#: serverguide/C/package-management.xml:195(para)
msgid ""
"For information on upgrading to a new Ubuntu release see <xref "
"linkend=\"installing-upgrading\"/>."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/package-management.xml:153(para)
msgid ""
"Some examples of popular uses for the <application>apt-get</application> "
"utility: <placeholder-1/>"
msgstr ""
"<application>apt-get</application> 유틸리티의 몇 가지 잘 알려진 사용 예는: <placeholder-1/>"

#: serverguide/C/package-management.xml:201(para)
msgid ""
"Actions of the <application>apt-get</application> command, such as "
"installation and removal of packages, are logged in the /var/log/dpkg.log "
"log file."
msgstr ""
"<application>apt-get</application> 명령의 행위는, 즉 꾸러미의 설치와 삭제와 같은, "
"/var/log/dpkg.log 로그 파일에 기록이 됩니다."

#: serverguide/C/package-management.xml:204(para)
msgid ""
"For further information about the use of <application>APT</application>, "
"read the comprehensive <ulink url=\"http://www.debian.org/doc/user-"
"manuals#apt-howto\">Debian APT User Manual</ulink> or type: <screen>apt-get "
"help</screen>"
msgstr ""
"<application>APT</application> 사용에 대한 더 많은 정보는, 광범위한 <ulink "
"url=\"http://www.debian.org/doc/user-manuals#apt-howto\">데비안 APT 사용자 "
"지침서</ulink> 를 읽거나 다음을 입력 하십시오: <screen>apt-get help</screen>"

#: serverguide/C/package-management.xml:208(title)
msgid "Aptitude"
msgstr "Aptitude"

#: serverguide/C/package-management.xml:209(para)
msgid ""
"<application>Aptitude</application> is a menu-driven, text-based front-end "
"to the <emphasis>Advanced Packaging Tool</emphasis> (APT) system. Many of "
"the common package management functions, such as installation, removal, and "
"upgrade, are performed in <application>Aptitude</application> with single-"
"key commands, which are typically lowercase letters."
msgstr ""
"<application>Aptitude</application> 는 메뉴 방식이고, <emphasis>Advanced Packaging "
"Tool</emphasis> (APT) 시스템의 텍스트 기반 프론트 엔드 입니다. 설치, 삭제, 그리고 업그레이드와 같은 많은 일반적인 "
"꾸러미 관리 기능을 <application>Aptitude</application> 에서는 단일 키 명령, 보통 소문자를 사용하여 수행할 "
"수 있습니다."

#: serverguide/C/package-management.xml:212(para)
msgid ""
"<application>Aptitude</application> is best suited for use in a non-"
"graphical terminal environment to ensure proper functioning of the command "
"keys. You may start <application>Aptitude</application> as a normal user "
"with the following command at a terminal prompt: <screen>\n"
"<command>sudo aptitude</command>\n"
"</screen>"
msgstr ""
"<application>Aptitude</application>는 명령 키가 올바로 동작하는 것을 보장할 수 있도록 그래픽 터미널이 아닌 "
"환경에 맞추어져 있습니다. 여러분은 일반 사용자 계정에서 다음 명령을 입력하여 "
"<application>Aptitude</application>를 실행할 수 있습니다: <screen>\n"
"<command>sudo aptitude</command>\n"
"</screen>"

#: serverguide/C/package-management.xml:219(para)
msgid ""
"When <application>Aptitude</application> starts, you will see a menu bar at "
"the top of the screen and two panes below the menu bar. The top pane "
"contains package categories, such as <emphasis role=\"italics\">New "
"Packages</emphasis> and <emphasis role=\"italics\">Not Installed "
"Packages</emphasis>. The bottom pane contains information related to the "
"packages and package categories."
msgstr ""
"<application>Aptitude</application>를 시작하고, 여러분은 화면의 가장 위에 메뉴 막대를, 그 메뉴 막대 밑에 "
"두 개의 부분 창을 보게 됩니다. 윗쪽의 부분 창은 <emphasis role=\"italics\">새 꾸러미</emphasis> 와 "
"<emphasis role=\"italics\">설치되지 않은 꾸러미</emphasis> 와 같은 꾸러미 분류를 가집니다. 아래의 부분 "
"창은 꾸러미와 꾸러미 분류에 관련된 정보를 가집니다."

#: serverguide/C/package-management.xml:222(para)
msgid ""
"Using <application>Aptitude</application> for package management is "
"relatively straightforward, and the user interface makes common tasks simple "
"to perform. The following are examples of common package management "
"functions as performed in <application>Aptitude</application>:"
msgstr ""
"꾸러미 관리를 위해 <application>Aptitude</application>를 사용하는 것은 비교적 간단하며, 사용자 인터페이스는 "
"일반적인 작업들을 간편하게 처리할 수 있게 해 줍니다. 다음은 <application>Aptitude</application>에서 "
"수행되는 일반적인 꾸러미 관리 기능들입니다:"

#: serverguide/C/package-management.xml:226(para)
msgid ""
"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Install Packages</emphasis>: To install a package, "
"locate the package via the Not Installed Packages package category, for "
"example, by using the keyboard arrow keys and the <keycap>ENTER</keycap> "
"key, and highlight the package you wish to install. After highlighting the "
"package you wish to install, press the <keycap>+</keycap> key, and the "
"package entry should turn <emphasis role=\"italics\">green</emphasis>, "
"indicating it has been marked for installation. Now press <keycap>g</keycap> "
"to be presented with a summary of package actions. Press <keycap>g</keycap> "
"again, and you will be prompted to become root to complete the installation. "
"Press <keycap>ENTER</keycap> which will result in a Password: prompt. Enter "
"your user password to become root. Finally, press <keycap>g</keycap> once "
"more and you'll be prompted to download the package. Press "
"<keycap>ENTER</keycap> on the <emphasis role=\"italics\">Continue</emphasis> "
"prompt, and downloading and installation of the package will commence."
msgstr ""
"<emphasis role=\"bold\">꾸러미 설치</emphasis>: 꾸러미를 설치하려면, 설치되지 않은 꾸러미 분류를 통하여 "
"꾸러미에 위치하고, 예를 들어, 키보드의 화살표 키와 <keycap>ENTER</keycap> 키를 사용하여, 설치하고자 하는 꾸러미를 "
"선택(하이라이팅으로 강조됨) 합니다. 설치하고자 하는 꾸러미의 선택 후, <keycap>+</keycap> 키를 누르면, 그 꾸러미 "
"항목은 <emphasis role=\"italics\">녹색</emphasis> 으로 색상이 바뀌고, 이것은 설치를 위하여 표시되었음을 "
"알려 줍니다. 이제 꾸러미 동작의 요약을 보이기 위해 <keycap>g</keycap> 키를 누릅니다. 다시 한번 "
"<keycap>g</keycap> 키를 누르면, 설치를 끝내기 위해 root가 되기위한 프롬프트를 보게 됩니다. "
"<keycap>ENTER</keycap> 키를 누르면 암호 프롬프트를 보게되고, 여러분의 사용자 암호를 입력하여 root(시스템 관리를 "
"하는 사용자)가 됩니다. 마지막으로, <keycap>g</keycap> 키를 한 번 더 누르고 꾸러미의 다운로드를 알리는 프롬프트를 보게 "
"됩니다. <emphasis role=\"italics\">Continue</emphasis> 프롬프트에서 "
"<keycap>ENTER</keycap> 키를 누르면, 꾸러미의 내려받기와 설치가 시작 됩니다."

#: serverguide/C/package-management.xml:230(para)
msgid ""
"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Remove Packages</emphasis>: To remove a package, "
"locate the package via the Installed Packages package category, for example, "
"by using the keyboard arrow keys and the <keycap>ENTER</keycap> key, and "
"highlight the package you wish to remove. After highlighting the package you "
"wish to install, press the <keycap>-</keycap> key, and the package entry "
"should turn <emphasis role=\"italics\">pink</emphasis>, indicating it has "
"been marked for removal. Now press <keycap>g</keycap> to be presented with a "
"summary of package actions. Press <keycap>g</keycap> again, and you will be "
"prompted to become root to complete the installation. Press "
"<keycap>ENTER</keycap> which will result in a Password: prompt. Enter your "
"user password to become root. Finally, press <keycap>g</keycap> once more, "
"and you'll be prompted to download the package. Press <keycap>ENTER</keycap> "
"on the <emphasis role=\"italics\">Continue</emphasis> prompt, and removal of "
"the package will commence."
msgstr ""
"<emphasis role=\"bold\">꾸러미 삭제</emphasis>: 꾸러미를 삭제하려면, 설치된 꾸러미 분류를 통하여 꾸러미에 "
"위치하고, 예를 들어, 키보드의 화살표 키와 <keycap>ENTER</keycap> 키를 사용하여, 삭제하고자 하는 꾸러미를 선택 "
"합니다. 삭제하고자 하는 꾸러미의 선택 후, <keycap>-</keycap> 키를 누르면, 그 꾸러미 항목은 <emphasis "
"role=\"italics\">분홍색</emphasis> 으로 색상이 바뀌고, 이것은 삭제를 위하여 표시되었음을 알려 줍니다. 이제 "
"꾸러미 동작의 요약을 보이기 위해 <keycap>g</keycap> 키를 누릅니다. 다시 한번 <keycap>g</keycap> 키를 "
"누르면, 삭제를 끝내기 위해 root가 되기위한 프롬프트를 보게 됩니다. <keycap>ENTER</keycap> 키를 누르면 암호 "
"프롬프트를 보게되고, 여러분의 사용자 암호를 입력하여 root가 됩니다. 마지막으로, <keycap>g</keycap> 키를 한 번 더 "
"누르고 꾸러미의 삭제를 알리는 프롬프트를 보게 됩니다. <emphasis "
"role=\"italics\">Continue</emphasis> 프롬프트에서 <keycap>ENTER</keycap> 키를 누르면, "
"꾸러미의 삭제가 시작 됩니다."

#: serverguide/C/package-management.xml:234(para)
msgid ""
"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Update Package Index</emphasis>: To update the "
"package index, simply press the <keycap>u</keycap> key and you will be "
"prompted to become root to complete the update. Press <keycap>ENTER</keycap> "
"which will result in a Password: prompt. Enter your user password to become "
"root. Updating of the package index will commence. Press "
"<keycap>ENTER</keycap> on the OK prompt when the download dialog is "
"presented to complete the process."
msgstr ""
"<emphasis role=\"bold\">꾸러미 인덱스 업데이트</emphasis>: 꾸러미 인덱스를 업데이트 하려면, 단지 "
"<keycap>u</keycap> 키를 누르면 됩니다. 그러면 업데이트를 수행하기 위해 root 사용자로 변경한다는 메시지가 보일 "
"것입니다. <keycap>ENTER</keycap> 키를 누르면 암호를 묻는 창이 뜨게 됩니다. 여러분의 암호를 입력하면, root "
"사용자로 변경되어 꾸러미 인덱스 업데이트가 수행될 것입니다. 업데이트가 완료하기 위해 다운로드 창이 뜨면 OK 프롬프트 상에서 "
"<keycap>ENTER</keycap> 키를 누르세요."

#: serverguide/C/package-management.xml:238(para)
msgid ""
"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Upgrade Packages</emphasis>: To upgrade packages, "
"perform the update of the package index as detailed above, and then press "
"the <keycap>U</keycap> key to mark all packages with updates. Now press "
"<keycap>g</keycap> whereby you'll be presented with a summary of package "
"actions. Press <keycap>g</keycap> again, and you will be prompted to become "
"root to complete the installation. Press <keycap>ENTER</keycap> which will "
"result in a Password: prompt. Enter your user password to become root. "
"Finally, press <keycap>g</keycap> once more, and you'll be prompted to "
"download the packages. Press <keycap>ENTER</keycap> on the <emphasis "
"role=\"italics\">Continue</emphasis> prompt, and upgrade of the packages "
"will commence."
msgstr ""
"<emphasis role=\"bold\">꾸러미 업그레이드</emphasis>: 꾸러미들을 업그레이드하려면, 위에서 설명한 꾸러미 "
"인덱스 업데이트를 수행하고 모든 꾸러미들을 업데이트하도록 표시하기 위해 <keycap>U</keycap> 키를 누릅니다. 이제 "
"<keycap>g</keycap> 키를 누르면 꾸러미들에 수행될 동작들의 요약을 볼 수 있습니다. 다시 <keycap>U</keycap> "
"키를 누르면 설치를 완료하기 위해 root 사용자로 변경한다는 메시지가 보일 것입니다. <keycap>ENTER</keycap> 키를 "
"누르면 암호를 묻는 창이 뜨게 됩니다. 여러분의 암호를 입력하면, root 사용자로 변경됩니다. 마지막으로 "
"<keycap>U</keycap> 키를 한번 더 누르면 꾸러미들을 다운로드 할지 물어보는 창이 뜹니다. <emphasis "
"role=\"italics\">Continue</emphasis> 프롬프트 상에서 <keycap>ENTER</keycap> 키를 누르면 "
"꾸러미 업그레이드가 수행될 것입니다."

#: serverguide/C/package-management.xml:245(para)
msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">i</emphasis>: Installed package"
msgstr "<emphasis role=\"bold\">i</emphasis>: 설치된 꾸러미"

#: serverguide/C/package-management.xml:250(para)
msgid ""
"<emphasis role=\"bold\">c</emphasis>: Package not installed, but package "
"configuration remains on system"
msgstr ""
"<emphasis role=\"bold\">c</emphasis>: 설치되지 않은 꾸러미이지만, 설정이 시스템에 남아있는 꾸러미"

#: serverguide/C/package-management.xml:254(para)
msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">p</emphasis>: Purged from system"
msgstr "<emphasis role=\"bold\">p</emphasis>: 시스템에서 깨끗히 삭제된 꾸러미"

#: serverguide/C/package-management.xml:258(para)
msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">v</emphasis>: Virtual package"
msgstr "<emphasis role=\"bold\">v</emphasis>: 가상 꾸러미"

#: serverguide/C/package-management.xml:262(para)
msgid "<emphasis role=\"bold\">B</emphasis>: Broken package"
msgstr "<emphasis role=\"bold\">B</emphasis>: 잘못된 꾸러미"

#: serverguide/C/package-management.xml:266(para)
msgid ""
"<emphasis role=\"bold\">u</emphasis>: Unpacked files, but package not yet "
"configured"
msgstr "<emphasis role=\"bold\">u</emphasis>: 풀려진 파일, 그러나 아직 설정이 안된 꾸러미"

#: serverguide/C/package-management.xml:270(para)
msgid ""
"<emphasis role=\"bold\">C</emphasis>: Half-configured - Configuration failed "
"and requires fix"
msgstr ""
"<emphasis role=\"bold\">C</emphasis>: 설정 중(Half-configured) - 설정 과정이 실패하여 "
"수정이 필요한 꾸러미"

#: serverguide/C/package-management.xml:274(para)
msgid ""
"<emphasis role=\"bold\">H</emphasis>: Half-installed - Removal failed and "
"requires fix"
msgstr ""
"<emphasis role=\"bold\">H</emphasis>: 설치 중(Half-installed) - 삭제 과정이 실패하여 수정이 "
"필요한 꾸러미"

#: serverguide/C/package-management.xml:242(para)
msgid ""
"The first column of information displayed in the package list in the top "
"pane, when actually viewing packages lists the current state of the package, "
"and uses the following key to describe the state of the package: "
"<placeholder-1/>"
msgstr ""
"위쪽 부분 창의 꾸러미 목록에 보여진 정보의 첫 항목(행)은, 꾸러미의 현재 상태를 꾸러미 목록에 실제 보이는 것이고, 꾸러미 상태를 "
"기술하는 것은 다음의 키를 사용 합니다:<placeholder-1/>"

#: serverguide/C/package-management.xml:280(para)
msgid ""
"To exit Aptitude, simply press the <keycap>q</keycap> key and confirm you "
"wish to exit. Many other functions are available from the Aptitude menu by "
"pressing the <keycap>F10</keycap> key."
msgstr ""
"Aptitude를 종료하려면, 간단히 <keycap>q</keycap> 키를 누르고 종료한다는 것을 확인 합니다. 많은 다른 기능들은 "
"Aptitude 메뉴에서 <keycap>F10</keycap> 키를 눌러 보실 수 있습니다."

#: serverguide/C/package-management.xml:285(title)
msgid "Automatic Updates"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/package-management.xml:287(para)
msgid ""
"The <application>unattended-upgrades</application> package can be used to "
"automatically install updated packages, and can be configured to update all "
"packages or just install security updates. First, install the package by "
"entering the following in a terminal:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/package-management.xml:293(command)
msgid "sudo apt-get install unattended-upgrades"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/package-management.xml:296(para)
msgid ""
"To configure <application>unattended-upgrades</application>, edit "
"<filename>/etc/apt/apt.conf.d/50unattended-upgrades</filename> and adjust "
"the following to fit your needs:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/package-management.xml:301(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"Unattended-Upgrade::Allowed-Origins {\n"
"        \"Ubuntu lucid-security\";\n"
"//      \"Ubuntu lucid-updates\";\n"
"};\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/package-management.xml:308(para)
msgid ""
"Certain packages can also be <emphasis>blacklisted</emphasis> and therefore "
"will not be automatically updated. To blacklist a package, add it to the "
"list:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/package-management.xml:313(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"Unattended-Upgrade::Package-Blacklist {\n"
"//      \"vim\";\n"
"//      \"libc6\";\n"
"//      \"libc6-dev\";\n"
"//      \"libc6-i686\";\n"
"};\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/package-management.xml:323(para)
msgid ""
"The double <emphasis><quote>//</quote></emphasis> serve as comments, so "
"whatever follows \"//\" will not be evaluated."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/package-management.xml:328(para)
msgid ""
"To enable automatic updates, edit "
"<filename>/etc/apt/apt.conf.d/10periodic</filename> and set the appropriate "
"<application>apt</application> configuration options:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/package-management.xml:332(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"APT::Periodic::Update-Package-Lists \"1\";\n"
"APT::Periodic::Download-Upgradeable-Packages \"1\";\n"
"APT::Periodic::AutocleanInterval \"7\";\n"
"APT::Periodic::Unattended-Upgrade \"1\";\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/package-management.xml:339(para)
msgid ""
"The above configuration updates the package list, downloads, and installs "
"available upgrades every day. The local download archive is cleaned every "
"week."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/package-management.xml:345(para)
msgid ""
"You can read more about <application>apt</application> Periodic "
"configuration options in the <filename>/etc/cron.daily/apt</filename> script "
"header."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/package-management.xml:350(para)
msgid ""
"The results of <application>unattended-upgrades</application> will be logged "
"to <filename>/var/log/unattended-upgrades</filename>."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/package-management.xml:355(title)
msgid "Notifications"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/package-management.xml:357(para)
msgid ""
"Configuring <emphasis>Unattended-Upgrade::Mail</emphasis> in "
"<filename>/etc/apt/apt.conf.d/50unattended-upgrades</filename> will enable "
"<application>unattended-upgrades</application> to email an administrator "
"detailing any packages that need upgrading or have problems."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/package-management.xml:362(para)
msgid ""
"Another useful package is <application>apticron</application>. "
"<application>apticron</application> will configure a "
"<application>cron</application> job to email an administrator information "
"about any packages on the system that have updates available, as well as a "
"summary of changes in each package."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/package-management.xml:368(para)
msgid ""
"To install the <application>apticron</application> package, in a terminal "
"enter:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/package-management.xml:373(command)
msgid "sudo apt-get install apticron"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/package-management.xml:376(para)
msgid ""
"Once the package is installed edit "
"<filename>/etc/apticron/apticron.conf</filename>, to set the email address "
"and other options:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/package-management.xml:380(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"EMAIL=\"root@example.com\"\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/package-management.xml:389(para)
msgid ""
"Configuration of the <emphasis>Advanced Packaging Tool</emphasis> (APT) "
"system repositories is stored in the /etc/apt/sources.list configuration "
"file. An example of this file is referenced here, along with information on "
"adding or removing repository references from the file."
msgstr ""
"<emphasis>Advanced Packaging Tool</emphasis> (APT) 시스템 저장소에 대한 설정은 "
"/etc/apt/sources.list 설정 파일에 저장 됩니다. 여기에 참조하는 것은 그 파일의 한 예이고, 그 파일에서 저장소를 추가 "
"또는 삭제하는 것에 대한 정보를 보여 줍니다."

#: serverguide/C/package-management.xml:395(para)
msgid ""
"<ulink url=\"../sample/sources.list\">Here</ulink> is a simple example of a "
"typical <filename>/etc/apt/sources.list</filename> file."
msgstr ""
"<ulink url=\"../sample/sources.list\">이것</ulink>은 전형적인 "
"<filename>/etc/apt/sources.list</filename> 파일의 간단한 예제입니다."

#: serverguide/C/package-management.xml:399(para)
msgid ""
"You may edit the file to enable repositories or disable them. For example, "
"to disable the requirement of inserting the Ubuntu CD-ROM whenever package "
"operations occur, simply comment out the appropriate line for the CD-ROM, "
"which appears at the top of the file:"
msgstr ""
"여러분은 저장소를 활성화 또는 비활성화 하기 위하여 그 파일을 편집할 수 있습니다. 예를 들어, 꾸러미에 대한 동작이 일어날 때마다 "
"우분투 CD-ROM의 삽입이 필요한 것을 비활성화 시키려면, 그 파일의 맨 위에 보여지는, CD-ROM를 위해 사용되는 그 줄을 간단히 "
"주석처리 합니다:"

#: serverguide/C/package-management.xml:404(screen)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"# no more prompting for CD-ROM please\n"
"# deb cdrom:[Ubuntu 10.04_Lucid_Lynx - Release i386 (20070419.1)]/ lucid "
"main restricted\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/package-management.xml:410(title)
msgid "Extra Repositories"
msgstr "추가 저장소"

#: serverguide/C/package-management.xml:411(para)
msgid ""
"In addition to the officially supported package repositories available for "
"Ubuntu, there exist additional community-maintained repositories which add "
"thousands more potential packages for installation. Two of the most popular "
"are the <emphasis>Universe</emphasis> and <emphasis>Multiverse</emphasis> "
"repositories. These repositories are not officially supported by Ubuntu, but "
"because they are maintained by the community they generally provide packages "
"which are safe for use with your Ubuntu computer."
msgstr ""
"우분투에서 공식적으로 지원하는 꾸러미 저장소 이외에도, 커뮤니티에서 관리하는 수천 가지 꾸러미들을 설치할 수 있는 추가적인 저장소가 "
"존재합니다. 이 중 가장 대중적인 두 저장소는 <emphasis>Universe</emphasis> 와 "
"<emphasis>Multiverse</emphasis> 저장소입니다. 이 저장소들은 우분투에서 공식적으로 지원하지는 않지만, "
"커뮤니티에서 관리되기 때문에 일반적으로 우분투 컴퓨터에서 안전하게 사용될 수 있는 꾸러미들을 제공합니다."

#: serverguide/C/package-management.xml:414(para)
msgid ""
"Packages in the <emphasis>Multiverse</emphasis> repository often have "
"licensing issues that prevent them from being distributed with a free "
"operating system, and they may be illegal in your locality."
msgstr ""
"<emphasis>Multiverse</emphasis> 저장소 내의 꾸러미들은 종종 자유 운영 체제에서 배포될 수 없는 라이센스 조항을 "
"가지고 있으며, 여러분의 지역 내에서 사용이 법률적으로 금지되어 있을 수도 있습니다."

#: serverguide/C/package-management.xml:416(para)
msgid ""
"Be advised that neither the <emphasis>Universe</emphasis> or "
"<emphasis>Multiverse</emphasis> repositories contain officially supported "
"packages. In particular, there may not be security updates for these "
"packages."
msgstr ""
"<emphasis>Universe</emphasis> 또는 <emphasis>Multiverse</emphasis> 저장소는 공식적으로 "
"지원되는 꾸러미를 가지고 있지 않음을 충고 합니다. 특정 예로, 그 꾸러미들을 위한 보안 업데이트가 없을 수도 있습니다."

#: serverguide/C/package-management.xml:420(para)
msgid ""
"Many other package sources are available, sometimes even offering only one "
"package, as in the case of package sources provided by the developer of a "
"single application. You should always be very careful and cautious when "
"using non-standard package sources, however. Research the source and "
"packages carefully before performing any installation, as some package "
"sources and their packages could render your system unstable or non-"
"functional in some respects."
msgstr ""
"많은 다른 꾸러미 소스도 사용 가능하고, 때로는 하나의 프로그램 개발자에 의해 제공되는 꾸러미 소스의 경우, 오직 하나의 꾸러미만을 "
"심지어 제공하는 경우도 있습니다. 하지만, 표준화되지 않은 꾸러미 소스를 사용할 때는, 여러분은 매우 조심하고 주의를 기울여야 합니다. "
"몇 개의 꾸러미 소스와 그들의 꾸러미는 어떤 측면에서는 여러분의 시스템을 불안정하게 하거나 또는 동작하지 않도록 할 수 있으므로, 설치를 "
"수행하기 전에 소스와 꾸러미를 조심스럽게 조사해 보십시오."

#: serverguide/C/package-management.xml:423(para)
msgid ""
"By default, the <emphasis>Universe</emphasis> and "
"<emphasis>Multiverse</emphasis> repositories are enabled but if you would "
"like to disable them edit <filename>/etc/apt/sources.list</filename> and "
"comment the following lines:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/package-management.xml:430(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"deb http://archive.ubuntu.com/ubuntu lucid universe multiverse\n"
"deb-src http://archive.ubuntu.com/ubuntu lucid universe multiverse\n"
"\n"
"deb http://us.archive.ubuntu.com/ubuntu/ lucid universe\n"
"deb-src http://us.archive.ubuntu.com/ubuntu/ lucid universe\n"
"deb http://us.archive.ubuntu.com/ubuntu/ lucid-updates universe\n"
"deb-src http://us.archive.ubuntu.com/ubuntu/ lucid-updates universe\n"
"\n"
"deb http://us.archive.ubuntu.com/ubuntu/ lucid multiverse\n"
"deb-src http://us.archive.ubuntu.com/ubuntu/ lucid multiverse\n"
"deb http://us.archive.ubuntu.com/ubuntu/ lucid-updates multiverse\n"
"deb-src http://us.archive.ubuntu.com/ubuntu/ lucid-updates multiverse\n"
"\n"
"deb http://security.ubuntu.com/ubuntu lucid-security universe\n"
"deb-src http://security.ubuntu.com/ubuntu lucid-security universe\n"
"deb http://security.ubuntu.com/ubuntu lucid-security multiverse\n"
"deb-src http://security.ubuntu.com/ubuntu lucid-security multiverse\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/package-management.xml:456(para)
msgid ""
"Most of the material covered in this chapter is available in "
"<application>man</application> pages, many of which are available online."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/package-management.xml:463(para)
msgid ""
"The <ulink "
"url=\"https://help.ubuntu.com/community/InstallingSoftware\">InstallingSoftwa"
"re</ulink> Ubuntu wiki page has more information."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/package-management.xml:468(para)
msgid ""
"For more <application>dpkg</application> details see the <ulink "
"url=\"http://manpages.ubuntu.com/manpages/lucid/en/man1/dpkg.1.html\">dpkg "
"man page</ulink>."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/package-management.xml:474(para)
msgid ""
"The <ulink url=\"http://www.debian.org/doc/manuals/apt-howto/\">APT "
"HOWTO</ulink> and <ulink "
"url=\"http://manpages.ubuntu.com/manpages/lucid/en/man8/apt-get.8.html\">apt-"
"get man page</ulink> contain useful information regarding <application>apt-"
"get</application> usage."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/package-management.xml:481(para)
msgid ""
"See the <ulink "
"url=\"http://manpages.ubuntu.com/manpages/lucid/man8/aptitude.8.html\">aptitu"
"de man page</ulink> for more <application>aptitude</application> options."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/package-management.xml:487(para)
msgid ""
"The <ulink "
"url=\"https://help.ubuntu.com/community/Repositories/Ubuntu\">Adding "
"Repositories HOWTO (Ubuntu Wiki)</ulink> page contains more details on "
"adding repositories."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/other-apps.xml:13(title)
msgid "Other Useful Applications"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/other-apps.xml:15(para)
msgid ""
"There are many very useful applications developed by the Ubuntu Server Team, "
"and others that are well integrated with Ubuntu Server Edition, that might "
"not be well known. This chapter will showcase some useful applications that "
"can make administering an Ubuntu server, or many Ubuntu servers, that much "
"easier."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/other-apps.xml:23(title)
msgid "pam_motd"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/other-apps.xml:25(para)
msgid ""
"When logging into an Ubuntu server you may have noticed the informative "
"Message Of The Day (MOTD). This information is obtained and displayed using "
"a couple of packages:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/other-apps.xml:32(para)
msgid ""
"<emphasis>landscape-common:</emphasis> provides the core libraries of "
"<application>landscape-client</application>, which can be used to manage "
"systems using the web based <emphasis>Landscape</emphasis> application. The "
"package includes the <application>/usr/bin/landscape-sysinfo</application> "
"utility which is used to gather the information displayed in the MOTD."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/other-apps.xml:40(para)
msgid ""
"<emphasis>update-notifier-common:</emphasis> is used to automatically update "
"the MOTD via <application>pam_motd</application> module."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/other-apps.xml:46(para)
msgid ""
"<application>pam_motd</application> executes the scripts in "
"<filename>/etc/update-motd.d</filename> in order based on the number "
"prepended to the script. The output of the scripts is written to "
"<filename>/var/run/motd</filename>, keeping the numerical order, then "
"concatenated with <filename>/etc/motd.tail</filename>."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/other-apps.xml:52(para)
msgid ""
"You can add your own dynamic information to the MOTD. For example, to add "
"local weather information:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/other-apps.xml:58(para)
msgid "First, install the <application>weather-util</application> package:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/other-apps.xml:63(command)
msgid "sudo apt-get install weather-util"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/other-apps.xml:68(para)
msgid ""
"The <application>weather</application> utility uses METAR data from the "
"National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration and forecasts from the "
"National Weather Service. In order to find local information you will need "
"the 4-character ICAO location indicator. This can be determined by browsing "
"to the <ulink url=\"http://www.weather.gov/tg/siteloc.shtml\">National "
"Weather Service</ulink> site."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/other-apps.xml:75(para)
msgid ""
"Although the National Weather Service is a United States government agency "
"there are weather stations available world wide. However, local weather "
"information for all locations outside the U.S. may not be available."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/other-apps.xml:81(para)
msgid ""
"Create <filename>/usr/local/bin/local-weather</filename>, a simple shell "
"script to use <application>weather</application> with your local ICAO "
"indicator:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/other-apps.xml:86(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"#!/bin/sh\n"
"#\n"
"#\n"
"# Prints the local weather information for the MOTD.\n"
"#\n"
"#\n"
"\n"
"# Replace KINT with your local weather station.\n"
"# Local stations can be found here: http://www.weather.gov/tg/siteloc.shtml\n"
"\n"
"echo\n"
"weather -i KINT\n"
"echo\n"
"\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/other-apps.xml:104(para)
msgid "Make the script executable:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/other-apps.xml:109(command)
msgid "sudo chmod 755 /usr/local/bin/local-weather"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/other-apps.xml:113(para)
msgid ""
"Next, create a symlink to <filename>/etc/update-motd.d/98-local-"
"weather</filename>:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/other-apps.xml:118(command)
msgid ""
"sudo ln -s /usr/local/bin/local-weather /etc/update-motd.d/98-local-weather"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/other-apps.xml:122(para)
msgid "Finally, exit the server and re-login to view the new MOTD."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/other-apps.xml:128(para)
msgid ""
"You should now be greeted with some useful information, and some information "
"about the local weather that may not be quite so useful. Hopefully the "
"<application>local-weather</application> example demonstrates the "
"flexibility of <application>pam_motd</application>."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/other-apps.xml:136(title)
msgid "etckeeper"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/other-apps.xml:138(para)
msgid ""
"<application>etckeeper</application> allows the contents of <filename "
"role=\"directory\">/etc</filename> be easily stored in Version Control "
"System (VCS) repository. It hooks into <application>apt</application> to "
"automatically commit changes to <filename>/etc</filename> when packages are "
"installed or upgraded. Placing <filename>/etc</filename> under version "
"control is considered an industry best practice, and the goal of "
"<application>etckeeper</application> is to make this process as painless as "
"possible."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/other-apps.xml:146(para)
msgid ""
"Install <application>etckeeper</application> by entering the following in a "
"terminal:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/other-apps.xml:151(command)
msgid "sudo apt-get install etckeeper"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/other-apps.xml:154(para)
msgid ""
"The main configuration file, "
"<filename>/etc/etckeeper/etckeeper.conf</filename>, is fairly simple. The "
"main option is which VCS to use. By default "
"<application>etckeeper</application> is configured to use "
"<application>bzr</application> for version control. The repository is "
"automatically initialized (and committed for the first time) during package "
"installation. It is possible to undo this by entering the following command:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/other-apps.xml:164(command)
msgid "sudo etckeeper uninit"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/other-apps.xml:167(para)
msgid ""
"By default, etckeeper will commit uncommitted changes made to /etc daily. "
"This can be disabled using the AVOID_DAILY_AUTOCOMMITS configuration option. "
"It will also automatically commit changes before and after package "
"installation. For a more precise tracking of changes, it is recommended to "
"commit your changes manually, together with a commit message, using:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/other-apps.xml:176(command)
msgid "sudo etckeeper commit \"..Reason for configuration change..\""
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/other-apps.xml:179(para)
msgid ""
"Using the VCS commands you can view log information about files in "
"<filename>/etc</filename>:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/other-apps.xml:184(command)
msgid "sudo bzr log /etc/passwd"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/other-apps.xml:187(para)
msgid ""
"To demonstrate the integration with the package management system, install "
"<application>postfix</application>:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/other-apps.xml:192(command) serverguide/C/mail.xml:45(command)
msgid "sudo apt-get install postfix"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/other-apps.xml:195(para)
msgid ""
"When the installation is finished, all the "
"<application>postfix</application> configuration files should be committed "
"to the repository:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/other-apps.xml:201(computeroutput)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"Committing to: /etc/\n"
"added aliases.db\n"
"modified group\n"
"modified group-\n"
"modified gshadow\n"
"modified gshadow-\n"
"modified passwd\n"
"modified passwd-\n"
"added postfix\n"
"added resolvconf\n"
"added rsyslog.d\n"
"modified shadow\n"
"modified shadow-\n"
"added init.d/postfix\n"
"added network/if-down.d/postfix\n"
"added network/if-up.d/postfix\n"
"added postfix/dynamicmaps.cf\n"
"added postfix/main.cf\n"
"added postfix/master.cf\n"
"added postfix/post-install\n"
"added postfix/postfix-files\n"
"added postfix/postfix-script\n"
"added postfix/sasl\n"
"added ppp/ip-down.d\n"
"added ppp/ip-down.d/postfix\n"
"added ppp/ip-up.d/postfix\n"
"added rc0.d/K20postfix\n"
"added rc1.d/K20postfix\n"
"added rc2.d/S20postfix\n"
"added rc3.d/S20postfix\n"
"added rc4.d/S20postfix\n"
"added rc5.d/S20postfix\n"
"added rc6.d/K20postfix\n"
"added resolvconf/update-libc.d\n"
"added resolvconf/update-libc.d/postfix\n"
"added rsyslog.d/postfix.conf\n"
"added ufw/applications.d/postfix\n"
"Committed revision 2."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/other-apps.xml:241(para)
msgid ""
"For an example of how <application>etckeeper</application> tracks manual "
"changes, add new a host to <filename>/etc/hosts</filename>. Using "
"<application>bzr</application> you can see which files have been modified:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/other-apps.xml:247(command)
msgid "sudo bzr status /etc/"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/other-apps.xml:248(computeroutput)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"modified:\n"
"  hosts"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/other-apps.xml:252(para)
msgid "Now commit the changes:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/other-apps.xml:257(command)
msgid "sudo etckeeper commit \"new host\""
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/other-apps.xml:260(para)
msgid ""
"For more information on <application>bzr</application> see <xref "
"linkend=\"bazaar\"/>."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/other-apps.xml:266(title)
msgid "Byobu"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/other-apps.xml:268(para)
msgid ""
"One of the most useful applications for any system administrator is "
"<application>screen</application>. It allows the execution of multiple "
"shells in one terminal. To make some of the advanced "
"<application>screen</application> features more user friendly, and provide "
"some useful information about the system, the "
"<application>byobu</application> package was created."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/other-apps.xml:275(para)
msgid ""
"When executing <application>byobu</application> pressing the "
"<emphasis>F9</emphasis> key will bring up the "
"<application>Configuration</application> menu. This menu will allow you to:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/other-apps.xml:281(para)
msgid "View the Help menu"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/other-apps.xml:282(para)
msgid "Change Byobu's background color"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/other-apps.xml:283(para)
msgid "Change Byobu's foreground color"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/other-apps.xml:284(para)
msgid "Toggle status notifications"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/other-apps.xml:285(para)
msgid "Change the key binding set"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/other-apps.xml:286(para)
msgid "Change the escape sequence"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/other-apps.xml:287(para)
msgid "Create new windows"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/other-apps.xml:288(para)
msgid "Manage the default windows"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/other-apps.xml:289(para)
msgid "Byobu currently does not launch at login (toggle on)"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/other-apps.xml:292(para)
msgid ""
"The <emphasis>key bindings</emphasis> determine such things as the escape "
"sequence, new window, change window, etc. There are two key binding sets to "
"choose from <emphasis>f-keys</emphasis> and <emphasis>screen-escape-"
"keys</emphasis>. If you wish to use the original key bindings choose the "
"<emphasis>none</emphasis> set."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/other-apps.xml:298(para)
msgid ""
"<application>byobu</application> provides a menu which displays the Ubuntu "
"release, processor information, memory information, and the time and date. "
"The effect is similar to a desktop menu."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/other-apps.xml:303(para)
msgid ""
"Using the <emphasis>\"Byobu currently does not launch at login (toggle "
"on)\"</emphasis> option will cause <application>byobu</application> to be "
"executed any time a terminal is opened. Changes made to "
"<application>byobu</application> are on a per user basis, and will not "
"affect other users on the system."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/other-apps.xml:309(para)
msgid ""
"One difference when using byobu is the <emphasis>scrollback</emphasis> mode. "
"Press the <emphasis>F7</emphasis> key to enter scrollback mode. Scrollback "
"mode allows you to navigate past output using <emphasis>vi</emphasis> like "
"commands. Here is a quick list of movement commands:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/other-apps.xml:316(para)
msgid "<emphasis>h</emphasis> - Move the cursor left by one character"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/other-apps.xml:317(para)
msgid "<emphasis>j</emphasis> - Move the cursor down by one line"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/other-apps.xml:318(para)
msgid "<emphasis>k</emphasis> - Move the cursor up by one line"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/other-apps.xml:319(para)
msgid "<emphasis>l</emphasis> - Move the cursor right by one character"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/other-apps.xml:320(para)
msgid "<emphasis>0</emphasis> - Move to the beginning of the current line"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/other-apps.xml:321(para)
msgid "<emphasis>$</emphasis> - Move to the end of the current line"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/other-apps.xml:322(para)
msgid ""
"<emphasis>G</emphasis> - Moves to the specified line (defaults to the end of "
"the buffer)"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/other-apps.xml:323(para)
msgid "<emphasis>/</emphasis> - Search forward"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/other-apps.xml:324(para)
msgid "<emphasis>?</emphasis> - Search backward"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/other-apps.xml:325(para)
msgid ""
"<emphasis>n</emphasis> - Moves to the next match, either forward or backword"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/other-apps.xml:334(para)
msgid ""
"See the <ulink "
"url=\"http://manpages.ubuntu.com/manpages/lucid/en/man1/update-motd.1.html\">"
"update-motd man page</ulink> for more options available to "
"<application>update-motd</application>."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/other-apps.xml:340(para)
msgid ""
"The Debian Package of the Day <ulink "
"url=\"http://debaday.debian.net/2007/10/04/weather-check-weather-conditions-"
"and-forecasts-on-the-command-line/\">weather</ulink> article has more "
"details about using the <application>weather</application>utility."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/other-apps.xml:347(para)
msgid ""
"See the <ulink "
"url=\"http://kitenet.net/~joey/code/etckeeper/\">etckeeper</ulink> site for "
"more details on using <application>etckeeper</application>."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/other-apps.xml:353(para)
msgid ""
"The <ulink url=\"https://help.ubuntu.com/community/etckeeper\">etckeeper "
"Ubuntu Wiki</ulink> page."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/other-apps.xml:358(para)
msgid ""
"For the latest news and information about <application>bzr</application> see "
"the <ulink url=\"http://bazaar-vcs.org/\">bzr</ulink> web site."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/other-apps.xml:363(para)
msgid ""
"For more information on <application>screen</application> see the <ulink "
"url=\"http://www.gnu.org/software/screen/\">screen web site</ulink>."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/other-apps.xml:368(para)
msgid ""
"And the <ulink url=\"https://help.ubuntu.com/community/Screen\">Ubuntu Wiki "
"screen</ulink> page."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/other-apps.xml:373(para)
msgid ""
"Also, see the <application>byobu</application><ulink "
"url=\"https://launchpad.net/byobu\">project page</ulink> for more "
"information."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-config.xml:14(para)
msgid ""
"Networks consist of two or more devices, such as computer systems, printers, "
"and related equipment which are connected by either physical cabling or "
"wireless links for the purpose of sharing and distributing information among "
"the connected devices."
msgstr ""
"네트워크는 연결된 장치들 간에 정보를 공유하거나 배포할 목적으로 물리적인 케이블이나 무선 링크를 통해 연결된 컴퓨터 시스템, 프린터 및 "
"관련 장비들과 같은 여러 장치들로 구성됩니다."

#: serverguide/C/network-config.xml:20(para)
msgid ""
"This section provides general and specific information pertaining to "
"networking, including an overview of network concepts and detailed "
"discussion of popular network protocols."
msgstr ""
"이 부분에서는 네트워크의 개념에 대한 개요와 대중적인 네트워크 프로토콜들에 대한 자세한 논의를 포함하여, 네트워크에 관련된 일반적인 "
"정보와 구체적인 정보들을 제공합니다."

#: serverguide/C/network-config.xml:27(title)
msgid "Network Configuration"
msgstr "네트워크 설정"

#: serverguide/C/network-config.xml:28(para)
msgid ""
"Ubuntu ships with a number of graphical utilities to configure your network "
"devices. This document is geared toward server administrators and will focus "
"on managing your network on the command line."
msgstr ""
"우분투는 여러분의 네트워크 장치를 설정할 수 있는 몇 가지 그래픽 유틸리티를 제공 합니다. 이 문서는 서버 관리자를 위하여 작성되었고 "
"명령어 라인에서 여러분의 네트워크를 관리하는 것에 중점 합니다."

#: serverguide/C/network-config.xml:35(title)
msgid "Ethernet Interfaces"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-config.xml:36(para)
msgid ""
"Ethernet interfaces are identified by the system using the naming convention "
"of <emphasis role=\"italix\">ethX</emphasis>, where <emphasis "
"role=\"italic\">X</emphasis> represents a numeric value. The first Ethernet "
"interface is typically identified as <emphasis "
"role=\"italic\">eth0</emphasis>, the second as <emphasis "
"role=\"italic\">eth1</emphasis>, and all others should move up in numerical "
"order."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-config.xml:46(title)
msgid "Identify Ethernet Interfaces"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-config.xml:47(para)
msgid ""
"To quickly identify all available Ethernet interfaces, you can use the "
"<application>ifconfig</application> command as shown below."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-config.xml:52(userinput)
#, no-wrap
msgid "ifconfig -a | grep eth"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-config.xml:51(screen)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"<placeholder-1/>\n"
"eth0      Link encap:Ethernet  HWaddr 00:15:c5:4a:16:5a\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-config.xml:55(para)
msgid ""
"Another application that can help identify all network interfaces available "
"to your system is the <application>lshw</application> command. In the "
"example below, <application>lshw</application> shows a single Ethernet "
"interface with the logical name of <emphasis role=\"italic\">eth0</emphasis> "
"along with bus information, driver details and all supported capabilities."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-config.xml:62(userinput)
#, no-wrap
msgid "sudo lshw -class network"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-config.xml:61(screen)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"<placeholder-1/>\n"
"  *-network\n"
"       description: Ethernet interface\n"
"       product: BCM4401-B0 100Base-TX\n"
"       vendor: Broadcom Corporation\n"
"       physical id: 0\n"
"       bus info: pci@0000:03:00.0\n"
"       logical name: eth0\n"
"       version: 02\n"
"       serial: 00:15:c5:4a:16:5a\n"
"       size: 10MB/s\n"
"       capacity: 100MB/s\n"
"       width: 32 bits\n"
"       clock: 33MHz\n"
"       capabilities: (snipped for brevity)\n"
"       configuration: (snipped for brevity)\n"
"       resources: irq:17 memory:ef9fe000-ef9fffff\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-config.xml:83(title)
msgid "Ethernet Interface Logical Names"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-config.xml:84(para)
msgid ""
"Interface logical names are configured in the file "
"<filename>/etc/udev/rules.d/70-persistent-net.rules.</filename> If you would "
"like control which interface receives a particular logical name, find the "
"line matching the interfaces physical MAC address and modify the value of "
"<emphasis role=\"italic\">NAME=ethX</emphasis> to the desired logical name. "
"Reboot the system to commit your changes."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-config.xml:92(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"SUBSYSTEM==\"net\", ACTION==\"add\", DRIVERS==\"?*\", "
"ATTR{address}==\"00:15:c5:4a:16:5a\", ATTR{dev_id}==\"0x0\", "
"ATTR{type}==\"1\", KERNEL==\"eth*\", NAME=\"eth0\"\n"
"SUBSYSTEM==\"net\", ACTION==\"add\", DRIVERS==\"?*\", "
"ATTR{address}==\"00:15:c5:4a:16:5b\", ATTR{dev_id}==\"0x0\", "
"ATTR{type}==\"1\", KERNEL==\"eth*\", NAME=\"eth1\"\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-config.xml:99(title)
msgid "Ethernet Interface Settings"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-config.xml:100(para)
msgid ""
"<application>ethtool</application> is a program that displays and changes "
"Ethernet card settings such as auto-negotiation, port speed, duplex mode, "
"and Wake-on-LAN. It is not installed by default, but is available for "
"installation in the repositories."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-config.xml:106(userinput)
#, no-wrap
msgid "sudo apt-get install ethtool"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-config.xml:108(para)
msgid ""
"The following is an example of how to view supported features and configured "
"settings of an Ethernet interface."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-config.xml:113(userinput)
#, no-wrap
msgid "sudo ethtool eth0"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-config.xml:112(screen)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"<placeholder-1/>\n"
"Settings for eth0:\n"
"        Supported ports: [ TP ]\n"
"        Supported link modes:   10baseT/Half 10baseT/Full \n"
"                                100baseT/Half 100baseT/Full \n"
"                                1000baseT/Half 1000baseT/Full \n"
"        Supports auto-negotiation: Yes\n"
"        Advertised link modes:  10baseT/Half 10baseT/Full \n"
"                                100baseT/Half 100baseT/Full \n"
"                                1000baseT/Half 1000baseT/Full \n"
"        Advertised auto-negotiation: Yes\n"
"        Speed: 1000Mb/s\n"
"        Duplex: Full\n"
"        Port: Twisted Pair\n"
"        PHYAD: 1\n"
"        Transceiver: internal\n"
"        Auto-negotiation: on\n"
"        Supports Wake-on: g\n"
"        Wake-on: d\n"
"        Current message level: 0x000000ff (255)\n"
"        Link detected: yes\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-config.xml:135(para)
msgid ""
"Changes made with the <application>ethtool</application> command are "
"temporary and will be lost after a reboot. If you would like to retain "
"settings, simply add the desired <application>ethtool</application> command "
"to a <emphasis role=\"italic\">pre-up</emphasis> statement in the interface "
"configuration file <filename>/etc/network/interfaces</filename>."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-config.xml:141(para)
msgid ""
"The following is an example of how the interface identified as <emphasis "
"role=\"italic\">eth0</emphasis> could be permanently configured with a port "
"speed of 1000Mb/s running in full duplex mode."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-config.xml:145(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"auto eth0\n"
"iface eth0 inet static\n"
"pre-up /usr/sbin/ethtool -s eth0 speed 1000 duplex full\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-config.xml:151(para)
msgid ""
"Although the example above shows the interface configured to use the "
"<emphasis role=\"italic\">static</emphasis> method, it actually works with "
"other methods as well, such as DHCP. The example is meant to demonstrate "
"only proper placement of the <emphasis role=\"italic\">pre-up</emphasis> "
"statement in relation to the rest of the interface configuration."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-config.xml:163(title)
msgid "IP Addressing"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-config.xml:164(para)
msgid ""
"The following section describes the process of configuring your systems IP "
"address and default gateway needed for communicating on a local area network "
"and the Internet."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-config.xml:171(title)
msgid "Temporary IP Address Assignment"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-config.xml:172(para)
msgid ""
"For temporary network configurations, you can use standard commands such as "
"<application>ip</application>, <application>ifconfig</application> and "
"<application>route</application>, which are also found on most other "
"GNU/Linux operating systems. These commands allow you to configure settings "
"which take effect immediately, however they are not persistent and will be "
"lost after a reboot."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-config.xml:180(para)
msgid ""
"To temporarily configure an IP address, you can use the "
"<application>ifconfig</application> command in the following manner. Just "
"modify the IP address and subnet mask to match your network requirements."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-config.xml:186(userinput)
#, no-wrap
msgid "sudo ifconfig eth0 10.0.0.100 netmask 255.255.255.0"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-config.xml:188(para)
msgid ""
"To verify the IP address configuration of <application>eth0</application>, "
"you can use the <application>ifconfig</application> command in the following "
"manner."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-config.xml:193(userinput)
#, no-wrap
msgid "ifconfig eth0"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-config.xml:192(screen)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"<placeholder-1/>\n"
"eth0      Link encap:Ethernet  HWaddr 00:15:c5:4a:16:5a  \n"
"          inet addr:10.0.0.100  Bcast:10.0.0.255  Mask:255.255.255.0\n"
"          inet6 addr: fe80::215:c5ff:fe4a:165a/64 Scope:Link\n"
"          UP BROADCAST RUNNING MULTICAST  MTU:1500  Metric:1\n"
"          RX packets:466475604 errors:0 dropped:0 overruns:0 frame:0\n"
"          TX packets:403172654 errors:0 dropped:0 overruns:0 carrier:0\n"
"          collisions:0 txqueuelen:1000 \n"
"          RX bytes:2574778386 (2.5 GB)  TX bytes:1618367329 (1.6 GB)\n"
"          Interrupt:16 \n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-config.xml:204(para)
msgid ""
"To configure a default gateway, you can use the "
"<application>route</application> command in the following manner. Modify the "
"default gateway address to match your network requirements."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-config.xml:210(userinput)
#, no-wrap
msgid "sudo route add default gw 10.0.0.1 eth0"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-config.xml:212(para)
msgid ""
"To verify your default gateway configuration, you can use the "
"<application>route</application> command in the following manner."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-config.xml:217(userinput)
#, no-wrap
msgid "route -n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-config.xml:216(screen)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"<placeholder-1/>\n"
"Kernel IP routing table\n"
"Destination     Gateway         Genmask         Flags Metric Ref    Use "
"Iface\n"
"10.0.0.0        0.0.0.0         255.255.255.0   U     1      0        0 "
"eth0\n"
"0.0.0.0         10.0.0.1        0.0.0.0         UG    0      0        0 "
"eth0\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-config.xml:223(para)
msgid ""
"If you require DNS for your temporary network configuration, you can add DNS "
"server IP addresses in the file <filename>/etc/resolv.conf</filename>. The "
"example below shows how to enter two DNS servers to "
"<filename>/etc/resolv.conf</filename>, which should be changed to servers "
"appropriate for your network. A more lengthy description of DNS client "
"configuration is in a following section."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-config.xml:230(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"nameserver 8.8.8.8\n"
"nameserver 8.8.4.4\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-config.xml:234(para)
msgid ""
"If you no longer need this configuration and wish to purge all IP "
"configuration from an interface, you can use the "
"<application>ip</application> command with the flush option as shown below."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-config.xml:240(userinput)
#, no-wrap
msgid "ip addr flush eth0"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-config.xml:243(para)
msgid ""
"Flushing the IP configuration using the <application>ip</application> "
"command does not clear the contents of "
"<filename>/etc/resolv.conf</filename>. You must remove or modify those "
"entries manually."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-config.xml:251(title)
msgid "Dynamic IP Address Assignment (DHCP Client)"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-config.xml:252(para)
msgid ""
"To configure your server to use DHCP for dynamic address assignment, add the "
"<emphasis role=\"italic\">dhcp</emphasis> method to the inet address family "
"statement for the appropriate interface in the file "
"<filename>/etc/network/interfaces</filename>. The example below assumes you "
"are configuring your first Ethernet interface identified as <emphasis "
"role=\"italic\">eth0</emphasis>."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-config.xml:259(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"auto eth0\n"
"iface eth0 inet dhcp\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-config.xml:263(para)
msgid ""
"By adding an interface configuration as shown above, you can manually enable "
"the interface through the <application>ifup</application> command which "
"initiates the DHCP process via <application>dhclient</application>."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-config.xml:269(userinput) serverguide/C/network-config.xml:304(userinput)
#, no-wrap
msgid "sudo ifup eth0"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-config.xml:271(para)
msgid ""
"To manually disable the interface, you can use the "
"<application>ifdown</application> command, which in turn will initiate the "
"DHCP release process and shut down the interface."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-config.xml:277(userinput) serverguide/C/network-config.xml:311(userinput)
#, no-wrap
msgid "sudo ifdown eth0"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-config.xml:282(title)
msgid "Static IP Address Assignment"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-config.xml:283(para)
msgid ""
"To configure your system to use a static IP address assignment, add the "
"<emphasis role=\"italic\">static</emphasis> method to the inet address "
"family statement for the appropriate interface in the file "
"<filename>/etc/network/interfaces</filename>. The example below assumes you "
"are configuring your first Ethernet interface identified as <emphasis "
"role=\"italic\">eth0</emphasis>. Change the <emphasis "
"role=\"italic\">address</emphasis>, <emphasis "
"role=\"italic\">netmask</emphasis>, and <emphasis "
"role=\"italic\">gateway</emphasis> values to meet the requirements of your "
"network."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-config.xml:292(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"auto eth0\n"
"iface eth0 inet static\n"
"address 10.0.0.100\n"
"netmask 255.255.255.0\n"
"gateway 10.0.0.1\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-config.xml:299(para)
msgid ""
"By adding an interface configuration as shown above, you can manually enable "
"the interface through the <application>ifup</application> command."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-config.xml:306(para)
msgid ""
"To manually disable the interface, you can use the "
"<application>ifdown</application> command."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-config.xml:316(title)
msgid "Loopback Interface"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-config.xml:317(para)
msgid ""
"The loopback interface is identified by the system as <emphasis "
"role=\"italic\">lo</emphasis> and has a default IP address of 127.0.0.1. It "
"can be viewed using the ifconfig command."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-config.xml:322(userinput)
#, no-wrap
msgid "ifconfig lo"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-config.xml:321(screen)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"<placeholder-1/>\n"
"lo        Link encap:Local Loopback  \n"
"          inet addr:127.0.0.1  Mask:255.0.0.0\n"
"          inet6 addr: ::1/128 Scope:Host\n"
"          UP LOOPBACK RUNNING  MTU:16436  Metric:1\n"
"          RX packets:2718 errors:0 dropped:0 overruns:0 frame:0\n"
"          TX packets:2718 errors:0 dropped:0 overruns:0 carrier:0\n"
"          collisions:0 txqueuelen:0 \n"
"          RX bytes:183308 (183.3 KB)  TX bytes:183308 (183.3 KB)\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-config.xml:332(para)
msgid ""
"By default, there should be two lines in "
"<filename>/etc/network/interfaces</filename> responsible for automatically "
"configuring your loopback interface. It is recommended that you keep the "
"default settings unless you have a specific purpose for changing them. An "
"example of the two default lines are shown below."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-config.xml:338(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"auto lo\n"
"iface lo inet loopback\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-config.xml:347(title)
msgid "Name Resolution"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-config.xml:348(para)
msgid ""
"Name resolution as it relates to IP networking is the process of mapping IP "
"addresses to hostnames, making it easier to identify resources on a network. "
"The following section will explain how to properly configure your system for "
"name resolution using DNS and static hostname records."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-config.xml:356(title)
msgid "DNS Client Configuration"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-config.xml:357(para)
msgid ""
"To configure your system to use DNS for name resolution, add the IP "
"addresses of the DNS servers that are appropriate for your network in the "
"file <filename>/etc/resolv.conf</filename>. You can also add an optional DNS "
"suffix search-lists to match your network domain names."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-config.xml:362(para)
msgid ""
"Below is an example of a typical configuration of "
"<filename>/etc/resolv.conf</filename> for a server on the domain \"<emphasis "
"role=\"italic\">example.com</emphasis>\" and using two public DNS servers."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-config.xml:367(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"search example.com\n"
"nameserver 8.8.8.8\n"
"nameserver 8.8.4.4\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-config.xml:372(para)
msgid ""
"The <emphasis role=\"italic\">search</emphasis> option can also be used with "
"multiple domain names so that DNS queries will be appended in the order in "
"which they are entered. For example, your network may have multiple sub-"
"domains to search; a parent domain of <emphasis "
"role=\"italic\">example.com</emphasis>, and two sub-domains, <emphasis "
"role=\"italic\">sales.example.com</emphasis> and <emphasis "
"role=\"italic\">dev.example.com</emphasis>."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-config.xml:380(para)
msgid ""
"If you have multiple domains you wish to search, your configuration might "
"look like the following."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-config.xml:383(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"search example.com sales.example.com dev.example.com\n"
"nameserver 8.8.8.8\n"
"nameserver 8.8.4.4\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-config.xml:388(para)
msgid ""
"If you try to ping a host with the name of <emphasis "
"role=\"italic\">server1</emphasis>, your system will automatically query DNS "
"for its Fully Qualified Domain Name (FQDN) in the following order:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-config.xml:394(para)
msgid "server1<emphasis role=\"bold\">.example.com</emphasis>"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-config.xml:399(para)
msgid "server1<emphasis role=\"bold\">.sales.example.com</emphasis>"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-config.xml:404(para)
msgid "server1<emphasis role=\"bold\">.dev.example.com</emphasis>"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-config.xml:409(para)
msgid ""
"If no matches are found, the DNS server will provide a result of <emphasis "
"role=\"italic\">notfound</emphasis> and the DNS query will fail."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-config.xml:416(title)
msgid "Static Hostnames"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-config.xml:417(para)
msgid ""
"Static hostnames are locally defined hostname-to-IP mappings located in the "
"file <filename>/etc/hosts</filename>. Entries in the "
"<filename>hosts</filename> file will have precedence over DNS by default. "
"This means that if your system tries to resolve a hostname and it matches an "
"entry in /etc/hosts, it will not attempt to look up the record in DNS. In "
"some configurations, especially when Internet access is not required, "
"servers that communicate with a limited number of resources can be "
"conveniently set to use static hostnames instead of DNS."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-config.xml:424(para)
msgid ""
"The following is an example of a <filename>hosts</filename> file where a "
"number of local servers have been identified by simple hostnames, aliases "
"and their equivalent Fully Qualified Domain Names (FQDN's)."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-config.xml:428(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"127.0.0.1\tlocalhost\n"
"127.0.1.1\tubuntu-server\n"
"10.0.0.11\tserver1 vpn server1.example.com\n"
"10.0.0.12\tserver2 mail server2.example.com\n"
"10.0.0.13\tserver3 www server3.example.com\n"
"10.0.0.14\tserver4 file server4.example.com\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-config.xml:437(para)
msgid ""
"In the above example, notice that each of the servers have been given "
"aliases in addition to their proper names and FQDN's. <emphasis "
"role=\"italic\">Server1</emphasis> has been mapped to the name <emphasis "
"role=\"italic\">vpn</emphasis>, <emphasis role=\"italic\">server2</emphasis> "
"is referred to as <emphasis role=\"italic\">mail</emphasis>, <emphasis "
"role=\"italic\">server3</emphasis> as <emphasis "
"role=\"italic\">www</emphasis>, and <emphasis "
"role=\"italic\">server4</emphasis> as <emphasis "
"role=\"italic\">file</emphasis>."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-config.xml:449(title)
msgid "Name Service Switch Configuration"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-config.xml:450(para)
msgid ""
"The order in which your system selects a method of resolving hostnames to IP "
"addresses is controlled by the Name Service Switch (NSS) configuration file "
"<filename>/etc/nsswitch.conf</filename>. As mentioned in the previous "
"section, typically static hostnames defined in the systems "
"<filename>/etc/hosts</filename> file have precedence over names resolved "
"from DNS. The following is an example of the line responsible for this order "
"of hostname lookups in the file <filename>/etc/nsswitch.conf</filename>."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-config.xml:458(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"hosts:          files mdns4_minimal [NOTFOUND=return] dns mdns4\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-config.xml:464(para)
msgid ""
"<emphasis role=\"bold\">files</emphasis> first tries to resolve static "
"hostnames located in <filename>/etc/hosts</filename>."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-config.xml:470(para)
msgid ""
"<emphasis role=\"bold\">mdns4_minimal</emphasis> attempts to resolve the "
"name using Multicast DNS."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-config.xml:475(para)
msgid ""
"<emphasis role=\"bold\">[NOTFOUND=return]</emphasis> means that any response "
"of <emphasis role=\"italic\">notfound</emphasis> by the preceeding <emphasis "
"role=\"italic\">mdns4_minimal</emphasis> process should be treated as "
"authoritative and that the system should not try to continue hunting for an "
"answer."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-config.xml:483(para)
msgid ""
"<emphasis role=\"bold\">dns</emphasis> represents a legacy unicast DNS query."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-config.xml:488(para)
msgid ""
"<emphasis role=\"bold\">mdns4</emphasis> represents a Multicast DNS query."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-config.xml:494(para)
msgid ""
"To modify the order of the above mentioned name resolution methods, you can "
"simply change the <emphasis role=\"italic\">hosts:</emphasis> string to the "
"value of your choosing. For example, if you prefer to use legacy Unicast DNS "
"versus Multicast DNS, you can change the string in "
"<filename>/etc/nsswitch.conf</filename> as shown below."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-config.xml:501(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"hosts:          files dns [NOTFOUND=return] mdns4_minimal mdns4\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-config.xml:508(title)
msgid "Bridging"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-config.xml:510(para)
msgid ""
"Bridging multiple interfaces is a more advanced configuration, but is very "
"useful in multiple scenarios. One scenario is setting up a bridge with "
"multiple network interfaces, then using a firewall to filter traffic between "
"two network segments. Another scenario is using bridge on a system with one "
"interface to allow virtual machines direct access to the outside network. "
"The following example covers the latter scenario."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-config.xml:517(para)
msgid ""
"Before configuring a bridge you will need to install the <application>bridge-"
"utils</application> package. To install the package, in a terminal enter:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-config.xml:523(command)
msgid "sudo apt-get install bridge-utils"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-config.xml:526(para)
msgid ""
"Next, configure the bridge by editing "
"<filename>/etc/network/interfaces</filename>:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-config.xml:530(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"auto lo\n"
"iface lo inet loopback\n"
"\n"
"auto br0\n"
"iface br0 inet static\n"
"        address 192.168.0.10\n"
"        network 192.168.0.0\n"
"        netmask 255.255.255.0\n"
"        broadcast 192.168.0.255\n"
"        gateway 192.168.0.1\n"
"        bridge_ports eth0\n"
"        bridge_fd 9\n"
"        bridge_hello 2\n"
"        bridge_maxage 12\n"
"        bridge_stp off\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-config.xml:549(para)
msgid "Enter the appropriate values for your physical interface and network."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-config.xml:554(para)
msgid "Now restart networking to enable the bridge interface:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-config.xml:561(para)
msgid ""
"The new bridge interface should now be up and running. The "
"<application>brctl</application> provides useful information about the state "
"of the bridge, controls which interfaces are part of the bridge, etc. See "
"<command>man brctl</command> for more information."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-config.xml:577(para)
msgid ""
"The <ulink url=\"https://help.ubuntu.com/community/Network\">Ubuntu Wiki "
"Network page</ulink> has links to articles covering more advanced network "
"configuration."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-config.xml:583(para)
msgid ""
"The <ulink "
"url=\"http://manpages.ubuntu.com/manpages/lucid/en/man5/interfaces.5.html\">i"
"nterfaces man page</ulink> has details on more options for "
"<filename>/etc/network/interfaces</filename>."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-config.xml:589(para)
msgid ""
"The <ulink "
"url=\"http://manpages.ubuntu.com/manpages/lucid/en/man8/dhclient.8.html\">dhc"
"lient man page</ulink> has details on more options for configuring DHCP "
"client settings."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-config.xml:595(para)
msgid ""
"For more information on DNS client configuration see the <ulink "
"url=\"http://manpages.ubuntu.com/manpages/lucid/en/man5/resolver.5.html\">res"
"olver man page</ulink>. Also, Chapter 6 of O'Reilly's <ulink "
"url=\"http://oreilly.com/catalog/linag2/book/ch06.html\">Linux Network "
"Administrator's Guide</ulink> is a good source of resolver and name service "
"configuration information."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-config.xml:603(para)
msgid ""
"For more information on <emphasis>bridging</emphasis> see the <ulink "
"url=\"http://manpages.ubuntu.com/manpages/lucid/en/man8/brctl.8.html\">brctl "
"man page</ulink> and the Linux Foundation's <ulink "
"url=\"http://www.linuxfoundation.org/en/Net:Bridge\">Net:Bridge</ulink> page."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-config.xml:614(title)
msgid "TCP/IP"
msgstr "TCP/IP"

#: serverguide/C/network-config.xml:615(para)
msgid ""
"The Transmission Control Protocol and Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) is a "
"standard set of protocols developed in the late 1970s by the Defense "
"Advanced Research Projects Agency (DARPA) as a means of communication "
"between different types of computers and computer networks. TCP/IP is the "
"driving force of the Internet, and thus it is the most popular set of "
"network protocols on Earth."
msgstr ""
"Transmission Control Protocol and Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) 는 1970년대 후반에 "
"Defense Advanced Research Projects Agency (DARPA) 에 의하여 개발된 프로토콜의 표준화된 규격이고 "
"다른 종류의 컴퓨터와 컴퓨터 네트워크 간에 통신을 하기 위한 수단 입니다. TCP/IP 는 인터넷을 주도하는 힘이고, 그러므로 그것은 "
"지구상의 네트워크 프로토콜 중에 가장 인기있는 규약 입니다."

#: serverguide/C/network-config.xml:623(title)
msgid "TCP/IP Introduction"
msgstr "TCP/IP 소개"

#: serverguide/C/network-config.xml:624(para)
msgid ""
"The two protocol components of TCP/IP deal with different aspects of "
"computer networking. <emphasis>Internet Protocol</emphasis>, the \"IP\" of "
"TCP/IP is a connectionless protocol which deals only with network packet "
"routing using the <emphasis role=\"italics\">IP Datagram</emphasis> as the "
"basic unit of networking information. The IP Datagram consists of a header "
"followed by a message. The <emphasis> Transmission Control "
"Protocol</emphasis> is the \"TCP\" of TCP/IP and enables network hosts to "
"establish connections which may be used to exchange data streams. TCP also "
"guarantees that the data between connections is delivered and that it "
"arrives at one network host in the same order as sent from another network "
"host."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-config.xml:637(title)
msgid "TCP/IP Configuration"
msgstr "TCP/IP 설정"

#: serverguide/C/network-config.xml:638(para)
msgid ""
"The TCP/IP protocol configuration consists of several elements which must be "
"set by editing the appropriate configuration files, or deploying solutions "
"such as the Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) server which in turn, "
"can be configured to provide the proper TCP/IP configuration settings to "
"network clients automatically. These configuration values must be set "
"correctly in order to facilitate the proper network operation of your Ubuntu "
"system."
msgstr ""
"TCP/IP 프로토콜 설정은, 해당 설정 파일들을 편집하거나, 적당한 TCP/IP 설정 값을 네트워크 클라이언트에게 자동적으로 제공하기 "
"위하여 사용하는 Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) 서버와 같은 솔루션을 적용하는 것에 의해, "
"반드시 지정되는 여러가지 요소로 구성 합니다. 이 설정 값들은 여러분의 우분투 시스템의 적절한 네트워크 동작의 편의를 위하여 반드시 "
"정확하게 지정되어야 합니다."

#: serverguide/C/network-config.xml:650(para)
msgid ""
"<emphasis role=\"bold\">IP address</emphasis> The IP address is a unique "
"identifying string expressed as four decimal numbers ranging from zero (0) "
"to two-hundred and fifty-five (255), separated by periods, with each of the "
"four numbers representing eight (8) bits of the address for a total length "
"of thirty-two (32) bits for the whole address. This format is called "
"<emphasis>dotted quad notation</emphasis>."
msgstr ""
"<emphasis role=\"bold\">IP 주소</emphasis> IP 주소는, 점으로 구분되는 네 개의 0부터 255까지의 "
"십진수 범위의 숫자들이고, 각각의 네 숫자는 전체 주소를 위한 총 32 bits의 8 bits 주소를 표현하는, 유일한 식별자 입니다. "
"이러한 형식은 <emphasis>dotted quad notation</emphasis> 라 불립니다."

#: serverguide/C/network-config.xml:660(para)
msgid ""
"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Netmask</emphasis> The Subnet Mask (or simply, "
"<emphasis>netmask</emphasis>) is a local bit mask, or set of flags which "
"separate the portions of an IP address significant to the network from the "
"bits significant to the <emphasis>subnetwork</emphasis>. For example, in a "
"Class C network, the standard netmask is 255.255.255.0 which masks the first "
"three bytes of the IP address and allows the last byte of the IP address to "
"remain available for specifying hosts on the subnetwork."
msgstr ""
"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Netmask</emphasis> 서브넷 마스크는 (또는 간략하게, "
"<emphasis>netmask</emphasis>) 네트워크 상의 비트 마스크, 또는 네트워크에 중요한 IP 주소에서 "
"<emphasis>subnetwork</emphasis> 에 중요한 비트를 구분하는 부분인 플래그의 집합 입니다. 예를 들어, 클래스 C "
"네트워크에서, 표준 netmask는 255.255.255.0 이고, IP 주소의 첫 3 바이트는 차폐하고 IP 주소의 마지막 바이트는 "
"서브 네트워크 상의 호스트를 지정하기 위해 사용하도록 남겨지는 것을 허용 합니다."

#: serverguide/C/network-config.xml:671(para)
msgid ""
"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Network Address</emphasis> The Network Address "
"represents the bytes comprising the network portion of an IP address. For "
"example, the host 12.128.1.2 in a Class A network would use 12.0.0.0 as the "
"network address, where twelve (12) represents the first byte of the IP "
"address, (the network part) and zeroes (0) in all of the remaining three "
"bytes to represent the potential host values. A network host using the "
"private IP address 192.168.1.100 would in turn use a Network Address of "
"192.168.1.0, which specifies the first three bytes of the Class C 192.168.1 "
"network and a zero (0) for all the possible hosts on the network."
msgstr ""
"<emphasis role=\"bold\">네트워크 주소</emphasis> 네트워크 주소는 IP 주소에서 네트워크 부분을 구성하는 "
"바이트들로 표현됩니다. 예를 들어, 클래스 A 네트워크 내의 12.128.1.2 호스트는 네트워크 주소로 12.0.0.0을 사용하게 "
"되며, 12는 IP 주소의 첫 바이트(네트워크 부분)를 나타내고, 나머지 3 바이트는 잠재적인 호스트의 값을 나타내기 위해 모두 0을 "
"사용합니다. 사설 IP 주소 192.168.1.100을 사용하는 네트워크 호스트는 네트워크 주소로 192.168.1.0을 사용하게 되며, "
"네트워크 부분으로 클래스 C 네트워크의 첫 3 바이트를 나타내는 192.168.1을 사용하고 나머지는 네트워크 상의 가능한 모든 "
"호스트들을 나타내기 위해 0을 사용합니다."

#: serverguide/C/network-config.xml:684(para)
msgid ""
"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Broadcast Address</emphasis> The Broadcast Address "
"is an IP address which allows network data to be sent simultaneously to all "
"hosts on a given subnetwork rather than specifying a particular host. The "
"standard general broadcast address for IP networks is 255.255.255.255, but "
"this broadcast address cannot be used to send a broadcast message to every "
"host on the Internet because routers block it. A more appropriate broadcast "
"address is set to match a specific subnetwork. For example, on the private "
"Class C IP network, 192.168.1.0, the broadcast address is 192.168.1.255. "
"Broadcast messages are typically produced by network protocols such as the "
"Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) and the Routing Information Protocol (RIP)."
msgstr ""
"<emphasis role=\"bold\">브로드캐스트 주소</emphasis> 브로트캐스트(Broadcast) 주소는 특정 호스트를 "
"지정하는 것이 아닌 주어진 서브네트워크 상의 모든 호스트들에게 동시에 데이터를 전송할 수 있도록 하는 IP 주소입니다. IP 네트워크의 "
"표준 일반 브로트캐스트 주소는 255.255.255.255이지만, 이 브로트캐스트 주소는 라우터에서 블록되기 때문에 인터넷 상의 모든 "
"호스트에 메시지를 전송하기 위해 사용할 수 없습니다. 보다 적절한 브로트캐스트 주소는 특정 서브네트워크에 맞는 것입니다. 예를 들어 "
"클래스 C의 사설 IP 네트워크인 192.168.1.0의 경우에 브로트캐스트 주소는 192.168.1.255가 될 것입니다. 브로트캐스트 "
"메시지는 일반적으로 Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) 과 Routing Information Protocol "
"(RIP) 를 통해 생성됩니다."

#: serverguide/C/network-config.xml:697(para)
msgid ""
"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Gateway Address</emphasis> A Gateway Address is the "
"IP address through which a particular network, or host on a network, may be "
"reached. If one network host wishes to communicate with another network "
"host, and that host is not located on the same network, then a "
"<emphasis>gateway</emphasis> must be used. In many cases, the Gateway "
"Address will be that of a router on the same network, which will in turn "
"pass traffic on to other networks or hosts, such as Internet hosts. The "
"value of the Gateway Address setting must be correct, or your system will "
"not be able to reach any hosts beyond those on the same network."
msgstr ""
"<emphasis role=\"bold\">게이트웨이 주소</emphasis> 게이트웨이 주소는 특정 네트워크 또는 네트워크 상의 "
"호스트로 접근하기 위하여 통해야 하는 IP 주소 입니다. 만약 한 네트워크 호스트가 같은 네트워크 상에 위치하지 않은 다른 네트워크 "
"호스트와 통신을 하기를 원한다면, 하나의 <emphasis>게이트웨이</emphasis>를 반드시 사용하여야 합니다. 많은 경우에, "
"게이트웨이 주소는 같은 네트워크 상의 라우터의 주소가 되고, 인터넷 호스트와 같은 다른 네트워크 또는 호스트로 트래픽을 넘기는데도 사용이 "
"됩니다. 게이트웨이 주소 설정 값은 반드시 정확하여야 하고, 그렇지 않다면 여러분의 시스템은 같은 네트워크 밖에 있는 어떠한 호스트로도 "
"접근을 하는 것이 불가능 합니다."

#: serverguide/C/network-config.xml:708(para)
msgid ""
"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Nameserver Address</emphasis> Nameserver Addresses "
"represent the IP addresses of Domain Name Service (DNS) systems, which "
"resolve network hostnames into IP addresses. There are three levels of "
"Nameserver Addresses, which may be specified in order of precedence: The "
"<emphasis>Primary</emphasis> Nameserver, the <emphasis>Secondary</emphasis> "
"Nameserver, and the <emphasis>Tertiary</emphasis> Nameserver. In order for "
"your system to be able to resolve network hostnames into their corresponding "
"IP addresses, you must specify valid Nameserver Addresses which you are "
"authorized to use in your system's TCP/IP configuration. In many cases these "
"addresses can and will be provided by your network service provider, but "
"many free and publicly accessible nameservers are available for use, such as "
"the Level3 (Verizon) servers with IP addresses from 4.2.2.1 to 4.2.2.6."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-config.xml:722(para)
msgid ""
"The IP address, Netmask, Network Address, Broadcast Address, and Gateway "
"Address are typically specified via the appropriate directives in the file "
"<filename>/etc/network/interfaces</filename>. The Nameserver Addresses are "
"typically specified via <emphasis>nameserver</emphasis> directives in the "
"file <filename>/etc/resolv.conf</filename>. For more information, view the "
"system manual page for <filename>interfaces</filename> or "
"<filename>resolv.conf</filename> respectively, with the following commands "
"typed at a terminal prompt:"
msgstr ""
"IP 주소, 넷마스크, 네트워크 주소, 브로드캐스트 주소, 그리고 게이트웨이 주소는 전형적으로 "
"<filename>/etc/network/interfaces</filename> 파일 내에 해당 지시자를 사용하여 지정 됩니다. 네임서버 "
"주소는 <filename>/etc/resolv.conf</filename> 파일 내에 "
"<emphasis>nameserver</emphasis> 지시자를 통해 일반적으로 지정 됩니다. 더 많은 정보는, 터미널 프롬프트에서 "
"다음의 명령을 사용하여, <filename>interfaces</filename> 또는 "
"<filename>resolv.conf</filename> 를 위한 시스템 지침서를 읽어 보십시오:"

#: serverguide/C/network-config.xml:729(para)
msgid ""
"Access the system manual page for <filename>interfaces</filename> with the "
"following command:"
msgstr "<filename>interfaces</filename> 를 위한 시스템 매뉴얼 페이지는 다음의 명령으로 접근 합니다:"

#: serverguide/C/network-config.xml:734(command)
msgid "man interfaces"
msgstr "man interfaces"

#: serverguide/C/network-config.xml:737(para)
msgid ""
"Access the system manual page for <filename>resolv.conf</filename> with the "
"following command:"
msgstr "<filename>resolv.conf</filename> 를 위한 시스템 매뉴얼 페이지는 다음의 명령으로 접근 합니다:"

#: serverguide/C/network-config.xml:741(command)
msgid "man resolv.conf"
msgstr "man resolv.conf"

#: serverguide/C/network-config.xml:646(para)
msgid ""
"The common configuration elements of TCP/IP and their purposes are as "
"follows: <placeholder-1/>"
msgstr "TCP/IP의 공통적인 설정 요소와 그들의 목적은 다음과 같습니다: <placeholder-1/>"

#: serverguide/C/network-config.xml:748(title)
msgid "IP Routing"
msgstr "IP 라우팅"

#: serverguide/C/network-config.xml:749(para)
msgid ""
"IP routing is a means of specifying and discovering paths in a TCP/IP "
"network along which network data may be sent. Routing uses a set of "
"<emphasis>routing tables</emphasis> to direct the forwarding of network data "
"packets from their source to the destination, often via many intermediary "
"network nodes known as <emphasis>routers</emphasis>. There are two primary "
"forms of IP routing: <emphasis>Static Routing</emphasis> and "
"<emphasis>Dynamic Routing.</emphasis>"
msgstr ""
"IP 라우팅은 TCP/IP 네크워크 상에서 데이터가 보내질 경로를 지정하고 찾아내는 방법입니다. 라우팅은 네트워크 데이터 패킷이 "
"출발지에서 목적지로 전달되는 경로를 지정하기 위해 <emphasis>라우팅 테이블</emphasis>의 집합을 이용하며, 때때로 "
"<emphasis>라우터</emphasis>라 불리는 많은 중간 네트워크 노드를 통합니다. IP 라우팅에는 <emphasis>정적 "
"라우팅</emphasis>과 <emphasis>동적 라우팅</emphasis>이라는 두 가지 주요한 형태가 존재합니다."

#: serverguide/C/network-config.xml:758(para)
msgid ""
"Static routing involves manually adding IP routes to the system's routing "
"table, and this is usually done by manipulating the routing table with the "
"<application>route</application> command. Static routing enjoys many "
"advantages over dynamic routing, such as simplicity of implementation on "
"smaller networks, predictability (the routing table is always computed in "
"advance, and thus the route is precisely the same each time it is used), and "
"low overhead on other routers and network links due to the lack of a dynamic "
"routing protocol. However, static routing does present some disadvantages as "
"well. For example, static routing is limited to small networks and does not "
"scale well. Static routing also fails completely to adapt to network outages "
"and failures along the route due to the fixed nature of the route."
msgstr ""
"정적 라우팅은 시스템 라우팅 테이블에 직접 IP 경로를 추가하는 작업을 포함하며, 이 작업은 대개 "
"<application>route</application> 명령을 통해 라우팅 테이블을 조작하는 방식으로 이루어 집니다. 정적 라우팅은 "
"동적 라우팅에 비해 작은 네트워크에서의 간단한 구현, 예측 가능성(라우팅 테이블은 항상 먼저 계산되므로, 라우팅은 매번 사용될 때 마다 "
"정확히 일치합니다), 다른 라우터들과 네트워크 링크 간에 동적 라우팅 프로토콜의 부재에 따른 보다 적은 오버헤드 등의 장점을 가집니다. "
"하지만, 정적 라우팅은 몇 가지 단점들도 가지고 있습니다. 예를 들어 정적 라우팅은 작은 네트워크로만 제한되며 쉽게 확장하기가 "
"어렵습니다. 또한 라우팅이 고정되어 있기 때문에 네트워크 정지 혹은 실패 시에는 전혀 동작하지 않게 됩니다."

#: serverguide/C/network-config.xml:768(para)
msgid ""
"Dynamic routing depends on large networks with multiple possible IP routes "
"from a source to a destination and makes use of special routing protocols, "
"such as the Router Information Protocol (RIP), which handle the automatic "
"adjustments in routing tables that make dynamic routing possible. Dynamic "
"routing has several advantages over static routing, such as superior "
"scalability and the ability to adapt to failures and outages along network "
"routes. Additionally, there is less manual configuration of the routing "
"tables, since routers learn from one another about their existence and "
"available routes. This trait also eliminates the possibility of introducing "
"mistakes in the routing tables via human error. Dynamic routing is not "
"perfect, however, and presents disadvantages such as heightened complexity "
"and additional network overhead from router communications, which does not "
"immediately benefit the end users, but still consumes network bandwidth."
msgstr ""
"동적 라우팅은 보낸 곳에서 받는 곳까지 복수의 IP 경로를 가질 수 있는 규모가 큰 네트웨크에 의존하고, 동적 라우팅이 가능하도록 라우팅 "
"테이블의 자동 조정을 처리하는 Router Information Protocol (RIP) 과 같은 특별한 라우팅 프로토콜을 사용합니다. "
"동적 라우팅은 정적 라우팅에 비해 휼륭한 확장성, 네트워크 라우터의 실패와 중단에 대응하는 능력 등 여러가지 장점을 가집니다. 또한 "
"라우터가 다른 라우터의 존재와 가능한 경로를 스스로 배우기 때문에, 라우팅 테이블의 수작업 설정을 줄여 줍니다. 이 특성은 또한 작업자의 "
"오류로 인한 라우팅 테이블의 실수가 일어나는 가능성을 제거합니다. 하지만, 동적 라우팅은 완벽하지 않고, 계층적으로 복잡함과 라우터 간의 "
"통신으로 인한 추가적인 (최종 사용자에게는 직접적으로 이득을 주지않고 네트워크의 대역폭을 소모하는) 네트워크 오버헤드와 같은 단점을 "
"가집니다."

#: serverguide/C/network-config.xml:782(title)
msgid "TCP and UDP"
msgstr "TCP와 UDP"

#: serverguide/C/network-config.xml:783(para)
msgid ""
"TCP is a connection-based protocol, offering error correction and guaranteed "
"delivery of data via what is known as <emphasis>flow control</emphasis>. "
"Flow control determines when the flow of a data stream needs to be stopped, "
"and previously sent data packets should to be re-sent due to problems such "
"as <emphasis>collisions</emphasis>, for example, thus ensuring complete and "
"accurate delivery of the data. TCP is typically used in the exchange of "
"important information such as database transactions."
msgstr ""
"TCP는 접속 기반(connection-based) 프로토콜이고, 에러 교정과 <emphasis>flow "
"control</emphasis> (흐름 제어)로 알려진 데이터의 배달을 보장하는 것을 제공 합니다. 흐름 제어는 데이터 스트림의 흐름이 "
"중단되는 것이 필요한 때와, 예를 들어, 데이타의 완전하고 정확한 배달을 확신하기 위하여, "
"<emphasis>collisions</emphasis> 과 같은 문제들로 인하여 재전송을 해야하는 이전의 보내진 패킷을 결정합니다. "
"TPC는 전형적으로 데이타베이스 트랜잭션과 같은 중요한 정보를 교환하는 데에 사용되어 집니다."

#: serverguide/C/network-config.xml:791(para)
msgid ""
"The User Datagram Protocol (UDP), on the other hand, is a "
"<emphasis>connectionless</emphasis> protocol which seldom deals with the "
"transmission of important data because it lacks flow control or any other "
"method to ensure reliable delivery of the data. UDP is commonly used in such "
"applications as audio and video streaming, where it is considerably faster "
"than TCP due to the lack of error correction and flow control, and where the "
"loss of a few packets is not generally catastrophic."
msgstr ""
"한편, User Datagram Protocol (UDP)는, <emphasis>비접속(connectionless)</emphasis> "
"프로토콜이고, 가끔 흐름 제어 또는 데이터의 신뢰할 수 있는 배달을 확신하기 위한 다른 수단이 부족한 사유로 중요한 데이타의 전송을 "
"다룹니다. UDP는 일반적으로 오디오와 비디오 스트리밍과 같은 프로그램에서 사용되고, 이것은 에러 교정 또는 흐름 제어의 부족에 기인하여 "
"TCP를 사용하는 것보다는 어지간히 빠르고, 약간의 패킷을 손실하는 것은 보통 큰 문제가 아닌 곳이기 때문 입니다."

#: serverguide/C/network-config.xml:801(title)
msgid "ICMP"
msgstr "ICMP"

#: serverguide/C/network-config.xml:802(para)
msgid ""
"The Internet Control Messaging Protocol (ICMP) is an extension to the "
"Internet Protocol (IP) as defined in the Request For Comments (RFC) #792 and "
"supports network packets containing control, error, and informational "
"messages. ICMP is used by such network applications as the "
"<application>ping</application> utility, which can determine the "
"availability of a network host or device. Examples of some error messages "
"returned by ICMP which are useful to both network hosts and devices such as "
"routers, include <emphasis>Destination Unreachable</emphasis> and "
"<emphasis>Time Exceeded</emphasis>."
msgstr ""
"Internet Control Messaging Protocol (ICMP)는 Request For Comments (RFC) #792에 "
"정의된 바와 같이 Internet Protocol (IP)의 확장이고, 제어, 에러 그리고 정보 메세지를 포함하는 네트워크 패킷을 지원 "
"합니다. ICMP는 <application>ping</application> 유틸리티와 같은 네트워크 프로그램에서 사용되고, 네트워크 "
"호스트 또는 장치의 사용 가능함을 결정할 수 있습니다. ICMP에 의해 되돌려지는 몇 가지 에러 메세지의 예는 네트워크 호스트와 라우터와 "
"같은 장치 모두에게 유용하고, <emphasis>Destination Unreachable</emphasis> 과 "
"<emphasis>Time Exceeded</emphasis> 를 포함 합니다."

#: serverguide/C/network-config.xml:812(title)
msgid "Daemons"
msgstr "데몬"

#: serverguide/C/network-config.xml:813(para)
msgid ""
"Daemons are special system applications which typically execute continuously "
"in the background and await requests for the functions they provide from "
"other applications. Many daemons are network-centric; that is, a large "
"number of daemons executing in the background on an Ubuntu system may "
"provide network-related functionality. Some examples of such network daemons "
"include the <emphasis>Hyper Text Transport Protocol Daemon</emphasis> "
"(httpd), which provides web server functionality; the <emphasis>Secure SHell "
"Daemon</emphasis> (sshd), which provides secure remote login shell and file "
"transfer capabilities; and the <emphasis>Internet Message Access Protocol "
"Daemon</emphasis> (imapd), which provides E-Mail services."
msgstr ""
"데몬은 전형적으로 백그라운드에서 계속적으로 실행되는 그리고 다른 프로그램에서 데몬이 제공하는 기능을 위한 요청을 기다리는 특별한 시스템 "
"응용 프로그램 입니다. 많은 데몬들은 네트워크 중심이고, 우분투 시스템 상의 백그라운드에서 수행되는 많은 수의 데몬들은 네트워크와 관련된 "
"기능을 제공 합니다. 이러한 네트워크 데몬의 몇 가지 예는 웹 서버 기능을 제공하는 <emphasis>Hyper Text "
"Transport Protocol Daemon</emphasis> (httpd), 보안 원격 로그인 쉘과 파일 전송 능력을 제공하는 "
"<emphasis>Secure SHell Daemon</emphasis> (sshd), 그리고 이메일 서비스를 제공하는 "
"<emphasis>Internet Message Access Protocol Daemon</emphasis> (imapd) 등을 포함 "
"합니다."

#: serverguide/C/network-config.xml:828(para)
msgid ""
"There are man pages for <ulink "
"url=\"http://manpages.ubuntu.com/manpages/lucid/en/man7/tcp.7.html\">TCP</uli"
"nk> and <ulink "
"url=\"http://manpages.ubuntu.com/manpages/lucid/man7/ip.7.html\">IP</ulink> "
"that contain more useful information."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-config.xml:834(para)
msgid ""
"Also, see the <ulink "
"url=\"http://www.redbooks.ibm.com/abstracts/gg243376.html\">TCP/IP Tutorial "
"and Technical Overview</ulink> IBM Redbook."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-config.xml:840(para)
msgid ""
"Another resource is O'Reilly's <ulink "
"url=\"http://oreilly.com/catalog/9780596002978/\">TCP/IP Network "
"Administration</ulink>."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-config.xml:849(title)
msgid "Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP)"
msgstr "동적 호스트 설정 프로토콜 (DHCP)"

#: serverguide/C/network-config.xml:850(para)
msgid ""
"The Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) is a network service that "
"enables host computers to be automatically assigned settings from a server "
"as opposed to manually configuring each network host. Computers configured "
"to be DHCP clients have no control over the settings they receive from the "
"DHCP server, and the configuration is transparent to the computer's user."
msgstr ""
"동적 호스트 설정 프로토콜 (DHCP) 는, 각각의 네트워크 호스트를 수작업으로 설정하는 것과는 반대로, 서버에서 자동으로 호스트 "
"컴퓨터에 설정값을 지정할 수 있도록 해주는 네트워크 서비스 입니다. 설정된 컴퓨터는 DHCP 클라이언트가 되고 DHCP 서버에서 받은 "
"설정값을 조작할 수 없고, 그 설정은 컴퓨터의 사용자에게 투명 합니다."

#: serverguide/C/network-config.xml:857(para)
msgid ""
"The most common settings provided by a DHCP server to DHCP clients include:"
msgstr "DHCP 서버에 의하여 DHCP 클라이언트로 제공되는 가장 공통적인 설정은 다음과 같습니다:"

#: serverguide/C/network-config.xml:862(para)
msgid "IP-Address and Netmask"
msgstr "IP 주소와 넷마스크"

#: serverguide/C/network-config.xml:865(para)
msgid "DNS"
msgstr "DNS"

#: serverguide/C/network-config.xml:868(para)
msgid "WINS"
msgstr "WINS"

#: serverguide/C/network-config.xml:871(para)
msgid ""
"However, a DHCP server can also supply configuration properties such as:"
msgstr "그러나, DHCP 서버는 다음과 같은 설정 값도 또한 공급을 할 수 있습니다:"

#: serverguide/C/network-config.xml:876(para)
msgid "Host Name"
msgstr "호스트 이름"

#: serverguide/C/network-config.xml:879(para)
msgid "Domain Name"
msgstr "도메인 이름"

#: serverguide/C/network-config.xml:882(para)
msgid "Default Gateway"
msgstr "기본 설정 게이트웨이"

#: serverguide/C/network-config.xml:885(para)
msgid "Time Server"
msgstr "시간 서버"

#: serverguide/C/network-config.xml:888(para)
msgid "Print Server"
msgstr "인쇄 서버"

#: serverguide/C/network-config.xml:891(para)
msgid ""
"The advantage of using DHCP is that changes to the network, for example a "
"change in the address of the DNS server, need only be changed at the DHCP "
"server, and all network hosts will be reconfigured the next time their DHCP "
"clients poll the DHCP server. As an added advantage, it is also easier to "
"integrate new computers into the network, as there is no need to check for "
"the availability of an IP address. Conflicts in IP address allocation are "
"also reduced."
msgstr ""
"DHCP 사용의 장점은 네트워크가 변경될 때 입니다. 예를 들어, DNS 서버의 주소가 변경되었을 때, DHCP 서버에서만 그 변경이 "
"필요하고, 모든 네트워크 호스트는 DHCP 클라이언트가 DHCP 서버를 읽는 다음 시점에 재 설정됩니다. 이 장점에 더하여, 네트워크에 "
"새로운 컴퓨터를 통합하는 것도 또한 쉽고, IP 주소의 사용 가능성을 점검할 필요가 없습니다. IP 주소의 할당 시 충돌이 일어나는 것도 "
"또한 줄어듭니다."

#: serverguide/C/network-config.xml:899(para)
msgid "A DHCP server can provide configuration settings using two methods:"
msgstr "DHCP 서버는 다음의 두 가지 방법을 사용하여 설정 값을 제공할 수 있습니다:"

#: serverguide/C/network-config.xml:904(term)
msgid "MAC Address"
msgstr "맥 어드레스"

#: serverguide/C/network-config.xml:906(para)
msgid ""
"This method entails using DHCP to identify the unique hardware address of "
"each network card connected to the network and then continually supplying a "
"constant configuration each time the DHCP client makes a request to the DHCP "
"server using that network device."
msgstr ""
"이 방법은, 네트워크로 연결되는 각각의 네트워크 카드의 유일한 하드웨어 주소를 식별하기 위하여 DHCP를 사용하는 것과, DHCP "
"클라이언트가 네트워크 장치를 사용하는 DHCP 서버로의 요청을 만드는 매번 일정한 설정을 공급하는 것을, 수반 합니다."

#: serverguide/C/network-config.xml:915(term)
msgid "Address Pool"
msgstr "어드레스 풀"

#: serverguide/C/network-config.xml:917(para)
msgid ""
"This method entails defining a pool (sometimes also called a range or scope) "
"of IP addresses from which DHCP clients are supplied their configuration "
"properties dynamically and on a \"first come, first served\" basis. When a "
"DHCP client is no longer on the network for a specified period, the "
"configuration is expired and released back to the address pool for use by "
"other DHCP Clients."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-config.xml:928(para)
msgid ""
"Ubuntu is shipped with both DHCP server and client. The server is "
"<application>dhcpd</application> (dynamic host configuration protocol "
"daemon). The client provided with Ubuntu is "
"<application>dhclient</application> and should be installed on all computers "
"required to be automatically configured. Both programs are easy to install "
"and configure and will be automatically started at system boot."
msgstr ""
"우분투는 DHCP 서버와 클라이언트 모두를 제공 합니다. 서버는 <application>dhcpd</application> "
"(dynamic host configuration protocol daemon) 입니다. 우분투와 함께 제공되는 클라이언트는 "
"<application>dhclient</application> 이고 요구되는 모든 컴퓨터에 설치되고 자동으로 설정 됩니다. 두 프로그램 "
"모두 설치와 설정이 쉽고 시스템이 부팅할 때 자동적으로 시작 됩니다."

#: serverguide/C/network-config.xml:938(para)
msgid ""
"At a terminal prompt, enter the following command to install "
"<application>dhcpd</application>:"
msgstr ""
"터미널 프롬프트에서, <application>dhcpd</application> 를 설치하기 위하여 다음의 명령을 입력 합니다:"

#: serverguide/C/network-config.xml:943(command)
msgid "sudo apt-get install dhcp3-server"
msgstr "sudo apt-get install dhcp3-server"

#: serverguide/C/network-config.xml:945(para)
msgid ""
"You will probably need to change the default configuration by editing "
"/etc/dhcp3/dhcpd.conf to suit your needs and particular configuration."
msgstr ""
"여러분은 아마도 여러분에게 필요한 특정 설정에 따라 /etc/dhcp3/dhcpd.conf 파일을 편집할 필요가 있을 것입니다."

#: serverguide/C/network-config.xml:949(para)
msgid ""
"You also need to edit /etc/default/dhcp3-server to specify the interfaces "
"dhcpd should listen to. By default it listens to eth0."
msgstr ""
"또한 /etc/default/dhcp3-server 파일을 편집하여 dhcpd가 listen 해야 하는 인터페이스를 지정할 수 있습니다. "
"기본적으로는 eth0 에 대해 listen 하도록 되어 있습니다."

#: serverguide/C/network-config.xml:953(para)
msgid ""
"NOTE: dhcpd's messages are being sent to syslog. Look there for diagnostics "
"messages."
msgstr "주의: dhcpd의 메시지들은 syslog로 보내집니다. 진단 메시지를 확인하려면 syslog를 살펴보기 바랍니다."

#: serverguide/C/network-config.xml:960(para)
msgid ""
"The error message the installation ends with might be a little confusing, "
"but the following steps will help you configure the service:"
msgstr "설치를 끝내는 오류 메세지는 약간 혼란을 줄 수 있는데, 다음의 절차를 수행해서 그 서비스를 설정 하십시오:"

#: serverguide/C/network-config.xml:964(para)
msgid ""
"Most commonly, what you want to do is assign an IP address randomly. This "
"can be done with settings as follows:"
msgstr ""
"아주 일반적으로, 여러분은 IP 주소를 불규칙적으로 지정하는 것을 원할 수 있습니다. 이것은 다음과 같이 설정하는 것으로 마칠 수 "
"있습니다:"

#: serverguide/C/network-config.xml:968(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"# Sample /etc/dhcpd.conf\n"
"# (add your comments here) \n"
"default-lease-time 600;\n"
"max-lease-time 7200;\n"
"option subnet-mask 255.255.255.0;\n"
"option broadcast-address 192.168.1.255;\n"
"option routers 192.168.1.254;\n"
"option domain-name-servers 192.168.1.1, 192.168.1.2;\n"
"option domain-name \"mydomain.example\";\n"
"\n"
"subnet 192.168.1.0 netmask 255.255.255.0 {\n"
"range 192.168.1.10 192.168.1.100;\n"
"range 192.168.1.150 192.168.1.200;\n"
"} \n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-config.xml:984(para)
msgid ""
"This will result in the DHCP server giving a client an IP address from the "
"range 192.168.1.10-192.168.1.100 or 192.168.1.150-192.168.1.200. It will "
"lease an IP address for 600 seconds if the client doesn't ask for a specific "
"time frame. Otherwise the maximum (allowed) lease will be 7200 seconds. The "
"server will also \"advise\" the client that it should use 255.255.255.0 as "
"its subnet mask, 192.168.1.255 as its broadcast address, 192.168.1.254 as "
"the router/gateway and 192.168.1.1 and 192.168.1.2 as its DNS servers."
msgstr ""
"이것은 DHCP 서버가 클라이언트에 192.168.1.10-192.168.1.100 또는 192.168.1.150-"
"192.168.1.200 범위 내의 한 IP 주소를 주는 결과를 가집니다. 그 주소는, 만약 클라이언트가 특정한 시간 간격을 요청하지 "
"않는다면, 600 초 동안 대여되는 IP 주소 입니다. 한편, 최대한 (허용되는) 대여 기간은 7200 초 입니다. 서버는 또한 "
"클라이언트가 서브넷 마스크로 255.255.255.0, 브로트캐스트 주소로 192.168.1.255, 라우터/게이트웨이 주소로 "
"192.168.1.254, 그리고 DNS 서버로 192.168.1.1과 192.168.1.2를 사용할 것을 \"충고\" 합니다."

#: serverguide/C/network-config.xml:993(para)
msgid ""
"If you need to specify a WINS server for your Windows clients, you will need "
"to include the netbios-name-servers option, e.g."
msgstr ""
"만약 여러분의 윈도우즈 클라이언트를 위하여 WINS 서버를 지정할 필요가 있다면, 에를 들어, netbios-name-servers "
"옵션을 포함하는 것이 필요 합니다."

#: serverguide/C/network-config.xml:997(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"option netbios-name-servers 192.168.1.1; \n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-config.xml:1000(para)
msgid ""
"Dhcpd configuration settings are taken from the DHCP mini-HOWTO, which can "
"be found <ulink "
"url=\"http://www.tldp.org/HOWTO/DHCP/index.html\">here</ulink>."
msgstr ""
"Dhcpd 설정 값은 DHCP 미니-하우투에서 취해졌고, 그것은 <ulink "
"url=\"http://www.tldp.org/HOWTO/DHCP/index.html\">여기</ulink>에서 찾을 수 있습니다."

#: serverguide/C/network-config.xml:1010(para)
msgid ""
"The <ulink url=\"https://help.ubuntu.com/community/dhcp3-server\">dhcp3-"
"server Ubuntu Wiki</ulink> page has more information."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-config.xml:1015(para)
msgid ""
"For more <filename>/etc/dhcp3/dchpd.conf</filename> options see the <ulink "
"url=\"http://manpages.ubuntu.com/manpages/lucid/en/man5/dhcpd.conf.5.html\">d"
"hcpd.conf man page</ulink>."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-config.xml:1021(para)
msgid ""
"Also see the <ulink url=\"http://www.dhcp-handbook.com/dhcp_faq.html\">DHCP "
"FAQ</ulink>"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-config.xml:1031(title)
msgid "Time Synchronisation with NTP"
msgstr "NTP를 이용한 시간 동기화"

#: serverguide/C/network-config.xml:1032(para)
msgid ""
"This page describes methods for keeping your computer's time accurate. This "
"is useful for servers, but is not necessary (or desirable) for desktop "
"machines."
msgstr ""
"이 페이지는 여러분의 컴퓨터의 시간을 정확하게 유지할 수 있는 방법을 설명합니다. 이것은 서버 머신에서 유용하게 사용되지만, 데스크탑 "
"머신에서는 꼭 필요하지 않습니다."

#: serverguide/C/network-config.xml:1035(para)
msgid ""
"NTP is a TCP/IP protocol for synchronising time over a network. Basically a "
"client requests the current time from a server, and uses it to set its own "
"clock."
msgstr ""
"NTP는 네트워크를 통해 시간을 동기화하는 TCP/IP 프로토콜입니다. 기본적으로 클라이언트는 서버에 현재 시간을 요청하여, 자신을 "
"시계를 설정하는 데 사용합니다."

#: serverguide/C/network-config.xml:1038(para)
msgid ""
"Behind this simple description, there is a lot of complexity - there are "
"tiers of NTP servers, with the tier one NTP servers connected to atomic "
"clocks (often via GPS), and tier two and three servers spreading the load of "
"actually handling requests across the Internet. Also the client software is "
"a lot more complex than you might think - it has to factor out communication "
"delays, and adjust the time in a way that does not upset all the other "
"processes that run on the server. But luckily all that complexity is hidden "
"from you!"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-config.xml:1041(para)
msgid ""
"Ubuntu has two ways of automatically setting your time: ntpdate and ntpd."
msgstr "우분투는 ntpdate와 ntpd라는 두 가지 방법을 통해 자동으로 시간을 설정할 수 있습니다."

#: serverguide/C/network-config.xml:1046(title)
msgid "ntpdate"
msgstr "ntpdate"

#: serverguide/C/network-config.xml:1047(para)
msgid ""
"Ubuntu comes with ntpdate as standard, and will run it once at boot time to "
"set up your time according to Ubuntu's NTP server. However, a server's clock "
"is likely to drift considerably between reboots, so it makes sense to "
"correct the time occasionally. The easiest way to do this is to get cron to "
"run ntpdate every day. With your favorite editor, as root, create a file "
"<code>/etc/cron.daily/ntpdate</code> containing:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-config.xml:1052(screen)
#, no-wrap
msgid "ntpdate ntp.ubuntu.com\n"
msgstr "ntpdate ntp.ubuntu.com\n"

#: serverguide/C/network-config.xml:1054(para)
msgid ""
"The file <code>/etc/cron.daily/ntpdate</code> must also be executable."
msgstr "물론 <code>/etc/cron.daily/ntpdate</code> 파일은 실행 권한을 가지고 있어야 합니다."

#: serverguide/C/network-config.xml:1057(screen)
#, no-wrap
msgid "sudo chmod 755 /etc/cron.daily/ntpdate\n"
msgstr "sudo chmod 755 /etc/cron.daily/ntpdate\n"

#: serverguide/C/network-config.xml:1061(title)
msgid "ntpd"
msgstr "ntpd"

#: serverguide/C/network-config.xml:1062(para)
msgid ""
"ntpdate is a bit of a blunt instrument - it can only adjust the time once a "
"day, in one big correction. The ntp daemon ntpd is far more subtle. It "
"calculates the drift of your system clock and continuously adjusts it, so "
"there are no large corrections that could lead to inconsistent logs for "
"instance. The cost is a little processing power and memory, but for a modern "
"server this is negligible."
msgstr ""
"ntpdate는 약간 둔한 프로그램입니다. 이 프로그램은 오직 하루에 한번만 대대적인 시간 정정을 수행합니다. ntp 대몬인 ntpd는 "
"좀더 세밀하게 사용할 수 있습니다. 이 프로그램은 시스템 시계의 오류를 계산하여 꾸준히 정정합니다. 따라서 (예를 들어 로그 시각의 "
"충돌을 일으킬 수도 있는) 대대적인 정정이 일어나지 않습니다. 이를 위해서는 약간의 CPU 파워와 메모리가 소모되지만, 최신의 서버에서 "
"이 정도는 무시할 수 있는 수준입니다."

#: serverguide/C/network-config.xml:1065(para)
msgid "To set up ntpd:"
msgstr "ntpd를 설정하려면:"

#: serverguide/C/network-config.xml:1066(screen)
#, no-wrap
msgid "sudo apt-get install ntp\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-config.xml:1071(title)
msgid "Changing Time Servers"
msgstr "타임 서버 변경하기"

#: serverguide/C/network-config.xml:1072(para)
msgid ""
"In both cases above, your system will use Ubuntu's NTP server at "
"<code>ntp.ubuntu.com</code> by default. This is OK, but you might want to "
"use several servers to increase accuracy and resilience, and you may want to "
"use time servers that are geographically closer to you. to do this for "
"ntpdate, change the contents of <code>/etc/cron.daily/ntpdate</code> to:"
msgstr ""
"위의 두 경우 모두, 여러분의 시스템은 기본적으로 <code>ntp.ubuntu.com</code>에 있는 우분투의 NTP 서버를 "
"이용합니다. 이것은 아무런 문제가 없습니다, 하지만 여러분은 여러 서버들을 이용하여 정확도를 높이거나 신속한 정정을 하고 싶을 수도 "
"있으며, 지리적으로 가까운 곳에 있는 타임 서버를 사용하고 싶을 수도 있습니다. ntpdate를 이용하는 경우에는 "
"<code>/etc/cron.daily/ntpdate</code> 파일의 내용을 다음과 같이 수정하여 타임 서버를 변경할 수 있습니다."

#: serverguide/C/network-config.xml:1079(screen)
#, no-wrap
msgid "ntpdate ntp.ubuntu.com pool.ntp.org \n"
msgstr "ntpdate ntp.ubuntu.com pool.ntp.org \n"

#: serverguide/C/network-config.xml:1081(para)
msgid ""
"And for ntpd edit <code>/etc/ntp.conf</code> to include additional server "
"lines:"
msgstr ""
"ntpd를 사용하는 경우에는 <code>/etc/ntp.conf</code> 파일을 편집하여 다음과 같이 서버를 추가합니다:"

#: serverguide/C/network-config.xml:1086(screen)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"server ntp.ubuntu.com\n"
"server pool.ntp.org\n"
msgstr ""
"server ntp.ubuntu.com\n"
"server pool.ntp.org\n"

#: serverguide/C/network-config.xml:1089(para)
msgid ""
"You may notice <code>pool.ntp.org</code> in the examples above. This is a "
"really good idea which uses round-robin DNS to return an NTP server from a "
"pool, spreading the load between several different servers. Even better, "
"they have pools for different regions - for instance, if you are in New "
"Zealand, so you could use <code>nz.pool.ntp.org</code> instead of "
"<code>pool.ntp.org</code> . Look at <ulink "
"url=\"http://www.pool.ntp.org/\">http://www.pool.ntp.org/</ulink> for more "
"details."
msgstr ""
"위의 예제에서는 <code>pool.ntp.org</code> 서버를 사용한 것을 알 수 있습니다. 이것은 라운드-로빈 DNS를 사용하여 "
"NTP 서버를 풀에서 가져와서 여러 서버들에게 부하를 분산시킬 수 있는 좋은 방식입니다. 더 나아가서는 각 지역에 대한 풀을 가지고 있기 "
"때문에, 만약 여러분이 뉴질랜드에 살고 있다면 <code>pool.ntp.org</code> 서버 대신에 "
"<code>nz.pool.ntp.org</code> 서버를 이용할 수도 있습니다. 자세한 사항은 <ulink "
"url=\"http://www.pool.ntp.org/\">http://www.pool.ntp.org/</ulink>(을)를 살펴보기 "
"바랍니다."

#: serverguide/C/network-config.xml:1100(para)
msgid ""
"You can also Google for NTP servers in your region, and add these to your "
"configuration. To test that a server works, just type <code>sudo ntpdate "
"ntp.server.name</code> and see what happens."
msgstr ""
"또한 구글 검색을 통해 여러분의 지역에 있는 NTP 서버를 검색하여 설정에 추가할 수 있습니다. 이렇게 찾은 서버가 제대로 동작하는 지 "
"검사하려면 <code>sudo ntpdate ntp.server.name</code>을 실행하고 어떤 일이 일어나는 지 살펴보면 됩니다."

#: serverguide/C/network-config.xml:1111(para)
msgid ""
"See the <ulink url=\"https://help.ubuntu.com/community/UbuntuTime\">Ubuntu "
"Time</ulink> wiki page for more information."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-config.xml:1117(ulink)
msgid "NTP Support"
msgstr "NTP 지원"

#: serverguide/C/network-config.xml:1122(ulink)
msgid "The NTP FAQ and HOWTO"
msgstr "NTP에 대해 자주하는 질문과 하우투"

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:13(title)
msgid "Network Authentication"
msgstr "네트워크 인증"

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:15(para)
msgid "This section explains various Network Authentication protocols."
msgstr "이 부분에서는 여러 가지 네트워크 인증(Authentication) 프로토콜에 대해서 설명합니다."

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:19(title)
msgid "OpenLDAP Server"
msgstr "OpenLDAP 서버"

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:20(para)
msgid ""
"LDAP is an acronym for Lightweight Directory Access Protocol, it is a "
"simplified version of the X.500 protocol. The directory setup in this "
"section will be used for authentication. Nevertheless, LDAP can be used in "
"numerous ways: authentication, shared directory (for mail clients), address "
"book, etc."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:28(para)
msgid ""
"To describe LDAP quickly, all information is stored in a tree structure. "
"With <application>OpenLDAP</application> you have freedom to determine the "
"directory arborescence (the Directory Information Tree: the DIT) yourself. "
"We will begin with a basic tree containing two nodes below the root:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:37(para)
msgid "\"People\" node where your users will be stored"
msgstr "\"People\" 노드에는 여러분의 사용자들이 저장됩니다."

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:40(para)
msgid "\"Groups\" node where your groups will be stored"
msgstr "\"Groups\" 노드에는 여러분의 그룹들이 저장됩니다."

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:44(para)
msgid ""
"Before beginning, you should determine what the root of your LDAP directory "
"will be. By default, your tree will be determined by your Fully Qualified "
"Domain Name (FQDN). If your domain is example.com (which we will use in this "
"example), your root node will be dc=example,dc=com."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:54(para)
msgid ""
"First, install the <application>OpenLDAP</application> server daemon "
"<application>slapd</application> and <application>ldap-utils</application>, "
"a package containing LDAP management utilities:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:60(command)
msgid "sudo apt-get install slapd ldap-utils"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:63(para)
msgid ""
"By default <application>slapd</application> is configured with minimal "
"options needed to run the <application>slapd</application> daemon."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:68(para)
msgid ""
"The configuration example in the following sections will match the domain "
"name of the server. For example, if the machine's Fully Qualified Domain "
"Name (FQDN) is ldap.example.com, the default suffix will be "
"<emphasis>dc=example,dc=com</emphasis>."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:76(title)
msgid "Populating LDAP"
msgstr "LDAP 데이터 넣기 (populating)"

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:78(para)
msgid ""
"<application>OpenLDAP</application> uses a separate directory which contains "
"the <emphasis>cn=config</emphasis> Directory Information Tree (DIT). The "
"<emphasis>cn=config</emphasis> DIT is used to dynamically configure the "
"<application>slapd</application> daemon, allowing the modification of schema "
"definitions, indexes, ACLs, etc without stopping the service."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:86(para)
msgid ""
"The backend <emphasis>cn=config</emphasis> directory has only a minimal "
"configuration and will need additional configuration options in order to "
"populate the frontend directory. The frontend will be populated with a "
"\"classical\" scheme that will be compatible with address book applications "
"and with Unix Posix accounts. Posix accounts will allow authentication to "
"various applications, such as web applications, email Mail Transfer Agent "
"(MTA) applications, etc."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:95(para)
msgid ""
"For external applications to authenticate using LDAP they will each need to "
"be specifically configured to do so. Refer to the individual application "
"documentation for details."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:103(para)
msgid ""
"Remember to change <emphasis>dc=example,dc=com</emphasis> in the following "
"examples to match your LDAP configuration."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:108(para)
msgid ""
"First, some additional schema files need to be loaded. In a terminal enter:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:113(command) serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:702(command)
msgid "sudo ldapadd -Y EXTERNAL -H ldapi:/// -f /etc/ldap/schema/cosine.ldif"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:114(command) serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:703(command)
msgid "sudo ldapadd -Y EXTERNAL -H ldapi:/// -f /etc/ldap/schema/nis.ldif"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:115(command) serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:704(command)
msgid ""
"sudo ldapadd -Y EXTERNAL -H ldapi:/// -f /etc/ldap/schema/inetorgperson.ldif"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:118(para)
msgid ""
"Next, copy the following example LDIF file, naming it "
"<filename>backend.example.com.ldif</filename>, somewhere on your system:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:123(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"# Load dynamic backend modules\n"
"dn: cn=module,cn=config\n"
"objectClass: olcModuleList\n"
"cn: module\n"
"olcModulepath: /usr/lib/ldap\n"
"olcModuleload: back_hdb\n"
"\n"
"# Database settings\n"
"dn: olcDatabase=hdb,cn=config\n"
"objectClass: olcDatabaseConfig\n"
"objectClass: olcHdbConfig\n"
"olcDatabase: {1}hdb\n"
"olcSuffix: dc=example,dc=com\n"
"olcDbDirectory: /var/lib/ldap\n"
"olcRootDN: cn=admin,dc=example,dc=com\n"
"olcRootPW: secret\n"
"olcDbConfig: set_cachesize 0 2097152 0\n"
"olcDbConfig: set_lk_max_objects 1500\n"
"olcDbConfig: set_lk_max_locks 1500\n"
"olcDbConfig: set_lk_max_lockers 1500\n"
"olcDbIndex: objectClass eq\n"
"olcLastMod: TRUE\n"
"olcDbCheckpoint: 512 30\n"
"olcAccess: to attrs=userPassword by dn=\"cn=admin,dc=example,dc=com\" write "
"by anonymous auth by self write by * none\n"
"olcAccess: to attrs=shadowLastChange by self write by * read\n"
"olcAccess: to dn.base=\"\" by * read\n"
"olcAccess: to * by dn=\"cn=admin,dc=example,dc=com\" write by * read\n"
"\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:155(para)
msgid ""
"Change <emphasis>olcRootPW: secret</emphasis> to a password of your choosing."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:160(para)
msgid "Now add the LDIF to the directory:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:165(command) serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:746(command)
msgid "sudo ldapadd -Y EXTERNAL -H ldapi:/// -f backend.example.com.ldif"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:168(para)
msgid ""
"The frontend directory is now ready to be populated. Create a "
"<filename>frontend.example.com.ldif</filename> with the following contents:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:173(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"# Create top-level object in domain\n"
"dn: dc=example,dc=com\n"
"objectClass: top\n"
"objectClass: dcObject\n"
"objectclass: organization\n"
"o: Example Organization\n"
"dc: Example\n"
"description: LDAP Example \n"
"\n"
"# Admin user.\n"
"dn: cn=admin,dc=example,dc=com\n"
"objectClass: simpleSecurityObject\n"
"objectClass: organizationalRole\n"
"cn: admin\n"
"description: LDAP administrator\n"
"userPassword: secret\n"
"\n"
"dn: ou=people,dc=example,dc=com\n"
"objectClass: organizationalUnit\n"
"ou: people\n"
"\n"
"dn: ou=groups,dc=example,dc=com\n"
"objectClass: organizationalUnit\n"
"ou: groups\n"
"\n"
"dn: uid=john,ou=people,dc=example,dc=com\n"
"objectClass: inetOrgPerson\n"
"objectClass: posixAccount\n"
"objectClass: shadowAccount\n"
"uid: john\n"
"sn: Doe\n"
"givenName: John\n"
"cn: John Doe\n"
"displayName: John Doe\n"
"uidNumber: 1000\n"
"gidNumber: 10000\n"
"userPassword: password\n"
"gecos: John Doe\n"
"loginShell: /bin/bash\n"
"homeDirectory: /home/john\n"
"shadowExpire: -1\n"
"shadowFlag: 0\n"
"shadowWarning: 7\n"
"shadowMin: 8\n"
"shadowMax: 999999\n"
"shadowLastChange: 10877\n"
"mail: john.doe@example.com\n"
"postalCode: 31000\n"
"l: Toulouse\n"
"o: Example\n"
"mobile: +33 (0)6 xx xx xx xx\n"
"homePhone: +33 (0)5 xx xx xx xx\n"
"title: System Administrator\n"
"postalAddress: \n"
"initials: JD\n"
"\n"
"dn: cn=example,ou=groups,dc=example,dc=com\n"
"objectClass: posixGroup\n"
"cn: example\n"
"gidNumber: 10000\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:236(para)
msgid ""
"In this example the directory structure, a user, and a group have been "
"setup. In other examples you might see the <emphasis>objectClass: "
"top</emphasis> added in every entry, but that is the default behaviour so "
"you do not have to add it explicitly."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:243(para)
msgid "Add the entries to the LDAP directory:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:249(command) serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:757(command)
msgid ""
"sudo ldapadd -x -D cn=admin,dc=example,dc=com -W -f frontend.example.com.ldif"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:252(para)
msgid ""
"We can check that the content has been correctly added with the "
"<application>ldapsearch</application> utility. Execute a search of the LDAP "
"directory:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:258(command)
msgid "ldapsearch -xLLL -b \"dc=example,dc=com\" uid=john sn givenName cn"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:259(computeroutput)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"dn: uid=john,ou=people,dc=example,dc=com\n"
"cn: John Doe\n"
"sn: Doe\n"
"givenName: John\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:267(para)
msgid "Just a quick explanation:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:273(para)
msgid ""
"<emphasis>-x:</emphasis> will not use SASL authentication method, which is "
"the default."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:279(para)
msgid "<emphasis>-LLL:</emphasis> disable printing LDIF schema information."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:287(title)
msgid "Further Configuration"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:290(para)
msgid ""
"The <emphasis>cn=config</emphasis> tree can be manipulated using the "
"utilities in the <application>ldap-utils</application> package. For example:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:298(para)
msgid ""
"Use <application>ldapsearch</application> to view the tree, entering the "
"admin password set during installation or reconfiguration:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:304(command)
msgid "sudo ldapsearch -LLL -Y EXTERNAL -H ldapi:/// -b cn=config dn"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:308(computeroutput)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"SASL/EXTERNAL authentication started\n"
"SASL username: gidNumber=0+uidNumber=0,cn=peercred,cn=external,cn=auth\n"
"SASL SSF: 0\n"
"dn: cn=config\n"
"\n"
"dn: cn=module{0},cn=config\n"
"\n"
"dn: cn=schema,cn=config\n"
"\n"
"dn: cn={0}core,cn=schema,cn=config\n"
"\n"
"dn: cn={1}cosine,cn=schema,cn=config\n"
"\n"
"dn: cn={2}nis,cn=schema,cn=config\n"
"\n"
"dn: cn={3}inetorgperson,cn=schema,cn=config\n"
"\n"
"dn: olcDatabase={-1}frontend,cn=config\n"
"\n"
"dn: olcDatabase={0}config,cn=config\n"
"\n"
"dn: olcDatabase={1}hdb,cn=config\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:334(para)
msgid ""
"The output above is the current configuration options for the "
"<emphasis>cn=config</emphasis> backend database. Your output may be vary."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:342(para)
msgid ""
"As an example of modifying the <emphasis>cn=config</emphasis> tree, add "
"another attribute to the index list using "
"<application>ldapmodify</application>:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:348(command) serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:984(command) serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:1155(command) serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:1191(command)
msgid "sudo ldapmodify -Y EXTERNAL -H ldapi:///"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:356(userinput)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"dn: olcDatabase={1}hdb,cn=config\n"
"add: olcDbIndex\n"
"olcDbIndex: uidNumber eq"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:352(computeroutput)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"SASL/EXTERNAL authentication started\n"
"SASL username: gidNumber=0+uidNumber=0,cn=peercred,cn=external,cn=auth\n"
"SASL SSF: 0\n"
"<placeholder-1/>\n"
"\n"
"modifying entry \"olcDatabase={1}hdb,cn=config\"\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:364(para)
msgid ""
"Once the modification has completed, press <emphasis>Ctrl+D</emphasis> to "
"exit the utility."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:371(para)
msgid ""
"<application>ldapmodify</application> can also read the changes from a file. "
"Copy and paste the following into a file named "
"<filename>uid_index.ldif</filename>:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:376(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"dn: olcDatabase={1}hdb,cn=config\n"
"add: olcDbIndex\n"
"olcDbIndex: uid eq,pres,sub\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:382(para)
msgid "Then execute <application>ldapmodify</application>:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:387(command)
msgid "sudo ldapmodify -Y EXTERNAL -H ldapi:/// -f uid_index.ldif"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:391(computeroutput)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"SASL/EXTERNAL authentication started\n"
"SASL username: gidNumber=0+uidNumber=0,cn=peercred,cn=external,cn=auth\n"
"SASL SSF: 0\n"
"modifying entry \"olcDatabase={1}hdb,cn=config\"\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:399(para)
msgid "The file method is very useful for large changes."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:406(para)
msgid ""
"Adding additional <emphasis>schemas</emphasis> to "
"<application>slapd</application> requires the schema to be converted to LDIF "
"format. The <filename role=\"directory\">/etc/ldap/schema</filename> "
"directory contains some schema files already converted to LDIF format as "
"demonstrated in the previous section. Fortunately, the "
"<application>slapd</application> program can be used to automate the "
"conversion. The following example will add the "
"<emphasis>dyngoup.schema</emphasis>:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:416(para)
msgid ""
"First, create a conversion <filename>schema_convert.conf</filename> file "
"containing the following lines:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:421(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"include /etc/ldap/schema/core.schema\n"
"include /etc/ldap/schema/collective.schema\n"
"include /etc/ldap/schema/corba.schema\n"
"include /etc/ldap/schema/cosine.schema\n"
"include /etc/ldap/schema/duaconf.schema\n"
"include /etc/ldap/schema/dyngroup.schema\n"
"include /etc/ldap/schema/inetorgperson.schema\n"
"include /etc/ldap/schema/java.schema\n"
"include /etc/ldap/schema/misc.schema\n"
"include /etc/ldap/schema/nis.schema\n"
"include /etc/ldap/schema/openldap.schema\n"
"include /etc/ldap/schema/ppolicy.schema\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:439(para) serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:1655(para)
msgid "Next, create a temporary directory to hold the output:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:444(command) serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:1660(command) serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:2695(command)
msgid "mkdir /tmp/ldif_output"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:450(para)
msgid ""
"Now using <application>slapcat</application> convert the schema files to "
"LDIF:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:455(command)
msgid ""
"slapcat -f schema_convert.conf -F /tmp/ldif_output -n0 -s "
"\"cn={5}dyngroup,cn=schema,cn=config\" &gt; /tmp/cn=dyngroup.ldif"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:458(para)
msgid ""
"Adjust the configuration file name and temporary directory names if yours "
"are different. Also, it may be worthwhile to keep the "
"<filename>ldif_output</filename> directory around in case you want to add "
"additional schemas in the future."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:467(para)
msgid ""
"Edit the <filename>/tmp/cn\\=dyngroup.ldif</filename> file, changing the "
"following attributes:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:471(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"dn: cn=dyngroup,cn=schema,cn=config\n"
"...\n"
"cn: dyngroup\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:477(para) serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:1691(para)
msgid "And remove the following lines from the bottom of the file:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:481(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"structuralObjectClass: olcSchemaConfig\n"
"entryUUID: 10dae0ea-0760-102d-80d3-f9366b7f7757\n"
"creatorsName: cn=config\n"
"createTimestamp: 20080826021140Z\n"
"entryCSN: 20080826021140.791425Z#000000#000#000000\n"
"modifiersName: cn=config\n"
"modifyTimestamp: 20080826021140Z\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:492(para) serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:1706(para) serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:2741(para)
msgid ""
"The attribute values will vary, just be sure the attributes are removed."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:500(para) serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:1714(para)
msgid ""
"Finally, using the <application>ldapadd</application> utility, add the new "
"schema to the directory:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:506(command)
msgid "sudo ldapadd -Y EXTERNAL -H ldapi:/// -f /tmp/cn\\=dyngroup.ldif"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:512(para)
msgid ""
"There should now be a <emphasis>dn: "
"cn={4}dyngroup,cn=schema,cn=config</emphasis> entry in the cn=config tree."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:522(title)
msgid "LDAP Replication"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:524(para)
msgid ""
"LDAP often quickly becomes a highly critical service to the network. "
"Multiple systems will come to depend on LDAP for authentication, "
"authorization, configuration, etc. It is a good idea to setup a redundant "
"system through replication."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:530(para)
msgid ""
"Replication is achieved using the <emphasis>Syncrepl</emphasis> engine. "
"Syncrepl allows the changes to be synced using a "
"<emphasis>consumer</emphasis>, <emphasis>provider</emphasis> model. A "
"provider sends directory changes to consumers."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:537(title)
msgid "Provider Configuration"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:539(para)
msgid ""
"The following is an example of a <emphasis>Single-Master</emphasis> "
"configuration. In this configuration one OpenLDAP server is configured as a "
"<emphasis>provider</emphasis> and another as a <emphasis>consumer</emphasis>."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:547(para)
msgid ""
"First, configure the provider server. Copy the following to a file named "
"<filename>provider_sync.ldif</filename>:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:552(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"# Add indexes to the frontend db.\n"
"dn: olcDatabase={1}hdb,cn=config\n"
"changetype: modify\n"
"add: olcDbIndex\n"
"olcDbIndex: entryCSN eq\n"
"-\n"
"add: olcDbIndex\n"
"olcDbIndex: entryUUID eq\n"
"\n"
"#Load the syncprov and accesslog modules.\n"
"dn: cn=module{0},cn=config\n"
"changetype: modify\n"
"add: olcModuleLoad\n"
"olcModuleLoad: syncprov\n"
"-\n"
"add: olcModuleLoad\n"
"olcModuleLoad: accesslog\n"
"\n"
"# Accesslog database definitions\n"
"dn: olcDatabase={2}hdb,cn=config\n"
"objectClass: olcDatabaseConfig\n"
"objectClass: olcHdbConfig\n"
"olcDatabase: {2}hdb\n"
"olcDbDirectory: /var/lib/ldap/accesslog\n"
"olcSuffix: cn=accesslog\n"
"olcRootDN: cn=admin,dc=example,dc=com\n"
"olcDbIndex: default eq\n"
"olcDbIndex: entryCSN,objectClass,reqEnd,reqResult,reqStart\n"
"\n"
"# Accesslog db syncprov.\n"
"dn: olcOverlay=syncprov,olcDatabase={2}hdb,cn=config\n"
"changetype: add\n"
"objectClass: olcOverlayConfig\n"
"objectClass: olcSyncProvConfig\n"
"olcOverlay: syncprov\n"
"olcSpNoPresent: TRUE\n"
"olcSpReloadHint: TRUE\n"
"\n"
"# syncrepl Provider for primary db\n"
"dn: olcOverlay=syncprov,olcDatabase={1}hdb,cn=config\n"
"changetype: add\n"
"objectClass: olcOverlayConfig\n"
"objectClass: olcSyncProvConfig\n"
"olcOverlay: syncprov\n"
"olcSpNoPresent: TRUE\n"
"\n"
"# accesslog overlay definitions for primary db\n"
"dn: olcOverlay=accesslog,olcDatabase={1}hdb,cn=config\n"
"objectClass: olcOverlayConfig\n"
"objectClass: olcAccessLogConfig\n"
"olcOverlay: accesslog\n"
"olcAccessLogDB: cn=accesslog\n"
"olcAccessLogOps: writes\n"
"olcAccessLogSuccess: TRUE\n"
"# scan the accesslog DB every day, and purge entries older than 7 days\n"
"olcAccessLogPurge: 07+00:00 01+00:00\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:614(para)
msgid ""
"The <application>AppArmor</application> profile for "
"<application>slapd</application> will need to be adjusted for the accesslog "
"database location. Edit <filename>/etc/apparmor.d/usr.sbin.slapd</filename> "
"adding:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:619(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"  /var/lib/ldap/accesslog/ r,\n"
"  /var/lib/ldap/accesslog/** rwk,\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:624(para)
msgid ""
"Then create the directory, reload the <application>apparmor</application> "
"profile, and copy the <filename>DB_CONFIG</filename> file:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:630(command)
msgid "sudo -u openldap mkdir /var/lib/ldap/accesslog"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:631(command)
msgid "sudo -u openldap cp /var/lib/ldap/DB_CONFIG /var/lib/ldap/accesslog/"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:636(para)
msgid ""
"Using the <emphasis>-u openldap</emphasis> option with the "
"<application>sudo</application> commands above removes the need to adjust "
"permissions for the new directory later."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:645(para)
msgid ""
"Edit the file and change the <emphasis>olcRootDN</emphasis> to match your "
"directory:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:649(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"olcRootDN: cn=admin,dc=example,dc=com\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:657(para)
msgid ""
"Next, add the LDIF file using the <application>ldapadd</application> utility:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:662(command)
msgid "sudo ldapadd -Y EXTERNAL -H ldapi:/// -f provider_sync.ldif"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:669(para)
msgid "Restart <application>slapd</application>:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:674(command) serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:1040(command) serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:1227(command)
msgid "sudo /etc/init.d/slapd restart"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:680(para)
msgid ""
"The <emphasis>Provider</emphasis> server is now configured, and it is time "
"to configure a <emphasis>Consumer</emphasis> server."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:687(title)
msgid "Consumer Configuration"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:692(para)
msgid ""
"On the <emphasis>Consumer</emphasis> server configure it the same as the "
"<emphasis>Provider</emphasis> except for the <emphasis>Syncrepl</emphasis> "
"configuration steps."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:697(para)
msgid "Add the additional schema files:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:707(para)
msgid ""
"Also, create, or copy from the provider server, the "
"<filename>backend.example.com.ldif</filename>"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:711(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"# Load dynamic backend modules\n"
"dn: cn=module,cn=config\n"
"objectClass: olcModuleList\n"
"cn: module\n"
"olcModulepath: /usr/lib/ldap\n"
"olcModuleload: back_hdb\n"
"\n"
"# Database settings\n"
"dn: olcDatabase=hdb,cn=config\n"
"objectClass: olcDatabaseConfig\n"
"objectClass: olcHdbConfig\n"
"olcDatabase: {1}hdb\n"
"olcSuffix: dc=example,dc=com\n"
"olcDbDirectory: /var/lib/ldap\n"
"olcRootDN: cn=admin,dc=example,dc=com\n"
"olcRootPW: secret\n"
"olcDbConfig: set_cachesize 0 2097152 0\n"
"olcDbConfig: set_lk_max_objects 1500\n"
"olcDbConfig: set_lk_max_locks 1500\n"
"olcDbConfig: set_lk_max_lockers 1500\n"
"olcDbIndex: objectClass eq\n"
"olcLastMod: TRUE\n"
"olcDbCheckpoint: 512 30\n"
"olcAccess: to attrs=userPassword by dn=\"cn=admin,dc=example,dc=com\" write "
"by anonymous auth by self write by * none\n"
"olcAccess: to attrs=shadowLastChange by self write by * read\n"
"olcAccess: to dn.base=\"\" by * read\n"
"olcAccess: to * by dn=\"cn=admin,dc=example,dc=com\" write by * read\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:741(para)
msgid "And add the LDIF by entering:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:752(para)
msgid ""
"Do the same with the <filename>frontend.example.com.ldif</filename> file "
"listed above, and add it:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:760(para)
msgid ""
"The two severs should now have the same configuration except for the "
"<emphasis>Syncrepl</emphasis> options."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:768(para)
msgid ""
"Now create a file named <filename>consumer_sync.ldif</filename> containing:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:772(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"#Load the syncprov module.\n"
"dn: cn=module{0},cn=config\n"
"changetype: modify\n"
"add: olcModuleLoad\n"
"olcModuleLoad: syncprov\n"
"\n"
"# syncrepl specific indices\n"
"dn: olcDatabase={1}hdb,cn=config\n"
"changetype: modify\n"
"add: olcDbIndex\n"
"olcDbIndex: entryUUID eq\n"
"-\n"
"add: olcSyncRepl\n"
"olcSyncRepl: rid=0 provider=ldap://ldap01.example.com bindmethod=simple "
"binddn=\"cn=admin,dc=example,dc=com\" \n"
" credentials=secret searchbase=\"dc=example,dc=com\" "
"logbase=\"cn=accesslog\" \n"
" logfilter=\"(&amp;(objectClass=auditWriteObject)(reqResult=0))\" "
"schemachecking=on \n"
" type=refreshAndPersist retry=\"60 +\" syncdata=accesslog\n"
"-\n"
"add: olcUpdateRef\n"
"olcUpdateRef: ldap://ldap01.example.com\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:795(para)
msgid "You will probably want to change the following attributes:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:800(para)
msgid "<emphasis>ldap01.example.com</emphasis> to your server's hostname."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:801(emphasis)
msgid "binddn"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:802(emphasis)
msgid "credentials"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:803(emphasis)
msgid "searchbase"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:804(emphasis)
msgid "olcUpdateRef:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:810(para)
msgid "Add the LDIF file to the configuration tree:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:815(command)
msgid "sudo ldapadd -c -Y EXTERNAL -H ldapi:/// -f consumer_sync.ldif"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:821(para)
msgid ""
"The frontend database should now sync between servers. You can add "
"additional servers using the steps above as the need arises."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:831(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid "127.0.0.1\tldap01.example.com ldap01"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:827(para)
msgid ""
"The <application>slapd</application> daemon will send log information to "
"<filename>/var/log/syslog</filename> by default. So if all does "
"<emphasis>not</emphasis> go well check there for errors and other "
"troubleshooting information. Also, be sure that each server knows it's Fully "
"Qualified Domain Name (FQDN). This is configured in "
"<filename>/etc/hosts</filename> with a line similar to: <placeholder-1/>."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:839(title)
msgid "Setting up ACL"
msgstr "ACL 설정"

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:841(para)
msgid ""
"Authentication requires access to the password field, that should be not "
"accessible by default. Also, in order for users to change their own "
"password, using <command>passwd</command> or other utilities, "
"<emphasis>shadowLastChange</emphasis> needs to be accessible once a user has "
"authenticated."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:848(para)
msgid ""
"To view the Access Control List (ACL), use the "
"<application>ldapsearch</application> utility:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:853(command)
msgid ""
"ldapsearch -xLLL -b cn=config -D cn=admin,cn=config -W olcDatabase=hdb "
"olcAccess"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:857(computeroutput)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"Enter LDAP Password: \n"
"dn: olcDatabase={1}hdb,cn=config\n"
"olcAccess: {0}to attrs=userPassword,shadowLastChange by "
"dn=\"cn=admin,dc=exampl\n"
" e,dc=com\" write by anonymous auth by self write by * none\n"
"olcAccess: {1}to dn.base=\"\" by * read\n"
"olcAccess: {2}to * by dn=\"cn=admin,dc=example,dc=com\" write by * read\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:869(title)
msgid "TLS and SSL"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:871(para)
msgid ""
"When authenticating to an OpenLDAP server it is best to do so using an "
"encrypted session. This can be accomplished using Transport Layer Security "
"(TLS) and/or Secure Sockets Layer (SSL)."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:876(para)
msgid ""
"The first step in the process is to obtain or create a "
"<emphasis>certificate</emphasis>. Because <application>slapd</application> "
"is compiled using the <application>gnutls</application> library, the "
"<application>certtool</application> utility will be used to create "
"certificates."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:885(para)
msgid ""
"First, install <application>gnutls-bin</application> by entering the "
"following in a terminal:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:890(command)
msgid "sudo apt-get install gnutls-bin"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:896(para)
msgid ""
"Next, create a private key for the <emphasis>Certificate "
"Authority</emphasis> (CA):"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:901(command)
msgid ""
"sudo sh -c \"certtool --generate-privkey &gt; /etc/ssl/private/cakey.pem\""
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:907(para)
msgid ""
"Create a <filename>/etc/ssl/ca.info</filename> details file to self-sign the "
"CA certificate containing:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:911(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"cn = Example Company\n"
"ca\n"
"cert_signing_key\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:920(para)
msgid "Now create the self-signed CA certificate:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:925(command)
msgid ""
"sudo certtool --generate-self-signed --load-privkey "
"/etc/ssl/private/cakey.pem \\ --template /etc/ssl/ca.info --outfile "
"/etc/ssl/certs/cacert.pem"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:932(para)
msgid "Make a private key for the server:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:937(command)
msgid ""
"sudo sh -c \"certtool --generate-privkey &gt; "
"/etc/ssl/private/ldap01_slapd_key.pem\""
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:941(para)
msgid ""
"Replace <emphasis>ldap01</emphasis> in the filename with your server's "
"hostname. Naming the certificate and key for the host and service that will "
"be using them will help keep filenames and paths straight."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:950(para)
msgid ""
"To sign the server's certificate with the CA, create the "
"<filename>/etc/ssl/ldap01.info</filename> info file containing:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:954(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"organization = Example Company\n"
"cn = ldap01.example.com\n"
"tls_www_server\n"
"encryption_key\n"
"signing_key\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:965(para)
msgid "Create the server's certificate:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:970(command)
msgid ""
"sudo certtool --generate-certificate --load-privkey /etc/ssl/private/x01-"
"test_slapd_key.pem \\ --load-ca-certificate /etc/ssl/certs/cacert.pem --load-"
"ca-privkey /etc/ssl/private/cakey.pem \\ --template /etc/ssl/x01-test.info --"
"outfile /etc/ssl/certs/x01-test_slapd_cert.pem"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:978(para)
msgid ""
"Once you have a certificate, key, and CA cert installed, use "
"<application>ldapmodify</application> to add the new configuration options:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:989(userinput)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"dn: cn=config\n"
"add: olcTLSCACertificateFile\n"
"olcTLSCACertificateFile: /etc/ssl/certs/cacert.pem\n"
"-\n"
"add: olcTLSCertificateFile\n"
"olcTLSCertificateFile: /etc/ssl/certs/ldap01_slapd_cert.pem\n"
"-\n"
"add: olcTLSCertificateKeyFile\n"
"olcTLSCertificateKeyFile: /etc/ssl/private/ldap01_slapd_key.pem"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:988(computeroutput) serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:1159(computeroutput)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"Enter LDAP Password:\n"
"<placeholder-1/>\n"
"\n"
"modifying entry \"cn=config\"\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:1004(para)
msgid ""
"Adjust the <filename>ldap01_slapd_cert.pem</filename>, "
"<filename>ldap01_slapd_key.pem</filename>, and "
"<filename>cacert.pem</filename> names if yours are different."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:1010(para)
msgid ""
"Next, edit <filename>/etc/default/slapd</filename> uncomment the "
"<emphasis>SLAPD_SERVICES</emphasis> option:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:1014(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"SLAPD_SERVICES=\"ldap:/// ldapi:/// ldaps:///\"\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:1018(para)
msgid ""
"Now the <emphasis>openldap</emphasis> user needs access to the certificate:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:1023(command)
msgid "sudo adduser openldap ssl-cert"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:1024(command)
msgid "sudo chgrp ssl-cert /etc/ssl/private/ldap01_slapd_key.pem"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:1025(command)
msgid "sudo chmod g+r /etc/ssl/private/ldap01_slapd_key.pem"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:1029(para)
msgid ""
"If the <filename role=\"directory\">/etc/ssl/private</filename> and "
"<filename>/etc/ssl/private/server.key</filename> have different permissions, "
"adjust the commands appropriately."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:1035(para)
msgid "Finally, restart <application>slapd</application>:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:1043(para)
msgid ""
"The <application>slapd</application> daemon should now be listening for "
"LDAPS connections and be able to use STARTTLS during authentication."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:1049(para)
msgid ""
"If you run into troubles with the server not starting, check the "
"/var/log/syslog. If you see errors like main: TLS init def ctx failed: -1, "
"it is likely there is a configuration problem. Check that the certificate is "
"signed by the authority from in the files configured, and that the ssl-cert "
"group has read permissions on the private key."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:1061(title)
msgid "TLS Replication"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:1063(para)
msgid ""
"If you have setup <application>Syncrepl</application> between servers, it is "
"prudent to encrypt the replication traffic using <emphasis>Transport Layer "
"Security (TLS)</emphasis>. For details on setting up replication see <xref "
"linkend=\"openldap-server-replication\"/>."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:1069(para)
msgid ""
"Assuming you have followed the above instructions and created a CA "
"certificate and server certificate on the <emphasis>Provider</emphasis> "
"server. Follow the following instructions to create a certificate and key "
"for the <emphasis>Consumer</emphasis> server."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:1078(para)
msgid "Create a new key for the Consumer server:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:1083(command)
msgid "mkdir ldap02-ssl"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:1084(command)
msgid "cd ldap02-ssl"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:1085(command)
msgid "certtool --generate-privkey &gt; ldap02_slapd_key.pem"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:1089(para)
msgid ""
"Creating a new directory is not strictly necessary, but it will help keep "
"things organized and make it easier to copy the files to the Consumer server."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:1098(para)
msgid ""
"Next, create an info file, <filename>ldap02.info</filename> for the Consumer "
"server, changing the attributes to match your locality and server:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:1103(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"country = US\n"
"state = North Carolina\n"
"locality = Winston-Salem\n"
"organization = Example Company\n"
"cn = ldap02.salem.edu\n"
"tls_www_client\n"
"encryption_key\n"
"signing_key\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:1117(para)
msgid "Create the certificate:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:1122(command)
msgid ""
"sudo certtool --generate-certificate --load-privkey ldap02_slapd_key.pem \\ -"
"-load-ca-certificate /etc/ssl/certs/cacert.pem --load-ca-privkey "
"/etc/ssl/private/cakey.pem \\ --template ldap02.info --outfile "
"ldap02_slapd_cert.pem"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:1130(para)
msgid "Copy the <filename>cacert.pem</filename> to the dicretory:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:1135(command)
msgid "cp /etc/ssl/certs/cacert.pem ."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:1141(para)
msgid ""
"The only thing left is to copy the <filename>ldap02-ssl</filename> directory "
"to the Consumer server, then copy <filename>ldap02_slapd_cert.pem</filename> "
"and <filename>cacert.pem</filename> to <filename>/etc/ssl/certs</filename>, "
"and copy <filename>ldap02_slapd_key.pem</filename> to "
"<filename>/etc/ssl/private</filename>."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:1150(para)
msgid ""
"Once the files are in place adjust the <emphasis>cn=config</emphasis> tree "
"by entering:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:1160(userinput)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"dn: cn=config\n"
"add: olcTLSCACertificateFile\n"
"olcTLSCACertificateFile: /etc/ssl/certs/cacert.pem\n"
"-\n"
"add: olcTLSCertificateFile\n"
"olcTLSCertificateFile: /etc/ssl/certs/ldap02_slapd_cert.pem\n"
"-\n"
"add: olcTLSCertificateKeyFile\n"
"olcTLSCertificateKeyFile: /etc/ssl/private/ldap02_slapd_key.pem"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:1177(para)
msgid ""
"As with the Provider you can now edit "
"<filename>/etc/default/slapd</filename> and add the "
"<emphasis>ldaps:///</emphasis> parameter to the "
"<emphasis>SLAPD_SERVICES</emphasis> option."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:1185(para)
msgid ""
"Now that <emphasis>TLS</emphasis> has been setup on each server, once again "
"modify the <emphasis>Consumer</emphasis> server's "
"<emphasis>cn=config</emphasis> tree by entering the following in a terminal:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:1198(userinput)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"dn: olcDatabase={1}hdb,cn=config\n"
"replace: olcSyncrepl\n"
"olcSyncrepl: {0}rid=0 provider=ldap://ldap01.example.com bindmethod=simple "
"binddn=\"cn=ad\n"
" min,dc=example,dc=com\" credentials=secret searchbase=\"dc=example,dc=com\" "
"logbas\n"
" e=\"cn=accesslog\" "
"logfilter=\"(&amp;(objectClass=auditWriteObject)(reqResult=0))\" s\n"
" chemachecking=on type=refreshAndPersist retry=\"60 +\" syncdata=accesslog "
"starttls=yes"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:1195(computeroutput)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"SASL/EXTERNAL authentication started\n"
"SASL username: gidNumber=0+uidNumber=0,cn=peercred,cn=external,cn=auth\n"
"SASL SSF: 0\n"
"<placeholder-1/>\n"
"\n"
"modifying entry \"olcDatabase={1}hdb,cn=config\"\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:1210(para)
msgid ""
"If the LDAP server hostname does not match the Fully Qualified Domain Name "
"(FQDN) in the certificate, you may have to edit "
"<filename>/etc/ldap/ldap.conf</filename> and add the following TLS options:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:1215(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"TLS_CERT /etc/ssl/certs/ldap02_slapd_cert.pem\n"
"TLS_KEY /etc/ssl/private/ldap02_slapd_key.pem\n"
"TLS_CACERT /etc/ssl/certs/cacert.pem\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:1222(para)
msgid ""
"Finally, restart <application>slapd</application> on each of the servers:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:1235(title)
msgid "LDAP Authentication"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:1237(para)
msgid ""
"Once you have a working LDAP server, the <application>auth-client-"
"config</application> and <application>libnss-ldap</application> packages "
"take the pain out of configuring an Ubuntu client to authenticate using "
"LDAP. To install the packages from, a terminal prompt enter:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:1244(command)
msgid "sudo apt-get install libnss-ldap"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:1247(para)
msgid ""
"During the install a menu dialog will ask you connection details about your "
"LDAP server."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:1251(para)
msgid ""
"If you make a mistake when entering your information you can execute the "
"dialog again using:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:1256(command)
msgid "sudo dpkg-reconfigure ldap-auth-config"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:1259(para)
msgid ""
"The results of the dialog can be seen in "
"<filename>/etc/ldap.conf</filename>. If your server requires options not "
"covered in the menu edit this file accordingly."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:1264(para)
msgid ""
"Now that <application>libnss-ldap</application> is configured enable the "
"<application>auth-client-config</application> LDAP profile by entering:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:1270(command)
msgid "sudo auth-client-config -t nss -p lac_ldap"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:1275(para)
msgid ""
"<emphasis>-t:</emphasis> only modifies "
"<filename>/etc/nsswitch.conf</filename>."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:1280(para)
msgid "<emphasis>-p:</emphasis> name of the profile to enable, disable, etc."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:1285(para)
msgid ""
"<emphasis>lac_ldap:</emphasis> the <application>auth-client-"
"config</application> profile that is part of the <application>ldap-auth-"
"config</application> package."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:1292(para)
msgid ""
"Using the <application>pam-auth-update</application> utility, configure the "
"system to use LDAP for authentication:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:1297(command)
msgid "sudo pam-auth-update"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:1300(para)
msgid ""
"From the <application>pam-auth-update</application> menu, choose LDAP and "
"any other authentication mechanisms you need."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:1304(para)
msgid ""
"You should now be able to login using user credentials stored in the LDAP "
"directory."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:1309(para)
msgid ""
"If you are going to use LDAP to store Samba users you will need to configure "
"the server to authenticate using LDAP. See <xref linkend=\"samba-ldap\"/> "
"for details."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:1317(title)
msgid "User and Group Management"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:1319(para)
msgid ""
"The <application>ldap-utils</application> package comes with multiple "
"utilities to manage the directory, but the long string of options needed, "
"can make them a burden to use. The <application>ldapscripts</application> "
"package contains configurable scripts to easily manage LDAP users and groups."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:1325(para)
msgid "To install the package, from a terminal enter:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:1330(command)
msgid "sudo apt-get install ldapscripts"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:1333(para)
msgid ""
"Next, edit the config file "
"<filename>/etc/ldapscripts/ldapscripts.conf</filename> uncommenting and "
"changing the following to match your environment:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:1338(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"SERVER=localhost\n"
"BINDDN='cn=admin,dc=example,dc=com'\n"
"BINDPWDFILE=\"/etc/ldapscripts/ldapscripts.passwd\"\n"
"SUFFIX='dc=example,dc=com'\n"
"GSUFFIX='ou=Groups'\n"
"USUFFIX='ou=People'\n"
"MSUFFIX='ou=Computers'\n"
"GIDSTART=10000\n"
"UIDSTART=10000\n"
"MIDSTART=10000\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:1351(para)
msgid ""
"Now, create the <filename>ldapscripts.passwd</filename> file to allow "
"authenticated access to the directory:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:1356(command)
msgid ""
"sudo sh -c \"echo -n 'secret' &gt; /etc/ldapscripts/ldapscripts.passwd\""
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:1357(command)
msgid "sudo chmod 400 /etc/ldapscripts/ldapscripts.passwd"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:1361(para)
msgid ""
"Replace <quote>secret</quote> with the actual password for your LDAP admin "
"user."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:1366(para)
msgid ""
"The <application>ldapscripts</application> are now ready to help manage your "
"directory. The following are some examples of how to use the scripts:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:1373(para)
msgid "Create a new user:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:1377(command)
msgid "sudo ldapadduser george example"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:1379(para)
msgid ""
"This will create a user with uid <emphasis role=\"italic\">george</emphasis> "
"and set the user's primary group (gid) to <emphasis "
"role=\"italic\">example</emphasis>"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:1385(para)
msgid "Change a user's password:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:1389(command)
msgid "sudo ldapsetpasswd george"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:1390(computeroutput)
#, no-wrap
msgid "Changing password for user uid=george,ou=People,dc=example,dc=com"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:1391(userinput)
#, no-wrap
msgid "New Password: "
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:1392(userinput)
#, no-wrap
msgid "New Password (verify): "
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:1396(para)
msgid "Delete a user:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:1400(command)
msgid "sudo ldapdeleteuser george"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:1405(para)
msgid "Add a group:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:1409(command)
msgid "sudo ldapaddgroup qa"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:1413(para)
msgid "Delete a group:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:1417(command)
msgid "sudo ldapdeletegroup qa"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:1421(para)
msgid "Add a user to a group:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:1425(command)
msgid "sudo ldapaddusertogroup george qa"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:1427(para)
msgid ""
"You should now see a <emphasis>memberUid</emphasis> attribute for the "
"<emphasis role=\"italic\">qa</emphasis> group with a value of <emphasis "
"role=\"italic\">george</emphasis>."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:1433(para)
msgid "Remove a user from a group:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:1437(command)
msgid "sudo ldapdeleteuserfromgroup george qa"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:1439(para)
msgid ""
"The <emphasis>memberUid</emphasis> attribute should now be removed from the "
"<emphasis role=\"italic\">qa</emphasis> group."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:1445(para)
msgid ""
"The <application>ldapmodifyuser</application> script allows you to add, "
"remove, or replace a user's attributes. The script uses the same syntax as "
"the <application>ldapmodify</application> utility. For example:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:1450(command)
msgid "sudo ldapmodifyuser george"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:1451(computeroutput)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"# About to modify the following entry :\n"
"dn: uid=george,ou=People,dc=example,dc=com\n"
"objectClass: account\n"
"objectClass: posixAccount\n"
"cn: george\n"
"uid: george\n"
"uidNumber: 1001\n"
"gidNumber: 1001\n"
"homeDirectory: /home/george\n"
"loginShell: /bin/bash\n"
"gecos: george\n"
"description: User account\n"
"userPassword:: e1NTSEF9eXFsTFcyWlhwWkF1eGUybVdFWHZKRzJVMjFTSG9vcHk=\n"
"\n"
"# Enter your modifications here, end with CTRL-D.\n"
"dn: uid=george,ou=People,dc=example,dc=com"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:1467(userinput)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"replace: gecos\n"
"gecos: George Carlin"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:1470(para)
msgid ""
"The user's <emphasis>gecos</emphasis> should now be <quote>George "
"Carlin</quote>."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:1475(para)
msgid ""
"Another great feature of <application>ldapscripts</application>, is the "
"template system. Templates allow you to customize the attributes of user, "
"group, and machine objectes. For example, to enable the "
"<emphasis>user</emphasis> template edit "
"<filename>/etc/ldapscripts/ldapscripts.conf</filename> changing:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:1482(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"UTEMPLATE=\"/etc/ldapscripts/ldapadduser.template\"\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:1486(para)
msgid ""
"There are <emphasis role=\"italic\">sample</emphasis> templates in the "
"<filename>/etc/ldapscripts</filename> directory. Copy or rename the "
"<filename>ldapadduser.template.sample</filename> file to "
"<filename>/etc/ldapscripts/ldapadduser.template</filename>:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:1493(command)
msgid ""
"sudo cp /etc/ldapscripts/ldapadduser.template.sample "
"/etc/ldapscripts/ldapadduser.template"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:1496(para)
msgid ""
"Edit the new template to add the desired attributes. The following will "
"create new user's as with an <emphasis>objectClass</emphasis> of "
"<emphasis>inetOrgPerson</emphasis>:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:1501(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"dn: uid=&lt;user&gt;,&lt;usuffix&gt;,&lt;suffix&gt;\n"
"objectClass: inetOrgPerson\n"
"objectClass: posixAccount\n"
"cn: &lt;user&gt;\n"
"sn: &lt;ask&gt;\n"
"uid: &lt;user&gt;\n"
"uidNumber: &lt;uid&gt;\n"
"gidNumber: &lt;gid&gt;\n"
"homeDirectory: &lt;home&gt;\n"
"loginShell: &lt;shell&gt;\n"
"gecos: &lt;user&gt;\n"
"description: User account\n"
"title: Employee\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:1517(para)
msgid ""
"Notice the <emphasis>&lt;ask&gt;</emphasis> option used for the "
"<emphasis>cn</emphasis> value. Using &lt;ask&gt; will configure "
"<application>ldapadduser</application> to prompt you for the attribute value "
"during user creation."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:1525(para)
msgid ""
"There are more useful scripts in the package, to see a full list enter: "
"<command>dpkg -L ldapscripts | grep bin</command>"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:1534(para)
msgid ""
"The <ulink url=\"https://help.ubuntu.com/community/OpenLDAPServer\">OpenLDAP "
"Ubuntu Wiki</ulink> page has more details."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:1539(para)
msgid ""
"For more information see <ulink url=\"http://www.openldap.org/\">OpenLDAP "
"Home Page</ulink>"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:1544(para)
msgid ""
"Though starting to show it's age, a great source for in depth LDAP "
"information is O'Reilly's <ulink "
"url=\"http://www.oreilly.com/catalog/ldapsa/\">LDAP System "
"Administration</ulink>"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:1550(para)
msgid ""
"Packt's <ulink url=\"http://www.packtpub.com/OpenLDAP-Developers-Server-Open-"
"Source-Linux/book\">Mastering OpenLDAP</ulink> is a great reference covering "
"newer versions of OpenLDAP."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:1556(para)
msgid ""
"For more information on <application>auth-client-config</application> see "
"the man page: <command>man auth-client-config</command>."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:1561(para)
msgid ""
"For more details regarding the <application>ldapscripts</application> "
"package see the man pages: <command>man ldapscripts</command>, <command>man "
"ldapadduser</command>, <command>man ldapaddgroup</command>, etc."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:1571(title)
msgid "Samba and LDAP"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:1573(para)
msgid ""
"This section covers configuring Samba to use LDAP for user, group, and "
"machine account information and authentication. The assumption is, you "
"already have a working OpenLDAP directory installed and the server is "
"configured to use it for authentication. See <xref linkend=\"openldap-"
"server\"/> and <xref linkend=\"openldap-auth-config\"/> for details on "
"setting up OpenLDAP. For more information on installing and configuring "
"Samba see <xref linkend=\"windows-networking\"/>."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:1583(para)
msgid ""
"There are three packages needed when integrating Samba with LDAP. "
"<application>samba</application>, <application>samba-doc</application>, and "
"<application>smbldap-tools</application> packages . To install the packages, "
"from a terminal enter:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:1589(command)
msgid "sudo apt-get install samba samba-doc smbldap-tools"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:1592(para)
msgid ""
"Strictly speaking the <application>smbldap-tools</application> package isn't "
"needed, but unless you have another package or custom scripts, a method of "
"managing users, groups, and computer accounts is needed."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:1599(title)
msgid "OpenLDAP Configuration"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:1601(para)
msgid ""
"In order for Samba to use OpenLDAP as a <emphasis>passdb backend</emphasis>, "
"the user objects in the directory will need additional attributes. This "
"section assumes you want Samba to be configured as a Windows NT domain "
"controller, and will add the necessary LDAP objects and attributes."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:1609(para)
msgid ""
"The Samba attributes are defined in the <filename>samba.schema</filename> "
"file which is part of the <application>samba-doc</application> package. The "
"schema file needs to be unzipped and copied to "
"<filename>/etc/ldap/schema</filename>. From a terminal prompt enter:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:1616(command)
msgid ""
"sudo cp /usr/share/doc/samba-doc/examples/LDAP/samba.schema.gz "
"/etc/ldap/schema/"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:1617(command)
msgid "sudo gzip -d /etc/ldap/schema/samba.schema.gz"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:1623(para)
msgid ""
"The <emphasis>samba</emphasis> schema needs to be added to the "
"<emphasis>cn=config</emphasis> tree. The procedure to add a new schema to "
"<application>slapd</application> is also detailed in <xref "
"linkend=\"openldap-configuration\"/>."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:1631(para) serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:2666(para)
msgid ""
"First, create a configuration file named "
"<filename>schema_convert.conf</filename>, or a similar descriptive name, "
"containing the following lines:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:1636(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"include /etc/ldap/schema/core.schema\n"
"include /etc/ldap/schema/collective.schema\n"
"include /etc/ldap/schema/corba.schema\n"
"include /etc/ldap/schema/cosine.schema\n"
"include /etc/ldap/schema/duaconf.schema\n"
"include /etc/ldap/schema/dyngroup.schema\n"
"include /etc/ldap/schema/inetorgperson.schema\n"
"include /etc/ldap/schema/java.schema\n"
"include /etc/ldap/schema/misc.schema\n"
"include /etc/ldap/schema/nis.schema\n"
"include /etc/ldap/schema/openldap.schema\n"
"include /etc/ldap/schema/ppolicy.schema\n"
"include /etc/ldap/schema/samba.schema\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:1666(para) serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:2701(para)
msgid ""
"Now use <application>slapcat</application> to convert the schema files:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:1671(command)
msgid ""
"slapcat -f schema_convert.conf -F /tmp/ldif_output -n0 -s "
"\"cn={12}samba,cn=schema,cn=config\" &gt; /tmp/cn=samba.ldif"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:1674(para) serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:2709(para)
msgid ""
"Change the above file and path names to match your own if they are different."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:1681(para)
msgid ""
"Edit the generated <filename>/tmp/cn\\=samba.ldif</filename> file, changing "
"the following attributes:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:1685(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"dn: cn=samba,cn=schema,cn=config\n"
"...\n"
"cn: samba\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:1695(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"structuralObjectClass: olcSchemaConfig\n"
"entryUUID: b53b75ca-083f-102d-9fff-2f64fd123c95\n"
"creatorsName: cn=config\n"
"createTimestamp: 20080827045234Z\n"
"entryCSN: 20080827045234.341425Z#000000#000#000000\n"
"modifiersName: cn=config\n"
"modifyTimestamp: 20080827045234Z\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:1720(command)
msgid "ldapadd -x -D cn=admin,cn=config -W -f /tmp/cn\\=samba.ldif"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:1726(para)
msgid ""
"There should now be a <emphasis>dn: "
"cn={X}misc,cn=schema,cn=config</emphasis>, where \"X\" is the next "
"sequential schema, entry in the cn=config tree."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:1734(para)
msgid ""
"Copy and paste the following into a file named "
"<filename>samba_indexes.ldif</filename>:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:1738(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"dn: olcDatabase={1}hdb,cn=config\n"
"changetype: modify\n"
"add: olcDbIndex\n"
"olcDbIndex: uidNumber eq\n"
"olcDbIndex: gidNumber eq\n"
"olcDbIndex: loginShell eq\n"
"olcDbIndex: uid eq,pres,sub\n"
"olcDbIndex: memberUid eq,pres,sub\n"
"olcDbIndex: uniqueMember eq,pres\n"
"olcDbIndex: sambaSID eq\n"
"olcDbIndex: sambaPrimaryGroupSID eq\n"
"olcDbIndex: sambaGroupType eq\n"
"olcDbIndex: sambaSIDList eq\n"
"olcDbIndex: sambaDomainName eq\n"
"olcDbIndex: default sub\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:1756(para)
msgid ""
"Using the <application>ldapmodify</application> utility load the new indexes:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:1761(command)
msgid "ldapmodify -x -D cn=admin,cn=config -W -f samba_indexes.ldif"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:1763(para)
msgid ""
"If all went well you should see the new indexes using "
"<application>ldapsearch</application>:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:1768(command)
msgid ""
"ldapsearch -xLLL -D cn=admin,cn=config -x -b cn=config -W olcDatabase={1}hdb"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:1774(para)
msgid ""
"Next, configure the <application>smbldap-tools</application> package to "
"match your environment. The package comes with a configuration script that "
"will ask questions about the needed options. To run the script enter:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:1780(command)
msgid "sudo gzip -d /usr/share/doc/smbldap-tools/configure.pl.gz"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:1781(command)
msgid "sudo perl /usr/share/doc/smbldap-tools/configure.pl"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:1784(para)
msgid ""
"Once you have answered the questions, there should be <filename>/etc/smbldap-"
"tools/smbldap.conf</filename> and <filename>/etc/smbldap-"
"tools/smbldap_bind.conf</filename> files. These files are generated by the "
"configure script, so if you made any mistakes while executing the script it "
"may be simpler to edit the file appropriately."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:1794(para)
msgid ""
"The <application>smbldap-populate</application> script will add the "
"necessary users, groups, and LDAP objects required for Samba. It is a good "
"idea to make a backup LDAP Data Interchange Format (LDIF) file with "
"<application>slapcat</application> before executing the command:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:1801(command)
msgid "sudo slapcat -l backup.ldif"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:1807(para)
msgid ""
"Once you have a current backup execute <application>smbldap-"
"populate</application> by entering:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:1812(command)
msgid "sudo smbldap-populate"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:1816(para)
msgid ""
"You can create an LDIF file containing the new Samba objects by executing "
"<command>sudo smbldap-populate -e samba.ldif</command>. This allows you to "
"look over the changes making sure everything is correct."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:1824(para)
msgid ""
"Your LDAP directory now has the necessary domain information to authenticate "
"Samba users."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:1830(title)
msgid "Samba Configuration"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:1832(para)
msgid ""
"There a multiple ways to configure Samba for details on some common "
"configurations see <xref linkend=\"windows-networking\"/>. To configure "
"Samba to use LDAP, edit the main Samba configuration file "
"<filename>/etc/samba/smb.conf</filename> commenting the <emphasis>passdb "
"backend</emphasis> option and adding the following:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:1838(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"#   passdb backend = tdbsam\n"
"\n"
"# LDAP Settings\n"
"   passdb backend = ldapsam:ldap://hostname\n"
"   ldap suffix = dc=example,dc=com\n"
"   ldap user suffix = ou=People\n"
"   ldap group suffix = ou=Groups\n"
"   ldap machine suffix = ou=Computers\n"
"   ldap idmap suffix = ou=Idmap\n"
"   ldap admin dn = cn=admin,dc=example,dc=com\n"
"   ldap ssl = start tls\n"
"   ldap passwd sync = yes\n"
"...\n"
"   add machine script = sudo /usr/sbin/smbldap-useradd -t 0 -w \"%u\"\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:1855(para)
msgid "Restart <application>samba</application> to enable the new settings:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:1863(para)
msgid ""
"Now Samba needs to know the LDAP admin password. From a terminal prompt "
"enter:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:1868(command)
msgid "sudo smbpasswd -w secret"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:1872(para)
msgid ""
"Replacing <emphasis role=\"italic\">secret</emphasis> with your LDAP admin "
"password."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:1877(para)
msgid ""
"If you currently have users in LDAP, and you want them to authenticate using "
"Samba, they will need some Samba attributes defined in the "
"<filename>samba.schema</filename> file. Add the Samba attributes to existing "
"users using the <application>smbpasswd</application> utility, replacing "
"<emphasis role=\"italic\">username</emphasis> with an actual user:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:1885(command)
msgid "sudo smbpasswd -a username"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:1888(para)
msgid "You will then be asked to enter the user's password."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:1892(para)
msgid ""
"To add new user, group, and machine accounts use the utilities from the "
"<application>smbldap-tools</application> package. Here are some examples:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:1899(para)
msgid ""
"To add a new user to LDAP with Samba attributes enter the following, "
"replacing username with an actual username:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:1903(command)
msgid "sudo smbldap-useradd -a -P username"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:1905(para)
msgid ""
"The <emphasis>-a</emphasis> option adds the Samba attributes, and the "
"<emphasis>-P</emphasis> options calls the <application>smbldap-"
"passwd</application> utility after the user is created allowing you to enter "
"a password for the user."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:1911(para)
msgid "To remove a user from the directory enter:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:1915(command)
msgid "sudo smbldap-userdel username"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:1917(para)
msgid ""
"The <application>smbldap-userdel</application> utility also has a <emphasis>-"
"r</emphasis> option to remove the user's home directory."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:1922(para)
msgid ""
"Use <application>smbldap-groupadd</application> to add a group, replacing "
"groupname with an appropriate group:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:1926(command)
msgid "sudo smbldap-groupadd -a groupname"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:1928(para)
msgid ""
"Similar to <application>smbldap-useradd</application>, the <emphasis>-"
"a</emphasis> adds the Samba attributes."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:1933(para)
msgid ""
"To add a user to a group use <application>smbldap-groupmod</application>:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:1937(command)
msgid "sudo smbldap-groupmod -m username groupname"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:1939(para)
msgid ""
"Be sure to replace <emphasis>username</emphasis> with a real user. Also, the "
"<emphasis>-m</emphasis> option can add more than one user at a time by "
"listing them in <emphasis>comma separated</emphasis> format."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:1945(para)
msgid ""
"<application>smbldap-groupmod</application> can also be used to remove a "
"user from a group:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:1949(command)
msgid "sudo smbldap-groupmod -x username groupname"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:1953(para)
msgid ""
"Additionally, the <application>smbldap-useradd</application> utility can add "
"Samba machine accounts:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:1957(command)
msgid "sudo smbldap-useradd -t 0 -w username"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:1959(para)
msgid ""
"Replace <emphasis>username</emphasis> with the name of the workstation. The "
"<emphasis>-t 0</emphasis> option creates the machine account without a "
"delay, while the <emphasis>-w</emphasis> option specifies the user as a "
"machine account. Also, note the <emphasis>add machine script</emphasis> "
"option in <filename>/etc/samba/smb.conf</filename> was changed to use "
"<application>smbldap-useradd</application>."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:1968(para)
msgid ""
"There are more useful utilities and options in the <application>smbldap-"
"tools</application> package. The man page for each utility provides more "
"details."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:1979(para)
msgid ""
"There are multiple places where LDAP and Samba is documented in the <ulink "
"url=\"http://samba.org/samba/docs/man/Samba-HOWTO-Collection/\">Samba HOWTO "
"Collection</ulink>."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:1985(para)
msgid ""
"Specifically see the <ulink url=\"http://samba.org/samba/docs/man/Samba-"
"HOWTO-Collection/passdb.html\">passdb section</ulink>."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:1991(para)
msgid ""
"Another good site is <ulink url=\"http://www.iallanis.info/smbldap-"
"tools/docs/samba-ldap-howto/\">Samba OpenLDAP HOWTO</ulink>."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:1997(para)
msgid ""
"Again, for more information on <application>smbldap-tools</application> see "
"the man pages: <command>man smbldap-useradd</command>, <command>man smbldap-"
"groupadd</command>, <command>man smbldap-populate</command>, etc."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:2004(para)
msgid ""
"Also, there is a list of <ulink "
"url=\"https://help.ubuntu.com/community/Samba#samba-ldap\">Ubuntu "
"wiki</ulink> articles with more information."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:2013(title)
msgid "Kerberos"
msgstr "Kerberos"

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:2015(para)
msgid ""
"<application>Kerberos</application> is a network authentication system based "
"on the principal of a trusted third party. The other two parties being the "
"user and the service the user wishes to authenticate to. Not all services "
"and applications can use Kerberos, but for those that can, it brings the "
"network environment one step closer to being Single Sign On (SSO)."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:2021(para)
msgid ""
"This section covers installation and configuration of a Kerberos server, and "
"some example client configurations."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:2028(para)
msgid ""
"If you are new to Kerberos there are a few terms that are good to understand "
"before setting up a Kerberos server. Most of the terms will relate to things "
"you may be familiar with in other environments:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:2035(para)
msgid ""
"<emphasis>Principal:</emphasis> any users, computers, and services provided "
"by servers need to be defined as Kerberos Principals."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:2040(para)
msgid ""
"<emphasis>Instances:</emphasis> are used for service principals and special "
"administrative principals."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:2045(para)
msgid ""
"<emphasis>Realms:</emphasis> the unique realm of control provided by the "
"Kerberos installation. Usually the DNS domain converted to uppercase "
"(EXAMPLE.COM)."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:2051(para)
msgid ""
"<emphasis>Key Distribution Center:</emphasis> (KDC) consist of three parts, "
"a database of all principals, the authentication server, and the ticket "
"granting server. For each realm there must be at least one KDC."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:2057(para)
msgid ""
"<emphasis>Ticket Granting Ticket:</emphasis> issued by the Authentication "
"Server (AS), the Ticket Granting Ticket (TGT) is encrypted in the user's "
"password which is known only to the user and the KDC."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:2063(para)
msgid ""
"<emphasis>Ticket Granting Server:</emphasis> (TGS) issues service tickets to "
"clients upon request."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:2068(para)
msgid ""
"<emphasis>Tickets:</emphasis> confirm the identity of the two principals. "
"One principal being a user and the other a service requested by the user. "
"Tickets establish an encryption key used for secure communication during the "
"authenticated session."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:2074(para)
msgid ""
"<emphasis>Keytab Files:</emphasis> are files extracted from the KDC "
"principal database and contain the encryption key for a service or host."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:2081(para)
msgid ""
"To put the pieces together, a Realm has at least one KDC, preferably two for "
"redundancy, which contains a database of Principals. When a user principal "
"logs into a workstation, configured for Kerberos authentication, the KDC "
"issues a Ticket Granting Ticket (TGT). If the user supplied credentials "
"match, the user is authenticated and can then request tickets for Kerberized "
"services from the Ticket Granting Server (TGS). The service tickets allow "
"the user to authenticate to the service without entering another username "
"and password."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:2090(title)
msgid "Kerberos Server"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:2094(para)
msgid ""
"Before installing the Kerberos server a properly configured DNS server is "
"needed for your domain. Since the Kerberos Realm by convention matches the "
"domain name, this section uses the <emphasis>example.com</emphasis> domain "
"configured in <xref linkend=\"dns-primarymaster-configuration\"/>."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:2100(para)
msgid ""
"Also, Kerberos is a time sensitive protocol. So if the local system time "
"between a client machine and the server differs by more than five minutes "
"(by default), the workstation will not be able to authenticate. To correct "
"the problem all hosts should have their time synchronized using the "
"<emphasis>Network Time Protocol (NTP)</emphasis>. For details on setting up "
"NTP see <xref linkend=\"NTP\"/>."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:2107(para)
msgid ""
"The first step in installing a Kerberos Realm is to install the "
"<application>krb5-kdc</application> and <application>krb5-admin-"
"server</application> packages. From a terminal enter:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:2113(command) serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:2288(command)
msgid "sudo apt-get install krb5-kdc krb5-admin-server"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:2116(para)
msgid ""
"You will be asked at the end of the install to supply a name for the "
"Kerberos and Admin servers, which may or may not be the same server, for the "
"realm."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:2121(para)
msgid ""
"Next, create the new realm with the <application>kdb5_newrealm</application> "
"utility:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:2126(command)
msgid "sudo krb5_newrealm"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:2133(para)
msgid ""
"The questions asked during installation are used to configure the "
"<filename>/etc/krb5.conf</filename> file. If you need to adjust the Key "
"Distribution Center (KDC) settings simply edit the file and restart the "
"<application>krb5-kdc</application> daemon."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:2141(para)
msgid ""
"Now that the KDC running an admin user is needed. It is recommended to use a "
"different username from your everyday username. Using the "
"<application>kadmin.local</application> utility in a terminal prompt enter:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:2147(command) serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:2943(command)
msgid "sudo kadmin.local"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:2148(computeroutput)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"Authenticating as principal root/admin@EXAMPLE.COM with password.\n"
"kadmin.local:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:2149(userinput)
#, no-wrap
msgid " addprinc steve/admin"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:2150(computeroutput)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"WARNING: no policy specified for steve/admin@EXAMPLE.COM; defaulting to no "
"policy\n"
"Enter password for principal \"steve/admin@EXAMPLE.COM\": \n"
"Re-enter password for principal \"steve/admin@EXAMPLE.COM\": \n"
"Principal \"steve/admin@EXAMPLE.COM\" created.\n"
"kadmin.local:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:2154(userinput)
#, no-wrap
msgid " quit"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:2157(para)
msgid ""
"In the above example <emphasis role=\"italic\">steve</emphasis> is the "
"<emphasis>Principal</emphasis>, <emphasis role=\"italic\">/admin</emphasis> "
"is an <emphasis>Instance</emphasis>, and <emphasis "
"role=\"italic\">@EXAMPLE.COM</emphasis> signifies the realm. The <emphasis "
"role=\"italic\">\"every day\"</emphasis> Principal would be "
"<emphasis>steve@EXAMPLE.COM</emphasis>, and should have only normal user "
"rights."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:2165(para)
msgid ""
"Replace <emphasis>EXAMPLE.COM</emphasis> and <emphasis>steve</emphasis> with "
"your Realm and admin username."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:2173(para)
msgid ""
"Next, the new admin user needs to have the appropriate Access Control List "
"(ACL) permissions. The permissions are configured in the "
"<filename>/etc/krb5kdc/kadm5.acl</filename> file:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:2178(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"steve/admin@EXAMPLE.COM        *\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:2182(para)
msgid ""
"This entry grants <emphasis>steve/admin</emphasis> the ability to perform "
"any operation on all principals in the realm."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:2189(para)
msgid ""
"Now restart the <application>krb5-admin-server</application> for the new ACL "
"to take affect:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:2194(command)
msgid "sudo /etc/init.d/krb5-admin-server restart"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:2200(para)
msgid ""
"The new user principal can be tested using the <application>kinit "
"utility</application>:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:2205(command)
msgid "kinit steve/admin"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:2206(computeroutput)
#, no-wrap
msgid "steve/admin@EXAMPLE.COM's Password:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:2209(para)
msgid ""
"After entering the password, use the <application>klist</application> "
"utility to view information about the Ticket Granting Ticket (TGT):"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:2215(command) serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:2550(command)
msgid "klist"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:2216(computeroutput)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"Credentials cache: FILE:/tmp/krb5cc_1000\n"
"        Principal: steve/admin@EXAMPLE.COM\n"
"\n"
"  Issued           Expires          Principal\n"
"Jul 13 17:53:34  Jul 14 03:53:34  krbtgt/EXAMPLE.COM@EXAMPLE.COM"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:2223(para)
msgid ""
"You may need to add an entry into the <filename>/etc/hosts</filename> for "
"the KDC. For example:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:2227(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"192.168.0.1   kdc01.example.com       kdc01\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:2231(para)
msgid ""
"Replacing <emphasis>192.168.0.1</emphasis> with the IP address of your KDC."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:2238(para)
msgid ""
"In order for clients to determine the KDC for the Realm some DNS SRV records "
"are needed. Add the following to "
"<filename>/etc/named/db.example.com</filename>:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:2243(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"_kerberos._udp.EXAMPLE.COM.     IN SRV 1  0 88  kdc01.example.com.\n"
"_kerberos._tcp.EXAMPLE.COM.     IN SRV 1  0 88  kdc01.example.com.\n"
"_kerberos._udp.EXAMPLE.COM.     IN SRV 10 0 88  kdc02.example.com. \n"
"_kerberos._tcp.EXAMPLE.COM.     IN SRV 10 0 88  kdc02.example.com. \n"
"_kerberos-adm._tcp.EXAMPLE.COM. IN SRV 1  0 749 kdc01.example.com.\n"
"_kpasswd._udp.EXAMPLE.COM.      IN SRV 1  0 464 kdc01.example.com.\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:2253(para)
msgid ""
"Replace <emphasis>EXAMPLE.COM</emphasis>, <emphasis>kdc01</emphasis>, and "
"<emphasis>kdc02</emphasis> with your domain name, primary KDC, and secondary "
"KDC."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:2259(para)
msgid ""
"See <xref linkend=\"dns\"/> for detailed instructions on setting up DNS."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:2266(para)
msgid "Your new Kerberos Realm is now ready to authenticate clients."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:2273(title)
msgid "Secondary KDC"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:2275(para)
msgid ""
"Once you have one Key Distribution Center (KDC) on your network, it is good "
"practice to have a Secondary KDC in case the primary becomes unavailable."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:2283(para)
msgid ""
"First, install the packages, and when asked for the Kerberos and Admin "
"server names enter the name of the Primary KDC:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:2294(para)
msgid ""
"Once you have the packages installed, create the Secondary KDC's host "
"principal. From a terminal prompt, enter:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:2299(command)
msgid "kadmin -q \"addprinc -randkey host/kdc02.example.com\""
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:2303(para)
msgid ""
"After, issuing any <application>kadmin</application> commands you will be "
"prompted for your <emphasis>username/admin@EXAMPLE.COM</emphasis> principal "
"password."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:2312(para)
msgid "Extract the <emphasis>keytab</emphasis> file:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:2317(command)
msgid "kadmin -q \"ktadd -k keytab.kdc02 host/kdc02.example.com\""
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:2323(para)
msgid ""
"There should now be a <filename>keytab.kdc02</filename> in the current "
"directory, move the file to <filename>/etc/krb5.keytab</filename>:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:2329(command)
msgid "sudo mv keytab.kdc02 /etc/krb5.keytab"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:2333(para)
msgid ""
"If the path to the <filename>keytab.kdc02</filename> file is different "
"adjust accordingly."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:2338(para)
msgid ""
"Also, you can list the principals in a Keytab file, which can be useful when "
"troubleshooting, using the <application>klist</application> utility:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:2344(command)
msgid "sudo klist -k /etc/krb5.keytab"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:2350(para)
msgid ""
"Next, there needs to be a <filename>kpropd.acl</filename> file on each KDC "
"that lists all KDCs for the Realm. For example, on both primary and "
"secondary KDC, create <filename>/etc/krb5kdc/kpropd.acl</filename>:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:2355(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"host/kdc01.example.com@EXAMPLE.COM\n"
"host/kdc02.example.com@EXAMPLE.COM\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:2363(para)
msgid "Create an empty database on the <emphasis>Secondary KDC</emphasis>:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:2368(command)
msgid "sudo kdb5_util -s create"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:2374(para)
msgid ""
"Now start the <application>kpropd</application> daemon, which listens for "
"connections from the <application>kprop</application> utility. "
"<application>kprop</application> is used to transfer dump files:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:2381(command)
msgid "sudo kpropd -S"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:2387(para)
msgid ""
"From a terminal on the <emphasis>Primary KDC</emphasis>, create a dump file "
"of the principal database:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:2392(command)
msgid "sudo kdb5_util dump /var/lib/krb5kdc/dump"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:2398(para)
msgid ""
"Extract the Primary KDC's <emphasis>keytab</emphasis> file and copy it to "
"<filename>/etc/krb5.keytab</filename>:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:2403(command)
msgid "kadmin -q \"ktadd -k keytab.kdc01 host/kdc01.example.com\""
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:2404(command)
msgid "sudo mv keytab.kdc01 /etc/kr5b.keytab"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:2408(para)
msgid ""
"Make sure there is a <emphasis>host</emphasis> for "
"<emphasis>kdc01.example.com</emphasis> before extracting the Keytab."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:2416(para)
msgid ""
"Using the <application>kprop</application> utility push the database to the "
"Secondary KDC:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:2421(command)
msgid "sudo kprop -r EXAMPLE.COM -f /var/lib/krb5kdc/dump kdc02.example.com"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:2425(para)
msgid ""
"There should be a <emphasis>SUCCEEDED</emphasis> message if the propagation "
"worked. If there is an error message check "
"<filename>/var/log/syslog</filename> on the secondary KDC for more "
"information."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:2431(para)
msgid ""
"You may also want to create a <application>cron</application> job to "
"periodically update the database on the Secondary KDC. For example, the "
"following will push the database every hour:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:2436(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"# m h  dom mon dow   command\n"
"0 * * * * /usr/sbin/kdb5_util dump /var/lib/krb5kdc/dump &amp;&amp; "
"/usr/sbin/kprop -r EXAMPLE.COM -f /var/lib/krb5kdc/dump kdc02.example.com\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:2444(para)
msgid ""
"Back on the <emphasis>Secondary KDC</emphasis>, create a "
"<emphasis>stash</emphasis> file to hold the Kerberos master key:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:2450(command)
msgid "sudo kdb5_util stash"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:2456(para)
msgid ""
"Finally, start the <application>krb5-kdc</application> daemon on the "
"Secondary KDC:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:2461(command) serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:3073(command)
msgid "sudo /etc/init.d/krb5-kdc start"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:2467(para)
msgid ""
"The <emphasis>Secondary KDC</emphasis> should now be able to issue tickets "
"for the Realm. You can test this by stopping the <application>krb5-"
"kdc</application> daemon on the Primary KDC, then use "
"<application>kinit</application> to request a ticket. If all goes well you "
"should receive a ticket from the Secondary KDC."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:2475(title)
msgid "Kerberos Linux Client"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:2477(para)
msgid ""
"This section covers configuring a Linux system as a "
"<application>Kerberos</application> client. This will allow access to any "
"kerberized services once a user has successfully logged into the system."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:2485(para)
msgid ""
"In order to authenticate to a Kerberos Realm, the <application>krb5-"
"user</application> and <application>libpam-krb5</application> packages are "
"needed, along with a few others that are not strictly necessary but make "
"life easier. To install the packages enter the following in a terminal "
"prompt:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:2492(command)
msgid ""
"sudo apt-get install krb5-user libpam-krb5 libpam-ccreds auth-client-config"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:2495(para)
msgid ""
"The <application>auth-client-config</application> package allows simple "
"configuration of PAM for authentication from multiple sources, and the "
"<application>libpam-ccreds</application> will cache authentication "
"credentials allowing you to login in case the Key Distribution Center (KDC) "
"is unavailable. This package is also useful for laptops that may "
"authenticate using Kerberos while on the corporate network, but will need to "
"be accessed off the network as well."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:2506(para)
msgid "To configure the client in a terminal enter:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:2511(command)
msgid "sudo dpkg-reconfigure krb5-config"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:2514(para)
msgid ""
"You will then be prompted to enter the name of the Kerberos Realm. Also, if "
"you don't have DNS configured with Kerberos <emphasis>SRV</emphasis> "
"records, the menu will prompt you for the hostname of the Key Distribution "
"Center (KDC) and Realm Administration server."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:2520(para)
msgid ""
"The <application>dpkg-reconfigure</application> adds entries to the "
"<filename>/etc/krb5.conf</filename> file for your Realm. You should have "
"entries similar to the following:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:2525(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"[libdefaults]\n"
"        default_realm = EXAMPLE.COM\n"
"...\n"
"[realms]\n"
"        EXAMPLE.COM = }                \n"
"                kdc = 192.168.0.1               \n"
"                admin_server = 192.168.0.1\n"
"        }\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:2536(para)
msgid ""
"You can test the configuration by requesting a ticket using the "
"<application>kinit</application> utility. For example:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:2541(command)
msgid "kinit steve@EXAMPLE.COM"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:2542(computeroutput)
#, no-wrap
msgid "Password for steve@EXAMPLE.COM:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:2545(para)
msgid ""
"When a ticket has been granted, the details can be viewed using "
"<application>klist</application>:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:2551(computeroutput)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"Ticket cache: FILE:/tmp/krb5cc_1000\n"
"Default principal: steve@EXAMPLE.COM\n"
"\n"
"Valid starting     Expires            Service principal\n"
"07/24/08 05:18:56  07/24/08 15:18:56  krbtgt/EXAMPLE.COM@EXAMPLE.COM\n"
"        renew until 07/25/08 05:18:57\n"
"\n"
"\n"
"Kerberos 4 ticket cache: /tmp/tkt1000\n"
"klist: You have no tickets cached"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:2563(para)
msgid ""
"Next, use the <application>auth-client-config</application> to configure the "
"<application>libpam-krb5</application> module to request a ticket during "
"login:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:2569(command)
msgid "sudo auth-client-config -a -p kerberos_example"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:2572(para)
msgid ""
"You will should now receive a ticket upon successful login authentication."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:2583(para)
msgid ""
"For more information on Kerberos see the <ulink "
"url=\"http://web.mit.edu/Kerberos/\">MIT Kerberos</ulink> site."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:2588(para)
msgid ""
"The <ulink url=\"https://help.ubuntu.com/community/Kerberos\">Ubuntu Wiki "
"Kerberos</ulink> page has more details."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:2593(para)
msgid ""
"O'Reilly's <ulink "
"url=\"http://oreilly.com/catalog/9780596004033/\">Kerberos: The Definitive "
"Guide</ulink> is a great reference when setting up Kerberos."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:2599(para)
msgid ""
"Also, feel free to stop by the <emphasis>#ubuntu-server</emphasis> IRC "
"channel on <ulink url=\"http://freenode.net/\">Freenode</ulink> if you have "
"Kerberos questions."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:2609(title)
msgid "Kerberos and LDAP"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:2611(para)
msgid ""
"Replicating a Kerberos principal database between two servers can be "
"complicated, and adds an additional user database to your network. "
"Fortunately, MIT Kerberos can be configured to use an "
"<application>LDAP</application> directory as a principal database. This "
"section covers configuring a primary and secondary kerberos server to use "
"<application>OpenLDAP</application> for the principal database."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:2619(title)
msgid "Configuring OpenLDAP"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:2621(para)
msgid ""
"First, the necessary <emphasis>schema</emphasis> needs to be loaded on an "
"<application>OpenLDAP</application> server that has network connectivity to "
"the Primary and Secondary KDCs. The rest of this section assumes that you "
"also have LDAP replication configured between at least two servers. For "
"information on setting up OpenLDAP see <xref linkend=\"openldap-server\"/>."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:2628(para)
msgid ""
"It is also required to configure OpenLDAP for TLS and SSL connections, so "
"that traffic between the KDC and LDAP server is encrypted. See <xref "
"linkend=\"openldap-tls\"/> for details."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:2635(para)
msgid ""
"To load the schema into LDAP, on the LDAP server install the "
"<application>krb5-kdc-ldap</application> package. From a terminal enter:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:2641(command)
msgid "sudo apt-get install krb5-kdc-ldap"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:2646(para)
msgid "Next, extract the <filename>kerberos.schema.gz</filename> file:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:2651(command)
msgid "sudo gzip -d /usr/share/doc/krb5-kdc-ldap/kerberos.schema.gz"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:2652(command)
msgid ""
"sudo cp /usr/share/doc/krb5-kdc-ldap/kerberos.schema /etc/ldap/schema/"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:2658(para)
msgid ""
"The <emphasis>kerberos</emphasis> schema needs to be added to the "
"<emphasis>cn=config</emphasis> tree. The procedure to add a new schema to "
"<application>slapd</application> is also detailed in <xref "
"linkend=\"openldap-configuration\"/>."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:2671(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"include /etc/ldap/schema/core.schema\n"
"include /etc/ldap/schema/collective.schema\n"
"include /etc/ldap/schema/corba.schema\n"
"include /etc/ldap/schema/cosine.schema\n"
"include /etc/ldap/schema/duaconf.schema\n"
"include /etc/ldap/schema/dyngroup.schema\n"
"include /etc/ldap/schema/inetorgperson.schema\n"
"include /etc/ldap/schema/java.schema\n"
"include /etc/ldap/schema/misc.schema\n"
"include /etc/ldap/schema/nis.schema\n"
"include /etc/ldap/schema/openldap.schema\n"
"include /etc/ldap/schema/ppolicy.schema\n"
"include /etc/ldap/schema/kerberos.schema\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:2691(para)
msgid "Create a temporary directory to hold the LDIF files:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:2706(command)
msgid ""
"slapcat -f schema_convert.conf -F /tmp/ldif_output -n0 -s "
"\"cn={12}kerberos,cn=schema,cn=config\" &gt; /tmp/cn=kerberos.ldif"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:2716(para)
msgid ""
"Edit the generated <filename>/tmp/cn\\=kerberos.ldif</filename> file, "
"changing the following attributes:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:2720(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"dn: cn=kerberos,cn=schema,cn=config\n"
"...\n"
"cn: kerberos\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:2726(para)
msgid "And remove the following lines from the end of the file:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:2730(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"structuralObjectClass: olcSchemaConfig\n"
"entryUUID: 18ccd010-746b-102d-9fbe-3760cca765dc\n"
"creatorsName: cn=config\n"
"createTimestamp: 20090111203515Z\n"
"entryCSN: 20090111203515.326445Z#000000#000#000000\n"
"modifiersName: cn=config\n"
"modifyTimestamp: 20090111203515Z\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:2749(para)
msgid "Load the new schema with <application>ldapadd</application>:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:2754(command)
msgid "ldapadd -x -D cn=admin,cn=config -W -f /tmp/cn\\=kerberos.ldif"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:2760(para)
msgid ""
"Add an index for the <emphasis>krb5principalname</emphasis> attribute:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:2765(command) serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:2782(command)
msgid "ldapmodify -x -D cn=admin,cn=config -W"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:2767(userinput)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"dn: olcDatabase={1}hdb,cn=config\n"
"add: olcDbIndex\n"
"olcDbIndex: krbPrincipalName eq,pres,sub"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:2766(computeroutput)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"Enter LDAP Password:\n"
"<placeholder-1/>\n"
"\n"
"modifying entry \"olcDatabase={1}hdb,cn=config\""
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:2777(para)
msgid "Finally, update the Access Control Lists (ACL):"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:2784(userinput)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"dn: olcDatabase={1}hdb,cn=config\n"
"replace: olcAccess\n"
"olcAccess: to attrs=userPassword,shadowLastChange,krbPrincipalKey by "
"dn=\"cn=admin,dc=exampl\n"
" e,dc=com\" write by anonymous auth by self write by * none\n"
"-\n"
"add: olcAccess\n"
"olcAccess: to dn.base=\"\" by * read\n"
"-\n"
"add: olcAccess\n"
"olcAccess: to * by dn=\"cn=admin,dc=example,dc=com\" write by * read"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:2783(computeroutput)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"Enter LDAP Password: \n"
"<placeholder-1/>\n"
"\n"
"modifying entry \"olcDatabase={1}hdb,cn=config\"\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:2804(para)
msgid ""
"That's it, your LDAP directory is now ready to serve as a Kerberos principal "
"database."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:2810(title)
msgid "Primary KDC Configuration"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:2812(para)
msgid ""
"With <application>OpenLDAP</application> configured it is time to configure "
"the KDC."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:2818(para)
msgid "First, install the necessary packages, from a terminal enter:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:2823(command) serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:2980(command)
msgid "sudo apt-get install krb5-kdc krb5-admin-server krb5-kdc-ldap"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:2829(para)
msgid ""
"Now edit <filename>/etc/krb5.conf</filename> adding the following options to "
"under the appropriate sections:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:2833(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"[libdefaults]\n"
"        default_realm = EXAMPLE.COM\n"
"\n"
"...\n"
"\n"
"[realms]\n"
"        EXAMPLE.COM = {\n"
"                kdc = kdc01.example.com\n"
"                kdc = kdc02.example.com\n"
"                admin_server = kdc01.example.com\n"
"                admin_server = kdc02.example.com\n"
"                default_domain = example.com\n"
"                database_module = openldap_ldapconf\n"
"        }\n"
"\n"
"...\n"
"\n"
"[domain_realm]\n"
"        .example.com = EXAMPLE.COM\n"
"\n"
"\n"
"...\n"
"\n"
"[dbdefaults]\n"
"        ldap_kerberos_container_dn = dc=example,dc=com\n"
"\n"
"[dbmodules]\n"
"        openldap_ldapconf = {\n"
"                db_library = kldap\n"
"                ldap_kdc_dn = \"cn=admin,dc=example,dc=com\"\n"
"\n"
"                # this object needs to have read rights on\n"
"                # the realm container, principal container and realm sub-"
"trees\n"
"                ldap_kadmind_dn = \"cn=admin,dc=example,dc=com\"\n"
"\n"
"                # this object needs to have read and write rights on\n"
"                # the realm container, principal container and realm sub-"
"trees\n"
"                ldap_service_password_file = /etc/krb5kdc/service.keyfile\n"
"                ldap_servers = ldaps://ldap01.example.com "
"ldaps://ldap02.example.com\n"
"                ldap_conns_per_server = 5\n"
"        }\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:2878(para)
msgid ""
"Change <emphasis>example.com</emphasis>, "
"<emphasis>dc=example,dc=com</emphasis>, "
"<emphasis>cn=admin,dc=example,dc=com</emphasis>, and "
"<emphasis>ldap01.example.com</emphasis> to the appropriate domain, LDAP "
"object, and LDAP server for your network."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:2887(para)
msgid ""
"Next, use the <application>kdb5_ldap_util</application> utility to create "
"the realm:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:2892(command)
msgid ""
"sudo kdb5_ldap_util -D cn=admin,dc=example,dc=com create -subtrees "
"dc=example,dc=com -r EXAMPLE.COM -s -H ldap://ldap01.example.com"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:2898(para)
msgid ""
"Create a stash of the password used to bind to the LDAP server. This "
"password is used by the <emphasis>ldap_kdc_dn</emphasis> and "
"<emphasis>ldap_kadmin_dn</emphasis> options in "
"<filename>/etc/krb5.conf</filename>:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:2904(command) serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:3042(command)
msgid ""
"sudo kdb5_ldap_util -D cn=admin,dc=example,dc=com stashsrvpw -f "
"/etc/krb5kdc/service.keyfile cn=admin,dc=example,dc=com"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:2910(para)
msgid "Copy the CA certificate from the LDAP server:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:2915(command)
msgid "scp ldap01:/etc/ssl/certs/cacert.pem ."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:2916(command)
msgid "sudo cp cacert.pem /etc/ssl/certs"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:2919(para)
msgid ""
"And edit <filename>/etc/ldap/ldap.conf</filename> to use the certificate:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:2923(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"TLS_CACERT /etc/ssl/certs/cacert.pem\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:2928(para)
msgid ""
"The certificate will also need to be copied to the Secondary KDC, to allow "
"the connection to the LDAP servers using LDAPS."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:2937(para)
msgid ""
"You can now add Kerberos principals to the LDAP database, and they will be "
"copied to any other LDAP servers configured for replication. To add a "
"principal using the <application>kadmin.local</application> utility enter:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:2945(userinput)
#, no-wrap
msgid "addprinc -x dn=\"uid=steve,ou=people,dc=example,dc=com\" steve"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:2944(computeroutput)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"Authenticating as principal root/admin@EXAMPLE.COM with password.\n"
"kadmin.local:  <placeholder-1/>\n"
"WARNING: no policy specified for steve@EXAMPLE.COM; defaulting to no policy\n"
"Enter password for principal \"steve@EXAMPLE.COM\": \n"
"Re-enter password for principal \"steve@EXAMPLE.COM\": \n"
"Principal \"steve@EXAMPLE.COM\" created."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:2952(para)
msgid ""
"There should now be krbPrincipalName, krbPrincipalKey, krbLastPwdChange, and "
"krbExtraData attributes added to the "
"<emphasis>uid=steve,ou=people,dc=example,dc=com</emphasis> user object. Use "
"the <application>kinit</application> and <application>klist</application> "
"utilities to test that the user is indeed issued a ticket."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:2959(para)
msgid ""
"If the user object is already created the <emphasis>-x dn=\"...\"</emphasis> "
"option is needed to add the Kerberos attributes. Otherwise a new "
"<emphasis>principal</emphasis> object will be created in the realm subtree."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:2967(title)
msgid "Secondary KDC Configuration"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:2969(para)
msgid ""
"Configuring a Secondary KDC using the LDAP backend is similar to configuring "
"one using the normal Kerberos database."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:2975(para)
msgid "First, install the necessary packages. In a terminal enter:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:2986(para)
msgid ""
"Next, edit <filename>/etc/krb5.conf</filename> to use the LDAP backend:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:2990(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"[libdefaults]\n"
"        default_realm = EXAMPLE.COM\n"
"\n"
"...\n"
"\n"
"[realms]\n"
"        EXAMPLE.COM = {\n"
"                kdc = kdc01.example.com\n"
"                kdc = kdc02.example.com\n"
"                admin_server = kdc01.example.com\n"
"                admin_server = kdc02.example.com\n"
"                default_domain = example.com\n"
"                database_module = openldap_ldapconf\n"
"        }\n"
"\n"
"...\n"
"\n"
"[domain_realm]\n"
"        .example.com = EXAMPLE.COM\n"
"\n"
"...\n"
"\n"
"[dbdefaults]\n"
"        ldap_kerberos_container_dn = dc=example,dc=com\n"
"\n"
"[dbmodules]\n"
"        openldap_ldapconf = {\n"
"                db_library = kldap\n"
"                ldap_kdc_dn = \"cn=admin,dc=example,dc=com\"\n"
"\n"
"                # this object needs to have read rights on\n"
"                # the realm container, principal container and realm sub-"
"trees\n"
"                ldap_kadmind_dn = \"cn=admin,dc=example,dc=com\"\n"
"\n"
"                # this object needs to have read and write rights on\n"
"                # the realm container, principal container and realm sub-"
"trees\n"
"                ldap_service_password_file = /etc/krb5kdc/service.keyfile\n"
"                ldap_servers = ldaps://ldap01.example.com "
"ldaps://ldap02.example.com\n"
"                ldap_conns_per_server = 5\n"
"        }\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:3037(para)
msgid "Create the stash for the LDAP bind password:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:3048(para)
msgid ""
"Now, on the <emphasis>Primary KDC</emphasis> copy the "
"<filename>/etc/krb5kdc/.k5.EXAMPLE.COM</filename><emphasis>Master "
"Key</emphasis> stash to the Secondary KDC. Be sure to copy the file over an "
"encrypted connection such as <application>scp</application>, or on physical "
"media."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:3055(command)
msgid "sudo scp /etc/krb5kdc/.k5.EXAMPLE.COM steve@kdc02.example.com:~"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:3056(command)
msgid "sudo mv .k5.EXAMPLE.COM /etc/krb5kdc/"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:3060(para)
msgid ""
"Again, replace <emphasis>EXAMPLE.COM</emphasis> with your actual realm."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:3068(para)
msgid "Finally, start the <application>krb5-kdc</application> daemon:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:3079(para)
msgid ""
"You now have redundant KDCs on your network, and with redundant LDAP servers "
"you should be able to continue to authenticate users if one LDAP server, one "
"Kerberos server, or one LDAP and one Kerberos server become unavailable."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:3091(para)
msgid ""
"The <ulink url=\"http://web.mit.edu/Kerberos/krb5-1.6/krb5-1.6.3/doc/krb5-"
"admin.html#Configuring-Kerberos-with-OpenLDAP-back_002dend\"> Kerberos Admin "
"Guide</ulink> has some additional details."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:3097(para)
msgid ""
"For more information on <application>kdb5_ldap_util</application> see <ulink "
"url=\"http://web.mit.edu/Kerberos/krb5-1.6/krb5-1.6.3/doc/krb5-"
"admin.html#Global-Operations-on-the-Kerberos-LDAP-Database\"> Section "
"5.6</ulink> and the <ulink "
"url=\"http://manpages.ubuntu.com/manpages/lucid/en/man8/kdb5_ldap_util.8.html"
"\">kdb5_ldap_util man page</ulink>."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:3105(para)
msgid ""
"Another useful link is the <ulink "
"url=\"http://manpages.ubuntu.com/manpages/lucid/en/man5/krb5.conf.5.html\">kr"
"b5.conf man page</ulink>."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/network-auth.xml:3110(para)
msgid ""
"Also, see the <ulink "
"url=\"https://help.ubuntu.com/community/Kerberos#kerberos-ldap\">Kerberos "
"and LDAP</ulink> Ubuntu wiki page."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/monitoring.xml:13(title)
msgid "Monitoring"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/monitoring.xml:17(para)
msgid ""
"The monitoring of essential servers and services is an important part of "
"system administration. Most network services are monitored for performance, "
"availability, or both. This section will cover installation and "
"configuration of <application>Nagios</application> for availability "
"monitoring, and <application>Munin</application> for performance monitoring."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/monitoring.xml:24(para)
msgid ""
"The examples in this section will use two servers with hostnames "
"<emphasis>server01</emphasis> and <emphasis>server02</emphasis>. "
"<emphasis>Server01</emphasis> will be configured with "
"<application>Nagios</application> to monitor services on itself and "
"<emphasis>server02</emphasis>. Server01 will also be setup with the "
"<application>munin</application> package to gather information from the "
"network. Using the <application>munin-node</application> package, "
"<emphasis>server02</emphasis> will be configured to send information to "
"<emphasis>server01</emphasis>."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/monitoring.xml:33(para)
msgid ""
"Hopefully these simple examples will allow you to monitor additional servers "
"and services on your network."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/monitoring.xml:39(title)
msgid "Nagios"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/monitoring.xml:44(para)
msgid ""
"First, on <emphasis>server01</emphasis> install the "
"<application>nagios</application> package. In a terminal enter:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/monitoring.xml:50(command)
msgid "sudo apt-get install nagios3 nagios-nrpe-plugin"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/monitoring.xml:53(para)
msgid ""
"You will be asked to enter a password for the "
"<emphasis>nagiosadmin</emphasis> user. The user's credentials are stored in "
"<filename>/etc/nagios3/htpasswd.users</filename>. To change the "
"<emphasis>nagiosadmin</emphasis> password, or add additional users to the "
"Nagios CGI scripts, use the <application>htpasswd</application> that is part "
"of the <application>apache2-utils</application> package."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/monitoring.xml:60(para)
msgid ""
"For example, to change the password for the <emphasis>nagiosadmin</emphasis> "
"user enter:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/monitoring.xml:65(command)
msgid "sudo htpasswd /etc/nagios3/htpasswd.users nagiosadmin"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/monitoring.xml:68(para)
msgid "To add a user:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/monitoring.xml:73(command)
msgid "sudo htpasswd /etc/nagios3/htpasswd.users steve"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/monitoring.xml:76(para)
msgid ""
"Next, on <emphasis>server02</emphasis> install the <application>nagios-nrpe-"
"server</application> package. From a terminal on server02 enter:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/monitoring.xml:82(command)
msgid "sudo apt-get install nagios-nrpe-server"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/monitoring.xml:86(para)
msgid ""
"<application>NRPE</application> allows you to execute local checks on remote "
"hosts. There are other ways of accomplishing this through other Nagios "
"plugins as well as other checks."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/monitoring.xml:94(title)
msgid "Configuration Overview"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/monitoring.xml:96(para)
msgid ""
"There are a couple of directories containing "
"<application>Nagios</application> configuration and check files."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/monitoring.xml:102(para)
msgid ""
"<filename>/etc/nagios3</filename>: contains configuration files for the "
"operation of the <application>nagios</application> daemon, CGI files, hosts, "
"etc."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/monitoring.xml:108(para)
msgid ""
"<filename>/etc/nagios-plugins</filename>: houses configuration files for the "
"service checks."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/monitoring.xml:113(para)
msgid ""
"<filename>/etc/nagios</filename>: on the remote host contains the "
"<application>nagios-nrpe-server</application> configuration files."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/monitoring.xml:118(para)
msgid ""
"<filename>/usr/lib/nagios/plugins/</filename>: where the check binaries are "
"stored. To see the options of a check use the <emphasis>-h</emphasis> option."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/monitoring.xml:123(para)
msgid "For example: <command>/usr/lib/nagios/plugins/check_dhcp -h</command>"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/monitoring.xml:129(para)
msgid ""
"There are a plethora of checks <application>Nagios</application> can be "
"configured to execute for any given host. For this example Nagios will be "
"configured to check disk space, DNS, and a MySQL hostgroup. The DNS check "
"will be on <emphasis>server02</emphasis>, and the MySQL hostgroup will "
"include both <emphasis>server01</emphasis> and <emphasis>server02</emphasis>."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/monitoring.xml:136(para)
msgid ""
"See <xref linkend=\"httpd\"/> for details on setting up Apache, <xref "
"linkend=\"dns\"/> for DNS, and <xref linkend=\"mysql\"/> for MySQL."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/monitoring.xml:141(para)
msgid ""
"Additionally, there are some terms that once explained will hopefully make "
"understanding Nagios configuration easier:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/monitoring.xml:147(para)
msgid ""
"<emphasis>Host</emphasis>: a server, workstation, network device, etc that "
"is being monitored."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/monitoring.xml:152(para)
msgid ""
"<emphasis>Host Group</emphasis>: a group of similar hosts. For example, you "
"could group all web servers, file server, etc."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/monitoring.xml:157(para)
msgid ""
"<emphasis>Service</emphasis>: the service being monitored on the host. Such "
"as HTTP, DNS, NFS, etc."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/monitoring.xml:162(para)
msgid ""
"<emphasis>Service Group</emphasis>: allows you to group multiple services "
"together. This is useful for grouping multiple HTTP for example."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/monitoring.xml:168(para)
msgid ""
"<emphasis>Contact</emphasis>: person to be notified when an event takes "
"place. Nagios can be configured to send emails, SMS messages, etc."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/monitoring.xml:174(para)
msgid ""
"By default Nagios is configured to check HTTP, disk space, SSH, current "
"users, processes, and load on the <emphasis>localhost</emphasis>. Nagios "
"will also <application>ping</application> check the "
"<emphasis>gateway</emphasis>."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/monitoring.xml:179(para)
msgid ""
"Large Nagios installations can be quite complex to configure. It is usually "
"best to start small, one or two hosts, get things configured the way you "
"like then expand."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/monitoring.xml:194(para)
msgid ""
"First, create a <emphasis>host</emphasis> configuration file for "
"<emphasis>server02</emphasis>. In a terminal enter:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/monitoring.xml:199(command)
msgid ""
"sudo cp /etc/nagios3/conf.d/localhost_nagios2.cfg "
"/etc/nagios3/conf.d/server02.cfg"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/monitoring.xml:203(para)
msgid ""
"In the above and following command examples, replace "
"<emphasis>\"server01\"</emphasis>, "
"<emphasis>\"server02\"</emphasis><emphasis>172.18.100.100</emphasis>, and "
"<emphasis>172.18.100.101</emphasis> with the host names and IP addresses of "
"your servers."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/monitoring.xml:212(para)
msgid "Next, edit <filename>/etc/nagios3/conf.d/server02.cfg</filename>:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/monitoring.xml:216(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"define host{\n"
"        use                     generic-host            ; Name of host "
"template to use\n"
"        host_name               server02\n"
"        alias                   Server 02\n"
"        address                 172.18.100.101\n"
"}\n"
"\n"
"# check DNS service.\n"
"define service {\n"
"        use                             generic-service\n"
"        host_name                       server02\n"
"        service_description             DNS\n"
"        check_command                   check_dns!172.18.100.101\n"
"}\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/monitoring.xml:236(para)
msgid ""
"Restart the <application>nagios</application> daemon to enable the new "
"configuration:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/monitoring.xml:241(command) serverguide/C/monitoring.xml:308(command) serverguide/C/monitoring.xml:375(command)
msgid "sudo /etc/init.d/nagios3 restart"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/monitoring.xml:251(para)
msgid ""
"Now add a service definition for the MySQL check by adding the following to "
"<filename>/etc/nagios3/conf.d/services_nagios2.cfg</filename>:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/monitoring.xml:255(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"# check MySQL servers.\n"
"define service {\n"
"        hostgroup_name                  mysql-servers\n"
"        service_description             MySQL\n"
"        check_command                   "
"check_mysql_cmdlinecred!nagios!secret!$HOSTADDRESS\n"
"        use                             generic-service\n"
"        notification_interval           0 ; set &gt; 0 if you want to be "
"renotified\n"
"}\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/monitoring.xml:269(para)
msgid ""
"A <emphasis>mysqsl-servers</emphasis> hostgroup now needs to be defined. "
"Edit <filename>/etc/nagios3/conf.d/hostgroups_nagios2.cfg</filename> adding:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/monitoring.xml:274(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"# MySQL hostgroup.\n"
"define hostgroup {\n"
"        hostgroup_name  mysql-servers\n"
"                alias           MySQL servers\n"
"                members         localhost, server02\n"
"        }\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/monitoring.xml:286(para)
msgid ""
"The Nagios check needs to authenticate to MySQL. To add a "
"<emphasis>nagios</emphasis> user to MySQL enter:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/monitoring.xml:291(command)
msgid "mysql -u root -p -e \"create user nagios identified by 'secret';\""
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/monitoring.xml:295(para)
msgid ""
"The <emphasis>nagios</emphasis> user will need to be added all hosts in the "
"<emphasis>mysql-servers</emphasis> hostgroup."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/monitoring.xml:303(para)
msgid ""
"Restart <application>nagios</application> to start checking the MySQL "
"servers."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/monitoring.xml:318(para)
msgid ""
"Lastly configure NRPE to check the disk space on "
"<emphasis>server02</emphasis>."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/monitoring.xml:322(para)
msgid ""
"On <emphasis>server01</emphasis> add the service check to "
"<filename>/etc/nagios3/conf.d/server02.cfg</filename>:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/monitoring.xml:327(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"# NRPE disk check.\n"
"define service {\n"
"        use                             generic-service\n"
"        host_name                       server02\n"
"        service_description             nrpe-disk\n"
"        check_command                   "
"check_nrpe_1arg!check_all_disks!172.18.100.101\n"
"}\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/monitoring.xml:340(para)
msgid ""
"Now on <emphasis>server02</emphasis> edit "
"<filename>/etc/nagios/nrpe.cfg</filename> changing:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/monitoring.xml:344(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"allowed_hosts=172.18.100.100\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/monitoring.xml:348(para)
msgid "And below in the command definition area add:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/monitoring.xml:352(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"command[check_all_disks]=/usr/lib/nagios/plugins/check_disk -w 20% -c 10% -"
"e\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/monitoring.xml:359(para)
msgid "Finally, restart <application>nagios-nrpe-server</application>:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/monitoring.xml:364(command)
msgid "sudo /etc/init.d/nagios-nrpe-server restart"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/monitoring.xml:370(para)
msgid ""
"Also, on <emphasis>server01</emphasis> restart "
"<application>nagios</application>:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/monitoring.xml:383(para)
msgid ""
"You should now be able to see the host and service checks in the Nagios CGI "
"files. To access them point a browser to http://server01/nagios3. You will "
"then be prompted for the <emphasis>nagiosadmin</emphasis> username and "
"password."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/monitoring.xml:393(para)
msgid ""
"This section has just scratched the surface of Nagios' features. The "
"<application>nagios-plugins-extra</application> and <application>nagios-snmp-"
"plugins</application> contain many more service checks."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/monitoring.xml:400(para)
msgid ""
"For more information see <ulink "
"url=\"http://www.nagios.org/\">Nagios</ulink> website."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/monitoring.xml:405(para)
msgid ""
"Specifically the <ulink "
"url=\"http://nagios.sourceforge.net/docs/3_0/\">Online Documentation</ulink> "
"site."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/monitoring.xml:410(para)
msgid ""
"There is also a list of <ulink "
"url=\"http://www.nagios.org/propaganda/books/\">books</ulink> related to "
"Nagios and network monitoring:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/monitoring.xml:416(para)
msgid ""
"The <ulink url=\"https://help.ubuntu.com/community/Nagios\">Nagios Ubuntu "
"Wiki</ulink> page also has more details."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/monitoring.xml:425(title)
msgid "Munin"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/monitoring.xml:430(para)
msgid ""
"Before installing <application>Munin</application> on "
"<emphasis>server01</emphasis><application>apache2</application> will need to "
"be installed. The default configuration is fine for running a "
"<application>munin</application> server. For more information see <xref "
"linkend=\"httpd\"/>."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/monitoring.xml:436(para)
msgid ""
"First, on <emphasis>server01</emphasis> install "
"<application>munin</application>. In a terminal enter:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/monitoring.xml:441(command)
msgid "sudo apt-get install munin"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/monitoring.xml:444(para)
msgid ""
"Now on <emphasis>server02</emphasis> install the <application>munin-"
"node</application> package:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/monitoring.xml:449(command)
msgid "sudo apt-get install munin-node"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/monitoring.xml:456(para)
msgid ""
"On <emphasis>server01</emphasis> edit the "
"<filename>/etc/munin/munin.conf</filename> adding the IP address for "
"<emphasis>server02</emphasis>:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/monitoring.xml:461(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"## First our \"normal\" host.\n"
"[server02]\n"
"       address 172.18.100.101\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/monitoring.xml:468(para)
msgid ""
"Replace <emphasis>server02</emphasis> and "
"<emphasis>172.18.100.101</emphasis> with the actual hostname and IP address "
"for your server."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/monitoring.xml:474(para)
msgid ""
"Next, configure <application>munin-node</application> on "
"<emphasis>server02</emphasis>. Edit <filename>/etc/munin/munin-"
"node.conf</filename> to allow access by <emphasis>server01</emphasis>:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/monitoring.xml:479(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"allow ^172\\.18\\.100\\.100$\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/monitoring.xml:484(para)
msgid ""
"Replace <emphasis>^172\\.18\\.100\\.100$</emphasis> with IP address for your "
"<application>munin</application> server."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/monitoring.xml:489(para)
msgid ""
"Now restart <application>munin-node</application> on "
"<emphasis>server02</emphasis> for the changes to take effect:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/monitoring.xml:494(command)
msgid "sudo /etc/init.d/munin-node restart"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/monitoring.xml:497(para)
msgid ""
"Finally, in a browser go to <emphasis>http://server01/munin</emphasis>, and "
"you should see links to nice graphs displaying information from the standard "
"<emphasis>munin-plugins</emphasis> for disk, network, processes, and system."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/monitoring.xml:503(para)
msgid ""
"Since this is a new install it may take some time for the graphs to display "
"anything useful."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/monitoring.xml:510(title)
msgid "Additional Plugins"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/monitoring.xml:512(para)
msgid ""
"The <application>munin-plugins-extra</application> package contains "
"performance checks additional services such as DNS, DHCP, Samba, etc. To "
"install the package, from a terminal enter:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/monitoring.xml:518(command)
msgid "sudo apt-get install munin-plugins-extra"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/monitoring.xml:521(para)
msgid "Be sure to install the package on both the server and node machines."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/monitoring.xml:531(para)
msgid ""
"See the <ulink url=\"http://munin.projects.linpro.no/\">Munin</ulink> "
"website for more details."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/monitoring.xml:536(para)
msgid ""
"Specifically the <ulink "
"url=\"http://munin.projects.linpro.no/wiki/Documentation\">Munin "
"Documentation</ulink> page includes information on additional plugins, "
"writing plugins, etc."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/monitoring.xml:542(para)
msgid ""
"Also, there is a book in German by Open Source Press: <ulink "
"url=\"https://www.opensourcepress.de/index.php?26&amp;backPID=178&amp;tt_prod"
"ucts=152\">Munin Graphisches Netzwerk- und System-Monitoring</ulink>."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/monitoring.xml:548(para)
msgid ""
"Another resource is the <ulink "
"url=\"https://help.ubuntu.com/community/Munin\">Munin Ubuntu Wiki</ulink> "
"page."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:13(title)
msgid "Email Services"
msgstr "이메일 서비스"

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:14(para)
msgid ""
"The process of getting an email from one person to another over a network or "
"the Internet involves many systems working together. Each of these systems "
"must be correctly configured for the process to work. The sender uses a "
"<emphasis>Mail User Agent</emphasis> (MUA), or email client, to send the "
"message through one or more <emphasis>Mail Transfer Agents</emphasis> (MTA), "
"the last of which will hand it off to a <emphasis>Mail Delivery "
"Agent</emphasis> (MDA) for delivery to the recipient's mailbox, from which "
"it will be retrieved by the recipient's email client, usually via a POP3 or "
"IMAP server."
msgstr ""
"네트워크 또는 인터넷 상에서 한 사람에서 부터 다른 사람으로 이메일을 가지는 과정은 많은 시스템이 함께 동작하는 것과 관련 됩니다. "
"각각의 시스템은 과정이 동작하기 위하여 반드시 올바르게 설정되어야 합니다. 보내는 사람은 <emphasis>Mail User "
"Agent</emphasis> (MUA) 또는 이메일 클라이언트를 사용하고, 메세지를 보내기 위하여 하나 또는 여러 개의 "
"<emphasis>Mail Transfer Agents</emphasis> (MTA) 를 통과하며, 마지막으로, 받는 사람의 메일박스에 "
"배달을 하기 위하여 <emphasis>Mail Delivery Agent</emphasis> (MDA) 를 거치게 됩니다. 그리고, "
"메일은 보통 POP3 또는 IMAP 서버를 통하여 받는 사람의 이메일 클라이언트에 의해 읽혀지게 됩니다."

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:24(title) serverguide/C/mail.xml:832(application) serverguide/C/mail.xml:866(title) serverguide/C/mail.xml:944(title) serverguide/C/mail.xml:1510(title)
msgid "Postfix"
msgstr "Postfix"

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:25(para)
msgid ""
"<application>Postfix</application> is the default Mail Transfer Agent (MTA) "
"in Ubuntu. It attempts to be fast and easy to administer and secure. It is "
"compatible with the MTA <application>sendmail</application>. This section "
"explains how to install and configure <application>postfix</application>. It "
"also explains how to set it up as an SMTP server using a secure connection "
"(for sending emails securely)."
msgstr ""
"<application>Postfix</application> 는 우분투에서 기본 설정된 Mail Transfer Agent (MTA) "
"입니다. 이것은 빠르고 관리와 보안을 하기가 수월 합니다. 그리고 MTA 인 "
"<application>sendmail</application> 과 호환이 됩니다. 이 영역은 "
"<application>postfix</application> 를 어떻게 설치하고 설정하는 지를 설명 합니다. 또한 그것을 보안 연결을 "
"(안전하게 이메일을 보내기 위한) 사용하는 SMTP 서버로서 어떻게 만드는 지를 설명 합니다."

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:34(para)
msgid ""
"This guide does not cover setting up Postfix <emphasis>Virtual "
"Domains</emphasis>, for information on Virtual Domains and other advanced "
"configurations see <xref linkend=\"postfix-references\"/>."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:41(para)
msgid ""
"To install <application>postfix</application> run the following command:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:47(para)
msgid ""
"Simply press return when the installation process asks questions, the "
"configuration will be done in greater detail in the next stage."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:52(title)
msgid "Basic Configuration"
msgstr "기본적인 설정"

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:53(para)
msgid ""
"To configure <application>postfix</application>, run the following command:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:57(command)
msgid "sudo dpkg-reconfigure postfix"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:63(para)
msgid "Internet Site"
msgstr "Internet Site"

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:64(para)
msgid "mail.example.com"
msgstr "mail.example.com"

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:65(para)
msgid "steve"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:66(para)
msgid "mail.example.com, localhost.localdomain, localhost"
msgstr "mail.example.com, localhost.localdomain, localhost"

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:67(para)
msgid "No"
msgstr "No"

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:68(para)
msgid "127.0.0.0/8 [::ffff:127.0.0.0]/104 [::1]/128 192.168.0.0/24"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:69(para)
msgid "0"
msgstr "0"

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:70(para)
msgid "+"
msgstr "+"

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:71(para)
msgid "all"
msgstr "all"

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:59(para)
msgid ""
"The user interface will be displayed. On each screen, select the following "
"values: <placeholder-1/>"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:75(para)
msgid ""
"Replace mail.example.com with the domain for which you'll accept email, "
"192.168.0.0/24 with the actual network and class range of your mail server, "
"and steve with the appropriate username."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:81(para)
msgid ""
"Now is a good time to decide which mailbox format you want to use. By "
"default Postfix will use <emphasis role=\"strong\">mbox</emphasis> for the "
"mailbox format. Rather than editing the configuration file directly, you can "
"use the <command>postconf</command> command to configure all "
"<application>postfix</application> parameters. The configuration parameters "
"will be stored in <filename>/etc/postfix/main.cf</filename> file. Later if "
"you wish to re-configure a particular parameter, you can either run the "
"command or change it manually in the file."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:92(para)
msgid ""
"To configure the mailbox format for <emphasis "
"role=\"strong\">Maildir:</emphasis>"
msgstr "<emphasis role=\"strong\">Maildir</emphasis> 형식의 메일박스를 사용하도록 설정하려면:"

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:97(command)
msgid "sudo postconf -e 'home_mailbox = Maildir/'"
msgstr "sudo postconf -e 'home_mailbox = Maildir/'"

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:100(para)
msgid ""
"This will place new mail in /home/<emphasis "
"role=\"italic\">username</emphasis>/Maildir so you will need to configure "
"your Mail Delivery Agent (MDA) to use the same path."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:108(title) serverguide/C/mail.xml:556(title)
msgid "SMTP Authentication"
msgstr "SMTP 인증"

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:110(para)
msgid ""
"SMTP-AUTH allows a client to identify itself through an authentication "
"mechanism (SASL). Transport Layer Security (TLS) should be used to encrypt "
"the authentication process. Once authenticated the SMTP server will allow "
"the client to relay mail."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:117(para)
msgid "Configure Postfix for SMTP-AUTH using SASL (Dovecot SASL):"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:120(screen)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"sudo postconf -e 'smtpd_sasl_type = dovecot'\n"
"sudo postconf -e 'smtpd_sasl_path = private/auth-client'\n"
"sudo postconf -e 'smtpd_sasl_local_domain ='\n"
"sudo postconf -e 'smtpd_sasl_security_options = noanonymous'\n"
"sudo postconf -e 'broken_sasl_auth_clients = yes'\n"
"sudo postconf -e 'smtpd_sasl_auth_enable = yes'\n"
"sudo postconf -e 'smtpd_recipient_restrictions = "
"permit_sasl_authenticated,permit_mynetworks,reject_unauth_destination'\n"
"sudo postconf -e 'inet_interfaces = all'\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:131(para)
msgid ""
"The <emphasis>smtpd_sasl_path</emphasis> configuration is a path relative to "
"the Postfix queue directory."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:137(para)
msgid ""
"Next, obtain a digital certificate for TLS. See <xref linkend=\"certificates-"
"and-security\"/> for details. This example also uses a Certificate Authority "
"(CA). For information on generating a CA certificate see <xref "
"linkend=\"certificate-authority\"/>."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:143(para)
msgid ""
"You can get the digital certificate from a certificate authority. But unlike "
"web clients, SMTP clients rarely complain about \"self-signed "
"certificates\", so alternatively, you can create the certificate yourself. "
"Refer to <xref linkend=\"creating-a-self-signed-certificate\"/> for more "
"details."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:155(para)
msgid ""
"Once you have a certificate, configure Postfix to provide TLS encryption for "
"both incoming and outgoing mail:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:158(screen)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"sudo postconf -e 'smtpd_tls_auth_only = no'\n"
"sudo postconf -e 'smtp_use_tls = yes'\n"
"sudo postconf -e 'smtpd_use_tls = yes'\n"
"sudo postconf -e 'smtp_tls_note_starttls_offer = yes'\n"
"sudo postconf -e 'smtpd_tls_key_file = /etc/ssl/private/server.key'\n"
"sudo postconf -e 'smtpd_tls_cert_file = /etc/ssl/certs/server.crt'\n"
"sudo postconf -e 'smtpd_tls_loglevel = 1'\n"
"sudo postconf -e 'smtpd_tls_received_header = yes'\n"
"sudo postconf -e 'smtpd_tls_session_cache_timeout = 3600s'\n"
"sudo postconf -e 'tls_random_source = dev:/dev/urandom'\n"
"sudo postconf -e 'myhostname = mail.example.com'\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:173(para)
msgid ""
"If you are using your own <emphasis>Certificate Authority</emphasis> to sign "
"the certificate enter:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:177(command)
msgid "sudo postconf -e 'smtpd_tls_CAfile = /etc/ssl/certs/cacert.pem'"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:180(para)
msgid ""
"Again, for more details about certificates see <xref linkend=\"certificates-"
"and-security\"/>."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:186(para)
msgid ""
"After running all the commands, <application>Postfix</application> is "
"configured for SMTP-AUTH and a self-signed certificate has been created for "
"TLS encryption."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:191(para)
msgid ""
"Now, the file <filename>/etc/postfix/main.cf</filename> should look like "
"<ulink url=\"../sample/postfix_configuration\">this</ulink>."
msgstr ""
"이때 <filename>/etc/postfix/main.cf</filename>와 <ulink "
"url=\"../sample/postfix_configuration\">this</ulink>이 같아보여야 합니다."

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:195(para)
msgid ""
"The postfix initial configuration is complete. Run the following command to "
"restart the postfix daemon:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:201(command) serverguide/C/mail.xml:315(command) serverguide/C/mail.xml:378(command) serverguide/C/mail.xml:984(command) serverguide/C/mail.xml:1561(command)
msgid "sudo /etc/init.d/postfix restart"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:204(para)
msgid ""
"<application>Postfix</application> supports SMTP-AUTH as defined in <ulink "
"url=\"ftp://ftp.isi.edu/in-notes/rfc2554.txt\">RFC2554</ulink>. It is based "
"on <ulink url=\"ftp://ftp.isi.edu/in-notes/rfc2222.txt\">SASL</ulink>. "
"However it is still necessary to set up SASL authentication before you can "
"use SMTP-AUTH."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:214(title) serverguide/C/mail.xml:609(title)
msgid "Configuring SASL"
msgstr "SASL 설정하기"

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:215(para)
msgid ""
"Postfix supports two SASL implementations Cyrus SASL and Dovecot SASL. To "
"enable Dovecot SASL the <application>dovecot-common</application> package "
"will need to be installed. From a terminal prompt enter the following:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:221(command)
msgid "sudo apt-get install dovecot-common"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:223(para)
msgid ""
"Next you will need to edit <filename>/etc/dovecot/dovecot.conf</filename>. "
"In the <emphasis>auth default</emphasis> section uncomment the "
"<emphasis>socket listen</emphasis> option and change the following:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:227(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"  socket listen {\n"
"    #master {\n"
"      # Master socket provides access to userdb information. It's typically\n"
"      # used to give Dovecot's local delivery agent access to userdb so it\n"
"      # can find mailbox locations.\n"
"      #path = /var/run/dovecot/auth-master\n"
"      #mode = 0600\n"
"      # Default user/group is the one who started dovecot-auth (root)\n"
"      #user = \n"
"      #group = \n"
"    #}\n"
"    client {\n"
"      # The client socket is generally safe to export to everyone. Typical "
"use\n"
"      # is to export it to your SMTP server so it can do SMTP AUTH lookups\n"
"      # using it.\n"
"      path = /var/spool/postfix/private/auth-client\n"
"      mode = 0660\n"
"      user = postfix\n"
"      group = postfix\n"
"    }\n"
"  }\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:251(para)
msgid ""
"In order to let <application>Outlook</application> clients use SMTPAUTH, in "
"the <emphasis>auth default</emphasis> section of /etc/dovecot/dovecot.conf "
"add <emphasis>\"login\"</emphasis>:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:256(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"  mechanisms = plain login\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:260(para)
msgid ""
"Once you have <application>Dovecot</application> configured restart it with:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:264(command) serverguide/C/mail.xml:735(command)
msgid "sudo /etc/init.d/dovecot restart"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:269(title)
msgid "Postfix-Dovecot"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:271(para)
msgid ""
"Another option for configuring <application>Postfix</application> for SMTP-"
"AUTH is using the <application>dovecot-postfix</application> package. This "
"package will install <application>Dovecot</application> and configure "
"<application>Postfix</application> to use it for both SASL authentication "
"and as a Mail Delivery Agent (MDA). The package also configures "
"<application>Dovecot</application> for IMAP, IMAPS, POP3, and POP3S."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:280(para)
msgid ""
"You may or may not want to run IMAP, IMAPS, POP3, or POP3S on your mail "
"server. For example, if you are configuring your server to be a mail "
"gateway, spam/virus filter, etc. If this is the case it may be easier to use "
"the above commands to configure Postfix for SMTPAUTH."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:287(para)
msgid "To install the package, from a terminal prompt enter:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:292(command)
msgid "sudo apt-get install dovecot-postfix"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:295(para)
msgid ""
"You should now have a working mail server, but there are a few options that "
"you may wish to further customize. For example, the package uses the "
"certificate and key from the <application>ssl-cert</application> package, "
"and in a production environment you should use a certificate and key "
"generated for the host. See <xref linkend=\"certificates-and-security\"/> "
"for more details."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:301(para)
msgid ""
"Once you have a customized certificate and key for the host, change the "
"following options in <filename>/etc/postfix/main.cf</filename>:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:305(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"smtpd_tls_cert_file = /etc/ssl/certs/ssl-mail.pem\n"
"smtpd_tls_key_file = /etc/ssl/private/ssl-mail.key\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:310(para)
msgid "Then restart Postfix:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:321(para)
msgid ""
"SMTP-AUTH configuration is complete. Now it is time to test the setup."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:324(para)
msgid "To see if SMTP-AUTH and TLS work properly, run the following command:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:329(command)
msgid "telnet mail.example.com 25"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:331(para)
msgid ""
"After you have established the connection to the postfix mail server, type:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:335(screen)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"ehlo mail.example.com\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:338(para)
msgid ""
"If you see the following lines among others, then everything is working "
"perfectly. Type <command>quit</command> to exit."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:342(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"250-STARTTLS\n"
"250-AUTH LOGIN PLAIN\n"
"250-AUTH=LOGIN PLAIN\n"
"250 8BITMIME\n"
msgstr ""
"\n"
"250-STARTTLS\n"
"250-AUTH LOGIN PLAIN\n"
"250-AUTH=LOGIN PLAIN\n"
"250 8BITMIME\n"

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:352(para)
msgid ""
"This section introduces some common ways to determine the cause if problems "
"arise."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:356(title)
msgid "Escaping chroot"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:357(para)
msgid ""
"The Ubuntu <application>postfix</application> package will by default "
"install into a <emphasis>chroot</emphasis> environment for security reasons. "
"This can add greater complexity when troubleshooting problems."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:361(para)
msgid ""
"To turn off the chroot operation locate for the following line in the "
"<filename>/etc/postfix/master.cf</filename> configuration file:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:365(screen)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"smtp      inet  n       -       -       -       -       smtpd\n"
msgstr ""
"\n"
"smtp      inet  n       -       -       -       -       smtpd\n"

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:368(para)
msgid "and modify it as follows:"
msgstr "이를 다음과 같이 수정합니다:"

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:371(screen)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"smtp      inet  n       -       n       -       -       smtpd\n"
msgstr ""
"\n"
"smtp      inet  n       -       n       -       -       smtpd\n"

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:374(para)
msgid ""
"You will then need to restart Postfix to use the new configuration. From a "
"terminal prompt enter:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:382(title)
msgid "Log Files"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:383(para)
msgid ""
"<application>Postfix</application> sends all log messages to "
"<filename>/var/log/mail.log</filename>. However error and warning messages "
"can sometimes get lost in the normal log output so they are also logged to "
"<filename>/var/log/mail.err</filename> and "
"<filename>/var/log/mail.warn</filename> respectively."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:388(para)
msgid ""
"To see messages entered into the logs in real time you can use the "
"<application>tail -f</application> command:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:393(command)
msgid "tail -f /var/log/mail.err"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:395(para)
msgid ""
"The amount of detail that is recorded in the logs can be increased. Below "
"are some configuration options for increasing the log level for some of the "
"areas covered above."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:401(para)
msgid ""
"To increase <emphasis>TLS</emphasis> activity logging set the "
"<emphasis>smtpd_tls_loglevel</emphasis> option to a value from 1 to 4."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:405(command)
msgid "sudo postconf -e 'smtpd_tls_loglevel = 4'"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:409(para)
msgid ""
"If you are having trouble sending or receiving mail from a specific domain "
"you can add the domain to the <emphasis>debug_peer_list</emphasis> parameter."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:414(command)
msgid "sudo postconf -e 'debug_peer_list = problem.domain'"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:418(para)
msgid ""
"You can increase the verbosity of any <application>Postfix</application> "
"daemon process by editing the <filename>/etc/postfix/master.cf</filename> "
"and adding a <emphasis>-v</emphasis> after the entry. For example edit the "
"<emphasis>smtp</emphasis> entry:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:422(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"smtp      unix  -       -       -       -       -       smtp -v\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:428(para)
msgid ""
"It is important to note that after making one of the logging changes above "
"the <application>Postfix</application> process will need to be reloaded in "
"order to recognize the new configuration: <command>sudo /etc/init.d/postfix "
"reload</command>"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:435(para)
msgid ""
"To increase the amount of information logged when troubleshooting "
"<emphasis>SASL</emphasis> issues you can set the following options in "
"<filename>/etc/dovecot/dovecot.conf</filename>"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:439(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"auth_debug=yes\n"
"auth_debug_passwords=yes\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:446(para)
msgid ""
"Just like <application>Postfix</application> if you change a "
"<application>Dovecot</application> configuration the process will need to be "
"reloaded: <command>sudo /etc/init.d/dovecot reload</command>."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:452(para)
msgid ""
"Some of the options above can drastically increase the amount of information "
"sent to the log files. Remember to return the log level back to normal after "
"you have corrected the problem. Then reload the appropriate daemon for the "
"new configuration to take affect."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:460(para)
msgid ""
"Administering a <application>Postfix</application> server can be a very "
"complicated task. At some point you may need to turn to the Ubuntu community "
"for more experienced help."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:464(para)
msgid ""
"A great place to ask for <application>Postfix</application> assistance, and "
"get involved with the Ubuntu Server community, is the <emphasis>#ubuntu-"
"server</emphasis> IRC channel on <ulink "
"url=\"http://freenode.net\">freenode</ulink>. You can also post a message to "
"one of the <ulink "
"url=\"http://www.ubuntu.com/support/community/webforums\">Web Forums</ulink>."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:469(para)
msgid ""
"For in depth <application>Postfix</application> information Ubuntu "
"developers highly recommend: <ulink url=\"http://www.postfix-book.com/\">The "
"Book of Postfix</ulink>."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:473(para)
msgid ""
"Finally, the <ulink "
"url=\"http://www.postfix.org/documentation.html\">Postfix</ulink> website "
"also has great documentation on all the different configuration options "
"available."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:477(para)
msgid ""
"Also, the <ulink url=\"https://help.ubuntu.com/community/Postfix\">Ubuntu "
"Wiki Postifx</ulink> page has more information."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:485(title) serverguide/C/mail.xml:872(title) serverguide/C/mail.xml:988(title)
msgid "Exim4"
msgstr "Exim4"

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:486(para)
msgid ""
"<application>Exim4</application> is another Message Transfer Agent (MTA) "
"developed at the University of Cambridge for use on Unix systems connected "
"to the Internet. Exim can be installed in place of "
"<application>sendmail</application>, although the configuration of "
"<application>exim</application> is quite different to that of "
"<application>sendmail</application>."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:497(para)
msgid ""
"To install <application>exim4</application>, run the following command: "
"<screen>\n"
"<command>sudo apt-get install exim4</command>\n"
"</screen>"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:506(para)
msgid ""
"To configure <application>Exim4</application>, run the following command:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:510(command)
msgid "sudo dpkg-reconfigure exim4-config"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:512(para)
msgid ""
"The user interface will be displayed. The user interface lets you configure "
"many parameters. For example, In <application>Exim4</application> the "
"configuration files are split among multiple files. If you wish to have them "
"in one file you can configure accordingly in this user interface."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:520(para)
msgid ""
"All the parameters you configure in the user interface are stored in "
"<filename>/etc/exim4/update-exim4.conf.conf</filename> file. If you wish to "
"re-configure, either you re-run the configuration wizard or manually edit "
"this file using your favorite editor. Once you configure, you can run the "
"following command to generate the master configuration file:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:531(command) serverguide/C/mail.xml:604(command)
msgid "sudo update-exim4.conf"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:533(para)
msgid ""
"The master configuration file, is generated and it is stored in "
"<filename>/var/lib/exim4/config.autogenerated</filename>."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:539(para)
msgid ""
"At any time, you should not edit the master configuration file, "
"<filename>/var/lib/exim4/config.autogenerated</filename> manually. It is "
"updated automatically every time you run <command>update-exim4.conf</command>"
msgstr ""
"언제든, 여러분은 주 설정 파일, <filename>/var/lib/exim4/config.autogenerated</filename>을 "
"수작업으로 편집하지 않습니다. 그것은 <command>update-exim4.conf</command>를 실행할 때마다 자동적으로 "
"업데이트 됩니다."

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:547(para)
msgid ""
"You can run the following command to start <application>Exim4</application> "
"daemon."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:552(command) serverguide/C/mail.xml:994(command)
msgid "sudo /etc/init.d/exim4 start"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:557(para)
msgid ""
"This section covers configuring Exim4 to use SMTP-AUTH with TLS and SASL."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:560(para)
msgid ""
"The first step is to create a certificate for use with TLS. Enter the "
"following into a terminal prompt:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:564(command)
msgid "sudo /usr/share/doc/exim4-base/examples/exim-gencert"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:566(para)
msgid ""
"Now Exim4 needs to be configured for TLS by editing "
"<filename>/etc/exim4/conf.d/main/03_exim4-config_tlsoptions</filename> add "
"the following:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:570(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"MAIN_TLS_ENABLE = yes\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:573(para)
msgid ""
"Next you need to configure <application>Exim4</application> to use the "
"<application>saslauthd</application> for authentication. Edit "
"<filename>/etc/exim4/conf.d/auth/30_exim4-config_examples</filename> and "
"uncomment the <emphasis>plain_saslauthd_server</emphasis> and "
"<emphasis>login_saslauthd_server</emphasis> sections:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:578(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
" plain_saslauthd_server:\n"
"   driver = plaintext\n"
"   public_name = PLAIN\n"
"   server_condition = ${if saslauthd{{$auth2}{$auth3}}{1}{0}}\n"
"   server_set_id = $auth2\n"
"   server_prompts = :\n"
"   .ifndef AUTH_SERVER_ALLOW_NOTLS_PASSWORDS\n"
"   server_advertise_condition = ${if eq{$tls_cipher}{}{}{*}}\n"
"   .endif\n"
"#\n"
" login_saslauthd_server:\n"
"   driver = plaintext\n"
"   public_name = LOGIN\n"
"   server_prompts = \"Username:: : Password::\"\n"
"   # don't send system passwords over unencrypted connections\n"
"   server_condition = ${if saslauthd{{$auth1}{$auth2}}{1}{0}}\n"
"   server_set_id = $auth1\n"
"   .ifndef AUTH_SERVER_ALLOW_NOTLS_PASSWORDS\n"
"   server_advertise_condition = ${if eq{$tls_cipher}{}{}{*}}\n"
"   .endif\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:600(para)
msgid "Finally, update the Exim4 configuration and restart the service:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:605(command)
msgid "sudo /etc/init.d/exim4 restart"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:610(para)
msgid ""
"This section provides details on configuring the saslauthd to provide "
"authentication for <application>Exim4</application>."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:613(para)
msgid ""
"The first step is to install the sasl2-bin package. From a terminal prompt "
"enter the following:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:617(command)
msgid "sudo apt-get install sasl2-bin"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:619(para)
msgid ""
"To configure saslauthd edit the /etc/default/saslauthd configuration file "
"and set START=no to:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:622(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"START=yes\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:625(para)
msgid ""
"Next the <emphasis>Debian-exim</emphasis> user needs to be part of the "
"<emphasis>sasl</emphasis> group in order for Exim4 to use the saslauthd "
"service:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:630(command)
msgid "sudo adduser Debian-exim sasl"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:632(para)
msgid "Now start the <application>saslauthd</application> service:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:636(command)
msgid "sudo /etc/init.d/saslauthd start"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:638(para)
msgid ""
"<application>Exim4</application> is now configured with SMTP-AUTH using TLS "
"and SASL authentication."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:647(para)
msgid ""
"See <ulink url=\"http://www.exim.org/\">exim.org</ulink> for more "
"information."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:652(para)
msgid ""
"There is also an <ulink url=\"http://www.uit.co.uk/content/exim-smtp-mail-"
"server\">Exim4 Book</ulink> available."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:657(para)
msgid ""
"Another resource is the <ulink "
"url=\"https://help.ubuntu.com/community/Exim4\">Exim4 Ubuntu Wiki </ulink> "
"page."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:666(title)
msgid "Dovecot Server"
msgstr "Dovecot 서버"

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:667(para)
msgid ""
"<application>Dovecot</application> is a Mail Delivery Agent, written with "
"security primarily in mind. It supports the major mailbox formats: mbox or "
"Maildir. This section explain how to set it up as an imap or pop3 server."
msgstr ""
"<application>Dovecot</application> 은 보안 우선을 염두에 두고 쓰여진 Mail Delivery Agent "
"입니다. 이것은 mbox 와 Maildir 같은 주요 메일박스 형식을 지원 합니다. 이 영역은 imap 또는 pop3 서버로서 "
"Dovecot을 어떻게 설정하는 지를 설명 합니다."

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:675(para)
msgid ""
"To install <application>dovecot</application>, run the following command in "
"the command prompt:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:680(command)
msgid "sudo apt-get install dovecot-imapd dovecot-pop3d"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:685(para)
msgid ""
"To configure <application>dovecot</application>, you can edit the file "
"<filename>/etc/dovecot/dovecot.conf</filename>. You can choose the protocol "
"you use. It could be pop3, pop3s (pop3 secure), imap and imaps (imap "
"secure). A description of these protocols is beyond the scope of this guide. "
"For further information, refer to the Wikipedia articles on <ulink "
"url=\"http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/POP3\">POP3</ulink> and <ulink "
"url=\"http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Internet_Message_Access_Protocol\">IMAP</u"
"link>."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:695(para)
msgid ""
"IMAPS and POP3S are more secure that the simple IMAP and POP3 because they "
"use SSL encryption to connect. Once you have chosen the protocol, amend the "
"following line in the file <filename>/etc/dovecot/dovecot.conf</filename>:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:701(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"protocols = pop3 pop3s imap imaps\n"
msgstr ""
"\n"
"protocols = pop3 pop3s imap imaps\n"

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:704(para)
msgid ""
"Next, choose the mailbox you would like to use. "
"<application>Dovecot</application> supports <emphasis "
"role=\"strong\">maildir</emphasis> and <emphasis "
"role=\"strong\">mbox</emphasis> formats. These are the most commonly used "
"mailbox formats. They both have their own benefits and are discussed on "
"<ulink url=\"http://wiki.dovecot.org/MailboxFormat\">the Dovecot web "
"site</ulink>."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:712(para)
msgid ""
"Once you have chosen your mailbox type, edit the file "
"<filename>/etc/dovecot/dovecot.conf</filename> and change the following line:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:717(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"mail_location = maildir:~/Maildir # (for maildir)\n"
"or\n"
"mail_location = mbox:~/mail:INBOX=/var/spool/mail/%u # (for mbox)\n"
msgstr ""
"\n"
"mail_location = maildir:~/Maildir # (maildir 형식)\n"
"혹은\n"
"mail_location = mbox:~/mail:INBOX=/var/spool/mail/%u # (mbox 형식)\n"

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:723(para)
msgid ""
"You should configure your Mail Transport Agent (MTA) to transfer the "
"incoming mail to this type of mailbox if it is different from the one you "
"have configured."
msgstr ""
"만약 이전에 설정한 것과 메일박스 형식이 다르다면 여러분은 이 형식으로 수신된 메일을 전달하기 위해 Mail Transport Agent "
"(MTA)를 설정해야 합니다."

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:729(para)
msgid ""
"Once you have configured dovecot, restart the "
"<application>dovecot</application> daemon in order to test your setup:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:738(para)
msgid ""
"If you have enabled imap, or pop3, you can also try to log in with the "
"commands <command>telnet localhost pop3</command> or <command>telnet "
"localhost imap2</command>. If you see something like the following, the "
"installation has been successful:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:745(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"bhuvan@rainbow:~$ telnet localhost pop3\n"
"Trying 127.0.0.1...\n"
"Connected to localhost.localdomain.\n"
"Escape character is '^]'.\n"
"+OK Dovecot ready.\n"
msgstr ""
"\n"
"bhuvan@rainbow:~$ telnet localhost pop3\n"
"Trying 127.0.0.1...\n"
"Connected to localhost.localdomain.\n"
"Escape character is '^]'.\n"
"+OK Dovecot ready.\n"

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:754(title)
msgid "Dovecot SSL Configuration"
msgstr "Dovecot SSL 설정"

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:755(para)
msgid ""
"To configure <application>dovecot</application> to use SSL, you can edit the "
"file <filename>/etc/dovecot/dovecot.conf</filename> and amend following "
"lines:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:760(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"ssl_cert_file = /etc/ssl/certs/ssl-cert-snakeoil.pem\n"
"ssl_key_file = /etc/ssl/private/ssl-cert-snakeoil.key\n"
"ssl_disable = no\n"
"disable_plaintext_auth = no\n"
msgstr ""
"\n"
"ssl_cert_file = /etc/ssl/certs/ssl-cert-snakeoil.pem\n"
"ssl_key_file = /etc/ssl/private/ssl-cert-snakeoil.key\n"
"ssl_disable = no\n"
"disable_plaintext_auth = no\n"

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:766(para)
msgid ""
"You can get the SSL certificate from a Certificate Issuing Authority or you "
"can create self signed SSL certificate. The latter is a good option for "
"email, because SMTP clients rarely complain about \"self-signed "
"certificates\". Please refer to <xref linkend=\"certificates-and-"
"security\"/> for details about how to create self signed SSL certificate. "
"Once you create the certificate, you will have a key file and a certificate "
"file. Please copy them to the location pointed in the "
"<filename>/etc/dovecot/dovecot.conf</filename> configuration file."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:781(title)
msgid "Firewall Configuration for an Email Server"
msgstr "이메일 서버를 위한 방화벽 설정"

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:787(para)
msgid "IMAP - 143"
msgstr "IMAP - 143"

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:788(para)
msgid "IMAPS - 993"
msgstr "IMAPS - 993"

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:789(para)
msgid "POP3 - 110"
msgstr "POP3 - 110"

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:790(para)
msgid "POP3S - 995"
msgstr "POP3S - 995"

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:782(para)
msgid ""
"To access your mail server from another computer, you must configure your "
"firewall to allow connections to the server on the necessary ports. "
"<placeholder-1/>"
msgstr ""
"다른 컴퓨터에서 메일 서버를 접근하려면, 필요한 포트로 서버로의 접속을 허용하도록 방화벽을 반드시 설정해야만 합니다. "
"<placeholder-1/>"

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:799(para)
msgid ""
"See the <ulink url=\"http://www.dovecot.org/\">Dovecot website</ulink> for "
"more information."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:804(para)
msgid ""
"Also, the <ulink url=\"https://help.ubuntu.com/community/Dovecot\">Dovecot "
"Ubuntu Wiki</ulink> page has more details."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:813(title) serverguide/C/mail.xml:890(title) serverguide/C/mail.xml:1113(title)
msgid "Mailman"
msgstr "Mailman"

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:814(para)
msgid ""
"Mailman is an open source program for managing electronic mail discussions "
"and e-newsletter lists. Many open source mailing lists (including all the "
"<ulink url=\"http://lists.ubuntu.com\">Ubuntu mailing lists</ulink>) use "
"Mailman as their mailing list software. It is powerful and easy to install "
"and maintain."
msgstr ""
"Mailman은 전자 우편 회의와 전자 소식 목록을 관리하기 위한 오픈소스 프로그램 입니다. 많은 오픈소스 메일링 리스트는 (모든 "
"<ulink url=\"http://lists.ubuntu.com\">우분투 메일링 리스트</ulink>를 포함한) 메일링 리스트 "
"소프트웨어로 Mailman을 사용 합니다. 이것은 강력하고 설치와 유지보수가 쉽습니다."

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:824(para)
msgid ""
"Mailman provides a web interface for the administrators and users, using an "
"external mail server to send and receive emails. It works perfectly with the "
"following mail servers:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:835(application)
msgid "Exim"
msgstr "Exim"

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:838(application)
msgid "Sendmail"
msgstr "Sendmail"

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:841(application)
msgid "Qmail"
msgstr "Qmail"

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:846(para)
msgid ""
"We will see how to install and configure Mailman with, the Apache web "
"server, and either the Postfix or Exim mail server. If you wish to install "
"Mailman with a different mail server, please refer to the references section."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:853(para)
msgid ""
"You only need to install one mail server and "
"<application>Postfix</application> is the default Ubuntu Mail Transfer Agent."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:858(title) serverguide/C/mail.xml:917(title)
msgid "Apache2"
msgstr "아파치2"

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:859(para)
msgid ""
"To install apache2 you refer to <ulink url=\"./web-servers.xml#http-"
"installation\">HTTPD Installation</ulink> section for details."
msgstr ""
"아파치2를 설치하려면 <ulink url=\"./web-servers.xml#http-installation\">HTTPD "
"설치</ulink> 부분을 참조하십시오."

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:867(para)
msgid ""
"For instructions on installing and configuring Postfix refer to <xref "
"linkend=\"postfix\"/>"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:873(para)
msgid "To install Exim4 refer to <xref linkend=\"exim4\"/>."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:884(application)
msgid "dc_use_split_config='true'"
msgstr "dc_use_split_config='true'"

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:876(para)
msgid ""
"Once exim4 is installed, the configuration files are stored in the "
"<filename>/etc/exim4</filename> directory. In Ubuntu, by default, the exim4 "
"configuration files are split across different files. You can change this "
"behavior by changing the following variable in the "
"<filename>/etc/exim4/update-exim4.conf</filename> file: <placeholder-1/>"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:891(para)
msgid ""
"To install <application>Mailman</application>, run following command at a "
"terminal prompt:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:895(command)
msgid "sudo apt-get install mailman"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:897(para)
msgid ""
"It copies the installation files in "
"<application>/var/lib/mailman</application> directory. It installs the CGI "
"scripts in <application>/usr/lib/cgi-bin/mailman</application> directory. It "
"creates <emphasis>list</emphasis> linux user. It creates the "
"<emphasis>list</emphasis> linux group. The mailman process will be owned by "
"this user."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:909(para)
msgid ""
"This section assumes you have successfully installed "
"<application>mailman</application>, <application>apache2</application>, and "
"<application>postfix</application> or <application>exim4</application>. Now "
"you just need to configure them."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:918(para)
msgid ""
"An example Apache configuration file comes with "
"<application>Mailman</application> and is placed in "
"<filename>/etc/mailman/apache.conf</filename>. In order for Apache to use "
"the config file it needs to be copied to <filename>/etc/apache2/sites-"
"available</filename>:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:924(command)
msgid ""
"sudo cp /etc/mailman/apache.conf /etc/apache2/sites-available/mailman.conf"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:926(para)
msgid ""
"This will setup a new Apache <emphasis>VirtualHost</emphasis> for the "
"Mailman administration site. Now enable the new configuration and restart "
"Apache:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:931(command)
msgid "sudo a2ensite mailman.conf"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:934(para)
msgid ""
"Mailman uses apache2 to render its CGI scripts. The mailman CGI scripts are "
"installed in the <application>/usr/lib/cgi-bin/mailman</application> "
"directory. So, the mailman url will be http://hostname/cgi-bin/mailman/. You "
"can make changes to the <filename>/etc/apache2/sites-"
"available/mailman.conf</filename> file if you wish to change this behavior."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:945(para)
msgid ""
"For <application>Postfix</application> integration, we will associate the "
"domain lists.example.com with the mailing lists. Please replace "
"<emphasis>lists.example.com</emphasis> with the domain of your choosing."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:949(para)
msgid ""
"You can use the postconf command to add the necessary configuration to "
"<filename>/etc/postfix/main.cf</filename>:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:953(command)
msgid "sudo postconf -e 'relay_domains = lists.example.com'"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:954(command)
msgid "sudo postconf -e 'transport_maps = hash:/etc/postfix/transport'"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:955(command)
msgid "sudo postconf -e 'mailman_destination_recipient_limit = 1'"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:957(para)
msgid ""
"In <filename>/etc/postfix/master.cf</filename> double check that you have "
"the following transport:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:960(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"mailman   unix  -       n       n       -       -       pipe\n"
"  flags=FR user=list argv=/usr/lib/mailman/bin/postfix-to-mailman.py\n"
"  ${nexthop} ${user}\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:965(para)
msgid ""
"It calls the <emphasis>postfix-to-mailman.py</emphasis> script when a mail "
"is delivered to a list."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:968(para)
msgid ""
"Associate the domain lists.example.com to the Mailman transport with the "
"transport map. Edit the file <filename>/etc/postfix/transport</filename>:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:971(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"lists.example.com      mailman:\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:974(para)
msgid ""
"Now have <application>Postfix</application> build the transport map by "
"entering the following from a terminal prompt:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:978(command)
msgid "sudo postmap -v /etc/postfix/transport"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:980(para)
msgid "Then restart Postfix to enable the new configurations:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:989(para)
msgid ""
"Once Exim4 is installed, you can start the Exim server using the following "
"command from a terminal prompt:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:1005(para) serverguide/C/mail.xml:1020(title)
msgid "Main"
msgstr "Main"

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:1008(para) serverguide/C/mail.xml:1060(title)
msgid "Transport"
msgstr "Transport"

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:1011(para) serverguide/C/mail.xml:1083(title)
msgid "Router"
msgstr "Router"

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:996(para)
msgid ""
"In order to make mailman work with Exim4, you need to configure Exim4. As "
"mentioned earlier, by default, Exim4 uses multiple configuration files of "
"different types. For details, please refer to the <ulink "
"url=\"http://www.exim.org\">Exim</ulink> web site. To run mailman, we should "
"add new a configuration file to the following configuration types: "
"<placeholder-1/> Exim creates a master configuration file by sorting all "
"these mini configuration files. So, the order of these configuration files "
"is very important."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:1027(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"# start\n"
"# Home dir for your Mailman installation -- aka Mailman's prefix\n"
"# directory.\n"
"# On Ubuntu this should be \"/var/lib/mailman\"\n"
"# This is normally the same as ~mailman\n"
"MM_HOME=/var/lib/mailman\n"
"#\n"
"# User and group for Mailman, should match your --with-mail-gid\n"
"# switch to Mailman's configure script.  Value is normally \"mailman\"\n"
"MM_UID=list\n"
"MM_GID=list\n"
"#\n"
"# Domains that your lists are in - colon separated list\n"
"# you may wish to add these into local_domains as well\n"
"domainlist mm_domains=hostname.com\n"
"#\n"
"# -=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=\n"
"#\n"
"# These values are derived from the ones above and should not need\n"
"# editing unless you have munged your mailman installation\n"
"#\n"
"# The path of the Mailman mail wrapper script\n"
"MM_WRAP=MM_HOME/mail/mailman\n"
"#\n"
"# The path of the list config file (used as a required file when\n"
"# verifying list addresses)\n"
"MM_LISTCHK=MM_HOME/lists/${lc::$local_part}/config.pck\n"
"# end\n"
msgstr ""
"\n"
"# start\n"
"# Home dir for your Mailman installation -- aka Mailman's prefix\n"
"# directory.\n"
"# On Ubuntu this should be \"/var/lib/mailman\"\n"
"# This is normally the same as ~mailman\n"
"MM_HOME=/var/lib/mailman\n"
"#\n"
"# User and group for Mailman, should match your --with-mail-gid\n"
"# switch to Mailman's configure script. Value is normally \"mailman\"\n"
"MM_UID=list\n"
"MM_GID=list\n"
"#\n"
"# Domains that your lists are in - colon separated list\n"
"# you may wish to add these into local_domains as well\n"
"domainlist mm_domains=hostname.com\n"
"#\n"
"# -=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=\n"
"#\n"
"# These values are derived from the ones above and should not need\n"
"# editing unless you have munged your mailman installation\n"
"#\n"
"# The path of the Mailman mail wrapper script\n"
"MM_WRAP=MM_HOME/mail/mailman\n"
"#\n"
"# The path of the list config file (used as a required file when\n"
"# verifying list addresses)\n"
"MM_LISTCHK=MM_HOME/lists/${lc::$local_part}/config.pck\n"
"# end\n"

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:1021(para)
msgid ""
"All the configuration files belonging to the main type are stored in the "
"<filename>/etc/exim4/conf.d/main/</filename> directory. You can add the "
"following content to a new file, named <filename>04_exim4-"
"config_mailman</filename>: <placeholder-1/>"
msgstr ""
"Main 종류에 속하는 모든 설정 파일들은 <filename>/etc/exim4/conf.d/main/</filename> 디렉토리 내에 "
"저장 됩니다. <filename>04_exim4-config_mailman</filename> 이란 이름의 새 파일에 다음의 내용을 "
"추가할 수 있습니다: <placeholder-1/>"

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:1067(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"  mailman_transport:\n"
"   driver = pipe\n"
"   command = MM_WRAP \\\n"
"               '${if def:local_part_suffix \\\n"
"                     {${sg{$local_part_suffix}{-(\\\\w+)(\\\\+.*)?}{\\$1}}} "
"\\\n"
"                     {post}}' \\\n"
"               $local_part\n"
"    current_directory = MM_HOME\n"
"    home_directory = MM_HOME\n"
"    user = MM_UID\n"
"    group = MM_GID\n"
msgstr ""
"\n"
"  mailman_transport:\n"
"   driver = pipe\n"
"   command = MM_WRAP \\\n"
"               '${if def:local_part_suffix \\\n"
"                     {${sg{$local_part_suffix}{-(\\\\w+)(\\\\+.*)?}{\\$1}}} "
"\\\n"
"                     {post}}' \\\n"
"               $local_part\n"
"    current_directory = MM_HOME\n"
"    home_directory = MM_HOME\n"
"    user = MM_UID\n"
"    group = MM_GID\n"

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:1061(para)
msgid ""
"All the configuration files belonging to transport type are stored in the "
"<filename>/etc/exim4/conf.d/transport/</filename> directory. You can add the "
"following content to a new file named <filename> 40_exim4-"
"config_mailman</filename>: <placeholder-1/>"
msgstr ""
"Transport 종류에 속하는 모든 설정 파일들은 "
"<filename>/etc/exim4/conf.d/transport/</filename> 디렉토리 내에 저장 됩니다. <filename> "
"40_exim4-config_mailman</filename> 이란 이름의 새 파일에 다음의 내용을 추가할 수 있습니다: "
"<placeholder-1/>"

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:1088(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"  mailman_router:\n"
"   driver = accept\n"
"   require_files = MM_HOME/lists/$local_part/config.pck\n"
"   local_part_suffix_optional\n"
"   local_part_suffix = -bounces : -bounces+* : \\\n"
"                       -confirm+* : -join : -leave : \\\n"
"                       -owner : -request : -admin\n"
"   transport = mailman_transport\n"
msgstr ""
"\n"
"  mailman_router:\n"
"   driver = accept\n"
"   require_files = MM_HOME/lists/$local_part/config.pck\n"
"   local_part_suffix_optional\n"
"   local_part_suffix = -bounces : -bounces+* : \\\n"
"                       -confirm+* : -join : -leave : \\\n"
"                       -owner : -request : -admin\n"
"   transport = mailman_transport\n"

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:1084(para)
msgid ""
"All the configuration files belonging to router type are stored in the "
"<filename>/etc/exim4/conf.d/router/</filename> directory. You can add the "
"following content in to a new file named <filename>101_exim4-"
"config_mailman</filename>: <placeholder-1/>"
msgstr ""
"Router 종류에 속하는 모든 설정 파일들은 <filename>/etc/exim4/conf.d/router/</filename> "
"디렉토리 내에 저장 됩니다. <filename>101_exim4-config_mailman</filename> 이란 이름의 새 파일에 "
"다음의 내용을 추가할 수 있습니다: <placeholder-1/>"

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:1101(para)
msgid ""
"The order of main and transport configuration files can be in any order. "
"But, the order of router configuration files must be the same. This "
"particular file must appear before the <application>200_exim4-"
"config_primary</application> file. These two configuration files contain "
"same type of information. The first file takes the precedence. For more "
"details, please refer to the references section."
msgstr ""
"Main과 Transport 설정 파일들의 순서는 어느 순서가 되도 무방 합니다. 그러나, Router 설정 파일의 순서는 반드시 "
"똑같아야 합니다. 이 특정 파일은 <application>200_exim4-config_primary</application> 파일 "
"이전에 반드시 나타나야 합니다. 이 두 설정 파일은 같은 종류의 정보를 가지고 있습니다. 첫 번째 파일이 우선권을 가집니다. 더 자세한 "
"것은, 참조 영역을 참고 하십시오."

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:1114(para)
msgid ""
"Once mailman is installed, you can run it using the following command:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:1118(command)
msgid "sudo /etc/init.d/mailman start"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:1120(para)
msgid ""
"Once mailman is installed, you should create the default mailing list. Run "
"the following command to create the mailing list:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:1126(command)
msgid "sudo /usr/sbin/newlist mailman"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:1129(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"  Enter the email address of the person running the list: bhuvan at "
"ubuntu.com\n"
"  Initial mailman password:\n"
"  To finish creating your mailing list, you must edit your "
"<filename>/etc/aliases</filename> (or\n"
"  equivalent) file by adding the following lines, and possibly running the\n"
"  `newaliases' program:\n"
"\n"
"  ## mailman mailing list\n"
"  mailman:              \"|/var/lib/mailman/mail/mailman post mailman\"\n"
"  mailman-admin:        \"|/var/lib/mailman/mail/mailman admin mailman\"\n"
"  mailman-bounces:      \"|/var/lib/mailman/mail/mailman bounces mailman\"\n"
"  mailman-confirm:      \"|/var/lib/mailman/mail/mailman confirm mailman\"\n"
"  mailman-join:         \"|/var/lib/mailman/mail/mailman join mailman\"\n"
"  mailman-leave:        \"|/var/lib/mailman/mail/mailman leave mailman\"\n"
"  mailman-owner:        \"|/var/lib/mailman/mail/mailman owner mailman\"\n"
"  mailman-request:      \"|/var/lib/mailman/mail/mailman request mailman\"\n"
"  mailman-subscribe:    \"|/var/lib/mailman/mail/mailman subscribe "
"mailman\"\n"
"  mailman-unsubscribe:  \"|/var/lib/mailman/mail/mailman unsubscribe "
"mailman\"\n"
"\n"
"  Hit enter to notify mailman owner...\n"
"\n"
"  # \n"
msgstr ""
"\n"
"  Enter the email address of the person running the list: bhuvan at "
"ubuntu.com\n"
"  Initial mailman password:\n"
"  To finish creating your mailing list, you must edit your "
"<filename>/etc/aliases</filename> (or\n"
"  equivalent) file by adding the following lines, and possibly running the\n"
"  `newaliases' program:\n"
"\n"
"  ## mailman mailing list\n"
"  mailman: \"|/var/lib/mailman/mail/mailman post mailman\"\n"
"  mailman-admin: \"|/var/lib/mailman/mail/mailman admin mailman\"\n"
"  mailman-bounces: \"|/var/lib/mailman/mail/mailman bounces mailman\"\n"
"  mailman-confirm: \"|/var/lib/mailman/mail/mailman confirm mailman\"\n"
"  mailman-join: \"|/var/lib/mailman/mail/mailman join mailman\"\n"
"  mailman-leave: \"|/var/lib/mailman/mail/mailman leave mailman\"\n"
"  mailman-owner: \"|/var/lib/mailman/mail/mailman owner mailman\"\n"
"  mailman-request: \"|/var/lib/mailman/mail/mailman request mailman\"\n"
"  mailman-subscribe: \"|/var/lib/mailman/mail/mailman subscribe mailman\"\n"
"  mailman-unsubscribe: \"|/var/lib/mailman/mail/mailman unsubscribe "
"mailman\"\n"
"\n"
"  Hit enter to notify mailman owner...\n"
"\n"
"  # \n"

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:1152(para)
msgid ""
"We have configured either Postfix or Exim4 to recognize all emails from "
"mailman. So, it is not mandatory to make any new entries in "
"<filename>/etc/aliases</filename>. If you have made any changes to the "
"configuration files, please ensure that you restart those services before "
"continuing to next section."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:1160(para)
msgid ""
"The Exim4 does not use the above aliases to forward mails to Mailman, as it "
"uses a <emphasis>discover</emphasis> approach. To suppress the aliases while "
"creating the list, you can add <emphasis>MTA=None</emphasis> line in Mailman "
"configuration file, <filename>/etc/mailman/mm_cfg.py</filename>."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:1171(title)
msgid "Administration"
msgstr "관리"

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:1172(para)
msgid ""
"We assume you have a default installation. The mailman cgi scripts are still "
"in the <application>/usr/lib/cgi-bin/mailman/</application> directory. "
"Mailman provides a web based administration facility. To access this page, "
"point your browser to the following url:"
msgstr ""
"우리는 여러분이 기본 설치된 상태에 있다고 가정하겠습니다. mailman cgi 스크립트는 여전히 "
"<application>/usr/lib/cgi-bin/mailman/</application> 디렉토리에 존재합니다. mailman은 웹 "
"기반의 관리 기능을 제공합니다. 이 페이지에 접근하기 위해서는 웹 브라우저에서 다음 url을 입력합니다:"

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:1180(para)
msgid "http://hostname/cgi-bin/mailman/admin"
msgstr "http://hostname/cgi-bin/mailman/admin"

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:1184(para)
msgid ""
"The default mailing list, <emphasis>mailman</emphasis>, will appear in this "
"screen. If you click the mailing list name, it will ask for your "
"authentication password. If you enter the correct password, you will be able "
"to change administrative settings of this mailing list. You can create a new "
"mailing list using the command line utility "
"(<command>/usr/sbin/newlist</command>). Alternatively, you can create a new "
"mailing list using the web interface."
msgstr ""
"기본 메일링 리스트인 <emphasis>mailman</emphasis>이 화면에 나타날 것입니다. 메일링 리스트의 이름을 클릭하면 "
"여러분의 인증을 위해 암호를 물어볼 것입니다. 올바른 암호를 입력하면 이 메일링 리스트의 관리를 위한 설정을 변경할 수 있습니다. 새로운 "
"메일링 리스트를 생성하기 위해서는 명령행 유틸리티를 이용할 수 "
"있습니다(<command>/usr/sbin/newlist</command>). 아니면 웹 인터페이스를 통해서도 새로운 메일링 리스트를 "
"생성할 수 있습니다."

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:1197(title)
msgid "Users"
msgstr "사용자"

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:1198(para)
msgid ""
"Mailman provides a web based interface for users. To access this page, point "
"your browser to the following url:"
msgstr ""
"Mailman은 사용자에게 웹 기반의 인터페이스를 제공 합니다. 이 페이지를 접근하려면, 다음 url을 여러분의 브라우저에서 사용 합니다:"

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:1203(para)
msgid "http://hostname/cgi-bin/mailman/listinfo"
msgstr "http://hostname/cgi-bin/mailman/listinfo"

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:1207(para)
msgid ""
"The default mailing list, <emphasis>mailman</emphasis>, will appear in this "
"screen. If you click the mailing list name, it will display the subscription "
"form. You can enter your email address, name (optional), and password to "
"subscribe. An email invitation will be sent to you. You can follow the "
"instructions in the email to subscribe."
msgstr ""
"기본 설정된 메일링 리스트, <emphasis>mailman</emphasis> 가 이 화면에 나타납니다. 그 메일링 리스트 이름을 "
"클릭하면, 가입 양식을 보입니다. 여러분의 이메일 주소, 이름(선택사항) 그리고 암호를 가입하기 위하여 입력 합니다. 여러분에게 이메일 "
"초대가 보내집니다. 가입하기 위하여 그 이메일의 절차를 따릅니다."

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:1219(ulink)
msgid "GNU Mailman - Installation Manual"
msgstr "GNU Mailman - 설치 매뉴얼"

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:1223(ulink)
msgid "HOWTO - Using Exim 4 and Mailman 2.1 together"
msgstr "하우투 - Exim 4와 Mailman 2.1을 함께 사용하기"

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:1226(para)
msgid ""
"Also, see the <ulink "
"url=\"https://help.ubuntu.com/community/Mailman\">Mailman Ubuntu "
"Wiki</ulink> page."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:1232(title)
msgid "Mail Filtering"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:1233(para)
msgid ""
"One of the largest issues with email today is the problem of Unsolicited "
"Bulk Email (UBE). Also known as SPAM, such messages may also carry viruses "
"and other forms of malware. According to some reports these messages make up "
"the bulk of all email traffic on the Internet."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:1238(para)
msgid ""
"This section will cover integrating <application>Amavisd-new</application>, "
"<application>Spamassassin</application>, and "
"<application>ClamAV</application> with the "
"<application>Postfix</application> Mail Transport Agent (MTA). "
"<application>Postfix</application> can also check email validity by passing "
"it through external content filters. These filters can sometimes determine "
"if a message is spam without needing to process it with more resource "
"intensive applications. Two common filters are <application>dkim-"
"filter</application> and <application>python-policyd-spf</application>."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:1248(para)
msgid ""
"<application>Amavisd-new</application> is a wrapper program that can call "
"any number of content filtering programs for spam detection, antivirus, etc."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:1254(para)
msgid ""
"<application>Spamassassin</application> uses a variety of mechanisms to "
"filter email based on the message content."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:1259(para)
msgid ""
"<application>ClamAV</application> is an open source antivirus application."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:1264(para)
msgid ""
"<application>dkim-filter</application> implements a Sendmail Mail Filter "
"(Milter) for the DomainKeys Identified Mail (DKIM) standard."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:1270(para)
msgid ""
"<application>python-policyd-spf</application> enables Sender Policy "
"Framework (SPF) checking with <application>Postfix</application>."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:1275(para)
msgid "This is how the pieces fit together:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:1280(para)
msgid "An email message is accepted by <application>Postfix</application>."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:1285(para)
msgid ""
"The message is passed through any external filters <application>dkim-"
"filter</application> and <application>python-policyd-spf</application> in "
"this case."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:1291(para)
msgid "<application>Amavisd-new</application> then processes the message."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:1296(para)
msgid ""
"<application>ClamAV</application> is used to scan the message. If the "
"message contains a virus <application>Postfix</application> will reject the "
"message."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:1302(para)
msgid ""
"Clean messages will then be analyzed by "
"<application>Spamassassin</application> to find out if the message is spam. "
"<application>Spamassassin</application> will then add X-Header lines "
"allowing <application>Amavisd-new</application> to further manipulate the "
"message."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:1309(para)
msgid ""
"For example, if a message has a Spam score of over fifty the message could "
"be automatically dropped from the queue without the recipient ever having to "
"be bothered. Another, way to handle flagged messages is to deliver them to "
"the Mail User Agent (MUA) allowing the user to deal with the message as they "
"see fit."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:1316(para)
msgid ""
"See <xref linkend=\"postfix\"/> for instructions on installing and "
"configuring Postfix."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:1319(para)
msgid ""
"To install the rest of the applications enter the following from a terminal "
"prompt:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:1323(command)
msgid "sudo apt-get install amavisd-new spamassassin clamav-daemon"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:1324(command)
msgid "sudo apt-get install dkim-filter python-policyd-spf"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:1326(para)
msgid ""
"There are some optional packages that integrate with "
"<application>Spamassassin</application> for better spam detection:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:1330(command)
msgid "sudo apt-get install pyzor razor"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:1332(para)
msgid ""
"Along with the main filtering applications compression utilities are needed "
"to process some email attachments:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:1336(command)
msgid ""
"sudo apt-get install arj cabextract cpio lha nomarch pax rar unrar unzip zip"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:1339(para)
msgid ""
"If some packages are not found, check that the "
"<emphasis>multiverse</emphasis> repository is enabled in "
"<filename>/etc/apt/sources.list</filename>"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:1340(para)
msgid ""
"If you make changes to the file, be sure to run <command>sudo apt-get "
"update</command> before trying to install again."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:1345(para)
msgid "Now configure everything to work together and filter email."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:1349(title)
msgid "ClamAV"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:1350(para)
msgid ""
"The default behaviour of <application>ClamAV</application> will fit our "
"needs. For more ClamAV configuration options, check the configuration files "
"in <filename>/etc/clamav</filename>."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:1355(para)
msgid ""
"Add the <emphasis>clamav</emphasis> user to the <emphasis>amavis</emphasis> "
"group in order for <application>Amavisd-new</application> to have the "
"appropriate access to scan files:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:1360(command)
msgid "sudo adduser clamav amavis"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:1364(title)
msgid "Spamassassin"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:1365(para)
msgid ""
"Spamassassin automatically detects optional components and will use them if "
"they are present. This means that there is no need to configure "
"<application>pyzor</application> and <application>razor</application>."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:1369(para)
msgid ""
"Edit <filename>/etc/default/spamassassin</filename> to activate the "
"<application>Spamassassin</application> daemon. Change "
"<emphasis>ENABLED=0</emphasis> to:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:1373(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"ENABLED=1\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:1376(para)
msgid "Now start the daemon:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:1380(command)
msgid "sudo /etc/init.d/spamassassin start"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:1384(title)
msgid "Amavisd-new"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:1385(para)
msgid ""
"First activate spam and antivirus detection in <application>Amavisd-"
"new</application> by editing <filename>/etc/amavis/conf.d/15-"
"content_filter_mode</filename>:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:1389(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"use strict;\n"
"\n"
"# You can modify this file to re-enable SPAM checking through spamassassin\n"
"# and to re-enable antivirus checking.\n"
"\n"
"#\n"
"# Default antivirus checking mode\n"
"# Uncomment the two lines below to enable it\n"
"#\n"
"\n"
"@bypass_virus_checks_maps = (\n"
"   \\%bypass_virus_checks, \\@bypass_virus_checks_acl, \\"
"$bypass_virus_checks_re);\n"
"\n"
"\n"
"#\n"
"# Default SPAM checking mode\n"
"# Uncomment the two lines below to enable it\n"
"#\n"
"\n"
"@bypass_spam_checks_maps = (\n"
"   \\%bypass_spam_checks, \\@bypass_spam_checks_acl, \\"
"$bypass_spam_checks_re);\n"
"\n"
"1;  # insure a defined return\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:1414(para)
msgid ""
"Bouncing spam can be a bad idea as the return address is often faked. "
"Consider editing <filename>/etc/amavis/conf.d/20-debian_defaults</filename> "
"to set <emphasis>$final_spam_destiny</emphasis> to D_DISCARD rather than "
"D_BOUNCE, as follows:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:1420(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"$final_spam_destiny       = D_DISCARD;\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:1424(para)
msgid ""
"Additionally, you may want to adjust the following options to flag more "
"messages as spam:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:1428(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"$sa_tag_level_deflt = -999; # add spam info headers if at, or above that "
"level\n"
"$sa_tag2_level_deflt = 6.0; # add 'spam detected' headers at that level\n"
"$sa_kill_level_deflt = 21.0; # triggers spam evasive actions\n"
"$sa_dsn_cutoff_level = 4; # spam level beyond which a DSN is not sent\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:1435(para)
msgid ""
"If the server's <emphasis>hostname</emphasis> is different from the domain's "
"MX record you may need to manually set the <emphasis>$myhostname</emphasis> "
"option. Also, if the server receives mail for multiple domains the "
"<emphasis>@local_domains_acl</emphasis> option will need to be customized. "
"Edit the <filename>/etc/amavis/conf.d/50-user</filename> file:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:1442(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"$myhostname = 'mail.example.com';\n"
"@local_domains_acl = ( \"example.com\", \"example.org\" );\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:1447(para)
msgid ""
"After configuration <application>Amavisd-new</application> needs to be "
"restarted:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:1451(command) serverguide/C/mail.xml:1497(command)
msgid "sudo /etc/init.d/amavis restart"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:1454(title)
msgid "DKIM Whitelist"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:1456(para)
msgid ""
"<application>Amavisd-new</application> can be configured to automatically "
"<emphasis>Whitelist</emphasis> addresses from domains with valid Domain "
"Keys. There are some pre-configured domains in the "
"<filename>/etc/amavis/conf.d/40-policy_banks</filename>."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:1462(para)
msgid "There are multiple ways to configure the Whitelist for a domain:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:1468(para)
msgid ""
"<emphasis>'example.com' =&gt; 'WHITELIST',</emphasis>: will whitelist any "
"address from the \"example.com\" domain."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:1473(para)
msgid ""
"<emphasis>'.example.com' =&gt; 'WHITELIST',</emphasis>: will whitelist any "
"address from any <emphasis>subdomains</emphasis> of \"example.com\" that "
"have a valid signature."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:1479(para)
msgid ""
"<emphasis>'.example.com/@example.com' =&gt; 'WHITELIST',</emphasis>: will "
"whitelist subdomains of \"example.com\" that use the signature of <emphasis "
"role=\"italic\">example.com</emphasis> the parent domain."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:1485(para)
msgid ""
"<emphasis>'./@example.com' =&gt; 'WHITELIST',</emphasis>: adds addresses "
"that have a valid signature from \"example.com\". This is usually used for "
"discussion groups that sign thier messages."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:1492(para)
msgid ""
"A domain can also have multiple Whitelist configurations. After, editing the "
"file restart <application>amaisd-new</application>:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:1501(para)
msgid ""
"In this context, once a domain has been added to the Whitelist the message "
"will not receive any anti-virus or spam filtering. This may or may not be "
"the intended behavior you wish for a domain."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:1511(para)
msgid ""
"For <application>Postfix</application> integration, enter the following from "
"a terminal prompt:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:1515(command)
msgid "sudo postconf -e 'content_filter = smtp-amavis:[127.0.0.1]:10024'"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:1517(para)
msgid ""
"Next edit <filename>/etc/postfix/master.cf</filename> and add the following "
"to the end of the file:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:1520(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"smtp-amavis     unix    -       -       -       -       2       smtp\n"
"        -o smtp_data_done_timeout=1200\n"
"        -o smtp_send_xforward_command=yes\n"
"        -o disable_dns_lookups=yes\n"
"        -o max_use=20\n"
"\n"
"127.0.0.1:10025 inet    n       -       -       -       -       smtpd\n"
"        -o content_filter=\n"
"        -o local_recipient_maps=\n"
"        -o relay_recipient_maps=\n"
"        -o smtpd_restriction_classes=\n"
"        -o smtpd_delay_reject=no\n"
"        -o smtpd_client_restrictions=permit_mynetworks,reject\n"
"        -o smtpd_helo_restrictions=\n"
"        -o smtpd_sender_restrictions=\n"
"        -o smtpd_recipient_restrictions=permit_mynetworks,reject\n"
"        -o smtpd_data_restrictions=reject_unauth_pipelining\n"
"        -o smtpd_end_of_data_restrictions=\n"
"        -o mynetworks=127.0.0.0/8\n"
"        -o smtpd_error_sleep_time=0\n"
"        -o smtpd_soft_error_limit=1001\n"
"        -o smtpd_hard_error_limit=1000\n"
"        -o smtpd_client_connection_count_limit=0\n"
"        -o smtpd_client_connection_rate_limit=0\n"
"        -o "
"receive_override_options=no_header_body_checks,no_unknown_recipient_checks\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:1547(para)
msgid ""
"Also add the following two lines immediately below the "
"<emphasis>\"pickup\"</emphasis> transport service:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:1550(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"         -o content_filter=\n"
"         -o receive_override_options=no_header_body_checks\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:1554(para)
msgid ""
"This will prevent messages that are generated to report on spam from being "
"classified as spam."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:1557(para)
msgid "Now restart <application>Postfix</application>:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:1563(para)
msgid "Content filtering with spam and virus detection is now enabled."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:1570(para)
msgid ""
"First, test that the <application>Amavisd-new</application> SMTP is "
"listening:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:1573(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"telnet localhost 10024\n"
"Trying 127.0.0.1...\n"
"Connected to localhost.\n"
"Escape character is '^]'.\n"
"220 [127.0.0.1] ESMTP amavisd-new service ready\n"
"^]\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:1581(para)
msgid ""
"In the Header of messages that go through the content filter you should see:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:1584(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"X-Spam-Level: \n"
"X-Virus-Scanned: Debian amavisd-new at example.com\n"
"X-Spam-Status: No, hits=-2.3 tagged_above=-1000.0 required=5.0 tests=AWL, "
"BAYES_00\n"
"X-Spam-Level: \n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:1591(para)
msgid ""
"Your output will vary, but the important thing is that there are <emphasis>X-"
"Virus-Scanned</emphasis> and <emphasis>X-Spam-Status</emphasis> entries."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:1599(para)
msgid ""
"The best way to figure out why something is going wrong is to check the log "
"files."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:1604(para)
msgid ""
"For instructions on <application>Postfix</application> logging see the <xref "
"linkend=\"postfix-troubleshooting\"/> section."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:1610(para)
msgid ""
"<application>Amavisd-new</application> uses "
"<application>Syslog</application> to send messages to "
"<filename>/var/log/mail.log</filename>. The amount of detail can be "
"increased by adding the <emphasis>$log_level</emphasis> option to "
"<filename>/etc/amavis/conf.d/50-user</filename>, and setting the value from "
"1 to 5."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:1615(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"$log_level = 2;\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:1619(para)
msgid ""
"When the <application>Amavisd-new</application> log output is increased "
"<application>Spamassassin</application> log output is also increased."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:1626(para)
msgid ""
"The <application>ClamAV</application> log level can be increased by editing "
"<filename>/etc/clamav/clamd.conf</filename> and setting the following option:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:1630(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"LogVerbose true\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:1633(para)
msgid ""
"By default <application>ClamAV</application> will send log messages to "
"<filename>/var/log/clamav/clamav.log</filename>."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:1639(para)
msgid ""
"After changing an applications log settings remember to restart the service "
"for the new settings to take affect. Also, once the issue you are "
"troubleshooting is resolved it is a good idea to change the log settings "
"back to normal."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:1647(para)
msgid "For more information on filtering mail see the following links:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:1653(ulink)
msgid "Amavisd-new Documentation"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:1657(para)
msgid ""
"<ulink url=\"http://www.clamav.org/doc/latest/html/\">ClamAV "
"Documentation</ulink> and <ulink "
"url=\"http://wiki.clamav.net/Main/WebHome\">ClamAV Wiki</ulink>"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:1664(ulink)
msgid "Spamassassin Wiki"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:1669(ulink)
msgid "Pyzor Homepage"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:1674(ulink)
msgid "Razor Homepage"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:1679(ulink)
msgid "DKIM.org"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:1684(ulink)
msgid "Postfix Amavis New"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/mail.xml:1688(para)
msgid ""
"Also, feel free to ask questions in the <emphasis>#ubuntu-server</emphasis> "
"IRC channel on <ulink url=\"http://freenode.net\">freenode</ulink>."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/lamp-applications.xml:13(title)
msgid "LAMP Applications"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/lamp-applications.xml:19(para)
msgid ""
"LAMP installations (Linux + Apache + MySQL + PHP) are a popular setup for "
"Ubuntu servers. There is a plethora of Open Source applications written "
"using the LAMP application stack. Some popular LAMP applications are Wiki's, "
"Content Management Systems, and Management Software such as phpMyAdmin."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/lamp-applications.xml:26(para)
msgid ""
"One advantage of LAMP is the substantial flexibility for different database, "
"web server, and scripting languages. Popular substitutes for MySQL include "
"Posgresql and SQLite. Python, Perl, and Ruby are also frequently used "
"instead of PHP."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/lamp-applications.xml:32(para)
msgid ""
"The traditional way to install most <emphasis>LAMP</emphasis> applications "
"is:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/lamp-applications.xml:38(para)
msgid "Download an archive containing the application source files."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/lamp-applications.xml:43(para)
msgid ""
"Unpack the archive, usually in a directory accessible to a web server."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/lamp-applications.xml:48(para)
msgid ""
"Depending on where the source was extracted, configure a web browser to "
"serve the files."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/lamp-applications.xml:53(para)
msgid "Configure the application to connect to the database."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/lamp-applications.xml:58(para)
msgid ""
"Run a script, or browse to a page of the application, to install the "
"database needed by the application."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/lamp-applications.xml:63(para)
msgid ""
"Once the steps above, or similar steps, are completed you are ready to begin "
"using the application."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/lamp-applications.xml:69(para)
msgid ""
"A disadvantage of using this approach is that the application files are not "
"placed in the file system in a standard way, which can cause confusion as to "
"where the application is installed. Another larger disadvantage is updating "
"the application. When a new version is released, the same process used to "
"install the application is needed to apply updates."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/lamp-applications.xml:76(para)
msgid ""
"Fortunately, a number of <emphasis>LAMP</emphasis> applications are already "
"packaged for Ubuntu, and are available for installation in the same way as "
"non-LAMP applications. Depending on the application some extra configuration "
"and setup steps may be needed, however."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/lamp-applications.xml:82(para)
msgid ""
"This section covers howto install and configure the Wiki applications "
"<application>MoinMoin</application>, <application>MediaWiki</application>, "
"and the MySQL management application <application>phpMyAdmin</application>."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/lamp-applications.xml:88(para)
msgid ""
"A Wiki is a website that allows the visitors to easily add, remove and "
"modify available content easily. The ease of interaction and operation makes "
"Wiki an effective tool for mass collaborative authoring. The term Wiki is "
"also referred to the collaborative software."
msgstr ""
"위키는 웹사이트에 방문한 사람들이 해당 사이트의 내용을 간편하게 추가/변경/삭제할 수 있는 사이트를 말합니다. 위키의 이러한 간편한 "
"상호작용과 기능들은 위키를 협업을 통해 방대한 문서를 작성하는 경우에 유용하게 사용할 수 있는 도구로 만들었습니다. 또한 위키라는 용어는 "
"협력적인 소프트웨어를 말하기도 합니다."

#: serverguide/C/lamp-applications.xml:100(title)
msgid "Moin Moin"
msgstr "Moin Moin"

#: serverguide/C/lamp-applications.xml:102(para)
msgid ""
"MoinMoin is a Wiki engine implemented in Python, based on the PikiPiki Wiki "
"engine, and licensed under the GNU GPL."
msgstr ""
"MoinMoin은 PikiPiki 위키 엔진을 기반으로 하여, 파이썬 언어로 구현된 위키 엔진이며, GNU GPL 라이센스를 따릅니다."

#: serverguide/C/lamp-applications.xml:110(para)
msgid ""
"To install <application>MoinMoin</application>, run the following command in "
"the command prompt:"
msgstr "<application>MoinMoin</application>을 설치하려면, 명령창에서 다음을 입력하세요:"

#: serverguide/C/lamp-applications.xml:116(command)
msgid "sudo apt-get install python-moinmoin"
msgstr "sudo apt-get install python-moinmoin"

#: serverguide/C/lamp-applications.xml:119(para)
msgid ""
"You should also install <application>apache2</application> web server. For "
"installing <application>apache2</application> web server, please refer to "
"<xref linkend=\"http-installation\"/> sub-section in <xref "
"linkend=\"httpd\"/> section."
msgstr ""
"또한 <application>apache2</application> 웹 서버를 설치할 수도 있습니다. "
"<application>apache2</application> 웹 서버를 설치하는 방법은  <xref linkend=\"httpd\"/> "
"절의 <xref linkend=\"http-installation\"/> 부분을 참조하기 바랍니다."

#: serverguide/C/lamp-applications.xml:130(para)
msgid ""
"For configuring your first Wiki application, please run the following set of "
"commands. Let us assume that you are creating a Wiki named "
"<emphasis>mywiki</emphasis>:"
msgstr ""
"위키 프로그램을 처음으로 설정하려면 아래와 같은 명령들을 실행해야 합니다. 여기서는 여러분이 "
"<emphasis>mywiki</emphasis>라는 이름의 위키를 생성했다고 가정하겠습니다:"

#: serverguide/C/lamp-applications.xml:137(command)
msgid "cd /usr/share/moin"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/lamp-applications.xml:138(command)
msgid "sudo mkdir mywiki"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/lamp-applications.xml:139(command)
msgid "sudo cp -R data mywiki"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/lamp-applications.xml:140(command)
msgid "sudo cp -R underlay mywiki"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/lamp-applications.xml:141(command)
msgid "sudo cp server/moin.cgi mywiki"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/lamp-applications.xml:142(command)
msgid "sudo chown -R www-data.www-data mywiki"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/lamp-applications.xml:143(command)
msgid "sudo chmod -R ug+rwX mywiki"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/lamp-applications.xml:144(command)
msgid "sudo chmod -R o-rwx mywiki"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/lamp-applications.xml:147(para)
msgid ""
"Now you should configure <application>MoinMoin</application> to find your "
"new Wiki <emphasis>mywiki</emphasis>. To configure "
"<application>MoinMoin</application>, open "
"<filename>/etc/moin/mywiki.py</filename> file and change the following line:"
msgstr ""
"이제 여러분이 생성한 <emphasis>mywiki</emphasis> 위키를 찾기 위해 "
"<application>MoinMoin</application>을 설정해야 합니다. "
"<application>MoinMoin</application>을 설정하려면 "
"<filename>/etc/moin/mywiki.py</filename> 파일을 열고, 다음 부분을 변경합니다:"

#: serverguide/C/lamp-applications.xml:155(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid "data_dir = '/org/mywiki/data'"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/lamp-applications.xml:157(para)
msgid "to"
msgstr "아래와 같이 바꿉니다."

#: serverguide/C/lamp-applications.xml:161(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid "data_dir = '/usr/share/moin/mywiki/data'"
msgstr "data_dir = '/usr/share/moin/mywiki/data'"

#: serverguide/C/lamp-applications.xml:163(para)
msgid ""
"Also, below the <emphasis>data_dir</emphasis> option add the "
"<emphasis>data_underlay_dir</emphasis>:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/lamp-applications.xml:167(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"data_underlay_dir='/usr/share/moin/mywiki/underlay'\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/lamp-applications.xml:172(para)
msgid ""
"If the <filename>/etc/moin/mywiki.py</filename> file does not exists, you "
"should copy <filename>/etc/moin/moinmaster.py</filename> file to "
"<filename>/etc/moin/mywiki.py</filename> file and do the above mentioned "
"change."
msgstr ""
"만약 <filename>/etc/moin/mywiki.py</filename> 파일이 없다면, "
"<filename>/etc/moin/moinmaster.py</filename> 파일을 "
"<filename>/etc/moin/mywiki.py</filename>라는 이름으로 복사한 뒤에 위에서 설명한 부분을 변경합니다."

#: serverguide/C/lamp-applications.xml:181(para)
msgid ""
"If you have named your Wiki as <emphasis>my_wiki_name</emphasis> you should "
"insert a line <quote>(\"my_wiki_name\", r\".*\")</quote> in "
"<filename>/etc/moin/farmconfig.py</filename> file after the line "
"<quote>(\"mywiki\", r\".*\")</quote>."
msgstr ""
"만약 여러분의 위키 이름이 <emphasis>my_wiki_name</emphasis>라면, "
"<filename>/etc/moin/farmconfig.py</filename> 파일에서 <quote>(\"mywiki\", "
"r\".*\")</quote> 줄 아래에 <quote>(\"my_wiki_name\", r\".*\")</quote> 줄을 추가하십시오."

#: serverguide/C/lamp-applications.xml:189(para)
msgid ""
"Once you have configured <application>MoinMoin</application> to find your "
"first Wiki application <emphasis>mywiki</emphasis>, you should configure "
"<application>apache2</application> and make it ready for your Wiki "
"application."
msgstr ""
"<emphasis>mywiki</emphasis>라는 위키 프로그램을 찾기 위해 "
"<application>MoinMoin</application>을 설정하고나면, 위키 프로그램을 이용할 수 있도록  "
"<application>아파치2</application>를 설정해야 합니다."

#: serverguide/C/lamp-applications.xml:196(para)
msgid ""
"You should add the following lines in <filename>/etc/apache2/sites-"
"available/default</filename> file inside the <quote>&lt;VirtualHost "
"*&gt;</quote> tag:"
msgstr ""
"<filename>/etc/apache2/sites-available/default</filename> 파일에서 "
"<quote>&lt;VirtualHost *&gt;</quote> 태그 안쪽에 다음과 같은 내용을 추가하세요."

#: serverguide/C/lamp-applications.xml:202(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"### moin\n"
"  ScriptAlias /mywiki \"/usr/share/moin/mywiki/moin.cgi\"\n"
"  alias /moin_static184 \"/usr/share/moin/htdocs\"\n"
"  &lt;Directory /usr/share/moin/htdocs&gt;\n"
"  Order allow,deny\n"
"  allow from all\n"
"  &lt;/Directory&gt;\n"
"### end moin\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/lamp-applications.xml:214(para)
msgid ""
"Adjust the <emphasis>\"moin_static184\"</emphasis> in the "
"<emphasis>alias</emphasis> line above, to the "
"<application>moinmoin</application> version installed."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/lamp-applications.xml:220(para)
msgid ""
"Once you configure the <application>apache2</application> web server and "
"make it ready for your Wiki application, you should restart it. You can run "
"the following command to restart the <application>apache2</application> web "
"server:"
msgstr ""
"위키 프로그램을 이용할 수 있도록 <application>a아파치2</application> 웹 서버를 설정하고나면, 웹 서버를 "
"재시작해야 합니다. <application>아파치2</application> 웹 서버를 재시작하려면 다음 명령을 실행하세요:"

#: serverguide/C/lamp-applications.xml:233(title)
msgid "Verification"
msgstr "확인"

#: serverguide/C/lamp-applications.xml:235(para)
msgid ""
"You can verify the Wiki application and see if it works by pointing your web "
"browser to the following URL:"
msgstr "여러분위 위키 프로그램이 잘 동작하는지 확인하려면 웹 브라우저에서 다음 URL을 입력하세요:"

#: serverguide/C/lamp-applications.xml:239(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"http://localhost/mywiki\n"
msgstr ""
"\n"
"http://localhost/mywiki\n"

#: serverguide/C/lamp-applications.xml:243(para)
msgid ""
"You can also run the test command by pointing your web browser to the "
"following URL:"
msgstr "또는 웹 브라우저에서 다음 URL을 입력하여 테스트 명령을 실행해 볼 수 있습니다:"

#: serverguide/C/lamp-applications.xml:248(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"http://localhost/mywiki?action=test\n"
msgstr ""
"\n"
"http://localhost/mywiki?action=test\n"

#: serverguide/C/lamp-applications.xml:252(para)
msgid ""
"For more details, please refer to the <ulink "
"url=\"http://moinmo.in/\">MoinMoin</ulink> web site."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/lamp-applications.xml:263(para)
msgid ""
"For more information see the <ulink url=\"http://moinmo.in/\">moinmoin "
"Wiki</ulink>."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/lamp-applications.xml:268(para)
msgid ""
"Also, see the <ulink "
"url=\"https://help.ubuntu.com/community/MoinMoin\">Ubuntu Wiki "
"MoinMoin</ulink> page."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/lamp-applications.xml:277(title)
msgid "MediaWiki"
msgstr "MediaWiki"

#: serverguide/C/lamp-applications.xml:279(para)
msgid ""
"MediaWiki is an web based Wiki software written in the PHP language. It can "
"either use <application>MySQL</application> or "
"<application>PostgreSQL</application> Database Management System."
msgstr ""
"미디어위키는 PHP 언어로 작성된 웹 기반의 위키 소프트웨어입니다. 미디어위키는 "
"<application>MySQL</application> 혹은 <application>PostgreSQL</application> "
"데이터베이스 관리 시스템을 사용할 수 있습니다."

#: serverguide/C/lamp-applications.xml:289(para)
msgid ""
"Before installing <application>MediaWiki</application> you should also "
"install <application>Apache2</application>, the "
"<application>PHP5</application> scripting language and Database a Management "
"System. <application>MySQL</application> or "
"<application>PostgreSQL</application> are the most common, choose one "
"depending on your need. Please refer to those sections in this manual for "
"installation instructions."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/lamp-applications.xml:297(para)
msgid ""
"To install <application>MediaWiki</application>, run the following command "
"in the command prompt:"
msgstr "<application>MediaWiki</application>를 설치하려면, 명령행에서 다음을 실행하세요:"

#: serverguide/C/lamp-applications.xml:303(command)
msgid "sudo apt-get install mediawiki php5-gd"
msgstr "sudo apt-get install mediawiki php5-gd"

#: serverguide/C/lamp-applications.xml:306(para)
msgid ""
"For additional <application>MediaWiki</application> functionality see the "
"<application>mediawiki-extensions</application> package."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/lamp-applications.xml:316(para)
msgid ""
"The Apache configuration file <filename>mediawiki.conf</filename> for "
"MediaWiki is installed in <filename>/etc/apache2/conf.d/</filename> "
"directory. You should uncomment the following line in this file to access "
"MediaWiki application."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/lamp-applications.xml:324(screen)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"# Alias /mediawiki /var/lib/mediawiki\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/lamp-applications.xml:328(para)
msgid ""
"After you uncomment the above line, restart Apache server and access "
"MediaWiki using the following url:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/lamp-applications.xml:333(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"http://localhost/mediawiki/config/index.php\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/lamp-applications.xml:338(para)
msgid ""
"Please read the <quote>Checking environment...</quote> section in this page. "
"You should be able to fix many issues by carefully reading this section."
msgstr ""
"이 페이지의 <quote>환경 점검...</quote> 부분을 읽어보십시오. 이 부분을 주의깊게 읽는다면 많은 문제점들을 해결할 수 있게 "
"될 것입니다."

#: serverguide/C/lamp-applications.xml:345(para)
msgid ""
"Once the configuration is complete, you should copy the "
"<filename>LocalSettings.php</filename> file to "
"<filename>/etc/mediawiki</filename> directory:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/lamp-applications.xml:352(command)
msgid "sudo mv /var/lib/mediawiki/config/LocalSettings.php /etc/mediawiki/"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/lamp-applications.xml:355(para)
msgid ""
"You may also want to edit "
"<filename>/etc/mediawiki/LocalSettings.php</filename> adjusting:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/lamp-applications.xml:360(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"ini_set( 'memory_limit', '64M' );\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/lamp-applications.xml:367(title)
msgid "Extensions"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/lamp-applications.xml:368(para)
msgid ""
"The extensions add new features and enhancements for the MediaWiki "
"application. The extensions give wiki administrators and end users the "
"ability to customize MediaWiki to their requirements."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/lamp-applications.xml:374(para)
msgid ""
"You can download MediaWiki extensions as an archive file or checkout from "
"the Subversion repository. You should copy it to "
"<filename>/var/lib/mediawiki/extensions</filename> directory. You should "
"also add the following line at the end of file: "
"<filename>/etc/mediawiki/LocalSettings.php</filename>."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/lamp-applications.xml:382(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"require_once \"$IP/extensions/ExtentionName/ExtentionName.php\";\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/lamp-applications.xml:392(para)
msgid ""
"For more details, please refer to the <ulink "
"url=\"http://www.mediawiki.org\">MediaWiki</ulink> web site."
msgstr ""
"자세한 사항은 <ulink url=\"http://www.mediawiki.org\">MediaWiki</ulink> 웹사이트를 방문해 "
"보십시오."

#: serverguide/C/lamp-applications.xml:398(para)
msgid ""
"The <ulink url=\"http://www.packtpub.com/Mediawiki/book\">MediaWiki "
"Administrators’ Tutorial Guide</ulink> contains a wealth of information for "
"new MediaWiki administrators."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/lamp-applications.xml:404(para)
msgid ""
"Also, the <ulink url=\"https://help.ubuntu.com/community/MediaWiki\">Ubuntu "
"Wiki MediaWiki</ulink> page is a good resource."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/lamp-applications.xml:414(title)
msgid "phpMyAdmin"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/lamp-applications.xml:416(para)
msgid ""
"<application>phpMyAdmin</application> is a LAMP application specifically "
"written for administering <application>MySQL</application> servers. Written "
"in <application>PHP</application>, and accessed through a web browser, "
"phpMyAdmin provides a graphical interface for database administration tasks."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/lamp-applications.xml:425(para)
msgid ""
"Before installing <application>phpMyAdmin</application> you will need access "
"to a <application>MySQL</application> database either on the same host as "
"that phpMyAdmin is installed on, or on a host accessible over the network. "
"For more information see <xref linkend=\"mysql\"/>. From a terminal prompt "
"enter:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/lamp-applications.xml:432(command)
msgid "sudo apt-get install phpmyadmin"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/lamp-applications.xml:435(para)
msgid ""
"At the prompt choose which web server to be configured for "
"<application>phpMyAdmin</application>. The rest of this section will use "
"<application>Apache2</application> for the web server."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/lamp-applications.xml:440(para)
msgid ""
"In a browser go to <emphasis>http://servername/phpmyadmin</emphasis>, "
"replacing <emphasis role=\"italic\">serveranme</emphasis> with the server's "
"actual hostname. At the login, page enter <emphasis>root</emphasis> for the "
"<emphasis>username</emphasis>, or another <application>MySQL</application> "
"user if you any setup, and enter the <application>MySQL</application> user's "
"password."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/lamp-applications.xml:447(para)
msgid ""
"Once logged in you can reset the <emphasis>root</emphasis> password if "
"needed, create users, create/destroy databases and tables, etc."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/lamp-applications.xml:455(para)
msgid ""
"The configuration files for <application>phpMyAdmin</application> are "
"located in <filename>/etc/phpmyadmin</filename>. The main configuration file "
"is <filename>/etc/phpmyadmin/config.inc.php</filename>. This file contains "
"configuration options that apply globally to "
"<application>phpMyAdmin</application>."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/lamp-applications.xml:461(para)
msgid ""
"To use <application>phpMyAdmin</application> to administer a MySQL database "
"hosted on another server, adjust the following in "
"<filename>/etc/phpmyadmin/config.inc.php</filename>:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/lamp-applications.xml:466(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"$cfg['Servers'][$i]['host'] = 'db_server';\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/lamp-applications.xml:471(para)
msgid ""
"Replace <emphasis role=\"italic\">db_server</emphasis> with the actual "
"remote database server name or IP address. Also, be sure that the "
"<application>phpMyAdmin</application> host has permissions to access the "
"remote database."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/lamp-applications.xml:477(para)
msgid ""
"Once configured, log out of <application>phpMyAdmin</application> and back "
"in, and you should be accessing the new server."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/lamp-applications.xml:481(para)
msgid ""
"The <filename>config.header.inc.php</filename> and "
"<filename>config.footer.inc.php</filename> files are used to add a HTML "
"header and footer to <application>phpMyAdmin</application>."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/lamp-applications.xml:486(para)
msgid ""
"Another important configuration file is "
"<filename>/etc/phpmyadmin/apache.conf</filename>, this file is symlinked to "
"<filename>/etc/apache2/conf.d/phpmyadmin.conf</filename>, and is used to "
"configure <application>Apache2</application> to serve the "
"<application>phpMyAdmin</application> site. The file contains directives for "
"loading <application>PHP</application>, directory permissions, etc. For more "
"information on configuring <application>Apache2</application> see <xref "
"linkend=\"httpd\"/>."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/lamp-applications.xml:500(para)
msgid ""
"The <application>phpMyAdmin</application> documentation comes installed with "
"the package and can be accessed from the <emphasis>phpMyAdmin "
"Documentation</emphasis> link (a question mark with a box around it) under "
"the phpMyAdmin logo. The official docs can also be access on the <ulink "
"url=\"http://www.phpmyadmin.net/home_page/docs.php\">phpMyAdmin</ulink> site."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/lamp-applications.xml:507(para)
msgid ""
"Also, <ulink url=\"http://www.packtpub.com/phpmyadmin-3rd-"
"edition/book\">Mastering phpMyAdmin</ulink> is a great resource."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/lamp-applications.xml:512(para)
msgid ""
"A third resource is the <ulink "
"url=\"https://help.ubuntu.com/community/phpMyAdmin\">phpMyAdmin Ubuntu "
"Wiki</ulink> page."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/introduction.xml:14(para)
msgid "Welcome to the <emphasis>Ubuntu Server Guide</emphasis>!"
msgstr "<emphasis>우분투 서버 안내서</emphasis>에 온 것을 환영합니다!"

#: serverguide/C/introduction.xml:15(para)
msgid ""
"Here you can find information on how to install and configure various server "
"applications. It is a step-by-step, task-oriented guide for configuring and "
"customizing your system."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/introduction.xml:19(para)
msgid ""
"This guide assumes you have a basic understanding of your Ubuntu system. "
"Some installation details are covered in <xref linkend=\"installation\"/>, "
"but if you need detailed instructions installing Ubuntu please refer to the "
"<ulink url=\"https://help.ubuntu.com/10.04 LTS/installation-guide/\">Ubuntu "
"Installation Guide</ulink>."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/introduction.xml:25(para)
msgid ""
"A HTML version of the manual is available online at <ulink "
"url=\"http://help.ubuntu.com\">the Ubuntu Documentation website</ulink>. The "
"HTML files are also available in the <application>ubuntu-"
"serverguide</application> package. See <xref linkend=\"package-"
"management\"/> for details on installing packages."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/introduction.xml:32(para)
msgid ""
"If you choose to install the <application>ubuntu-serverguide</application> "
"you can view this document from a console by:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/introduction.xml:36(command)
msgid "w3m /usr/share/ubuntu-serverguide/html/C/index.html"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/introduction.xml:39(para)
msgid ""
"If you are using a localized version of Ubuntu, replace "
"<emphasis>C</emphasis> with your language localization (e.g. "
"<emphasis>en_GB</emphasis>)."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/introduction.xml:53(title)
msgid "Support"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/introduction.xml:55(para)
msgid ""
"There are a couple of different ways that Ubuntu Server Edition is "
"supported, commercial support and community support. The main commercial "
"support (and development funding) is available from Canonical Ltd. They "
"supply reasonably priced support contracts on a per desktop or per server "
"basis. For more information see the <ulink "
"url=\"http://www.canonical.com/services/support\">Canonical Services</ulink> "
"page."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/introduction.xml:62(para)
msgid ""
"Community support is also provided by dedicated individuals, and companies, "
"that wish to make Ubuntu the best distribution possible. Support is provided "
"through multiple mailing lists, IRC channels, forums, blogs, wikis, etc. The "
"large amount of information available can be overwhelming, but a good search "
"engine query can usually provide an answer to your questions. See the <ulink "
"url=\"http://www.ubuntu.com/support\">Ubuntu Support</ulink> page for more "
"information."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:14(para)
msgid ""
"This chapter provides a quick overview of installing Ubuntu 10.04 LTS Server "
"Edition. For more detailed instructions, please refer to the <ulink "
"url=\"https://help.ubuntu.com/10.04 LTS/installation-guide/\">Ubuntu "
"Installation Guide</ulink>."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:19(title)
msgid "Preparing to Install"
msgstr "설치 준비하기"

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:20(para)
msgid ""
"This section explains various aspects to consider before starting the "
"installation."
msgstr "이 영역은 설치를 시작하기 전에 고려할 만한 다양한 측면을 설명 합니다."

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:24(title)
msgid "System Requirements"
msgstr "시스템 요구 사항"

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:25(para)
msgid ""
"Ubuntu 10.04 LTS Server Edition supports two (2) major architectures: Intel "
"x86 and AMD64. The table below lists recommended hardware specifications. "
"Depending on your needs, you might manage with less than this. However, most "
"users risk being frustrated if they ignore these suggestions."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:27(title)
msgid "Recommended Minimum Requirements"
msgstr "권장되는 최소한의 요구 사항"

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:35(para)
msgid "Install Type"
msgstr "설치 종류"

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:36(para)
msgid "RAM"
msgstr "RAM"

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:37(para)
msgid "Hard Drive Space"
msgstr "하드 드라이브 용량"

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:40(para)
msgid "Base System"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:41(para)
msgid "All Tasks Installed"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:46(para)
msgid "Server"
msgstr "서버"

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:47(para)
msgid "128 megabytes"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:48(para)
msgid "500 megabytes"
msgstr "500 메가바이트"

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:49(para)
msgid "1 gigabyte"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:54(para)
msgid ""
"The Server Edition provides a common base for all sorts of server "
"applications. It is a minimalist design providing a platform for the desired "
"services, such as file/print services, web hosting, email hosting, etc."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:60(para)
msgid ""
"The requirements for UEC are slightly different for Front End requirements "
"see <xref linkend=\"uec-frontend-requirements\"/> and for UEC Node "
"requirements see <xref linkend=\"uec-node-requirements\"/>."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:68(title)
msgid "Server and Desktop Differences"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:69(para)
msgid ""
"There are a few differences between the <emphasis>Ubuntu Server "
"Edition</emphasis> and the <emphasis>Ubuntu Desktop Edition</emphasis>. It "
"should be noted that both editions use the same "
"<application>apt</application> repositories. Making it just as easy to "
"install a <emphasis role=\"italic\">server</emphasis> application on the "
"Desktop Edition as it is on the Server Edition."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:75(para)
msgid ""
"The differences between the two editions are the lack of an X window "
"environment in the Server Edition, the installation process, and different "
"Kernel options."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:82(title)
msgid "Kernel Differences:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:85(para)
msgid ""
"The Server Edition uses the <emphasis>Deadline</emphasis> I/O scheduler "
"instead of the <emphasis>CFQ</emphasis> scheduler used by the Desktop "
"Edition."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:91(para)
msgid "<emphasis>Preemption</emphasis> is turned off in the Server Edition."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:96(para)
msgid ""
"The timer interrupt is 100 Hz in the Server Edition and 250 Hz in the "
"Desktop Edition."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:102(para)
msgid ""
"When running a 64-bit version of Ubuntu on 64-bit processors you are not "
"limited by memory addressing space."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:107(para)
msgid ""
"To see all kernel configuration options you can look through "
"<filename>/boot/config-2.6.31-server</filename>. Also, <ulink "
"url=\"http://www.kroah.com/lkn/\">Linux Kernel in a Nutshell</ulink> is a "
"great resource on the options available."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:116(title)
msgid "Backing Up"
msgstr "백업 하기"

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:119(para)
msgid ""
"Before installing <application>Ubuntu Server Edition</application> you "
"should make sure all data on the system is backed up. See <xref "
"linkend=\"backups\"/> for backup options."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:123(para)
msgid ""
"If this is not the first time an operating system has been installed on your "
"computer, it is likely you will need to re-partition your disk to make room "
"for Ubuntu."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:127(para)
msgid ""
"Any time you partition your disk, you should be prepared to lose everything "
"on the disk should you make a mistake or something goes wrong during "
"partitioning. The programs used in installation are quite reliable, most "
"have seen years of use, but they also perform destructive actions."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:139(title)
msgid "Installing from CD"
msgstr "CD에서 설치"

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:140(para)
msgid ""
"The basic steps to install Ubuntu Server Edition from CD are the same for "
"installing any operating system from CD. Unlike the <emphasis>Desktop "
"Edition</emphasis> the <emphasis>Server Edition</emphasis> does not include "
"a graphical installation program. Instead the Server Edition uses a console "
"menu based process."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:147(para)
msgid ""
"First, download and burn the appropriate ISO file from the <ulink "
"url=\"http://www.ubuntu.com/getubuntu/download\"> Ubuntu web site</ulink>."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:153(para)
msgid "Boot the system from the CD-ROM drive."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:158(para)
msgid ""
"At the boot prompt you will be asked to select the language. Afterwards the "
"installation process begins by asking for your keyboard layout."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:164(para)
msgid ""
"From the main boot menu there are some additional options to install Ubuntu "
"Server Edition. You can install a basic Ubuntu Server, or install Ubuntu "
"Server as part of a <emphasis>Ubuntu Enterprise Cloud</emphasis>. For more "
"information on UEC see <xref linkend=\"uec\"/>. The rest of this section "
"will cover the basic Ubuntu Server install."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:172(para)
msgid ""
"The installer then discovers your hardware configuration, and configures the "
"network settings using DHCP. If you do not wish to use DHCP at the next "
"screen choose \"Go Back\", and you have the option to \"Configure the "
"network manually\"."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:179(para)
msgid "Next, the installer asks for the system's hostname and Time Zone."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:184(para)
msgid ""
"You can then choose from several options to configure the hard drive layout. "
"For advanced disk options see <xref linkend=\"advanced-installation\"/>."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:190(para)
msgid "The Ubuntu base system is then installed."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:195(para)
msgid ""
"A new user is setup, this user will have <emphasis>root</emphasis> access "
"through the <application>sudo</application> utility."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:201(para)
msgid ""
"After the user is setup, you will be asked to encrypt your <filename "
"role=\"directory\">home</filename> directory."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:207(para)
msgid ""
"The next step in the installation process is to decide how you want to "
"update the system. There are three options:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:213(para)
msgid ""
"<emphasis>No automatic updates</emphasis>: this requires an administrator to "
"log into the machine and manually install updates."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:219(para)
msgid ""
"<emphasis>Install security updates Automatically</emphasis>: will install "
"the <application>unattended-upgrades</application> package, which will "
"install security updates without the intervention of an administrator. For "
"more details see <xref linkend=\"automatic-updates\"/>."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:226(para)
msgid ""
"<emphasis>Manage the system with Landscape</emphasis>: Landscape is a paid "
"service provided by Canonical to help manage your Ubuntu machines. See the "
"<ulink url=\"http://www.canonical.com/projects/landscape\">Landscape</ulink> "
"site for details."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:235(para)
msgid ""
"You now have the option to install, or not install, several package tasks. "
"See <xref linkend=\"install-tasks\"/> for details. Also, there is an option "
"to launch <application>aptitude</application> to choose specific packages to "
"install. For more information see <xref linkend=\"aptitude\"/>."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:243(para)
msgid "Finally, the last step before rebooting is to set the clock to UTC."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:249(para)
msgid ""
"If at any point during installation you are not satisfied by the default "
"setting, use the \"Go Back\" function at any prompt to be brought to a "
"detailed installation menu that will allow you to modify the default "
"settings."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:254(para)
msgid ""
"At some point during the installation process you may want to read the help "
"screen provided by the installation system. To do this, press F1."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:259(para)
msgid ""
"Once again, for detailed instructions see the <ulink "
"url=\"https://help.ubuntu.com/10.04 LTS/installation-guide/\"> Ubuntu "
"Installation Guide</ulink>."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:265(title)
msgid "Package Tasks"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:266(para)
msgid ""
"During the Server Edition installation you have the option of installing "
"additional packages from the CD. The packages are grouped by the type of "
"service they provide."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:272(para)
msgid "Cloud computing: Walrus storage service"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:277(para)
msgid "Cloud computing: all-in-one cluster"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:282(para)
msgid "Cloud computing: Cluster controller"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:287(para)
msgid "Cloud computing: Node controller"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:292(para)
msgid "Cloud computing: Storage controller"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:297(para)
msgid "Cloud computing: top-level cloud controller"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:302(para)
msgid "DNS server: Selects the BIND DNS server and its documentation."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:307(para)
msgid "LAMP server: Selects a ready-made Linux/Apache/MySQL/PHP server."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:312(para)
msgid ""
"Mail server: This task selects a variety of package useful for a general "
"purpose mail server system."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:317(para)
msgid "OpenSSH server: Selects packages needed for an OpenSSH server."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:322(para)
msgid ""
"PostgreSQL database: This task selects client and server packages for the "
"PostgreSQL database."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:327(para)
msgid "Print server: This task sets up your system to be a print server."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:332(para)
msgid ""
"Samba File server: This task sets up your system to be a Samba file server, "
"which is especially suitable in networks with both Windows and Linux systems."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:338(para)
msgid ""
"Tomcat server: Installs the Apache Tomcat and needed dependencies Java, gcj, "
"etc."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:343(para)
msgid ""
"Virtual machine host: Includes packages needed to run KVM virtual machines."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:348(para)
msgid ""
"Manually select packages: Executes <application>apptitude</application> "
"allowing you to individually select packages."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:353(para)
msgid ""
"Installing the package groups is accomplished using the "
"<application>tasksel</application> utility. One of the important difference "
"between Ubuntu (or Debian) and other GNU/Linux distribution is that, when "
"installed, a package is also configured to reasonable defaults, eventually "
"prompting you for additional required information. Likewise, when installing "
"a task, the packages are not only installed, but also configured to provided "
"a fully integrated service."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:360(para)
msgid ""
"For more information on the <emphasis>Cloud Computing</emphasis> tasks see "
"<xref linkend=\"uec\"/>."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:363(para)
msgid ""
"Once the installation process has finished you can view a list of available "
"tasks by entering the following from a terminal prompt:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:368(command)
msgid "tasksel --list-tasks"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:371(para)
msgid ""
"The output will list tasks from other Ubuntu based distributions such as "
"Kubuntu and Edubuntu. Note that you can also invoke the "
"<command>tasksel</command> command by itself, which will bring up a menu of "
"the different tasks available."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:377(para)
msgid ""
"You can view a list of which packages are installed with each task using the "
"<emphasis>--task-packages</emphasis> option. For example, to list the "
"packages installed with the <emphasis>DNS Server</emphasis> task enter the "
"following:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:382(command)
msgid "tasksel --task-packages dns-server"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:384(para)
msgid "The output of the command should list:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:387(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"bind9-doc \n"
"bind9utils \n"
"bind9\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:392(para)
msgid ""
"Also, if you did not install one of the tasks during the installation "
"process, but for example you decide to make your new LAMP server a DNS "
"server as well. Simply insert the installation CD and from a terminal:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:397(command)
msgid "sudo tasksel install dns-server"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:402(title)
msgid "Upgrading"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:403(para)
msgid ""
"There are several ways to upgrade from one Ubuntu release to another. This "
"section gives an overview of the recommended upgrade method."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:407(title) serverguide/C/installation.xml:422(command)
msgid "do-release-upgrade"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:408(para)
msgid ""
"The recommended way to upgrade a Server Edition installation is to use the "
"<application>do-release-upgrade</application> utility. Part of the "
"<emphasis>update-manager-core</emphasis> package, it does not have any "
"graphical dependencies and is installed by default."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:413(para)
msgid ""
"Debian based systems can also be upgraded by using <command>apt-get dist-"
"upgrade</command>. However, using <application>do-release-"
"upgrade</application> is recommended because it has the ability to handle "
"system configuration changes sometimes needed between releases."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:418(para)
msgid "To upgrade to a newer release, from a terminal prompt enter:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:424(para)
msgid ""
"It is also possible to use <application>do-release-upgrade</application> to "
"upgrade to a development version of Ubuntu. To accomplish this use the "
"<emphasis>-d</emphasis> switch:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:429(command)
msgid "do-release-upgrade -d"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:432(para)
msgid ""
"Upgrading to a development release is <emphasis>not</emphasis> recommended "
"for production environments."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:439(title)
msgid "Advanced Installation"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:442(title)
msgid "Software RAID"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:444(para)
msgid ""
"RAID is a method of configuring multiple hard drives to act as one, reducing "
"the probability of catastrophic data loss in case of drive failure. RAID is "
"implemented in either software (where the operating system knows about both "
"drives and actively maintains both of them) or hardware (where a special "
"controller makes the OS think there's only one drive and maintains the "
"drives 'invisibly')."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:451(para)
msgid ""
"The RAID software included with current versions of Linux (and Ubuntu) is "
"based on the <application>'mdadm'</application> driver and works very well, "
"better even than many so-called 'hardware' RAID controllers. This section "
"will guide you through installing Ubuntu Server Edition using two RAID1 "
"partitions on two physical hard drives, one for <emphasis>/</emphasis> and "
"another for <emphasis>swap</emphasis>."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:461(para) serverguide/C/installation.xml:975(para)
msgid ""
"Follow the installation steps until you get to the <emphasis>Partition "
"disks</emphasis> step, then:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:468(para)
msgid "Select <emphasis>Manual</emphasis> as the partition method."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:475(para)
msgid ""
"Select the first hard drive, and agree to <emphasis>\"Create a new empty "
"partition table on this device?\"</emphasis>."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:479(para)
msgid ""
"Repeat this step for each drive you wish to be part of the RAID array."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:486(para)
msgid ""
"Select the <emphasis>\"FREE SPACE\"</emphasis> on the first drive then "
"select <emphasis>\"Create a new partition\"</emphasis>."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:493(para)
msgid ""
"Next, select the <emphasis>Size</emphasis> of the partition. This partition "
"will be the <emphasis>swap</emphasis> partition, and a general rule for swap "
"size is twice that of RAM. Enter the partition size, then choose "
"<emphasis>Primary</emphasis>, then <emphasis>Beginning</emphasis>."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:502(para)
msgid ""
"Select the <emphasis>\"Use as:\"</emphasis> line at the top. By default this "
"is <emphasis role=\"italic\">\"Ext4 journaling file system\"</emphasis>, "
"change that to <emphasis>\"physical volume for RAID\"</emphasis> then "
"<emphasis>\"Done setting up partition\"</emphasis>."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:511(para)
msgid ""
"For the <emphasis>/</emphasis> partition once again select <emphasis>\"Free "
"Space\"</emphasis> on the first drive then <emphasis>\"Create a new "
"partition\"</emphasis>."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:519(para)
msgid ""
"Use the rest of the free space on the drive and choose "
"<emphasis>Continue</emphasis>, then <emphasis>Primary</emphasis>."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:526(para)
msgid ""
"As with the swap partition, select the <emphasis>\"Use as:\"</emphasis> line "
"at the top, changing it to <emphasis>\"physical volume for "
"RAID\"</emphasis>. Also select the <emphasis>\"Bootable flag:\"</emphasis> "
"line to change the value to <emphasis>\"on\"</emphasis>. Then choose "
"<emphasis>\"Done setting up partition\"</emphasis>."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:536(para)
msgid "Repeat steps three through eight for the other disk and partitions."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:545(title)
msgid "RAID Configuration"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:547(para)
msgid "With the partitions setup the arrays are ready to be configured:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:554(para)
msgid ""
"Back in the main \"Partition Disks\" page, select <emphasis>\"Configure "
"Software RAID\"</emphasis> at the top."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:561(para)
msgid "Select <emphasis>\"yes\"</emphasis> to write the changes to disk."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:568(para)
msgid "Choose <emphasis>\"Create MD device\"</emphasis>."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:575(para)
msgid ""
"For this example, select <emphasis>\"RAID1\"</emphasis>, but if you are "
"using a different setup choose the appropriate type (RAID0 RAID1 RAID5)."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:581(para)
msgid ""
"In order to use <emphasis>RAID5</emphasis> you need at least "
"<emphasis>three</emphasis> drives. Using RAID0 or RAID1 only "
"<emphasis>two</emphasis> drives are required."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:590(para)
msgid ""
"Enter the number of active devices <emphasis>\"2\"</emphasis>, or the amount "
"of hard drives you have, for the array. Then select "
"<emphasis>\"Continue\"</emphasis>."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:598(para)
msgid ""
"Next, enter the number of spare devices <emphasis>\"0\"</emphasis> by "
"default, then choose <emphasis>\"Continue\"</emphasis>."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:605(para)
msgid ""
"Choose which partitions to use. Generally they will be sda1, sdb1, sdc1, "
"etc. The numbers will usually match and the different letters correspond to "
"different hard drives."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:610(para)
msgid ""
"For the <emphasis>swap</emphasis> partition choose <emphasis>sda1</emphasis> "
"and <emphasis>sdb1</emphasis>. Select <emphasis>\"Continue\"</emphasis> to "
"go to the next step."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:618(para)
msgid ""
"Repeat steps <emphasis>three</emphasis> through <emphasis>seven</emphasis> "
"for the <emphasis>/</emphasis> partition choosing <emphasis>sda2</emphasis> "
"and <emphasis>sdb2</emphasis>."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:626(para)
msgid "Once done select <emphasis>\"Finish\"</emphasis>."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:636(title)
msgid "Formatting"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:638(para)
msgid ""
"There should now be a list of hard drives and RAID devices. The next step is "
"to format and set the mount point for the RAID devices. Treat the RAID "
"device as a local hard drive, format and mount accordingly."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:646(para)
msgid ""
"Select <emphasis>\"#1\"</emphasis> under the <emphasis>\"RAID1 device "
"#0\"</emphasis> partition."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:653(para)
msgid ""
"Choose <emphasis>\"Use as:\"</emphasis>. Then select <emphasis>\"swap "
"area\"</emphasis>, then <emphasis>\"Done setting up partition\"</emphasis>."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:661(para)
msgid ""
"Next, select <emphasis>\"#1\"</emphasis> under the <emphasis>\"RAID1 device "
"#1\"</emphasis> partition."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:668(para)
msgid ""
"Choose <emphasis>\"Use as:\"</emphasis>. Then select <emphasis>\"Ext4 "
"journaling file system\"</emphasis>."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:675(para)
msgid ""
"Then select the <emphasis>\"Mount point\"</emphasis> and choose "
"<emphasis>\"/ - the root file system\"</emphasis>. Change any of the other "
"options as appropriate, then select <emphasis>\"Done setting up "
"partition\"</emphasis>."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:683(para)
msgid ""
"Finally, select <emphasis>\"Finish partitioning and write changes to "
"disk\"</emphasis>."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:690(para)
msgid ""
"If you choose to place the root partition on a RAID array, the installer "
"will then ask if you would like to boot in a <emphasis>degraded</emphasis> "
"state. See <xref linkend=\"raid-degraded\"/> for further details."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:695(para)
msgid "The installation process will then continue normally."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:701(title)
msgid "Degraded RAID"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:703(para)
msgid ""
"At some point in the life of the computer a disk failure event may occur. "
"When this happens, using Software RAID, the operating system will place the "
"array into what is known as a <emphasis>degraded</emphasis> state."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:708(para)
msgid ""
"If the array has become degraded, due to the chance of data corruption, by "
"default Ubuntu Server Edition will boot to <emphasis>initramfs</emphasis> "
"after thirty seconds. Once the initramfs has booted there is a fifteen "
"second prompt giving you the option to go ahead and boot the system, or "
"attempt manual recover. Booting to the initramfs prompt may or may not be "
"the desired behavior, especially if the machine is in a remote location. "
"Booting to a degraded array can be configured several ways:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:719(para)
msgid ""
"The <application>dpkg-reconfigure</application> utility can be used to "
"configure the default behavior, and during the process you will be queried "
"about additional settings related to the array. Such as monitoring, email "
"alerts, etc. To reconfigure <application>mdadm</application> enter the "
"following:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:726(command)
msgid "sudo dpkg-reconfigure mdadm"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:732(para)
msgid ""
"The <command>dpkg-reconfigure mdadm</command> process will change the "
"<filename>/etc/initramfs-tools/conf.d/mdadm</filename> configuration file. "
"The file has the advantage of being able to pre-configure the system's "
"behavior, and can also be manually edited:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:738(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"BOOT_DEGRADED=true\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:743(para)
msgid "The configuration file can be overridden by using a Kernel argument."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:751(para)
msgid ""
"Using a Kernel argument will allow the system to boot to a degraded array as "
"well:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:757(para)
msgid ""
"When the server is booting press <keycap>Shift</keycap> to open the "
"<application>Grub</application> menu."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:762(para)
msgid "Press <keycap>e</keycap> to edit your kernel command options."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:767(para)
msgid "Press the <keycap>down</keycap> arrow to highlight the kernel line."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:772(para)
msgid ""
"Add <emphasis>\"bootdegraded=true\"</emphasis> (without the quotes) to the "
"end of the line."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:777(para)
msgid ""
"Press <keycombo><keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keycap>x</keycap></keycombo> to boot "
"the system."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:786(para)
msgid ""
"Once the system has booted you can either repair the array see <xref "
"linkend=\"raid-maintenance\"/> for details, or copy important data to "
"another machine due to major hardware failure."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:793(title)
msgid "RAID Maintenance"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:795(para)
msgid ""
"The <application>mdadm</application> utility can be used to view the status "
"of an array, add disks to an array, remove disks, etc:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:802(para)
msgid "To view the status of an array, from a terminal prompt enter:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:806(command)
msgid "sudo mdadm -D /dev/md0"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:809(para)
msgid ""
"The <emphasis>-D</emphasis> tells <application>mdadm</application> to "
"display <emphasis>detailed</emphasis> information about the "
"<filename>/dev/md0</filename> device. Replace <filename>/dev/md0</filename> "
"with the appropriate RAID device."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:815(para)
msgid "To view the status of a disk in an array:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:819(command)
msgid "sudo mdadm -E /dev/sda1"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:821(para)
msgid ""
"The output if very similar to the <command>mdadm -D</command> command, "
"adjust <filename>/dev/sda1</filename> for each disk."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:826(para)
msgid "If a disk fails and needs to be removed from an array enter:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:830(command)
msgid "sudo mdadm --remove /dev/md0 /dev/sda1"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:832(para)
msgid ""
"Change <filename>/dev/md0</filename> and <filename>/dev/sda1</filename> to "
"the appropriate RAID device and disk."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:837(para)
msgid "Similarly, to add a new disk:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:841(command)
msgid "sudo mdadm --add /dev/md0 /dev/sda1"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:846(para)
msgid ""
"Sometimes a disk can change to a <emphasis>faulty</emphasis> state even "
"though there is nothing physically wrong with the drive. It is usually "
"worthwhile to remove the drive from the array then re-add it. This will "
"cause the drive to re-sync with the array. If the drive will not sync with "
"the array, it is a good indication of hardware failure."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:852(para)
msgid ""
"The <filename>/proc/mdstat</filename> file also contains useful information "
"about the system's RAID devices:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:857(command)
msgid "cat /proc/mdstat"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:858(computeroutput)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"Personalities : [linear] [multipath] [raid0] [raid1] [raid6] [raid5] [raid4] "
"[raid10] \n"
"md0 : active raid1 sda1[0] sdb1[1]\n"
"      10016384 blocks [2/2] [UU]\n"
"      \n"
"unused devices: &lt;none&gt;"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:865(para)
msgid ""
"The following command is great for watching the status of a syncing drive:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:870(command)
msgid "watch -n1 cat /proc/mdstat"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:873(para)
msgid ""
"Press <emphasis>Ctrl+c</emphasis> to stop the "
"<application>watch</application> command."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:877(para)
msgid ""
"If you do need to replace a faulty drive, after the drive has been replaced "
"and synced, <application>grub</application> will need to be installed. To "
"install <application>grub</application> on the new drive, enter the "
"following:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:883(command)
msgid "sudo grub-install /dev/md0"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:886(para)
msgid ""
"Replace <filename>/dev/md0</filename> with the appropriate array device name."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:894(para)
msgid ""
"The topic of RAID arrays is a complex one due to the plethora of ways RAID "
"can be configured. Please see the following links for more information:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:901(para)
msgid ""
"<ulink url=\"https://help.ubuntu.com/community/Installation#raid\">Ubuntu "
"Wiki Articles on RAID</ulink>."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:907(ulink)
msgid "Software RAID HOWTO"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:912(ulink)
msgid "Managing RAID on Linux"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:919(title)
msgid "Logical Volume Manager (LVM)"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:921(para)
msgid ""
"Logical Volume Manger, or <emphasis>LVM</emphasis>, allows administrators to "
"create <emphasis>logical</emphasis> volumes out of one or multiple physical "
"hard disks. LVM volumes can be created on both software RAID partitions and "
"standard partitions residing on a single disk. Volumes can also be extended, "
"giving greater flexibility to systems as requirements change."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:930(para)
msgid ""
"A side effect of LVM's power and flexibility is a greater degree of "
"complication. Before diving into the LVM installation process, it is best to "
"get familiar with some terms."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:937(para)
msgid ""
"<emphasis>Volume Group (VG):</emphasis> contains one or several Logical "
"Volumes (LV)."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:942(para)
msgid ""
"<emphasis>Logical Volume (LV):</emphasis> is similar to a partition in a non-"
"LVM system. Multiple Physical Volumes (PV) can make up one LV, on top of "
"which resides the actual EXT3, XFS, JFS, etc filesystem."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:948(para)
msgid ""
"<emphasis>Physical Volume (PV):</emphasis> physical hard disk or software "
"RAID partition. The Volume Group can be extended by adding more PVs."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:959(para)
msgid ""
"As an example this section covers installing Ubuntu Server Edition with "
"<filename role=\"directory\">/srv</filename> mounted on a LVM volume. During "
"the initial install only one Physical Volume (PV) will be part of the Volume "
"Group (VG). Another PV will be added after install to demonstrate how a VG "
"can be extended."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:965(para)
msgid ""
"There are several installation options for LVM, <emphasis>\"Guided - use the "
"entire disk and setup LVM\"</emphasis> which will also allow you to assign a "
"portion of the available space to LVM, <emphasis>\"Guided - use entire and "
"setup encrypted LVM\"</emphasis>, or <emphasis>Manually</emphasis> setup the "
"partitions and configure LVM. At this time the only way to configure a "
"system with both LVM and standard partitions, during installation, is to use "
"the Manual approach."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:982(para)
msgid ""
"At the <emphasis>\"Partition Disks</emphasis> screen choose "
"<emphasis>\"Manual\"</emphasis>."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:989(para)
msgid ""
"Select the hard disk and on the next screen choose \"yes\" to "
"<emphasis>\"Create a new empty partition table on this device\"</emphasis>."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:996(para)
msgid ""
"Next, create standard <emphasis>/boot</emphasis>, <emphasis>swap</emphasis>, "
"and <emphasis>/</emphasis> partitions with whichever filesystem you prefer."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:1004(para)
msgid ""
"For the LVM <emphasis>/srv</emphasis>, create a new "
"<emphasis>Logical</emphasis> partition. Then change <emphasis>\"Use "
"as\"</emphasis> to <emphasis>\"physical volume for LVM\"</emphasis> then "
"<emphasis>\"Done setting up the partition\"</emphasis>."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:1012(para)
msgid ""
"Now select <emphasis>\"Configure the Logical Volume Manager\"</emphasis> at "
"the top, and choose <emphasis>\"Yes\"</emphasis> to write the changes to "
"disk."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:1020(para)
msgid ""
"For the <emphasis>\"LVM configuration action\"</emphasis> on the next "
"screen, choose <emphasis>\"Create volume group\"</emphasis>. Enter a name "
"for the VG such as <emphasis>vg01</emphasis>, or something more descriptive. "
"After entering a name, select the partition configured for LVM, and choose "
"<emphasis>\"Continue\"</emphasis>."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:1029(para)
msgid ""
"Back at the <emphasis>\"LVM configuration action\"</emphasis> screen, select "
"<emphasis>\"Create logical volume\"</emphasis>. Select the newly created "
"volume group, and enter a name for the new LV, for example "
"<emphasis>srv</emphasis> since that is the intended mount point. Then choose "
"a size, which may be the full partition because it can always be extended "
"later. Choose <emphasis>\"Finish\"</emphasis> and you should be back at the "
"main <emphasis>\"Partition Disks\"</emphasis> screen."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:1039(para)
msgid ""
"Now add a filesystem to the new LVM. Select the partition under "
"<emphasis>\"LVM VG vg01, LV srv\"</emphasis>, or whatever name you have "
"chosen, the choose <emphasis>Use as</emphasis>. Setup a file system as "
"normal selecting <emphasis>/srv</emphasis> as the mount point. Once done, "
"select <emphasis>\"Done setting up the partition\"</emphasis>."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:1048(para)
msgid ""
"Finally, select <emphasis>\"Finish partitioning and write changes to "
"disk\"</emphasis>. Then confirm the changes and continue with the rest of "
"the installation."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:1056(para)
msgid "There are some useful utilities to view information about LVM:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:1061(para)
msgid ""
"<emphasis>vgdisplay:</emphasis> shows information about Volume Groups."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:1062(para)
msgid ""
"<emphasis>lvdisplay:</emphasis> has information about Logical Volumes."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:1063(para)
msgid ""
"<emphasis>pvdisplay:</emphasis> similarly displays information about "
"Physical Volumes."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:1068(title)
msgid "Extending Volume Groups"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:1070(para)
msgid ""
"Continuing with <emphasis>srv</emphasis> as an LVM volume example, this "
"section covers adding a second hard disk, creating a Physical Volume (PV), "
"adding it to the volume group (VG), extending the logical volume <filename "
"role=\"directory\">srv</filename> and finally extending the filesystem. This "
"example assumes a second hard disk has been added to the system. This hard "
"disk will be named <filename>/dev/sdb</filename> in our example. BEWARE: "
"make sure you don't already have an existing <filename>/dev/sdb</filename> "
"before issuing the commands below. You could lose some data if you issue "
"those commands on a non-empty disk. In our example we will use the entire "
"disk as a physical volume (you could choose to create partitions and use "
"them as different physical volumes)"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:1082(para)
msgid "First, create the physical volume, in a terminal execute:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:1087(command)
msgid "sudo pvcreate /dev/sdb"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:1093(para)
msgid "Now extend the Volume Group (VG):"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:1098(command)
msgid "sudo vgextend vg01 /dev/sdb"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:1104(para)
msgid ""
"Use <application>vgdisplay</application> to find out the free physical "
"extents - Free PE / size (the size you can allocate). We will assume a free "
"size of 511 PE (equivalent to 2GB with a PE size of 4MB) and we will use the "
"whole free space available. Use your own PE and/or free space."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:1110(para)
msgid ""
"The Logical Volume (LV) can now be extended by different methods, we will "
"only see how to use the PE to extend the LV:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:1115(command)
msgid "sudo lvextend /dev/vg01/srv -l +511"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:1118(para)
msgid ""
"The <emphasis>-l</emphasis> option allows the LV to be extended using PE. "
"The <emphasis>-L</emphasis> option allows the LV to be extended using Meg, "
"Gig, Tera, etc bytes."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:1126(para)
msgid ""
"Even though you are supposed to be able to <emphasis>expand</emphasis> an "
"ext3 or ext4 filesystem without unmounting it first, it may be a good "
"pratice to unmount it anyway and check the filesystem, so that you don't "
"mess up the day you want to reduce a logical volume (in that case unmounting "
"first is compulsory)."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:1132(para)
msgid ""
"The following commands are for an <emphasis>EXT3</emphasis> or "
"<emphasis>EXT4</emphasis> filesystem. If you are using another filesystem "
"there may be other utilities available."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:1139(command)
msgid "sudo e2fsck -f /dev/vg01/srv"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:1142(para)
msgid ""
"The <emphasis>-f</emphasis> option of <application>e2fsck</application> "
"forces checking even if the system seems clean."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:1149(para)
msgid "Finally, resize the filesystem:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:1154(command)
msgid "sudo resize2fs /dev/vg01/srv"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:1160(para)
msgid "Now mount the partition and check its size."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:1165(command)
msgid "mount /dev/vg01/srv /srv &amp;&amp; df -h /srv"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:1177(para)
msgid ""
"See the <ulink "
"url=\"https://help.ubuntu.com/community/Installation#lvm\">Ubuntu Wiki LVM "
"Articles</ulink>."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:1182(para)
msgid ""
"See the <ulink url=\"http://tldp.org/HOWTO/LVM-HOWTO/index.html\">LVM "
"HOWTO</ulink> for more information."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:1187(para)
msgid ""
"Another good article is <ulink "
"url=\"http://www.linuxdevcenter.com/pub/a/linux/2006/04/27/managing-disk-"
"space-with-lvm.html\">Managing Disk Space with LVM</ulink> on O'Reilly's "
"linuxdevcenter.com site."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/installation.xml:1194(para)
msgid ""
"For more information on <application>fdisk</application> see the <ulink "
"url=\"http://manpages.ubuntu.com/manpages/lucid/en/man8/fdisk.8.html\">fdisk "
"man page</ulink>."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/file-server.xml:13(title)
msgid "File Servers"
msgstr "파일 서버"

#: serverguide/C/file-server.xml:15(para)
msgid ""
"If you have more than one computer on a single network. At some point you "
"will probably need to share files between them. In this section we cover "
"installing and configuring FTP, NFS, and CUPS."
msgstr ""
"만약 단일 네트워크 상에 둘 이상의 컴퓨터를 가지고 있다면, 이 들간에 파일을 공유해야 할 때가 생길 것입니다. 이 부분에서는 FTP, "
"NFS, CUPS 설치 및 설정에 대해 설명합니다."

#: serverguide/C/file-server.xml:22(title)
msgid "FTP Server"
msgstr "FTP 서버"

#: serverguide/C/file-server.xml:24(para)
msgid ""
"File Transfer Protocol (FTP) is a TCP protocol for uploading and downloading "
"files between computers. FTP works on a client/server model. The server "
"component is called an <emphasis>FTP daemon</emphasis>. It continuously "
"listens for FTP requests from remote clients. When a request is received, it "
"manages the login and sets up the connection. For the duration of the "
"session it executes any of commands sent by the FTP client."
msgstr ""
"파일 전송 프로토콜 (FTP)는 컴퓨터들 간에 파일을 올리고 내려받기 위한 TCP 프로토콜 입니다. FTP는 클라이언트/서버 모델로 "
"동작을 합니다. 서버 구성 요소는 <emphasis>FTP 데몬</emphasis>으로 불립니다. 그것은 원격지 클라이언트에서의 FTP "
"요청을 계속적으로 듣습니다. 요청이 접수될 때, 그것은 로그인을 관리하고 접속을 만들어 줍니다. 세션이 지속되는 동안 그것은 FTP "
"클라이언트에서 보내지는 어떠한 명령도 실행을 합니다."

#: serverguide/C/file-server.xml:33(para)
msgid "Access to an FTP server can be managed in two ways:"
msgstr "FTP 서버로 접근하는 것은 다음의 두 가지 방법으로 관리할 수 있습니다:"

#: serverguide/C/file-server.xml:37(para)
msgid "Anonymous"
msgstr "익명"

#: serverguide/C/file-server.xml:40(para)
msgid "Authenticated"
msgstr "인증"

#: serverguide/C/file-server.xml:43(para)
msgid ""
"In the Anonymous mode, remote clients can access the FTP server by using the "
"default user account called \"anonymous\" or \"ftp\" and sending an email "
"address as the password. In the Authenticated mode a user must have an "
"account and a password. User access to the FTP server directories and files "
"is dependent on the permissions defined for the account used at login. As a "
"general rule, the FTP daemon will hide the root directory of the FTP server "
"and change it to the FTP Home directory. This hides the rest of the file "
"system from remote sessions."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/file-server.xml:55(title)
msgid "vsftpd - FTP Server Installation"
msgstr "vsftpd - FTP 서버 설치"

#: serverguide/C/file-server.xml:57(para)
msgid ""
"vsftpd is an FTP daemon available in Ubuntu. It is easy to install, set up, "
"and maintain. To install <application>vsftpd</application> you can run the "
"following command:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/file-server.xml:65(command)
msgid "sudo apt-get install vsftpd"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/file-server.xml:71(title)
msgid "Anonymous FTP Configuration"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/file-server.xml:73(para)
msgid ""
"By default <application>vsftpd</application> is configured to only allow "
"anonymous download. During installation a <emphasis>ftp</emphasis> user is "
"created with a home directory of <filename>/home/ftp</filename>. This is the "
"default FTP directory."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/file-server.xml:80(para)
msgid ""
"If you wish to change this location, to <filename>/srv/ftp</filename> for "
"example, simply create a directory in another location and change the "
"<emphasis>ftp</emphasis> user's home directory:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/file-server.xml:87(command)
msgid "sudo mkdir /srv/ftp"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/file-server.xml:88(command)
msgid "sudo usermod -d /srv/ftp ftp"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/file-server.xml:91(para)
msgid "After making the change restart <application>vsftpd</application>:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/file-server.xml:96(command) serverguide/C/file-server.xml:124(command) serverguide/C/file-server.xml:189(command) serverguide/C/file-server.xml:237(command)
msgid "sudo /etc/init.d/vsftpd restart"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/file-server.xml:99(para)
msgid ""
"Finally, copy any files and directories you would like to make available "
"through anonymous FTP to <filename>/srv/ftp</filename>."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/file-server.xml:106(title)
msgid "User Authenticated FTP Configuration"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/file-server.xml:108(para)
msgid ""
"To configure <application>vsftpd</application> to authenticate system users "
"and allow them to upload files edit <filename>/etc/vsftpd.conf</filename>:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/file-server.xml:114(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"local_enable=YES\n"
"write_enable=YES\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/file-server.xml:119(para)
msgid "Now restart <application>vsftpd</application>:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/file-server.xml:127(para)
msgid ""
"Now when system users login to FTP they will start in their "
"<emphasis>home</emphasis> directories where they can download, upload, "
"create directories, etc."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/file-server.xml:133(para)
msgid ""
"Similarly, by default, the anonymous users are not allowed to upload files "
"to FTP server. To change this setting, you should uncomment the following "
"line, and restart <application>vsftpd</application>:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/file-server.xml:140(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"anon_upload_enable=YES\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/file-server.xml:145(para)
msgid ""
"Enabling anonymous FTP upload can be an extreme security risk. It is best to "
"not enable anonymous upload on servers accessed directly from the Internet."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/file-server.xml:151(para)
msgid ""
"The configuration file consists of many configuration parameters. The "
"information about each parameter is available in the configuration file. "
"Alternatively, you can refer to the man page, <command>man 5 "
"vsftpd.conf</command> for details of each parameter."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/file-server.xml:162(title)
msgid "Securing FTP"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/file-server.xml:164(para)
msgid ""
"There are options in <filename>/etc/vsftpd.conf</filename> to help make "
"<application>vsftpd</application> more secure. For example users can be "
"limited to their home directories by uncommenting:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/file-server.xml:170(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"chroot_local_user=YES\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/file-server.xml:174(para)
msgid ""
"You can also limit a specific list of users to just their home directories:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/file-server.xml:178(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"chroot_list_enable=YES\n"
"chroot_list_file=/etc/vsftpd.chroot_list\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/file-server.xml:183(para)
msgid ""
"After uncommenting the above options, create a "
"<filename>/etc/vsftpd.chroot_list</filename> containing a list of users one "
"per line. Then restart <application>vsftpd</application>:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/file-server.xml:192(para)
msgid ""
"Also, the <filename>/etc/ftpusers</filename> file is a list of users that "
"are <emphasis>disallowed</emphasis> FTP access. The default list includes "
"root, daemon, nobody, etc. To disable FTP access for additional users simply "
"add them to the list."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/file-server.xml:199(para)
msgid ""
"FTP can also be encrypted using <emphasis>FTPS</emphasis>. Different from "
"<emphasis>SFTP</emphasis>, <emphasis>FTPS</emphasis> is FTP over Secure "
"Socket Layer (SSL). <emphasis>SFTP</emphasis> is a FTP like session over an "
"encrypted <emphasis>SSH</emphasis> connection. A major difference is that "
"users of SFTP need to have a <emphasis>shell</emphasis> account on the "
"system, instead of a <emphasis>nologin</emphasis> shell. Providing all users "
"with a shell may not be ideal for some environments, such as a shared web "
"host."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/file-server.xml:208(para)
msgid ""
"To configure <emphasis>FTPS</emphasis>, edit "
"<filename>/etc/vsftpd.conf</filename> and at the bottom add:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/file-server.xml:212(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"ssl_enable=Yes\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/file-server.xml:216(para)
msgid "Also, notice the certificate and key related options:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/file-server.xml:220(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"rsa_cert_file=/etc/ssl/certs/ssl-cert-snakeoil.pem\n"
"rsa_private_key_file=/etc/ssl/private/ssl-cert-snakeoil.key\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/file-server.xml:225(para)
msgid ""
"By default these options are set the certificate and key provided by the "
"<application>ssl-cert</application> package. In a production environment "
"these should be replaced with a certificate and key generated for the "
"specific host. For more information on certificates see <xref "
"linkend=\"certificates-and-security\"/>."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/file-server.xml:231(para)
msgid ""
"Now restart <application>vsftpd</application>, and non-anonymous users will "
"be forced to use <emphasis>FTPS</emphasis>:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/file-server.xml:240(para)
msgid ""
"To allow users with a shell of <filename>/usr/sbin/nologin</filename> access "
"to FTP, but have no shell access, edit <filename>/etc/shells</filename> "
"adding the <emphasis>nologin</emphasis> shell:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/file-server.xml:245(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"# /etc/shells: valid login shells\n"
"/bin/csh\n"
"/bin/sh\n"
"/usr/bin/es\n"
"/usr/bin/ksh\n"
"/bin/ksh\n"
"/usr/bin/rc\n"
"/usr/bin/tcsh\n"
"/bin/tcsh\n"
"/usr/bin/esh\n"
"/bin/dash\n"
"/bin/bash\n"
"/bin/rbash\n"
"/usr/bin/screen\n"
"/usr/sbin/nologin\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/file-server.xml:263(para)
msgid ""
"This is necessary because, by default <application>vsftpd</application> uses "
"PAM for authentication, and the <filename>/etc/pam.d/vsftpd</filename> "
"configuration file contains:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/file-server.xml:268(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"auth    required        pam_shells.so\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/file-server.xml:272(para)
msgid ""
"The <emphasis>shells</emphasis> PAM module restricts access to shells listed "
"in the <filename>/etc/shells</filename> file."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/file-server.xml:277(para)
msgid ""
"Most popular FTP clients can be configured connect using FTPS. The "
"<application>lftp</application> command line FTP client has the ability to "
"use FTPS as well."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/file-server.xml:288(para)
msgid ""
"See the <ulink url=\"http://vsftpd.beasts.org/vsftpd_conf.html\">vsftpd "
"website</ulink> for more information."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/file-server.xml:293(para)
msgid ""
"For detailed <filename>/etc/vsftpd.conf</filename> options see the <ulink "
"url=\"http://manpages.ubuntu.com/manpages/lucid/en/man5/vsftpd.conf.5.html\">"
"vsftpd.conf man page</ulink>."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/file-server.xml:299(para)
msgid ""
"The CodeGurus article <ulink "
"url=\"http://www.codeguru.com/csharp/.net/net_general/internet/article.php/c1"
"4329\"> FTPS vs. SFTP: What to Choose</ulink> has useful information "
"contrasting FTPS and SFTP."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/file-server.xml:305(para)
msgid ""
"Also, for more information see the <ulink "
"url=\"https://help.ubuntu.com/community/vsftpd\">Ubuntu Wiki vsftpd</ulink> "
"page."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/file-server.xml:315(title)
msgid "Network File System (NFS)"
msgstr "네트워크 파일 시스템 (NFS)"

#: serverguide/C/file-server.xml:316(para)
msgid ""
"NFS allows a system to share directories and files with others over a "
"network. By using NFS, users and programs can access files on remote systems "
"almost as if they were local files."
msgstr ""
"NFS는 네트워크 상의 다른 사람과 디렉토리와 파일을 공유하는 시스템을 허용 합니다. NFS를 사용하는 것으로, 사용자와 프로그램은 "
"원격지 시스템 상의 파일을 로컬 파일을 사용하는 것과 거의 비슷하게 접근할 수 있습니다."

#: serverguide/C/file-server.xml:322(para)
msgid "Some of the most notable benefits that NFS can provide are:"
msgstr "NFS가 제공하는 가장 주목할 만한 혜택의 몇 가지는 다음과 같습니다:"

#: serverguide/C/file-server.xml:328(para)
msgid ""
"Local workstations use less disk space because commonly used data can be "
"stored on a single machine and still remain accessible to others over the "
"network."
msgstr ""
"로컬 워크스테이션은 공통적으로 사용되는 데이터가 단일 기계에 저장되고 네트워크 상의 다른 것을 여전히 접근할 수 있기 때문에 보다 적은 "
"디스크 공간을 사용 합니다."

#: serverguide/C/file-server.xml:333(para)
msgid ""
"There is no need for users to have separate home directories on every "
"network machine. Home directories could be set up on the NFS server and made "
"available throughout the network."
msgstr ""
"사용자가 모든 네트워크 기계들에 분리된(각각의) 홈 디렉토리를 가질 필요가 없습니다. 홈 디렉토리는 NFS 서버 상에 만들어질 수 있고 "
"네트워크를 통하여 사용할 수 있습니다."

#: serverguide/C/file-server.xml:339(para)
msgid ""
"Storage devices such as floppy disks, CDROM drives, and USB Thumb drives can "
"be used by other machines on the network. This may reduce the number of "
"removable media drives throughout the network."
msgstr ""
"플로피 디스크, CD-ROM 드라이브, 그리고 USB 드라이브와 같은 저장 장치들은 네트워크 상의 다른 기계에 의하여 사용될 수 "
"있습니다. 이것은 네트워크 전체의 이동식 미디어 드라이브의 숫자를 줄일지도 모릅니다."

#: serverguide/C/file-server.xml:349(para)
msgid ""
"At a terminal prompt enter the following command to install the NFS Server:"
msgstr "NFS 서버를 설치하기 위하여 다음의 명령을 터미널 프롬프트에서 입력 합니다:"

#: serverguide/C/file-server.xml:355(command)
msgid "sudo apt-get install nfs-kernel-server"
msgstr "sudo apt-get install nfs-kernel-server"

#: serverguide/C/file-server.xml:361(para)
msgid ""
"You can configure the directories to be exported by adding them to the "
"<filename>/etc/exports</filename> file. For example:"
msgstr ""
"<filename>/etc/exports</filename> 파일에 디렉토리를 추가하는 것으로 내보낼 디렉토리를 설정할 수 있습니다. "
"예는:"

#: serverguide/C/file-server.xml:366(screen)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"/ubuntu  *(ro,sync,no_root_squash)\n"
"/home    *(rw,sync,no_root_squash)\n"
msgstr ""
"\n"
"/ubuntu *(ro,sync,no_root_squash)\n"
"/home *(rw,sync,no_root_squash)\n"

#: serverguide/C/file-server.xml:372(para)
msgid ""
"You can replace * with one of the hostname formats. Make the hostname "
"declaration as specific as possible so unwanted systems cannot access the "
"NFS mount."
msgstr ""
"호스트 이름 형식의 하나를 *로 대체할 수 있습니다. 호스트 이름 정의를 가능한 지정하여 원하지 않는 시스템이 NFS 마운트를 접근할 수 "
"없도록 합니다."

#: serverguide/C/file-server.xml:378(para)
msgid ""
"To start the NFS server, you can run the following command at a terminal "
"prompt:"
msgstr "NFS 서버를 시작하기 위하여, 다음의 명령을 터미널 프롬프트에서 실행할 수 있습니다:"

#: serverguide/C/file-server.xml:383(command)
msgid "sudo /etc/init.d/nfs-kernel-server start"
msgstr "sudo /etc/init.d/nfs-kernel-server start"

#: serverguide/C/file-server.xml:388(title)
msgid "NFS Client Configuration"
msgstr "NFS  클라이언트 설정"

#: serverguide/C/file-server.xml:389(para)
msgid ""
"Use the <application>mount</application> command to mount a shared NFS "
"directory from another machine, by typing a command line similar to the "
"following at a terminal prompt:"
msgstr ""
"다른 기계에서 공유된 NFS 디렉토리를 마운트하려면 <application>mount</application> 명령을 사용하고, 터미널 "
"프롬프트에서 다음의 명령과 비슷하게(각자의 경우에 맞게) 명령을 입력 합니다:"

#: serverguide/C/file-server.xml:395(command)
msgid "sudo mount example.hostname.com:/ubuntu /local/ubuntu"
msgstr "sudo mount example.hostname.com:/ubuntu /local/ubuntu"

#: serverguide/C/file-server.xml:399(para)
msgid ""
"The mount point directory <filename>/local/ubuntu</filename> must exist. "
"There should be no files or subdirectories in the "
"<filename>/local/ubuntu</filename> directory."
msgstr ""
"마운트 위치 디렉토리 <filename>/local/ubuntu</filename> 반드시 있어야 합니다. "
"<filename>/local/ubuntu</filename> 디렉토리 내에는 파일 또는 서브 디렉토리가 없어야만 합니다."

#: serverguide/C/file-server.xml:406(para)
msgid ""
"An alternate way to mount an NFS share from another machine is to add a line "
"to the <filename>/etc/fstab</filename> file. The line must state the "
"hostname of the NFS server, the directory on the server being exported, and "
"the directory on the local machine where the NFS share is to be mounted."
msgstr ""
"다른 기계에서 NFS 공유를 마운트하는 다른 방법은 <filename>/etc/fstab</filename> 파일에 한 줄을 더하는 것 "
"입니다. 그 줄은 NFS 서버의 호스트 이름, 내보내지는 서버 상의 디렉토리, NFS 공유가 마운트되는 로컬 기계 상의 디렉토리를 반드시 "
"기술 합니다."

#: serverguide/C/file-server.xml:414(para)
msgid ""
"The general syntax for the line in <filename>/etc/fstab</filename> file is "
"as follows:"
msgstr "<filename>/etc/fstab</filename> 파일 내의 그 줄을 위한 일반적인 문법은 다음과 같습니다:"

#: serverguide/C/file-server.xml:420(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"example.hostname.com:/ubuntu /local/ubuntu nfs "
"rsize=8192,wsize=8192,timeo=14,intr\n"
msgstr ""
"\n"
"example.hostname.com:/ubuntu /local/ubuntu nfs "
"rsize=8192,wsize=8192,timeo=14,intr\n"

#: serverguide/C/file-server.xml:424(para)
msgid ""
"If you have trouble mounting an NFS share, make sure the <application>nfs-"
"common</application> package is installed on your client. To install "
"<application>nfs-common</application> enter the following command at the "
"terminal prompt: <screen>\n"
"<command>sudo apt-get install nfs-common</command>\n"
"</screen>"
msgstr ""
"NFS 공유 폴더를 마운트 하는 과정에서 문제가 발생했다면, 클라이언트 쪽에 <application>nfs-"
"common</application> 꾸러미가 설치되어 있는지 확인하십시오. <application>nfs-"
"common</application> 꾸러미를 설치하려면 터미널 프롬프트에서 다음 명령을 입력히세요: <screen>\n"
"<command>sudo apt-get install nfs-common</command>\n"
"</screen>"

#: serverguide/C/file-server.xml:437(ulink)
msgid "Linux NFS faq"
msgstr "리눅스 NFS에 대해 자주하는 질문"

#: serverguide/C/file-server.xml:439(ulink)
msgid "Ubuntu Wiki NFS Howto"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/file-server.xml:445(title)
msgid "CUPS - Print Server"
msgstr "CUPS - 인쇄 서버"

#: serverguide/C/file-server.xml:446(para)
msgid ""
"The primary mechanism for Ubuntu printing and print services is the "
"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Common UNIX Printing System</emphasis> (CUPS). This "
"printing system is a freely available, portable printing layer which has "
"become the new standard for printing in most Linux distributions."
msgstr ""
"우분투에서 인쇄 및 프린트 서비스에 사용되는 주된 메커니즘은 <emphasis role=\"bold\">Common UNIX "
"Printing System</emphasis> (CUPS) 입니다. CUPS 프린팅 시스템은 자유롭게 이용 가능하며, 대부분의 리눅스 "
"배포판의 새로운 인쇄 표준이 된 이동식 인쇄 계층입니다."

#: serverguide/C/file-server.xml:453(para)
msgid ""
"CUPS manages print jobs and queues and provides network printing using the "
"standard Internet Printing Protocol (IPP), while offering support for a very "
"large range of printers, from dot-matrix to laser and many in between. CUPS "
"also supports PostScript Printer Description (PPD) and auto-detection of "
"network printers, and features a simple web-based configuration and "
"administration tool."
msgstr ""
"CUPS는 인쇄 작업과 대기소를 관리하고, 표준 인터넷 인쇄 프로토콜(IPP)를 사용하여 네트워크 출력을 제공하고, 도트매트릭스부터 "
"레이저까지의 굉장히 큰 범위의 프린터들과 그리고 많은 상호 간의 출력을 지원 합니다. CUPS는 또한 PostScript Printer "
"Description (PPD) 과 네트워크 프린터의 자동 감지를 지원하고, 단순한 웹 기반의 설정과 관리 도구를 가지고 있습니다."

#: serverguide/C/file-server.xml:463(para)
msgid ""
"To install CUPS on your Ubuntu computer, simply use "
"<application>sudo</application> with the <application>apt-get</application> "
"command and give the packages to install as the first parameter. A complete "
"CUPS install has many package dependencies, but they may all be specified on "
"the same command line. Enter the following at a terminal prompt to install "
"CUPS:"
msgstr ""
"여러분의 우분투 컴퓨터에 CUPS를 설치하려면, 간단하게 <application>apt-get</application> 명령을 "
"<application>sudo</application> 로 사용하고 첫 번째 파라미터로 설치하고자 하는 꾸러미를 줍니다. 하나의 완전한 "
"CUPS 설치는 많은 꾸러미 의존성을 가지지만, 같은 명령어 라인에 그것들을 모두 지정할 수도 있습니다. CUPS를 설치하기 위하여 "
"다음의 명령을 터미널 프롬프트에서 입력 하십시오:"

#: serverguide/C/file-server.xml:468(command)
msgid "sudo apt-get install cups"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/file-server.xml:471(para)
msgid ""
"Upon authenticating with your user password, the packages should be "
"downloaded and installed without error. Upon the conclusion of installation, "
"the CUPS server will be started automatically."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/file-server.xml:476(para)
msgid ""
"For troubleshooting purposes, you can access CUPS server errors via the "
"error log file at: <filename>/var/log/cups/error_log</filename>. If the "
"error log does not show enough information to troubleshoot any problems you "
"encounter, the verbosity of the CUPS log can be increased by changing the "
"<emphasis role=\"bold\">LogLevel</emphasis> directive in the configuration "
"file (discussed below) to \"debug\" or even \"debug2\", which logs "
"everything, from the default of \"info\". If you make this change, remember "
"to change it back once you've solved your problem, to prevent the log file "
"from becoming overly large."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/file-server.xml:489(para)
msgid ""
"The Common UNIX Printing System server's behavior is configured through the "
"directives contained in the file <filename>/etc/cups/cupsd.conf</filename>. "
"The CUPS configuration file follows the same syntax as the primary "
"configuration file for the Apache HTTP server, so users familiar with "
"editing Apache's configuration file should feel at ease when editing the "
"CUPS configuration file. Some examples of settings you may wish to change "
"initially will be presented here."
msgstr ""
"Common UNIX Printing System 서버의 동작은 "
"<filename>/etc/cups/cupsd.conf</filename> 파일 내에 포함된 지시자를 통하여 설정 됩니다. CUPS 설정 "
"파일은 아파치 HTTP 서버를 위한 주요 설정 파일과 같은 문법을 따르므로 아파치 설정 파일을 편집하는데 익숙한 사용자들은 CUPS 설정 "
"파일을 편집할 때 쉽다고 느낄 수 있습니다. 처음으로 변경하기를 원하는 설정 값의 몇 가지는 여기에 보여 집니다."

#: serverguide/C/file-server.xml:499(para)
msgid ""
"Prior to editing the configuration file, you should make a copy of the "
"original file and protect it from writing, so you will have the original "
"settings as a reference, and to reuse as necessary."
msgstr ""
"설정 파일을 편집하기 전에, 원래의 파일의 복사본을 만들고 쓰기에서 그것을 보호해야만 합니다. 그래서 여러분은 원래의 설정을 참조하거나 "
"그리고 필요한 경우 재사용 할 수 있습니다."

#: serverguide/C/file-server.xml:503(para)
msgid ""
"Copy the <filename>/etc/cups/cupsd.conf</filename> file and protect it from "
"writing with the following commands, issued at a terminal prompt:"
msgstr ""
"<filename>/etc/cups/cupsd.conf</filename> 파일을 복사하고 쓰기에서 그것을 보호하려면, 터미널 "
"프롬프트에서 다음의 명령을 입력 합니다:"

#: serverguide/C/file-server.xml:509(command)
msgid "sudo cp /etc/cups/cupsd.conf /etc/cups/cupsd.conf.original"
msgstr "sudo cp /etc/cups/cupsd.conf /etc/cups/cupsd.conf.original"

#: serverguide/C/file-server.xml:510(command)
msgid "sudo chmod a-w /etc/cups/cupsd.conf.original"
msgstr "sudo chmod a-w /etc/cups/cupsd.conf.original"

#: serverguide/C/file-server.xml:515(para)
msgid ""
"<emphasis role=\"bold\">ServerAdmin</emphasis>: To configure the email "
"address of the designated administrator of the CUPS server, simply edit the "
"<filename>/etc/cups/cupsd.conf</filename> configuration file with your "
"preferred text editor, and add or modify the <emphasis "
"role=\"italics\">ServerAdmin</emphasis> line accordingly. For example, if "
"you are the Administrator for the CUPS server, and your e-mail address is "
"'bjoy@somebigco.com', then you would modify the ServerAdmin line to appear "
"as such:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/file-server.xml:526(screen)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"ServerAdmin bjoy@somebigco.com\n"
msgstr ""
"\n"
"ServerAdmin bjoy@somebigco.com\n"

#: serverguide/C/file-server.xml:532(para)
msgid ""
"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Listen</emphasis>: By default on Ubuntu, the CUPS "
"server installation listens only on the loopback interface at IP address "
"<emphasis>127.0.0.1</emphasis>. In order to instruct the CUPS server to "
"listen on an actual network adapter's IP address, you must specify either a "
"hostname, the IP address, or optionally, an IP address/port pairing via the "
"addition of a Listen directive. For example, if your CUPS server resides on "
"a local network at the IP address <emphasis "
"role=\"italics\">192.168.10.250</emphasis> and you'd like to make it "
"accessible to the other systems on this subnetwork, you would edit the "
"<filename>/etc/cups/cupsd.conf</filename> and add a Listen directive, as "
"such:"
msgstr ""
"<emphasis role=\"bold\">Listen</emphasis>: 우분투에서는 기본적으로 CUPS 서버는 오직 "
"<emphasis>127.0.0.1</emphasis> 의 IP 주소를 가지는 루프백 인터페이스 에서만 대기(listen) 하고 "
"있습니다. CUPS 서버가 실제 네트워크 어댑터의 IP 주소를 통해 대기하도록 하려면, Listen 지시어를 추가하여 호스트 이름 혹은 "
"IP 주소 또는 IP 주소/포트 번호의 쌍을 지정해야 합니다. 예를 들어 여러분의 CUPS 서버가 로컬 네트워크 상에서 <emphasis "
"role=\"italics\">192.168.10.250</emphasis> 의 IP 주소를 사용할 때, 이 서브 네트워크 상의 다른 "
"컴퓨터에서 이를 사용하도록 하려면, <filename>/etc/cups/cupsd.conf</filename> 파일을 편집하여 다음과 "
"같이 Listen 지시어를 추가합니다:"

#: serverguide/C/file-server.xml:546(screen)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"Listen 127.0.0.1:631           # existing loopback Listen\n"
"Listen /var/run/cups/cups.sock # existing socket Listen\n"
"Listen 192.168.10.250:631      # Listen on the LAN interface, Port 631 "
"(IPP)\n"
msgstr ""
"\n"
"Listen 127.0.0.1:631 # existing loopback Listen\n"
"Listen /var/run/cups/cups.sock # existing socket Listen\n"
"Listen 192.168.10.250:631 # Listen on the LAN interface, Port 631 (IPP)\n"

#: serverguide/C/file-server.xml:552(para)
msgid ""
"In the example above, you may comment out or remove the reference to the "
"Loopback address (127.0.0.1) if you do not wish <application>cupsd "
"</application> to listen on that interface, but would rather have it only "
"listen on the Ethernet interfaces of the Local Area Network (LAN). To enable "
"listening for all network interfaces for which a certain hostname is bound, "
"including the Loopback, you could create a Listen entry for the hostname "
"<emphasis>socrates</emphasis> as such:"
msgstr ""
"위의 예에서, 만약 여러분이 <application>cupsd </application>가 루프백 인터페이스를 듣는 것을 원하지 않고 "
"Local Area Network(LAN)의 이더넷 인터페이스만을 듣게하려고 한다면, 루프백 주소 (127.0.0.1)을 주석 처리하거나 "
"삭제할 수 있습니다. 루프백을 포함하여, 특정 호스트 이름이 경계를 긋는 모든 네트워크 인터페이스를 듣게 만드려면, 아래와 같이 호스트 "
"이름 <emphasis>socrates</emphasis> 를 위하여 Listen 항목을 만들 수 있습니다:"

#: serverguide/C/file-server.xml:562(screen)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"Listen socrates:631  # Listen on all interfaces for the hostname 'socrates'\n"
msgstr ""
"\n"
"Listen socrates:631 # Listen on all interfaces for the hostname 'socrates'\n"

#: serverguide/C/file-server.xml:566(para)
msgid ""
"or by omitting the Listen directive and using <emphasis>Port</emphasis> "
"instead, as in:"
msgstr ""
"또는 Listen 지시자는 제외하고 대신에 <emphasis>Port</emphasis> 를 사용하여 다음과 같이 할 수 있습니다:"

#: serverguide/C/file-server.xml:568(screen)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"Port 631  # Listen on port 631 on all interfaces\n"
msgstr ""
"\n"
"Port 631 # Listen on port 631 on all interfaces\n"

#: serverguide/C/file-server.xml:575(para)
msgid ""
"For more examples of configuration directives in the CUPS server "
"configuration file, view the associated system manual page by entering the "
"following command at a terminal prompt:"
msgstr ""
"CUPS 서버 설정 파일 내의 설정 지시자에 대한 더 많은 예제는, 터미널 프롬프트에서 다음의 명령을 입력하여 관계된 시스템 매뉴얼 "
"페이지를 읽어 보십시오:"

#: serverguide/C/file-server.xml:582(command)
msgid "man cupsd.conf"
msgstr "man cupsd.conf"

#: serverguide/C/file-server.xml:586(para)
msgid ""
"Whenever you make changes to the <filename>/etc/cups/cupsd.conf</filename> "
"configuration file, you'll need to restart the CUPS server by typing the "
"following command at a terminal prompt:"
msgstr ""
"<filename>/etc/cups/cupsd.conf</filename> 설정 파일에 변경을 만드는 어느 때에나, 터미널 프롬프트에서 "
"다음의 명령을 입력하여 CUPS 서버를 재시작 하는 것이 필요 합니다:"

#: serverguide/C/file-server.xml:592(command)
msgid "sudo /etc/init.d/cups restart"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/file-server.xml:598(title)
msgid "Web Interface"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/file-server.xml:600(para)
msgid ""
"CUPS can be configured and monitored using a web interface, which by default "
"is available at <ulink "
"url=\"http://localhost:631/admin\">http://localhost:631/admin</ulink>. The "
"web interface can be used to perform all printer management tasks."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/file-server.xml:604(para)
msgid ""
"In order to perform administrative tasks via the web interface, you must "
"either have the root account enabled on your server, or authenticate as a "
"user in the <emphasis role=\"italic\">lpadmin</emphasis> group. For security "
"reasons, CUPS won't authenticate a user that doesn't have a password."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/file-server.xml:607(para)
msgid ""
"To add a user to the <emphasis role=\"italic\">lpadmin</emphasis> group, run "
"at the terminal prompt: <screen>\n"
"<command>sudo usermod -aG lpadmin username</command>\n"
"</screen>"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/file-server.xml:613(para)
msgid ""
"Further documentation is available in the <emphasis "
"role=\"italic\">Documentation/Help</emphasis> tab of the web interface."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/file-server.xml:621(ulink)
msgid "CUPS Website"
msgstr "CUPS 웹사이트"

#: serverguide/C/file-server.xml:624(ulink)
msgid "Ubuntu Wiki CUPS page"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/dns.xml:13(title)
msgid "Domain Name Service (DNS)"
msgstr "도메인 네임 서비스 (DNS)"

#: serverguide/C/dns.xml:14(para)
msgid ""
"Domain Name Service (DNS) is an Internet service that maps IP addresses and "
"fully qualified domain names (FQDN) to one another. In this way, DNS "
"alleviates the need to remember IP addresses. Computers that run DNS are "
"called <emphasis>name servers</emphasis>. Ubuntu ships with "
"<application>BIND</application> (Berkley Internet Naming Daemon), the most "
"common program used for maintaining a name server on Linux."
msgstr ""
"Domain Name Service(DNS)는 IP 주소와 Fully Qualified Domain Names(FQDN)을 매핑해주는 "
"인터넷 서비스입니다. 이 방법을 이용하면, DNS로 인해 IP 주소를 기억할 필요가 없어집니다. DNS를 실행하고 있는 컴퓨터를 "
"<emphasis>네임 서버</emphasis>라고 부릅니다. 우분투는 리눅스 상에서 네임 서버를 실행하고 관리하는 데 사용되는 가장 "
"일반적인 프로그램인 <application>BIND</application> (Berkley Internet Naming Daemon)를 "
"제공합니다."

#: serverguide/C/dns.xml:24(para)
msgid ""
"At a terminal prompt, enter the following command to install "
"<application>dns</application>:"
msgstr "터미널 프롬프트에서, <application>dns</application>를 설치하기 위하여 다음의 명령을 입력 합니다:"

#: serverguide/C/dns.xml:28(command)
msgid "sudo apt-get install bind9"
msgstr "sudo apt-get install bind9"

#: serverguide/C/dns.xml:30(para)
msgid ""
"A very useful package for testing and troubleshooting DNS issues is the "
"dnsutils package. To install <application>dnsutils</application> enter the "
"following:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/dns.xml:35(command)
msgid "sudo apt-get install dnsutils"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/dns.xml:40(para)
msgid ""
"There a many ways to configure <application>BIND9</application>. Some of the "
"most common configurations are a caching nameserver, primary master, and a "
"as a secondary master."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/dns.xml:46(para)
msgid ""
"When configured as a caching nameserver BIND9 will find the answer to name "
"queries and remember the answer when the domain is queried again."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/dns.xml:52(para)
msgid ""
"As a primary master server BIND9 reads the data for a zone from a file on "
"it's host and is authoritative for that zone."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/dns.xml:57(para)
msgid ""
"In a secondary master configuration BIND9 gets the zone data from another "
"nameserver authoritative for the zone."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/dns.xml:65(para)
msgid ""
"The DNS configuration files are stored in the <filename>/etc/bind</filename> "
"directory. The primary configuration file is "
"<filename>/etc/bind/named.conf</filename>."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/dns.xml:72(para)
msgid ""
"The <emphasis>include</emphasis> line specifies the filename which contains "
"the DNS options. The <emphasis>directory</emphasis> line in the "
"<filename>/etc/bind/named.conf.options</filename> file tells DNS where to "
"look for files. All files BIND uses will be relative to this directory."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/dns.xml:80(para)
msgid ""
"The file named <filename>/etc/bind/db.root</filename> describes the root "
"nameservers in the world. The servers change over time, so the "
"<filename>/etc/bind/db.root</filename> file must be maintained now and then. "
"This is usually done as updates to the <application>bind9</application> "
"package. The <emphasis>zone</emphasis> section defines a master server, and "
"it is stored in a file mentioned in the <emphasis>file</emphasis> option."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/dns.xml:90(para)
msgid ""
"It is possible to configure the same server to be a caching name server, "
"primary master, and secondary master. A server can be the Start of Authority "
"(SOA) for one zone, while providing secondary service for another zone. All "
"the while providing caching services for hosts on the local LAN."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/dns.xml:98(title)
msgid "Caching Nameserver"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/dns.xml:99(para)
msgid ""
"The default configuration is setup to act as a caching server. All that is "
"required is simply adding the IP Addresses of your ISP's DNS servers. Simply "
"uncomment and edit the following in "
"<filename>/etc/bind/named.conf.options</filename>:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/dns.xml:103(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"forwarders {\n"
"                1.2.3.4;\n"
"                5.6.7.8;\n"
"           };\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/dns.xml:110(para)
msgid ""
"Replace <emphasis>1.2.3.4</emphasis> and <emphasis>5.6.7.8</emphasis> with "
"the IP Adresses of actual nameservers."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/dns.xml:114(para)
msgid ""
"Now restart the DNS server, to enable the new configuration. From a terminal "
"prompt:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/dns.xml:118(command) serverguide/C/dns.xml:194(command) serverguide/C/dns.xml:253(command) serverguide/C/dns.xml:312(command) serverguide/C/dns.xml:561(command)
msgid "sudo /etc/init.d/bind9 restart"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/dns.xml:120(para)
msgid ""
"See <xref linkend=\"dns-testing-dig\"/> for information on testing a caching "
"DNS server."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/dns.xml:125(title)
msgid "Primary Master"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/dns.xml:126(para)
msgid ""
"In this section <application>BIND9</application> will be configured as the "
"Primary Master for the domain <emphasis>example.com</emphasis>. Simply "
"replace <emphasis role=\"italic\">example.com</emphasis> with your FQDN "
"(Fully Qualified Domain Name)."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/dns.xml:132(title)
msgid "Forward Zone File"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/dns.xml:133(para)
msgid ""
"To add a DNS zone to BIND9, turning BIND9 into a Primary Master server, the "
"first step is to edit <filename>/etc/bind/named.conf.local</filename>:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/dns.xml:137(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"zone \"example.com\" {\n"
"\ttype master;\n"
"        file \"/etc/bind/db.example.com\";\n"
"};\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/dns.xml:143(para)
msgid ""
"Now use an existing zone file as a template to create the "
"<filename>/etc/bind/db.example.com</filename> file:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/dns.xml:147(command)
msgid "sudo cp /etc/bind/db.local /etc/bind/db.example.com"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/dns.xml:149(para)
msgid ""
"Edit the new zone file <filename>/etc/bind/db.example.com</filename> change "
"<emphasis>localhost.</emphasis> to the FQDN of your server, leaving the "
"additional \".\" at the end. Change <emphasis>127.0.0.1</emphasis> to the "
"nameserver's IP Address and <emphasis>root.localhost</emphasis> to a valid "
"email address, but with a \".\" instead of the usual \"@\" symbol, again "
"leaving the \".\" at the end."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/dns.xml:155(para)
msgid ""
"Also, create an <emphasis>A record</emphasis> for <emphasis "
"role=\"italic\">ns.example.com</emphasis>. The name server in this example:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/dns.xml:159(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
";\n"
"; BIND data file for local loopback interface\n"
";\n"
"$TTL    604800\n"
"@       IN      SOA     ns.example.com. root.example.com. (\n"
"                              2         ; Serial\n"
"                         604800         ; Refresh\n"
"                          86400         ; Retry\n"
"                        2419200         ; Expire\n"
"                         604800 )       ; Negative Cache TTL\n"
";\n"
"@       IN      NS      ns.example.com.\n"
"@       IN      A       127.0.0.1\n"
"@       IN      AAAA    ::1\n"
"ns      IN      A       192.168.1.10\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/dns.xml:176(para)
msgid ""
"You must increment the <emphasis>Serial Number</emphasis> every time you "
"make changes to the zone file. If you make multiple changes before "
"restarting BIND9, simply increment the Serial once."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/dns.xml:180(para)
msgid ""
"Now, you can add DNS records to the bottom of the zone file. See <xref "
"linkend=\"dns-record-types\"/> for details."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/dns.xml:184(para)
msgid ""
"Many admins like to use the last date edited as the serial of a zone, such "
"as <emphasis>2007010100</emphasis> which is yyyymmddss (where "
"<emphasis>ss</emphasis> is the Serial Number)"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/dns.xml:189(para)
msgid ""
"Once you have made a change to the zone file "
"<application>BIND9</application> will need to be restarted for the changes "
"to take effect:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/dns.xml:198(title)
msgid "Reverse Zone File"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/dns.xml:199(para)
msgid ""
"Now that the zone is setup and resolving names to IP Adresses a "
"<emphasis>Reverse zone</emphasis> is also required. A Reverse zone allows "
"DNS to resolve an address to a name."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/dns.xml:203(para)
msgid "Edit /etc/bind/named.conf.local and add the following:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/dns.xml:206(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"zone \"1.168.192.in-addr.arpa\" {\n"
"        type master;\n"
"        notify no;\n"
"        file \"/etc/bind/db.192\";\n"
"};\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/dns.xml:214(para)
msgid ""
"Replace <emphasis>1.168.192</emphasis> with the first three octets of "
"whatever network you are using. Also, name the zone file "
"<filename>/etc/bind/db.192</filename> appropriately. It should match the "
"first octet of your network."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/dns.xml:219(para)
msgid "Now create the <filename>/etc/bind/db.192</filename> file:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/dns.xml:223(command)
msgid "sudo cp /etc/bind/db.127 /etc/bind/db.192"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/dns.xml:225(para)
msgid ""
"Next edit <filename>/etc/bind/db.192</filename> changing the basically the "
"same options as <filename>/etc/bind/db.example.com</filename>:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/dns.xml:229(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
";\n"
"; BIND reverse data file for local loopback interface\n"
";\n"
"$TTL    604800\n"
"@       IN      SOA     ns.example.com. root.example.com. (\n"
"                              2         ; Serial\n"
"                         604800         ; Refresh\n"
"                          86400         ; Retry\n"
"                        2419200         ; Expire\n"
"                         604800 )       ; Negative Cache TTL\n"
";\n"
"@       IN      NS      ns.\n"
"10      IN      PTR     ns.example.com.\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/dns.xml:244(para)
msgid ""
"The <emphasis>Serial Number</emphasis> in the Reverse zone needs to be "
"incremented on each changes as well. For each <emphasis>A record</emphasis> "
"you configure in <filename>/etc/bind/db.example.com</filename> you need to "
"create a <emphasis>PTR record</emphasis> in "
"<filename>/etc/bind/db.192</filename>."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/dns.xml:249(para)
msgid ""
"After creating the reverse zone file restart "
"<application>BIND9</application>:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/dns.xml:258(title)
msgid "Secondary Master"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/dns.xml:259(para)
msgid ""
"Once a <emphasis>Primary Master</emphasis> has been configured a "
"<emphasis>Secondary Master</emphasis> is needed in order to maintain the "
"availability of the domain should the Primary become unavailable."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/dns.xml:263(para)
msgid ""
"First, on the Primary Master server, the zone transfer needs to be allowed. "
"Add the <emphasis>allow-transfer</emphasis> option to the example Forward "
"and Reverse zone definitions in "
"<filename>/etc/bind/named.conf.local</filename>:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/dns.xml:267(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"zone \"example.com\" {\n"
"        type master;\n"
"\tfile \"/etc/bind/db.example.com\";\n"
"        allow-transfer { 192.168.1.11; };\n"
"};\n"
"\n"
"zone \"1.168.192.in-addr.arpa\" {\n"
"        type master;\n"
"        notify no;\n"
"        file \"/etc/bind/db.192\";\n"
"\tallow-transfer { 192.168.1.11; };\n"
"};\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/dns.xml:282(para)
msgid ""
"Replace <emphasis>192.168.1.11</emphasis> with the IP Address of your "
"Secondary nameserver."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/dns.xml:286(para)
msgid ""
"Next, on the Secondary Master, install the <application>bind9</application> "
"package the same way as on the Primary. Then edit the "
"<filename>/etc/bind/named.conf.local</filename> and add the following "
"declarations for the Forward and Reverse zones:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/dns.xml:290(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"zone \"example.com\" {\n"
"\ttype slave;\n"
"        file \"/var/cache/bind/db.example.com\";\n"
"        masters { 192.168.1.10; };\n"
"};        \n"
"      \n"
"zone \"1.168.192.in-addr.arpa\" {\n"
"\ttype slave;\n"
"        file \"/var/cache/bind/db.192\";\n"
"        masters { 192.168.1.10; };\n"
"};\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/dns.xml:304(para)
msgid ""
"Replace <emphasis>192.168.1.10</emphasis> with the IP Address of your "
"Primary nameserver."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/dns.xml:308(para)
msgid "Restart <application>BIND9</application> on the Secondary Master:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/dns.xml:314(para)
msgid ""
"In <filename>/var/log/syslog</filename> you should see something similar to:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/dns.xml:317(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"slave zone \"example.com\" (IN) loaded (serial 6)\n"
"slave zone \"100.18.172.in-addr.arpa\" (IN) loaded (serial 3)\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/dns.xml:322(para)
msgid ""
"Note: A zone is only transferred if the <emphasis>Serial Number</emphasis> "
"on the Primary is larger than the one on the Secondary."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/dns.xml:328(para)
msgid ""
"The default directory for non-authoritative zone files is "
"<filename>/var/cache/bind/</filename>. This directory is also configured in "
"<application>AppArmor</application> to allow the "
"<application>named</application> daemon to write to. For more information on "
"AppArmor see <xref linkend=\"apparmor\"/>."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/dns.xml:339(para)
msgid ""
"This section covers ways to help determine the cause when problems happen "
"with DNS and <application>BIND9</application>."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/dns.xml:345(title)
msgid "resolv.conf"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/dns.xml:346(para)
msgid ""
"The first step in testing <application>BIND9</application> is to add the "
"nameserver's IP Address to a hosts resolver. The Primary nameserver should "
"be configured as well as another host to double check things. Simply edit "
"<filename>/etc/resolv.conf</filename> and add the following:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/dns.xml:351(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"nameserver\t192.168.1.10\n"
"nameserver\t192.168.1.11\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/dns.xml:356(para)
msgid ""
"You should also add the IP Address of the Secondary nameserver in case the "
"Primary becomes unavailable."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/dns.xml:362(title)
msgid "dig"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/dns.xml:363(para)
msgid ""
"If you installed the <application>dnsutils</application> package you can "
"test your setup using the DNS lookup utility <application>dig</application>:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/dns.xml:369(para)
msgid ""
"After installing <application>BIND9</application> use "
"<application>dig</application> against the loopback interface to make sure "
"it is listening on port 53. From a terminal prompt:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/dns.xml:374(command)
msgid "dig -x 127.0.0.1"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/dns.xml:376(para)
msgid "You should see lines similar to the following in the command output:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/dns.xml:379(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
";; Query time: 1 msec\n"
";; SERVER: 192.168.1.10#53(192.168.1.10)\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/dns.xml:385(para)
msgid ""
"If you have configured <application>BIND9</application> as a "
"<emphasis>Caching</emphasis> nameserver \"dig\" an outside domain to check "
"the query time:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/dns.xml:390(command)
msgid "dig ubuntu.com"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/dns.xml:392(para)
msgid "Note the query time toward the end of the command output:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/dns.xml:395(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
";; Query time: 49 msec\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/dns.xml:398(para)
msgid "After a second dig there should be improvement:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/dns.xml:401(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
";; Query time: 1 msec\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/dns.xml:408(title)
msgid "ping"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/dns.xml:410(para)
msgid ""
"Now to demonstrate how applications make use of DNS to resolve a host name "
"use the <application>ping</application> utility to send an ICMP echo "
"request. From a terminal prompt enter:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/dns.xml:416(command)
msgid "ping example.com"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/dns.xml:418(para)
msgid ""
"This tests if the nameserver can resolve the name "
"<emphasis>ns.example.com</emphasis> to an IP Address. The command output "
"should resemble:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/dns.xml:422(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"PING ns.example.com (192.168.1.10) 56(84) bytes of data.\n"
"64 bytes from 192.168.1.10: icmp_seq=1 ttl=64 time=0.800 ms\n"
"64 bytes from 192.168.1.10: icmp_seq=2 ttl=64 time=0.813 ms\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/dns.xml:429(title)
msgid "named-checkzone"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/dns.xml:430(para)
msgid ""
"A great way to test your zone files is by using the <application>named-"
"checkzone</application> utility installed with the "
"<application>bind9</application> package. This utility allows you to make "
"sure the configuration is correct before restarting "
"<application>BIND9</application> and making the changes live."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/dns.xml:437(para)
msgid ""
"To test our example Forward zone file enter the following from a command "
"prompt:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/dns.xml:441(command)
msgid "named-checkzone example.com /etc/bind/db.example.com"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/dns.xml:443(para)
msgid ""
"If everything is configured correctly you should see output similar to:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/dns.xml:446(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"zone example.com/IN: loaded serial 6\n"
"OK\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/dns.xml:452(para)
msgid "Similarly, to test the Reverse zone file enter the following:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/dns.xml:456(command)
msgid "named-checkzone example.com /etc/bind/db.192"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/dns.xml:458(para)
msgid "The output should be similar to:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/dns.xml:461(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"zone example.com/IN: loaded serial 3\n"
"OK\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/dns.xml:468(para)
msgid ""
"The <emphasis>Serial Number</emphasis> of your zone file will probably be "
"different."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/dns.xml:475(title)
msgid "Logging"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/dns.xml:476(para)
msgid ""
"<application>BIND9</application> has a wide variety of logging configuration "
"options available. There are two main options. The "
"<emphasis>channel</emphasis> option configures where logs go, and the "
"<emphasis>category</emphasis> option determines what information to log."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/dns.xml:480(para)
msgid "If no logging option is configured the default option is:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/dns.xml:483(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"logging {\n"
"     category default { default_syslog; default_debug; };\n"
"     category unmatched { null; };\n"
"};\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/dns.xml:489(para)
msgid ""
"This section covers configuring <application>BIND9</application> to send "
"<emphasis>debug</emphasis> messages related to DNS queries to a separate "
"file."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/dns.xml:494(para)
msgid ""
"First, we need to configure a channel to specify which file to send the "
"messages to. Edit <filename>/etc/bind/named.conf.local</filename> and add "
"the following:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/dns.xml:498(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"logging {\n"
"    channel query.log {      \n"
"        file \"/var/log/query.log\";\n"
"        severity debug 3; \n"
"    }; \n"
"};\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/dns.xml:508(para)
msgid "Next, configure a category to send all DNS queries to the query file:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/dns.xml:511(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"logging {\n"
"    channel query.log {      \n"
"        file \"/var/log/query.log\"; \n"
"        severity debug 3; \n"
"    }; \n"
"    <emphasis>category queries { query.log; };</emphasis> \n"
"};\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/dns.xml:523(para)
msgid ""
"Note: the <emphasis>debug</emphasis> option can be set from 1 to 3. If a "
"level isn't specified level 1 is the default."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/dns.xml:529(para)
msgid ""
"Since the <emphasis>named daemon</emphasis> runs as the "
"<emphasis>bind</emphasis> user the <filename>/var/log/query.log</filename> "
"file must be created and the ownership changed:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/dns.xml:534(command)
msgid "sudo touch /var/log/query.log"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/dns.xml:535(command)
msgid "sudo chown bind /var/log/query.log"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/dns.xml:539(para)
msgid ""
"Before <application>named</application> daemon can write to the new log file "
"the <application>AppArmor</application> profile must be updated. First, edit "
"<filename>/etc/apparmor.d/usr.sbin.named</filename> and add:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/dns.xml:543(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"/var/log/query.log w,\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/dns.xml:546(para)
msgid "Next, reload the profile:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/dns.xml:550(command)
msgid "cat /etc/apparmor.d/usr.sbin.named | sudo apparmor_parser -r"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/dns.xml:552(para)
msgid ""
"For more information on <application>AppArmor</application> see <xref "
"linkend=\"apparmor\"/>"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/dns.xml:557(para)
msgid ""
"Now restart <application>BIND9</application> for the changes to take effect:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/dns.xml:565(para)
msgid ""
"You should see the file <filename>/var/log/query.log</filename> fill with "
"query information. This is a simple example of the "
"<application>BIND9</application> logging options. For coverage of advanced "
"options see <xref linkend=\"dns-more-info\"/>."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/dns.xml:574(title)
msgid "Common Record Types"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/dns.xml:575(para)
msgid "This section covers some of the most common DNS record types."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/dns.xml:580(para)
msgid ""
"<emphasis>A</emphasis> record: This record maps an IP Address to a hostname."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/dns.xml:583(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"www      IN    A      192.168.1.12\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/dns.xml:588(para)
msgid ""
"<emphasis>CNAME</emphasis> record: Used to create an alias to an existing A "
"record. You cannot create a CNAME record pointing to another CNAME record."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/dns.xml:591(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"web     IN    CNAME  www\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/dns.xml:596(para)
msgid ""
"<emphasis>MX</emphasis> record: Used to define where email should be sent "
"to. Must point to an A record, not a CNAME."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/dns.xml:599(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"        IN    MX  1   mail.example.com.\n"
"mail    IN    A       192.168.1.13\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/dns.xml:605(para)
msgid ""
"<emphasis>NS</emphasis> record: Used to define which servers serve copies of "
"a zone. It must point to an A record, not a CNAME. This is where Primary and "
"Secondary servers are defined."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/dns.xml:609(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"        IN    NS     ns.example.com.\n"
"\tIN    NS     ns2.example.com.\n"
"ns      IN    A      192.168.1.10\n"
"ns2\tIN    A\t     192.168.1.11\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/dns.xml:622(para)
msgid ""
"The <ulink url=\"http://www.tldp.org/HOWTO/DNS-HOWTO.html\">DNS "
"HOWTO</ulink> explains more advanced options for configuring BIND9."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/dns.xml:627(para)
msgid ""
"For in depth coverage of <emphasis>DNS</emphasis> and "
"<application>BIND9</application> see <ulink "
"url=\"http://www.bind9.net/\">Bind9.net</ulink>."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/dns.xml:632(para)
msgid ""
"<ulink url=\"http://www.oreilly.com/catalog/dns5/index.html\">DNS and "
"BIND</ulink> is a popular book now in it's fifth edition."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/dns.xml:637(para)
msgid ""
"A great place to ask for <application>BIND9</application> assistance, and "
"get involved with the Ubuntu Server community, is the <emphasis>#ubuntu-"
"server</emphasis> IRC channel on <ulink "
"url=\"http://freenode.net\">freenode</ulink>."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/dns.xml:643(para)
msgid ""
"Also, see the <ulink "
"url=\"https://help.ubuntu.com/community/BIND9ServerHowto\">BIND9 Server "
"HOWTO</ulink> in the Ubuntu Wiki."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/databases.xml:13(title)
msgid "Databases"
msgstr "데이타베이스"

#: serverguide/C/databases.xml:14(para)
msgid "Ubuntu provides two popular database servers. They are:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/databases.xml:22(application) serverguide/C/databases.xml:157(title)
msgid "PostgreSQL"
msgstr "PostgreSQL"

#: serverguide/C/databases.xml:25(para)
msgid ""
"They are available in the main repository. This section explains how to "
"install and configure these database servers."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/databases.xml:32(para)
msgid ""
"MySQL is a fast, multi-threaded, multi-user, and robust SQL database server. "
"It is intended for mission-critical, heavy-load production systems as well "
"as for embedding into mass-deployed software."
msgstr ""
"MySQL은 빠르고, 멀티쓰레드, 복수 사용자, 그리고 견고한 SQL 데이타베이스 서버 입니다. 이것은 대량의 소프트웨어 이행에 포함되는 "
"것과 마찬가지로 중요한 임무와 부하가 많은 현업 시스템을 위하여 사용 됩니다."

#: serverguide/C/databases.xml:41(para)
msgid "To install MySQL, run the following command from a terminal prompt:"
msgstr "MySQL을 설치하기 위하여, 터미널 프롬프트에서 다음 명령을 실행 합니다:"

#: serverguide/C/databases.xml:46(command)
msgid "sudo apt-get install mysql-server"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/databases.xml:48(para)
msgid ""
"During the installation process you will be prompted to enter a password for "
"the <application>MySQL</application> root user."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/databases.xml:53(para)
msgid ""
"Once the installation is complete, the MySQL server should be started "
"automatically. You can run the following command from a terminal prompt to "
"check whether the MySQL server is running:"
msgstr ""
"설치가 마쳐진 후, MySQL 서버는 자동적으로 시작 됩니다. MySQL 서바가 실행 중인지를 점검하려면 터미널 프롬프트에서 다음의 "
"명령을 실행할 수 있습니다:"

#: serverguide/C/databases.xml:61(command)
msgid "sudo netstat -tap | grep mysql"
msgstr "sudo netstat -tap | grep mysql"

#: serverguide/C/databases.xml:70(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"tcp        0      0 localhost:mysql         *:*                     LISTEN   "
"   2556/mysqld\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/databases.xml:74(para)
msgid ""
"If the server is not running correctly, you can type the following command "
"to start it:"
msgstr "만약 서버가 올바르게 실행 중이 아니라면, 그것을 시작하기 위하여 다음의 명령을 입력할 수 있습니다:"

#: serverguide/C/databases.xml:79(command) serverguide/C/databases.xml:104(command)
msgid "sudo /etc/init.d/mysql restart"
msgstr "sudo /etc/init.d/mysql restart"

#: serverguide/C/databases.xml:85(para)
msgid ""
"You can edit the <filename>/etc/mysql/my.cnf</filename> file to configure "
"the basic settings -- log file, port number, etc. For example, to configure "
"<application>MySQL</application> to listen for connections from network "
"hosts, change the <emphasis>bind-address</emphasis> directive to the "
"server's IP address:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/databases.xml:91(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"bind-address            = 192.168.0.5\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/databases.xml:95(para)
msgid "Replace 192.168.0.5 with the appropriate address."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/databases.xml:99(para)
msgid ""
"After making a change to <filename>/etc/mysql/my.cnf</filename> the "
"<application>mysql</application> daemon will need to be restarted:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/databases.xml:107(para)
msgid ""
"If you would like to change the "
"<application>MySQL</application><emphasis>root</emphasis> password, in a "
"terminal enter:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/databases.xml:113(command)
msgid "sudo dpkg-reconfigure mysql-server-5.1"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/databases.xml:116(para)
msgid ""
"The <application>mysql</application> daemon will be stopped, and you will be "
"prompted to enter a new password."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/databases.xml:125(para)
msgid ""
"See the <ulink url=\"http://www.mysql.com/\">MySQL Home Page</ulink> for "
"more information."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/databases.xml:130(para)
msgid ""
"The <emphasis>MySQL Handbook</emphasis> is also available in the "
"<application>mysql-doc-5.0</application> package. To install the package "
"enter the following in a terminal:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/databases.xml:135(command)
msgid "sudo apt-get install mysql-doc-5.0"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/databases.xml:137(para)
msgid ""
"The documentation is in HTML format, to view them enter "
"<command>file:///usr/share/doc/mysql-doc-5.0/refman-5.0-en.html-"
"chapter/index.html</command> in your browser's address bar."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/databases.xml:143(para) serverguide/C/databases.xml:290(para)
msgid ""
"For general SQL information see <ulink "
"url=\"http://www.informit.com/store/product.aspx?isbn=0768664128\">Using SQL "
"Special Edition</ulink> by Rafe Colburn."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/databases.xml:149(para)
msgid ""
"The <ulink url=\"https://help.ubuntu.com/community/ApacheMySQLPHP\">Apache "
"MySQL PHP Ubuntu Wiki</ulink> page also has useful information."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/databases.xml:158(para)
msgid ""
"PostgreSQL is an object-relational database system that has the features of "
"traditional commercial database systems with enhancements to be found in "
"next-generation DBMS systems."
msgstr ""
"PostgreSQL은 전통적인 상업용 데이타베이스 시스템의 기능에 차세대 DBMS 시스템에서 찾을 수 있는 개선을 포함하는 객체-관계형 "
"데이타베이스 시스템 입니다."

#: serverguide/C/databases.xml:165(para)
msgid ""
"To install PostgreSQL, run the following command in the command prompt:"
msgstr "PostgreSQL를 설치하기 위하여, 명령 프롬프트에서 다음의 명령을 실행 합니다:"

#: serverguide/C/databases.xml:172(command)
msgid "sudo apt-get install postgresql"
msgstr "sudo apt-get install postgresql"

#: serverguide/C/databases.xml:176(para)
msgid ""
"Once the installation is complete, you should configure the PostgreSQL "
"server based on your needs, although the default configuration is viable."
msgstr ""
"설치가 마쳐지면, 비록 기본 설정이 유용하기는 하지만, 여러분의 필요에 따라 PostgreSQL 서버를 설정할 수 있습니다."

#: serverguide/C/databases.xml:184(para)
msgid ""
"By default, connection via TCP/IP is disabled. PostgreSQL supports multiple "
"client authentication methods. By default, IDENT authentication method is "
"used for <application>postgres</application> and local users. Please refer "
"<ulink url=\"http://www.postgresql.org/docs/8.4/static/admin.html\"> the "
"PostgreSQL Administrator's Guide</ulink>."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/databases.xml:191(para)
msgid ""
"The following discussion assumes that you wish to enable TCP/IP connections "
"and use the MD5 method for client authentication. PostgreSQL configuration "
"files are stored in the "
"<filename>/etc/postgresql/&lt;version&gt;/main</filename> directory. For "
"example, if you install PostgreSQL 8.4, the configuration files are stored "
"in the <filename>/etc/postgresql/8.4/main</filename> directory."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/databases.xml:201(para)
msgid ""
"To configure <emphasis>ident</emphasis> authentication, add entries to the "
"<filename>/etc/postgresql/8.4/main/pg_ident.conf</filename> file."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/databases.xml:208(para)
msgid ""
"To enable TCP/IP connections, edit the file "
"<filename>/etc/postgresql/8.4/main/postgresql.conf</filename>"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/databases.xml:210(para)
msgid ""
"Locate the line <emphasis>#listen_addresses = 'localhost'</emphasis> and "
"change it to:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/databases.xml:213(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"listen_addresses = 'localhost'\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/databases.xml:217(para)
msgid ""
"To allow other computers to connect to your "
"<application>PostgreSQL</application> server replace 'localhost' with the "
"<emphasis>IP Address</emphasis> of your server."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/databases.xml:222(para)
msgid ""
"You may also edit all other parameters, if you know what you are doing! For "
"details, refer to the configuration file or to the PostgreSQL documentation."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/databases.xml:227(para)
msgid ""
"Now that we can connect to our <application>PostgreSQL</application> server, "
"the next step is to set a password for the <emphasis>postgres</emphasis> "
"user. Run the following command at a terminal prompt to connect to the "
"default PostgreSQL template database:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/databases.xml:234(command)
msgid "sudo -u postgres psql template1"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/databases.xml:236(para)
msgid ""
"The above command connects to PostgreSQL database "
"<emphasis>template1</emphasis> as user <emphasis>postgres</emphasis>. Once "
"you connect to the PostgreSQL server, you will be at a SQL prompt. You can "
"run the following SQL command at the <application>psql</application> prompt "
"to configure the password for the user <emphasis "
"role=\"italics\">postgres</emphasis>."
msgstr ""
"위의 명령은 사용자 <emphasis>postgres</emphasis>로써 PostgreSQL 데이타베이스 "
"<emphasis>template1</emphasis> 로 접속 합니다. PostgreSQL 서버로 접속하면, 여러분은 SQL 프롬프트를 "
"보게 됩니다. <emphasis role=\"italics\">postgres</emphasis> 사용자의 암호를 설정하기 위하여 "
"<application>psql</application> 프롬프트에서 다음의 SQL 명령을 실행할 수 있습니다."

#: serverguide/C/databases.xml:244(command)
msgid "ALTER USER postgres with encrypted password 'your_password';"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/databases.xml:246(para)
msgid ""
"After configuring the password, edit the file "
"<filename>/etc/postgresql/8.4/main/pg_hba.conf</filename> to use "
"<emphasis>MD5</emphasis> authentication with the "
"<emphasis>postgres</emphasis> user:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/databases.xml:252(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"local   all         postgres                          md5\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/databases.xml:256(para)
msgid ""
"Finally, you should restart the <application>PostgreSQL</application> "
"service to initialize the new configuration. From a terminal prompt enter "
"the following to restart <application>PostgreSQL</application>:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/databases.xml:262(command)
msgid "sudo /etc/init.d/postgresql-8.4 restart"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/databases.xml:265(para)
msgid ""
"The above configuration is not complete by any means. Please refer <ulink "
"url=\"http://www.postgresql.org/docs/8.4/static/admin.html\"> the PostgreSQL "
"Administrator's Guide</ulink> to configure more parameters."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/databases.xml:276(para)
msgid ""
"As mentioned above the <ulink "
"url=\"http://www.postgresql.org/docs/8.4/static/admin.html\">Administrator's "
"Guide</ulink> is an excellent resource. The guide is also available in the "
"<application>postgresql-doc-8.4</application> package. Execute the following "
"in a terminal to install the package:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/databases.xml:282(command)
msgid "sudo apt-get install postgresql-doc-8.4"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/databases.xml:284(para)
msgid ""
"To view the guide enter <command>file:///usr/share/doc/postgresql-doc-"
"8.4/html/index.html</command> into the address bar of your browser."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/databases.xml:296(para)
msgid ""
"Also, see the <ulink "
"url=\"https://help.ubuntu.com/community/PostgreSQL\">PostgreSQL Ubuntu "
"Wiki</ulink> page for more information."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/clustering.xml:13(title)
msgid "Clustering"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/clustering.xml:16(title)
msgid "DRBD"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/clustering.xml:18(para)
msgid ""
"Distributed Replicated Block Device (DRBD) mirrors block devices between "
"multiple hosts. The replication is transparent to other applications on the "
"host systems. Any block device hard disks, partitions, RAID devices, logical "
"volumes, etc can be mirrored."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/clustering.xml:24(para)
msgid ""
"To get started using <application>drbd</application>, first install the "
"necessary packages. From a terminal enter:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/clustering.xml:29(command)
msgid "sudo apt-get install drbd8-utils"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/clustering.xml:33(para)
msgid ""
"If you are using the <emphasis>virtual kernel</emphasis> as part of a "
"virtual machine you will need to manually compile the "
"<application>drbd</application> module. It may be easier to install the "
"<application>linux-server</application> package inside the virtual machine."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/clustering.xml:40(para)
msgid ""
"This section covers setting up a <application>drbd</application> to "
"replicate a separate <filename>/srv</filename> partition, with an "
"<application>ext3</application> filesystem between two hosts. The partition "
"size is not particularly relevant, but both partitions need to be the same "
"size."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/clustering.xml:49(para)
msgid ""
"The two hosts in this example will be called <emphasis>drbd01</emphasis> and "
"<emphasis>drbd02</emphasis>. They will need to have name resolution "
"configured either through DNS or the <filename>/etc/hosts</filename> file. "
"See <xref linkend=\"dns\"/> for details."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/clustering.xml:57(para)
msgid ""
"To configure <application>drbd</application>, on the first host edit "
"<filename>/etc/drbd.conf</filename>:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/clustering.xml:61(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"global { usage-count no; }\n"
"common { syncer { rate 100M; } }\n"
"resource r0 {\n"
"        protocol C;\n"
"        startup {\n"
"                wfc-timeout  15;\n"
"                degr-wfc-timeout 60;\n"
"        }\n"
"        net {\n"
"                cram-hmac-alg sha1;\n"
"                shared-secret \"secret\";\n"
"        }\n"
"        on drbd01 {\n"
"                device /dev/drbd0;\n"
"                disk /dev/sdb1;\n"
"                address 192.168.0.1:7788;\n"
"                meta-disk internal;\n"
"        }\n"
"        on drbd02 {\n"
"                device /dev/drbd0;\n"
"                disk /dev/sdb1;\n"
"                address 192.168.0.2:7788;\n"
"                meta-disk internal;\n"
"        }\n"
"} \n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/clustering.xml:90(para)
msgid ""
"There are many other options in <filename>/etc/drbd.conf</filename>, but for "
"this example their default values are fine."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/clustering.xml:98(para)
msgid "Now copy <filename>/etc/drbd.conf</filename> to the second host:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/clustering.xml:103(command)
msgid "scp /etc/drbd.conf drbd02:~"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/clustering.xml:109(para)
msgid ""
"And, on <emphasis>drbd02</emphasis> move the file to "
"<filename>/etc</filename>:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/clustering.xml:114(command)
msgid "sudo mv drbd.conf /etc/"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/clustering.xml:120(para)
msgid ""
"Next, on both hosts, start the <application>drbd</application> daemon:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/clustering.xml:125(command)
msgid "sudo /etc/init.d/drbd start"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/clustering.xml:131(para)
msgid ""
"Now using the <application>drbdadm</application> utility initialize the meta "
"data storage. On each server execute:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/clustering.xml:137(command)
msgid "sudo drbdadm create-md r0"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/clustering.xml:143(para)
msgid ""
"On the <emphasis>drbd01</emphasis>, or whichever host you wish to be the "
"primary, enter the following:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/clustering.xml:148(command)
msgid "sudo drbdadm -- --overwrite-data-of-peer primary all"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/clustering.xml:154(para)
msgid ""
"After executing the above command, the data will start syncing with the "
"secondary host. To watch the progresss, on <emphasis>drbd02</emphasis> enter "
"the following:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/clustering.xml:160(command)
msgid "watch -n1 cat /proc/drbd"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/clustering.xml:163(para)
msgid "To stop watching the output press <emphasis>Ctrl+c</emphasis>."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/clustering.xml:170(para)
msgid ""
"Finally, add a filesystem to <filename>/dev/drbd0</filename> and mount it:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/clustering.xml:175(command)
msgid "sudo mkfs.ext3 /dev/drbd0"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/clustering.xml:176(command) serverguide/C/clustering.xml:224(command)
msgid "sudo mount /dev/drbd0 /srv"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/clustering.xml:186(para)
msgid ""
"To test that the data is actually syncing between the hosts copy some files "
"on the <emphasis>drbd01</emphasis>, the primary, to "
"<filename>/srv</filename>:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/clustering.xml:195(para)
msgid "Next, unmount <filename>/srv</filename>:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/clustering.xml:203(para)
msgid ""
"<emphasis>Demote</emphasis> the <emphasis>primary</emphasis> server to the "
"<emphasis>secondary</emphasis> role:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/clustering.xml:208(command)
msgid "sudo drbdadm secondary r0"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/clustering.xml:211(para)
msgid ""
"Now on the <emphasis>secondary</emphasis> server "
"<emphasis>promote</emphasis> it to the <emphasis>primary</emphasis> role:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/clustering.xml:216(command)
msgid "sudo drbdadm primary r0"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/clustering.xml:219(para)
msgid "Lastly, mount the partition:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/clustering.xml:227(para)
msgid ""
"Using <emphasis>ls</emphasis> you should see "
"<filename>/srv/default</filename> copied from the former "
"<emphasis>primary</emphasis> host <emphasis>drbd01</emphasis>."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/clustering.xml:238(para)
msgid ""
"For more information on <application>DRBD</application> see the <ulink "
"url=\"http://www.drbd.org/\">DRBD web site</ulink>."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/clustering.xml:243(para)
msgid ""
"The <ulink "
"url=\"http://manpages.ubuntu.com/manpages/lucid/en/man5/drbd.conf.5.html\">dr"
"bd.conf man page</ulink> contains details on the options not covered in this "
"guide."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/clustering.xml:249(para)
msgid ""
"Also, see the <ulink "
"url=\"http://manpages.ubuntu.com/manpages/lucid/en/man8/drbdadm.8.html\">drbd"
"adm man page</ulink>."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/clustering.xml:254(para)
msgid ""
"The <ulink url=\"https://help.ubuntu.com/community/DRBD\">DRBD Ubuntu "
"Wiki</ulink> page also has more information."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/chat.xml:13(title)
msgid "Chat Applications"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/chat.xml:19(para)
msgid ""
"In this section, we will discuss how to install and configure a IRC server, "
"<application>ircd-irc2</application>. We will also discuss how to install "
"and configure Jabber, an instance messaging server."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/chat.xml:28(title)
msgid "IRC Server"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/chat.xml:30(para)
msgid ""
"The Ubuntu repository has many Internet Relay Chat servers. This section "
"explains how to install and configure the original IRC server "
"<application>ircd-irc2</application>."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/chat.xml:39(para)
msgid ""
"To install <application>ircd-irc2</application>, run the following command "
"in the command prompt:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/chat.xml:45(command)
msgid "sudo apt-get install ircd-irc2"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/chat.xml:48(para)
msgid ""
"The configuration files are stored in <filename>/etc/ircd</filename> "
"directory. The documents are available in <filename>/usr/share/doc/ircd-"
"irc2</filename> directory."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/chat.xml:59(para)
msgid ""
"The IRC settings can be done in the configuration file "
"<filename>/etc/ircd/ircd.conf</filename>. You can set the IRC host name in "
"this file by editing the following line:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/chat.xml:64(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"M:irc.localhost::Debian ircd default configuration::000A\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/chat.xml:68(para)
msgid ""
"Please make sure you add DNS aliases for the IRC host name. For instance, if "
"you set irc.livecipher.com as IRC host name, please make sure "
"irc.livecipher.com is resolvable in your Domain Name Server. The IRC host "
"name should not be same as the host name."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/chat.xml:75(para)
msgid ""
"The IRC admin details can be configured by editting the following line:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/chat.xml:80(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"A:Organization, IRC dept.:Daemon &lt;ircd@example.irc.org&gt;:Client "
"Server::IRCnet:\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/chat.xml:84(para)
msgid ""
"You should add specific lines to configure the list of IRC ports to listen "
"on, to configure Operator credentials, to configure client authentication, "
"etc. For details, please refer to the example configuration file "
"<filename>/usr/share/doc/ircd-irc2/ircd.conf.example.gz</filename>."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/chat.xml:92(para)
msgid ""
"The IRC banner to be displayed in the IRC client, when the user connects to "
"the server can be set in <filename>/etc/ircd/ircd.motd</filename> file."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/chat.xml:97(para)
msgid ""
"After making necessary changes to the configuration file, you can restart "
"the IRC server using following command:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/chat.xml:101(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"sudo /etc/init.d/ircd-irc2 restart\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/chat.xml:109(para)
msgid ""
"You may also be interested to take a look at other IRC servers available in "
"Ubuntu Repository. It includes, <application>ircd-ircu</application> and "
"<application>ircd-hybrid</application>."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/chat.xml:117(para)
msgid ""
"Refer to <ulink url=\"http://www.irc.org/tech_docs/ircnet/faq.html\">IRCD "
"FAQ</ulink> for more details about the IRC Server."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/chat.xml:124(para)
msgid ""
"Also, the <ulink url=\"https://help.ubuntu.com/community/ircd\">Ubuntu Wiki "
"IRCD</ulink> page has more information."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/chat.xml:132(title)
msgid "Jabber Instant Messaging Server"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/chat.xml:134(para)
msgid ""
"<emphasis>Jabber</emphasis> a popular instant message protocol is based on "
"XMPP, an open standard for instant messaging, and used by many popular "
"applications. This section covers setting up a <emphasis>Jabberd "
"2</emphasis> server on a local LAN. This configuration can also be adapted "
"to providing messaging services to users over the Internet."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/chat.xml:143(para)
msgid "To install <application>jabberd2</application>, in a terminal enter:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/chat.xml:148(command)
msgid "sudo apt-get install jabberd2"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/chat.xml:155(para)
msgid ""
"A couple of XML configuration files will be used to configure "
"<application>jabberd2</application> for <emphasis>Berkely DB</emphasis> user "
"authentication. This is a very simple form of authentication. However, "
"<application>jabberd2</application> can be configured to use LDAP, MySQL, "
"Postgresql, etc for for user authentication."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/chat.xml:162(para)
msgid "First, edit <filename>/etc/jabberd2/sm.xml</filename> changing:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/chat.xml:166(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"  &lt;id&gt;jabber.example.com&lt;/id&gt;\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/chat.xml:171(para)
msgid ""
"Replace <emphasis>jabber.example.com</emphasis> with the hostname, or other "
"id, of your server."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/chat.xml:176(para)
msgid "Now in the &lt;storage&gt; section change the &lt;driver&gt; to:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/chat.xml:180(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"   &lt;driver&gt;db&lt;/driver&gt;\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/chat.xml:184(para)
msgid ""
"Next, edit <filename>/etc/jabberd2/c2s.xml</filename> in the "
"<emphasis>&lt;local&gt;</emphasis> section change:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/chat.xml:188(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"    &lt;id&gt;jabber.example.com&lt;/id&gt;\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/chat.xml:192(para)
msgid ""
"And in the &lt;authreg&gt; section adjust the &lt;module&gt; section to:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/chat.xml:196(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"    &lt;module&gt;db&lt;/module&gt;\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/chat.xml:200(para)
msgid ""
"Finally, restart <application>jabberd2</application> to enable the new "
"settings:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/chat.xml:205(command)
msgid "sudo /etc/init.d/jabberd2 restart"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/chat.xml:208(para)
msgid ""
"You should now be able to connect to the server using a Jabber client like "
"<application>Pidgin</application> for example."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/chat.xml:213(para)
msgid ""
"The advantage of using Berkeley DB for user data is that after being "
"configured no additional maintenance is required. If you need more control "
"over user accounts and credentials another authentication method is "
"recommended."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/chat.xml:225(para)
msgid ""
"The <ulink url=\"http://codex.xiaoka.com/wiki/jabberd2:start\">Jabberd2 Web "
"Site</ulink> contains more details on configuring "
"<application>Jabberd2</application>."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/chat.xml:231(para)
msgid ""
"For more authentication options see the <ulink "
"url=\"http://jabberd2.xiaoka.com/wiki/InstallGuide\">Jabberd2 Install "
"Guide</ulink>."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/chat.xml:236(para)
msgid ""
"Also, the <ulink "
"url=\"https://help.ubuntu.com/community/SettingUpJabberServer\">Setting Up "
"Jabber Server Ubuntu Wiki</ulink> page has more information."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/backups.xml:13(title)
msgid "Backups"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/backups.xml:14(para)
msgid ""
"There are many ways to backup an Ubuntu installation. The most important "
"thing about backups is to develop a <emphasis>backup plan</emphasis> "
"consisting of what to backup, where to back it up to, and how to restore it."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/backups.xml:18(para)
msgid ""
"The following sections discuss various ways of accomplishing these tasks."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/backups.xml:22(title)
msgid "Shell Scripts"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/backups.xml:23(para)
msgid ""
"One of the simplest ways to backup a system is using a <emphasis>shell "
"script</emphasis>. For example, a script can be used to configure which "
"directories to backup, and use those directories as arguments to the "
"<application>tar</application> utility creating an archive file. The archive "
"file can then be moved or copied to another location. The archive can also "
"be created on a remote file system such as an <emphasis>NFS</emphasis> mount."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/backups.xml:29(para)
msgid ""
"The <application>tar</application> utility creates one archive file out of "
"many files or directories. <application>tar</application> can also filter "
"the files through compression utilities reducing the size of the archive "
"file."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/backups.xml:35(title)
msgid "Simple Shell Script"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/backups.xml:36(para)
msgid ""
"The following shell script uses <application>tar</application> to create an "
"archive file on a remotely mounted NFS file system. The archive filename is "
"determined using additional command line utilities."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/backups.xml:40(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"#!/bin/sh\n"
"####################################\n"
"#\n"
"# Backup to NFS mount script.\n"
"#\n"
"####################################\n"
"\n"
"# What to backup. \n"
"backup_files=\"/home /var/spool/mail /etc /root /boot /opt\"\n"
"\n"
"# Where to backup to.\n"
"dest=\"/mnt/backup\"\n"
"\n"
"# Create archive filename.\n"
"day=$(date +%A)\n"
"hostname=$(hostname -s)\n"
"archive_file=\"$hostname-$day.tgz\"\n"
"\n"
"# Print start status message.\n"
"echo \"Backing up $backup_files to $dest/$archive_file\"\n"
"date\n"
"echo\n"
"\n"
"# Backup the files using tar.\n"
"tar czf $dest/$archive_file $backup_files\n"
"\n"
"# Print end status message.\n"
"echo\n"
"echo \"Backup finished\"\n"
"date\n"
"\n"
"# Long listing of files in $dest to check file sizes.\n"
"ls -lh $dest\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/backups.xml:77(para)
msgid ""
"<emphasis>$backup_files:</emphasis> a variable listing which directories you "
"would like to backup. The list should be customized to fit your needs."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/backups.xml:83(para)
msgid ""
"<emphasis>$day:</emphasis> a variable holding the day of the week (Monday, "
"Tuesday, Wednesday, etc). This is used to create an archive file for each "
"day of the week, giving a backup history of seven days. There are other ways "
"to accomplish this including other ways using the "
"<application>date</application> utility."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/backups.xml:90(para)
msgid ""
"<emphasis>$hostname:</emphasis> variable containing the "
"<emphasis>short</emphasis> hostname of the system. Using the hostname in the "
"archive filename gives you the option of placing daily archive files from "
"multiple systems in the same directory."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/backups.xml:97(para)
msgid "<emphasis>$archive_file:</emphasis> the full archive filename."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/backups.xml:102(para)
msgid ""
"<emphasis>$dest:</emphasis> destination of the archive file. The directory "
"needs to be created and in this case <emphasis>mounted</emphasis> before "
"executing the backup script. See <xref linkend=\"network-file-system\"/> for "
"details using <emphasis>NFS</emphasis>."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/backups.xml:109(para)
msgid ""
"<emphasis>status messages:</emphasis> optional messages printed to the "
"console using the <application>echo</application> utility."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/backups.xml:115(para)
msgid ""
"<emphasis>tar czf $dest/$archive_file $backup_files:</emphasis> the "
"<application>tar</application> command used to create the archive file."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/backups.xml:121(para)
msgid "<emphasis>c:</emphasis> creates an archive."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/backups.xml:126(para)
msgid ""
"<emphasis>z:</emphasis> filter the archive through the "
"<application>gzip</application> utility compressing the archive."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/backups.xml:131(para)
msgid ""
"<emphasis>f:</emphasis> use archive file. Otherwise the "
"<application>tar</application> output will be sent to STDOUT."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/backups.xml:138(para)
msgid ""
"<emphasis>ls -lh $dest:</emphasis> optional statement prints a <emphasis>-"
"l</emphasis> long listing in <emphasis>-h</emphasis> human readable format "
"of the destination directory. This is useful for a quick file size check of "
"the archive file. This check should not replace testing the archive file."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/backups.xml:145(para)
msgid ""
"This is a simple example of a backup shell script. There are large amount of "
"options that can be included in a backup script. See <xref linkend=\"backup-"
"shellscript-references\"/> for links to resources providing more in depth "
"shell scripting information."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/backups.xml:152(title)
msgid "Executing the Script"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/backups.xml:154(title)
msgid "Executing from a Terminal"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/backups.xml:155(para)
msgid ""
"The simplest way of executing the above backup script is to copy and paste "
"the contents into a file. <filename>backup.sh</filename> for example. Then "
"from a terminal prompt:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/backups.xml:160(command)
msgid "sudo bash backup.sh"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/backups.xml:162(para)
msgid ""
"This is a great way to test the script to make sure everything works as "
"expected."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/backups.xml:167(title)
msgid "Executing with cron"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/backups.xml:168(para)
msgid ""
"The <application>cron</application> utility can be used to automate the "
"script execution. The <application>cron</application> daemon allows the "
"execution of scripts, or commands, at a specified time and date."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/backups.xml:172(para)
msgid ""
"<application>cron</application> is configured through entries in a "
"<filename>crontab</filename> file. <filename>crontab</filename> files are "
"separated into fields:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/backups.xml:176(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"# m h dom mon dow   command\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/backups.xml:181(para)
msgid ""
"<emphasis>m:</emphasis> minute the command executes on between 0 and 59."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/backups.xml:186(para)
msgid ""
"<emphasis>h:</emphasis> hour the command executes on between 0 and 23."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/backups.xml:191(para)
msgid "<emphasis>dom:</emphasis> day of month the command executes on."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/backups.xml:196(para)
msgid ""
"<emphasis>mon:</emphasis> the month the command executes on between 1 and 12."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/backups.xml:201(para)
msgid ""
"<emphasis>dow:</emphasis> the day of the week the command executes on "
"between 0 and 7. Sunday may be specified by using 0 or 7, both values are "
"valid."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/backups.xml:206(para)
msgid "<emphasis>command:</emphasis> the command to execute."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/backups.xml:211(para)
msgid ""
"To add or change entries in a <filename>crontab</filename> file the "
"<application>crontab -e</application> command should be used. Also, the "
"contents of a <filename>crontab</filename> file can be viewed using the "
"<application>crontab -l</application> command."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/backups.xml:215(para)
msgid ""
"To execute the <application>backup.sh</application> script listed above "
"using <application>cron</application>. Enter the following from a terminal "
"prompt:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/backups.xml:220(command)
msgid "sudo crontab -e"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/backups.xml:223(para)
msgid ""
"Using <application>sudo</application> with the <application>crontab -"
"e</application> command edits the <emphasis>root</emphasis> user's crontab. "
"This is necessary if you are backing up directories only the root user has "
"access to."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/backups.xml:228(para)
msgid "Add the following entry to the <filename>crontab</filename> file:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/backups.xml:231(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"# m h dom mon dow   command\n"
"0 0 * * * bash /usr/local/bin/backup.sh\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/backups.xml:235(para)
msgid ""
"The <application>backup.sh</application> script will now be executed every "
"day at 12:00 am."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/backups.xml:239(para)
msgid ""
"The <application>backup.sh</application> script will need to be copied to "
"the <filename>/usr/local/bin/</filename> directory in order for this entry "
"to execute properly. The script can reside anywhere on the file system "
"simply change the script path appropriately."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/backups.xml:244(para)
msgid ""
"For more in depth <application>crontab</application> options see <xref "
"linkend=\"backup-shellscript-references\"/>."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/backups.xml:250(title)
msgid "Restoring from the Archive"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/backups.xml:251(para)
msgid ""
"Once an archive has been created it is important to test the archive. The "
"archive can be tested by listing the files it contains, but the best test is "
"to <emphasis>restore</emphasis> a file from the archive."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/backups.xml:257(para)
msgid "To see a listing of the archive contents. From a terminal prompt:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/backups.xml:261(command)
msgid "tar -tzvf /mnt/backup/host-Monday.tgz"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/backups.xml:265(para)
msgid "To restore a file from the archive to a different directory enter:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/backups.xml:269(command)
msgid "tar -xzvf /mnt/backup/host-Monday.tgz -C /tmp etc/hosts"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/backups.xml:271(para)
msgid ""
"The <emphasis>-C</emphasis> option to <application>tar</application> "
"redirects the extracted files to the specified directory. The above example "
"will extract the <filename>/etc/hosts</filename> file to "
"<filename>/tmp/etc/hosts</filename>. <application>tar</application> "
"recreates the directory structure that it contains."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/backups.xml:276(para)
msgid ""
"Also, notice the leading <emphasis>\"/\"</emphasis> is left off the path of "
"the file to restore."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/backups.xml:281(para)
msgid "To restore all files in the archive enter the following:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/backups.xml:285(command)
msgid "cd /"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/backups.xml:286(command)
msgid "sudo tar -xzvf /mnt/backup/host-Monday.tgz"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/backups.xml:291(para)
msgid "This will overwrite the files currently on the file system."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/backups.xml:300(para)
msgid ""
"For more information on shell scripting see the <ulink "
"url=\"http://tldp.org/LDP/abs/html/\">Advanced Bash-Scripting Guide</ulink>"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/backups.xml:305(para)
msgid ""
"The book <ulink url=\"http://safari.samspublishing.com/0672323583\">Teach "
"Yourself Shell Programming in 24 Hours</ulink> is available online and a "
"great resource for shell scripting."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/backups.xml:311(para)
msgid ""
"The <ulink url=\"https://help.ubuntu.com/community/CronHowto\">CronHowto "
"Wiki Page</ulink> contains details on advanced "
"<application>cron</application> options."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/backups.xml:318(para)
msgid ""
"See the <ulink url=\"http://www.gnu.org/software/tar/manual/index.html\">GNU "
"tar Manual</ulink> for more <application>tar</application> options."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/backups.xml:324(para)
msgid ""
"The Wikipedia <ulink "
"url=\"http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Backup_rotation_scheme\">Backup Rotation "
"Scheme</ulink> article contains information on other backup rotation schemes."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/backups.xml:330(para)
msgid ""
"The shell script uses <application>tar</application> to create the archive, "
"but there many other command line utilities that can be used. For example:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/backups.xml:336(para)
msgid ""
"<ulink url=\"http://www.gnu.org/software/cpio/\">cpio</ulink>: used to copy "
"files to and from archives."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/backups.xml:341(para)
msgid ""
"<ulink url=\"http://www.gnu.org/software/coreutils/\">dd</ulink>: part of "
"the <application>coreutils</application> package. A low level utility that "
"can copy data from one format to another"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/backups.xml:347(para)
msgid ""
"<ulink url=\"http://www.rsnapshot.org/\">rsnapshot</ulink>: a file system "
"snap shot utility used to create copies of an entire file system."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/backups.xml:358(title)
msgid "Archive Rotation"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/backups.xml:359(para)
msgid ""
"The shell script in section <xref linkend=\"backup-shellscripts\"/> only "
"allows for seven different archives. For a server whose data doesn't change "
"often this may be enough. If the server has a large amount of data a more "
"robust rotation scheme should be used."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/backups.xml:365(title)
msgid "Rotating NFS Archives"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/backups.xml:366(para)
msgid ""
"In this section the shell script will be slightly modified to implement a "
"grandfather-father-son rotation scheme (monthly-weekly-daily):"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/backups.xml:372(para)
msgid ""
"The rotation will do a <emphasis>daily</emphasis> backup Sunday through "
"Friday."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/backups.xml:377(para)
msgid ""
"On Saturday a <emphasis>weekly</emphasis> backup is done giving you four "
"weekly backups a month."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/backups.xml:382(para)
msgid ""
"The <emphasis>monthly</emphasis> backup is done on the first of the month "
"rotating two monthly backups based on if the month is odd or even."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/backups.xml:388(para)
msgid "Here is the new script:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/backups.xml:391(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"#!/bin/bash\n"
"####################################\n"
"#\n"
"# Backup to NFS mount script with\n"
"# grandfather-father-son rotation.\n"
"#\n"
"####################################\n"
"\n"
"# What to backup. \n"
"backup_files=\"/home /var/spool/mail /etc /root /boot /opt\"\n"
"\n"
"# Where to backup to.\n"
"dest=\"/mnt/backup\"\n"
"\n"
"# Setup variables for the archive filename.\n"
"day=$(date +%A)\n"
"hostname=$(hostname -s)\n"
"\n"
"# Find which week of the month 1-4 it is.\n"
"day_num=$(date +%d)\n"
"if (( $day_num &lt;= 7 )); then\n"
"        week_file=\"$hostname-week1.tgz\"\n"
"elif (( $day_num &gt; 7 &amp;&amp; $day_num &lt;= 14 )); then\n"
"        week_file=\"$hostname-week2.tgz\"\n"
"elif (( $day_num &gt; 14 &amp;&amp; $day_num &lt;= 21 )); then\n"
"        week_file=\"$hostname-week3.tgz\"\n"
"elif (( $day_num &gt; 21 &amp;&amp; $day_num &lt; 32 )); then\n"
"        week_file=\"$hostname-week4.tgz\"\n"
"fi\n"
"\n"
"# Find if the Month is odd or even.\n"
"month_num=$(date +%m)\n"
"month=$(expr $month_num % 2)\n"
"if [ $month -eq 0 ]; then\n"
"        month_file=\"$hostname-month2.tgz\"\n"
"else\n"
"        month_file=\"$hostname-month1.tgz\"\n"
"fi\n"
"\n"
"# Create archive filename.\n"
"if [ $day_num == 1 ]; then\n"
"\tarchive_file=$month_file\n"
"elif [ $day != \"Saturday\" ]; then\n"
"        archive_file=\"$hostname-$day.tgz\"\n"
"else \n"
"\tarchive_file=$week_file\n"
"fi\n"
"\n"
"# Print start status message.\n"
"echo \"Backing up $backup_files to $dest/$archive_file\"\n"
"date\n"
"echo\n"
"\n"
"# Backup the files using tar.\n"
"tar czf $dest/$archive_file $backup_files\n"
"\n"
"# Print end status message.\n"
"echo\n"
"echo \"Backup finished\"\n"
"date\n"
"\n"
"# Long listing of files in $dest to check file sizes.\n"
"ls -lh $dest/\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/backups.xml:456(para)
msgid ""
"The script can be executed using the same methods as in <xref "
"linkend=\"backup-executing-shellscript\"/>."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/backups.xml:459(para)
msgid ""
"It is good practice to take backup media off site in case of a disaster. In "
"the shell script example the backup media is another server providing an NFS "
"share. In all likelihood taking the NFS server to another location would not "
"be practical. Depending upon connection speeds it may be an option to copy "
"the archive file over a WAN link to a server in another location."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/backups.xml:465(para)
msgid ""
"Another option is to copy the archive file to an external hard drive which "
"can then be taken off site. Since the price of external hard drives continue "
"to decrease it may be cost affective to use two drives for each archive "
"level. This would allow you to have one external drive attached to the "
"backup server and one in another location."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/backups.xml:472(title)
msgid "Tape Drives"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/backups.xml:473(para)
msgid ""
"A tape drive attached to the server can be used instead of a NFS share. "
"Using a tape drive simplifies archive rotation, and taking the media off "
"site as well."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/backups.xml:477(para)
msgid ""
"When using a tape drive the filename portions of the script aren't needed "
"because the date is sent directly to the tape device. Some commands to "
"manipulate the tape are needed. This is accomplished using "
"<application>mt</application>, a magnetic tape control utility part of the "
"<application>cpio</application> package."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/backups.xml:482(para)
msgid "Here is the shell script modified to use a tape drive:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/backups.xml:485(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"#!/bin/bash\n"
"####################################\n"
"#\n"
"# Backup to tape drive script.\n"
"#\n"
"####################################\n"
"\n"
"# What to backup. \n"
"backup_files=\"/home /var/spool/mail /etc /root /boot /opt\"\n"
"\n"
"# Where to backup to.\n"
"dest=\"/dev/st0\"\n"
"\n"
"# Print start status message.\n"
"echo \"Backing up $backup_files to $dest\"\n"
"date\n"
"echo\n"
"\n"
"# Make sure the tape is rewound.\n"
"mt -f $dest rewind\n"
"\n"
"# Backup the files using tar.\n"
"tar czf $dest $backup_files\n"
"\n"
"# Rewind and eject the tape.\n"
"mt -f $dest rewoffl\n"
"\n"
"# Print end status message.\n"
"echo\n"
"echo \"Backup finished\"\n"
"date\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/backups.xml:519(para)
msgid ""
"The default device name for a SCSI tape drive is "
"<filename>/dev/st0</filename>. Use the appropriate device path for your "
"system."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/backups.xml:524(para)
msgid ""
"Restoring from a tape drive is basically the same as restoring from a file. "
"Simply rewind the tape and use the device path instead of a file path. For "
"example to restore the <filename>/etc/hosts</filename> file to "
"<filename>/tmp/etc/hosts</filename>:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/backups.xml:529(command)
msgid "mt -f /dev/st0 rewind"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/backups.xml:530(command)
msgid "tar -xzf /dev/st0 -C /tmp etc/hosts"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/backups.xml:535(title)
msgid "Bacula"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/backups.xml:536(para)
msgid ""
"<application>Bacula</application> is a backup program enabling you to "
"backup, restore, and verify data across your network. There are Bacula "
"clients for Linux, Windows, and Mac OSX. Making it a cross platform network "
"wide solution."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/backups.xml:542(para)
msgid ""
"<application>Bacula</application> is made up of several components and "
"services used to manage which files to backup and where to back them up to:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/backups.xml:548(para)
msgid ""
"<application>Bacula Director:</application> a service that controls all "
"backup, restore, verify, and archive operations."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/backups.xml:553(para)
msgid ""
"<application>Bacula Console:</application> an application allowing "
"communication with the Director. There are three versions of the Console:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/backups.xml:558(para)
msgid "Text based command line version."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/backups.xml:559(para)
msgid "Gnome based GTK+ Graphical User Interface (GUI) interface."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/backups.xml:560(para)
msgid "wxWidgets GUI interface."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/backups.xml:564(para)
msgid ""
"<application>Bacula File:</application> also known as the "
"<application>Bacula Client</application> program. This application is "
"installed on machines to be backed up, and is responsible for the data "
"requested by the Director."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/backups.xml:570(para)
msgid ""
"<application>Bacula Storage:</application> the programs that perform the "
"storage and recovery of data to the physical media."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/backups.xml:575(para)
msgid ""
"<application>Bacula Catalog:</application> is responsible for maintaining "
"the file indexes and volume databases for all files backed up, enabling "
"quick location and restoration of archived files. The Catalog supports three "
"different databases MySQL, PostgreSQL, and SQLite."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/backups.xml:581(para)
msgid ""
"<application>Bacula Monitor:</application> allows the monitoring of the "
"Director, File daemons, and Storage daemons. Currently the Monitor is only "
"available as a GTK+ GUI application."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/backups.xml:587(para)
msgid ""
"These services and applications can be run on multiple servers and clients, "
"or they can be installed on one machine if backing up a single disk or "
"volume."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/backups.xml:594(para)
msgid ""
"There are multiple packages containing the different "
"<application>Bacula</application> components. To install Bacula, from a "
"terminal prompt enter:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/backups.xml:599(command)
msgid "sudo apt-get install bacula"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/backups.xml:601(para)
msgid ""
"By default installing the <application>bacula</application> package will use "
"a <application>MySQL</application> database for the Catalog. If you want to "
"use SQLite or PostgreSQL, for the Catalog, install <application>bacula-"
"director-sqlite3</application> or <application>bacula-director-"
"pgsql</application> respectively."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/backups.xml:607(para)
msgid ""
"During the install process you will be asked to supply credentials for the "
"database <emphasis>administrator</emphasis> and the "
"<emphasis>bacula</emphasis> database <emphasis>owner</emphasis>. The "
"database administrator will need to have the appropriate rights to create a "
"database, see <xref linkend=\"mysql\"/> for more information."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/backups.xml:617(para)
msgid ""
"<application>Bacula</application> configuration files are formatted based on "
"<emphasis>resources</emphasis> comprising of <emphasis>directives</emphasis> "
"surrounded by <quote>{}</quote> braces. Each Bacula component has an "
"individual file in the <filename role=\"directory\">/etc/bacula</filename> "
"directory."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/backups.xml:622(para)
msgid ""
"The various <application>Bacula</application> components must authorize "
"themselves to each other. This is accomplished using the "
"<emphasis>password</emphasis> directive. For example, the "
"<emphasis>Storage</emphasis> resource password in the "
"<filename>/etc/bacula/bacula-dir.conf</filename> file must match the "
"<emphasis>Director</emphasis> resource password in "
"<filename>/etc/bacula/bacula-sd.conf</filename>."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/backups.xml:628(para)
msgid ""
"By default the backup job named <emphasis>Client1</emphasis> is configured "
"to archive the <application>Bacula</application> Catalog. If you plan on "
"using the server to backup more than one client you should change the name "
"of this job to something more descriptive. To change the name edit "
"<filename>/etc/bacula/bacula-dir.conf</filename>:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/backups.xml:633(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"#\n"
"# Define the main nightly save backup job\n"
"#   By default, this job will back up to disk in \n"
"Job {\n"
"  Name = \"BackupServer\"\n"
"  JobDefs = \"DefaultJob\"\n"
"  Write Bootstrap = \"/var/lib/bacula/Client1.bsr\"\n"
"}\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/backups.xml:644(para)
msgid ""
"The example above changes the job name to <emphasis>BackupServer</emphasis> "
"matching the machine's host name. Replace <quote>BackupServer</quote> with "
"your appropriate hostname, or other descriptive name."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/backups.xml:649(para)
msgid ""
"The <emphasis>Console</emphasis> can be used to query the "
"<emphasis>Director</emphasis> about jobs, but to use the Console with a "
"<emphasis>non-root</emphasis> user, the user needs to be in the "
"<emphasis>bacula</emphasis> group. To add a user to the bacula group enter "
"the following from a terminal:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/backups.xml:655(command)
msgid "sudo adduser $username bacula"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/backups.xml:658(para)
msgid ""
"Replace <emphasis>$username</emphasis> with the actual username. Also, if "
"you are adding the current user to the group you should log out and back in "
"for the new permissions to take effect."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/backups.xml:665(title)
msgid "Localhost Backup"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/backups.xml:666(para)
msgid ""
"This section describes how to backup specified directories on a single host "
"to a local tape drive."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/backups.xml:671(para)
msgid ""
"First, the <emphasis>Storage</emphasis> device needs to be configured. Edit "
"<filename>/etc/bacula/bacula-sd.conf</filename> add:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/backups.xml:674(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"Device {\n"
"  Name = \"Tape Drive\"\n"
"  Device Type = tape\n"
"  Media Type = DDS-4\n"
"  Archive Device = /dev/st0\n"
"  Hardware end of medium = No;\n"
"  AutomaticMount = yes;               # when device opened, read it\n"
"  AlwaysOpen = Yes;\n"
"  RemovableMedia = yes;\n"
"  RandomAccess = no;\n"
"  Alert Command = \"sh -c 'tapeinfo -f %c | grep TapeAlert'\"\n"
"}\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/backups.xml:688(para)
msgid ""
"The example is for a <emphasis>DDS-4</emphasis> tape drive. Adjust the Media "
"Type and Archive Device to match your hardware."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/backups.xml:691(para)
msgid "You could also uncomment one of the other examples in the file."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/backups.xml:696(para)
msgid ""
"After editing <filename>/etc/bacula/bacula-sd.conf</filename> the "
"<application>Storage</application> daemon will need to be restarted:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/backups.xml:701(command)
msgid "sudo /etc/init.d/bacula-sd restart"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/backups.xml:705(para)
msgid ""
"Now add a <emphasis>Storage</emphasis> resource in "
"<filename>/etc/bacula/bacula-dir.conf</filename> to use the new Device:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/backups.xml:708(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"# Definition of \"Tape Drive\" storage device\n"
"Storage {\n"
"  Name = TapeDrive\n"
"  # Do not use \"localhost\" here    \n"
"  Address = backupserver               # N.B. Use a fully qualified name "
"here\n"
"  SDPort = 9103\n"
"  Password = \"Cv70F6pf1t6pBopT4vQOnigDrR0v3LT3Cgkiyj\"\n"
"  Device = \"Tape Drive\"\n"
"  Media Type = tape\n"
"}\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/backups.xml:720(para)
msgid ""
"The <emphasis>Address</emphasis> directive needs to be the Fully Qualified "
"Domain Name (FQDN) of the server. Change <emphasis>backupserver</emphasis> "
"to the actual host name."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/backups.xml:724(para)
msgid ""
"Also, make sure the <emphasis>Password</emphasis> directive matches the "
"password string in <filename>/etc/bacula/bacula-sd.conf</filename>."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/backups.xml:730(para)
msgid ""
"Create a new <emphasis>FileSet</emphasis>, which will determine what "
"directories to backup, by adding:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/backups.xml:733(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"# LocalhostBacup FileSet.\n"
"FileSet {\n"
"  Name = \"LocalhostFiles\"\n"
"  Include {\n"
"    Options {\n"
"      signature = MD5\n"
"      compression=GZIP\n"
"    }\n"
"    File = /etc\n"
"    File = /home\n"
"  }\n"
"}\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/backups.xml:747(para)
msgid ""
"This <emphasis>FileSet</emphasis> will backup the <filename "
"role=\"directory\">/etc</filename> and <filename "
"role=\"directory\">/home</filename> directories. The "
"<emphasis>Options</emphasis> resource directives configure the FileSet to "
"create a MD5 signature for each file backed up, and to compress the files "
"using GZIP."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/backups.xml:754(para)
msgid "Next, create a new <emphasis>Schedule</emphasis> for the backup job:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/backups.xml:757(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"# LocalhostBackup Schedule -- Daily.\n"
"Schedule {\n"
"  Name = \"LocalhostDaily\"\n"
"  Run = Full daily at 00:01\n"
"}\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/backups.xml:764(para)
msgid ""
"The job will run every day at 00:01 or 12:01 am. There are many other "
"scheduling options available."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/backups.xml:769(para)
msgid "Finally create the <emphasis>Job</emphasis>:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/backups.xml:772(programlisting)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"# Localhost backup.\n"
"Job {\n"
"  Name = \"LocalhostBackup\"\n"
"  JobDefs = \"DefaultJob\"\n"
"  Enabled = yes\n"
"  Level = Full\n"
"  FileSet = \"LocalhostFiles\"\n"
"  Schedule = \"LocalhostDaily\"\n"
"  Storage = TapeDrive\n"
"  Write Bootstrap = \"/var/lib/bacula/LocalhostBackup.bsr\"\n"
"}  \n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/backups.xml:785(para)
msgid ""
"The job will do a <emphasis>Full</emphasis> backup every day to the tape "
"drive."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/backups.xml:790(para)
msgid ""
"Each tape used will need to have a <emphasis>Label</emphasis>. If the "
"current tape does not have a label <application>Bacula</application> will "
"send an email letting you know. To label a tape using the "
"<application>Console</application> enter the following from a terminal:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/backups.xml:796(command)
msgid "bconsole"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/backups.xml:800(para)
msgid "At the Bacula Console prompt enter:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/backups.xml:804(command)
msgid "label"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/backups.xml:808(para)
msgid ""
"You will then be prompted for the <emphasis>Storage</emphasis> resource:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/backups.xml:818(userinput)
#, no-wrap
msgid "2"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/backups.xml:812(computeroutput)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"Automatically selected Catalog: MyCatalog\n"
"Using Catalog \"MyCatalog\"\n"
"The defined Storage resources are:\n"
"     1: File\n"
"     2: TapeDrive\n"
"Select Storage resource (1-2):<placeholder-1/>\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/backups.xml:823(para)
msgid "Enter the new <emphasis>Volume</emphasis> name:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/backups.xml:828(userinput)
#, no-wrap
msgid "Sunday"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/backups.xml:827(computeroutput)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"Enter new Volume name: <placeholder-1/>\n"
"Defined Pools:\n"
"     1: Default\n"
"     2: Scratch"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/backups.xml:833(para)
msgid "Replace <emphasis>Sunday</emphasis> with the desired label."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/backups.xml:838(para)
msgid "Now, select the <emphasis>Pool</emphasis>:"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/backups.xml:843(userinput)
#, no-wrap
msgid "1"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/backups.xml:842(computeroutput)
#, no-wrap
msgid ""
"\n"
"Select the Pool (1-2): <placeholder-1/>\n"
"Connecting to Storage daemon TapeDrive at backupserver:9103 ...\n"
"Sending label command for Volume \"Sunday\" Slot 0 ...\n"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/backups.xml:850(para)
msgid ""
"Congratulations, you have now configured <emphasis>Bacula</emphasis> to "
"backup the localhost to an attached tape drive."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/backups.xml:858(para)
msgid ""
"For more <emphasis>Bacula</emphasis> configuration options refer to the "
"<ulink url=\"http://www.bacula.org/en/rel-manual/index.html\">Bacula User's "
"Manual</ulink>"
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/backups.xml:864(para)
msgid ""
"The <ulink url=\"http://www.bacula.org/\">Bacula Home Page</ulink> contains "
"the latest Bacula news and developments."
msgstr ""

#: serverguide/C/backups.xml:869(para)
msgid ""
"Also, see the <ulink url=\"https://help.ubuntu.com/community/Bacula\">Bacula "
"Ubuntu Wiki</ulink> page."
msgstr ""

#. Put one translator per line, in the form of NAME <EMAIL>, YEAR1, YEAR2
#: serverguide/C/backups.xml:0(None)
msgid "translator-credits"
msgstr ""
"Launchpad Contributions:\n"
"  Namhyung Kim https://launchpad.net/~namhyung\n"
"  Seongho Choo https://launchpad.net/~freedancer\n"
"  atie https://launchpad.net/~atie-at-matrix"

#, no-wrap
#~ msgid ""
#~ "\n"
#~ "search com\n"
#~ "nameserver 204.11.126.131\n"
#~ "nameserver 64.125.134.133\n"
#~ "nameserver 64.125.134.132\n"
#~ "nameserver 208.185.179.218\n"
#~ msgstr ""
#~ "\n"
#~ "search com\n"
#~ "nameserver 204.11.126.13\n"
#~ "nameserver 64.125.134.133\n"
#~ "nameserver 64.125.134.132\n"
#~ "nameserver 208.185.179.218\n"

#~ msgid ""
#~ "This section assumes you have installed and configured Apache 2 Web Server "
#~ "and MySQL Database Server. You can refer to Apache 2 section and MySQL "
#~ "sections in this document to install and configure Apache 2 and MySQL "
#~ "respectively."
#~ msgstr ""
#~ "이 문서에서는 여러분이 이미 아파치2 웹 서버와 MySQL 데이터베이스 서버를 설치하였으며 올바로 설정하였다고 가정하고 있습니다. "
#~ "아파치2와 MySQL을 설치 및 설정하는 방법은 이 문서의 아파치2 부분이나 MySQL 부분을 참조하시면 됩니다."

#~ msgid ""
#~ "If your network contains computers whose IP addresses are not listed in DNS, "
#~ "it is recommended that you add them to the <filename>/etc/hosts</filename> "
#~ "file."
#~ msgstr ""
#~ "만약 여러분의 네트워크이 DNS에 나열되지 않은 IP 주소를 가지는 컴퓨터들을 가지고 있다면, 그것들을 "
#~ "<filename>/etc/hosts</filename> 파일에 추가하는 것을 권장 합니다."

#~ msgid ""
#~ "This section explains how to configure which nameserver to use when "
#~ "resolving IP addresses to hostnames and vice versa. It does not explain how "
#~ "to configure the system as a name server."
#~ msgstr ""
#~ "이 부분에서는 IP 주소를 호스트 이름으로 해석하거나 그 반대의 일을 수행하기 위해 네임서버를 설정하는 방법을 설명합니다. 여기서는 "
#~ "시스템을 네임서버로 사용하도록 설정하는 방법을 설명하지는 않습니다."

#~ msgid "Related Pages"
#~ msgstr "참조"

#, no-wrap
#~ msgid ""
#~ "\n"
#~ "local   all         postgres                          md5 sameuser\n"
#~ msgstr ""
#~ "\n"
#~ "local all postgres md5 sameuser\n"

#~ msgid "Managing DNS Entries"
#~ msgstr "DNS 항목 관리"

#~ msgid "Managing Hosts"
#~ msgstr "호스트 관리"

#~ msgid ""
#~ "The <application>nameserver</application> key specifies the nameserver IP "
#~ "address. It will be used to resolve a given IP address or hostname. This "
#~ "file can have multiple nameserver entries. The nameservers will be used by "
#~ "the network query in the same order."
#~ msgstr ""
#~ "<application>nameserver</application> 키는 네임서버의 IP 주소를 지정합니다. 이 네임서버는 주어진 IP "
#~ "주소나 호스트 이름을 해석할 때 사용됩니다. 이 파일은 여러 개의 네임서버 항목을 가질 수 있습니다. 네임서버는 추가된 것과 동일한 "
#~ "순서대로 네트워크 쿼리 시에 사용될 것입니다."

#~ msgid ""
#~ "Many more configurations are possible, including dialup PPP interfaces, IPv6 "
#~ "networking, VPN devices, etc. Refer to <application>man 5 "
#~ "interfaces</application> for more information and supported options. "
#~ "Remember that <filename>/etc/network/interfaces</filename> is used by the "
#~ "<application>ifup</application>/<application>ifdown</application> scripts as "
#~ "a higher level configuration scheme than may be used in some other Linux "
#~ "distributions, and that the traditional, lower level utilities such as "
#~ "<application>ifconfig</application>, <application>route</application>, and "
#~ "<application>dhclient</application> are still available to you for ad hoc "
#~ "configurations."
#~ msgstr ""
#~ "다이얼업 PPP 인터페이스, IPv6 네트워킹, VPN 장치, 기타 등등을 포함하는 많은 다른 설정들이 가능합니다. 더 많은 정보와 "
#~ "지원되는 선택 사항들은 <application>man 5 interfaces</application> 를 참조 하십시오. 기억해야 할 "
#~ "것은,  <filename>/etc/network/interfaces</filename> 파일은 "
#~ "<application>ifup</application>/<application>ifdown</application> 스크립트에 의하여 "
#~ "사용되고, 그것들은 다른 리눅스 배포판에서 사용되는 것보다 높은 수준의(역주:사용의 편의를 기했다는 의미) 설정 체계 입니다. "
#~ "<application>ifconfig</application>, <application>route</application>, 그리고 "
#~ "<application>dhclient</application> 와 같은 전통적이고, 낮은 수준의(역주:명령어 라인에 직접 입력해야 "
#~ "한다는 의미) 유틸리티는 여전히 ad hoc 설정을 위하여 사용 가능 합니다."

#~ msgid ""
#~ "For example, when a user requests the page "
#~ "http://www.example.com/this_directory/, he or she will get either the "
#~ "DirectoryIndex page if it exists, a server-generated directory list if it "
#~ "does not and the Indexes option is specified, or a Permission Denied page if "
#~ "neither is true. The server will try to find one of the files listed in the "
#~ "DirectoryIndex directive and will return the first one it finds. If it does "
#~ "not find any of these files and if Options Indexes is set for that "
#~ "directory, the server will generate and return a list, in HTML format, of "
#~ "the subdirectories and files in the directory. The default value, found in "
#~ "<filename>/etc/apache2/apache2.conf</filename> is \" index.html index.cgi "
#~ "index.pl index.php index.xhtml\". Thus, if Apache2 finds a file in a "
#~ "requested directory matching any of these names, the first will be displayed."
#~ msgstr ""
#~ "예를 들어, 사용자가 http://www.example.com/this_directory/라는 페이지를 요청한다면, 사용자가 볼 수 있는 "
#~ "페이지에 몇 가지가 있습니다. 우선, DirectoryIndex 페이지가 있을 경우에는 그 페이지를 보게 됩니다. 이 페이지가 없고, "
#~ "Indexes 옵션이 설정되어있다면 서버에서 생성한 디렉토리 목록을 보게 됩니다. 마지막으로 DirectoryIndex 페이지도 없고 "
#~ "Indexes 옵션도 설정이 안 되어있으면 Permission Denied 페이지를 보게 됩니다. 즉, 사용자의 요청이 들어오면 서버는 "
#~ "우선 DirectoryIndex에 설정된 파일 중에서 가장 먼저 발견하는 파일을 사용자에게 제공합니다. DirectoryIndex에 있는 "
#~ "파일이 하나도 없고, Indexes 옵션이 설정되어 있다면 서버는 HTML 형식으로 그 디렉토리에 있는 하위 디렉토리와 파일의 목록을 "
#~ "생성해서 사용자에게 제공합니다. <filename>/etc/apache2/apache2.conf</filename>에 있는 "
#~ "DirectoryIndex의 기본값은 \"index.html index.cgi index.pl index.php "
#~ "index.xhtml\"입니다. 사용자가 요청한 디렉토리에 앞의 파일 중 하나가 있다면 아파치2는 이 중 가장 앞의 것을 사용자에게 "
#~ "제공합니다."

#~ msgid "Apache Modules"
#~ msgstr "아파치 모듈"

#~ msgid "LDAP replication"
#~ msgstr "LDAP 복제 (replication)"

#~ msgid "Ethernet"
#~ msgstr "이더넷 (Ethernet)"

#~ msgid ""
#~ "If the DNS server names are retrieved dynamically from DHCP or PPPoE "
#~ "(retrieved from your ISP), do not add nameserver entries in this file. It "
#~ "will be overwritten."
#~ msgstr ""
#~ "만약 DNS 서버 이름을 DHCP나 PPPoE(여러분의 ISP에서 받음)에서 받아오는 경우에는, 이 파일에 nameserver 항목을 "
#~ "추가하지 마십시오. 이 정보가 덮어 쓰여질(overwritten) 것입니다."

#~ msgid ""
#~ "The <emphasis>DocumentRoot</emphasis> directive specifies where Apache "
#~ "should look for the files that make up the site. The default value is "
#~ "/var/www. No site is configured there, but if you uncomment the "
#~ "<emphasis>RedirectMatch</emphasis> directive in "
#~ "<filename>/etc/apache2/apache2.conf</filename> requests will be redirected "
#~ "to /var/www/apache2-default where the default Apache2 site awaits. Change "
#~ "this value in your site's virtual host file, and remember to create that "
#~ "directory if necessary!"
#~ msgstr ""
#~ "<emphasis>DocumentRoot</emphasis>는 웹사이트를 구성하는 파일들을 아파치가 찾을 때 사용하는 위치입니다. "
#~ "기본값은 /var/www입니다. 아직은 /var/www에 아무런 웹사이트가 없지만, "
#~ "<filename>/etc/apache2/apache2.conf</filename>에 있는 "
#~ "<emphasis>RedirectMatch</emphasis>의 주석을 풀면 연결 요청이 /var/www/apache2-default로 "
#~ "연결되어 아파치2의 기본 웹사이트를 볼 수 있게 됩니다. 서버의 가상호스트 파일에 있는 이 값을 바꾸고, 필요한 경우에는 그 디렉토리를 "
#~ "변경하는 것은 잊지 마십시오."

#~ msgid ""
#~ "To access the Subversion repository via WebDAV protocol, you must configure "
#~ "your Apache 2 web server. You must add the following snippet in your "
#~ "<filename>/etc/apache2/apache2.conf</filename> file:"
#~ msgstr ""
#~ "WebDAV 프로토콜을 사용하여 Subversion 저장소를 접근하기 위하여, 여러분은 반드시 아파치2 웹 서버를 설정하여야 합니다. "
#~ "반드시 다음의 예를 여러분의 <filename>/etc/apache2/apache2.conf</filename> 파일에 추가 합니다:"

#~ msgid ""
#~ "The <application>search</application> key specifies the string which will be "
#~ "appended to an incomplete hostname. Here, we have configured it to "
#~ "<application>com</application>. So, when we run: <command>ping "
#~ "ubuntu</command> it would be interpreted as <command>ping "
#~ "ubuntu.com</command>."
#~ msgstr ""
#~ "<application>search</application> 키는 불완전한 호스트 이름에 추가될 문자열을 지정합니다. 여기서 우리는 "
#~ "<application>com</application>으로 설정해 두었으므로, <command>ping ubuntu</command> "
#~ "명령을 실행할 때 <command>ping ubuntu.com</command>과 같이 해석될 것입니다."

#~ msgid ""
#~ "The Apache2 web server is available in Ubuntu Linux. To install Apache2:"
#~ msgstr "아파치2 웹 서버는 우분투 리눅스에서 사용 가능합니다. 아파치2를 설치하려면:"
